Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help
The AutoCAD Electrical Help system is a browser-based system available through context-sensitive links or by accessing it through the Help menu or icon. Key features of the Help system include:
■

There is on-demand access from the F1 function key, ribbons, dialog boxes, and the command line. Navigation tabs in each topic link to related procedures, references, and concepts. The Help menu gives you access to AutoCAD Electrical Help, AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad, the New Features Workshop and other resources.

■

■

What are ways to gain access to Help?
You can get help about a command while you are using it.
Help Button in ribbon environment Select the Help icon in the upper right. Select the dropdown arrow to display a menu of help options. Help Menu From the menu bar, select Help ➤ Electrical Help Topics to view the AutoCAD Electrical Help home page.

1

Press F1

■ ■

At the command prompt, press F1 to open the topic for the active tool. In a dialog box, press F1 to open the Reference topic for the active tool.

Help button

In a dialog box, click Help to open the Reference topic for the active tool.

How is Help organized?
Most of the subjects in the Help system have three topic types: Procedure, Reference, and Concept. Every Help topic selected from a menu has a tab row above the topic title. You can click a tab to go to the other available topic types.
■

The titles of Help topics are designed to tell you the information they contain:
■ ■ ■

Procedure topics start with an action word, for example, "Create projects." Reference topics have the names of the dialog box as their titles. Concept topics typically start with the words "Use" or “Overview of.”

How do I get around in the Help system?
When you start the Help system, the first thing you see is the AutoCAD Electrical Help home page.
Navigation bar At the top of every Help window is a navigation bar with icons. The left-most icon is either Show or Hide, which opens or closes the navigation pane of the Help window. The navigation pane has tabs for Table of Contents, Index, Search, and Favorites.

2 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

Table of Contents

Presents an overview of the available documentation in a list of topics and subtopics. Provides a structure so you can always see where you are in Help and quickly jump to other topics. Click AutoCAD Electrical Command Listing for an alphabetical list of AutoCAD Electrical tools found in the menu and toolbars. You can enter a word in the box to locate the term in the alphabetical index. Double-click the term to display the topic, or if multiple topics, to open a list of topics found. You can enter a search word in the box and click List Topics to view a list of topics that contain the search word anywhere in their content. Click a title, and then click Display (or double-click a title) to open the topic. With a topic visible in the Help window, you can click the Favorites tab, and then click Add to add the current topic to a list of favorites. To remove a topic from the list, select the topic in the list, and then click Remove.

Index

Search

Favorites

How do I learn the product?
Training programs and products from Autodesk help you learn the key technical features and improve your productivity. For the latest information about Autodesk training, visit http://www.autodesk.com/training or contact your local Autodesk office. The Autodesk Authorized Training Center (ATC) network delivers Autodesk-authorized, instructor-led training to design professionals who use Autodesk software. Autodesk Authorized Training Centers use experienced and knowledgeable instructors. More than 1,200 ATC sites are available worldwide to meet your needs for discipline-specific, locally based training. To find a training center near you, contact your local Autodesk office or visit http://www.autodesk.com/atc.

Use AutoCAD Electrical Help
AutoCAD Electrical has a variety of learning tools to assist you, whether you are a newcomer or an experienced CAD user.

Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help | 3

To gain access to Help
Use any of the following methods to gain access to Help.
■

Select the Help icon in the upper right or select the drop-down arrow to display a menu of help options.

■

Select Help ➤ Electrical Help Topics from the menu bar, and then browse to the desired topic. You can use the tabbed pane to access the Index, Search, or Table of Contents. Press F1 to open the Procedure or Reference Help topic for the active command. In an open dialog box, press F1 or click Help to open the Reference topic for the active command.

■

■

To customize Help
Use any of the following methods to customize Help.
■

Click the Hide or Show button in the Help toolbar to control the visibility of the tabbed pane beside the content window. To add a topic to the Favorites tab, select a Help topic, click the Favorites tab, and then click Add. To delete a topic from the Favorites tab, select the topic in the list, and then click Delete.

■

To search Help
Another method for finding Help topics is to use the Search tab. 1 Click Show in the browser toolbar if the tabbed navigation pane is not displayed. 2 Click the Search tab. 3 Enter text in the search text box, and then click List Topics. Use quotation marks (" ") around the search criteria to search for a string. Use an asterisk (*) before or after text as a wildcard. 4 Double-click a topic or select a topic, and then click Display to show the topic.

4 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

5 You can also select one or more of the following Search options to limit the results.
■ ■ ■

Search previous results Match similar words Search titles only

6 Use operators to refine your Search criteria further. Click the right arrow next to the search text box, and then select one of the following operators.
■

AND Use AND to search for topics with more than one set of your search criteria. OR Use OR to search for topics with at least one of your search criteria. NEAR Use Near to search for specified text within close proximity to each other. NOT Use NOT to search for topics that do not include your search criteria.

■ ■

■

To print Help
You can print a single file or you can print sections of the Help. 1 In the Help Contents tab, right-click a heading and select Print. 2 Select whether to print the selected topic or the selected heading and all subheadings. NOTE You can also print a single topic by right-clicking in the file and selecting Print. 3 Click OK. If you want to print the entire Help system, in the Contents tab, right-click AutoCAD Electrical Help and select Print. Select the option to print the selected heading and all subheadings and click OK.

To find out What's New about AutoCAD Electrical
What's New topics describe the new functionality in the most recent AutoCAD Electrical release.

Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help | 5

1 Click Help ➤ AutoCAD Electrical Help. In the AutoCAD Electrical Help, click What's New from the Table of Contents. You can also open the What's New by selecting Help ➤ Display Launchpad. Click What's New on the AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad. 2 Browse to a feature you want to learn about. 3 Click More Information to learn more about the feature.

To get started with AutoCAD Electrical using Getting Started
1 Select Help ➤ Display Launchpad. The AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad screen appears. The Launchpad has two sections. The top section is for first-time users. It has links to white papers, the Getting Started manual, the AutoCAD Electrical discussion group, and frequently asked questions. The bottom section has links to places for additional information about AutoCAD Electrical. You can find out what's new in the current release, link to the Advanced Productivity home page, and find out more about additional Autodesk products. 2 Click Getting Started Manual on the AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad.

Join the Customer Involvement Program
You are invited to participate in helping guide the direction of Autodesk design software.
If you participate in the Customer Involvement Program, specific information about how you use AutoCAD Electrical is forwarded to Autodesk. This information includes what features you use the most, problems that you encounter, and other information helpful to the future direction of the product. See the following links for more information.
■

To turn the CIP on or off
1 On the InfoCenter toolbar, to the right of the Help button, click the drop-down arrow. 2 Click Customer Involvement Program. 3 In the Customer Involvement Program dialog box, select a level of participation. 4 Click OK.

What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2010
Ribbon Interface
To provide easy access to AutoCAD Electrical commands, a ribbon interface is now available. The ribbon layout is based on workflow and function. See the Help topic, Ribbon Interface, for more information on the ribbon layout. For More Information on page 11

You can switch to another workspace whenever you need to by selecting the Workspace icon on the status bar.

What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2010 | 7

Circuit Builder goes green
Circuit Builder now provides engineering analysis/green calculations in the area of power conductor size versus energy losses. Designing to meet minimum code requirements can conflict with green design. During the code requirements analysis, Circuit Builder displays parallel energy loss calculations so you can make better green design decisions. For example, you might want to oversize the conductors for a motor to reduce conductor heating losses. It results in a higher initial cost. But this higher cost can potentially be recovered many times over in reduced energy losses in the wiring over the lifetime of the installation. For More Information on page 764

Option to add a source arrow symbols at end of the power feed bus. Option to add a generic load box representation at the end of the power feed bus. Supports defining a user-created load symbol, for example a variable speed drive symbol, for insertion at the end of a power feed bus. Support for adjusting the load representation based on the rung spacing.

■

■

For More Information on page 744

Circuit Builder - additional features
■ ■

Wire conductor sizing based upon electrical code requirements. Support for split-parallel conductor sizing is available. You can choose to substitute multiple, smaller diameter conductors to meet the equivalent ampacity requirement of a single, large diameter conductor. Fuse, breaker, disconnect switch, and overload calculations based upon electrical code requirements. Circuit Builder can be set up to predefine motor description text, installation, location, and text description for individual components in the circuit.

■

■

8 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

■

Insert a new circuit and reference an existing circuit. This option can transfer the values from the existing circuit to your new circuit. Electrical standards database editor to view, modify, and expand the ace_electrical_standards.mdb file.

■

For More Information on page 703

Motor control one-line circuits
AutoCAD Electrical now provides library support and software support to create motor control one-line diagrams that link back to other drawing types in a project drawing set.
■ ■

New motor control one-line symbol library accessible from the icon menu. Circuit Builder supports building motor control one-line circuits dynamically allowing the design of one-line circuits, with component values and wire sizes, to conform to a given electrical code. One-line component symbols can be related to parent/child counterparts on the schematic and panel layout drawings within a project. You can surf between one-line and related components and all related components update if one is modified. Tagging of schematic or panel components using existing commands can reference a pick list that includes components pulled from the one-line diagrams. Certain schematic reports have a new category option. You select the category, for example One-Line, and the data is filtered based on that category. It can also be used to filter a report for Hydraulic, P&ID, or Pneumatic components.

■

■

■

For More Information on page 310

No wire numbering option for wire layers
Wire layers now have a “no wire numbering” option. These wires behave normally for inserting, breaking, and scooting components, and show up in the Wire From/To report. The Insert Wire Numbers command follows these rules:
■

If all wires in the network are on layers set “No” for Wire Numbering, no new wire number is inserted.

What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2010 | 9

■

If any wire in the network is on a layer set “Yes” for Wire Numbering, the existing non-fixed wire number is updated or a new wire number is inserted. If a wire network already has a non-fixed wire number, it is updated regardless of the Wire Numbering setting. Use the Delete Wire Numbers command to remove the wire number.

■

For More Information on page 282

Electrical Audit
The Electrical Audit can now display the results for the active drawing only. Run the Electrical Audit, click the Active Drawing button and quickly see the issues for this drawing only. Open another drawing and the dialog box updates to display the results for the newly opened drawing. The active drawing must be part of the active project. For More Information on page 1730

Help Updates
Reference topics that show command access now include the following features:
■ ■ ■

Command line access Ribbon access If the location of a command is changed, ribbon and menu access to the command are updated in the Help system to reflect the new location of the command. NOTE This dynamic update only works when the Help is used within AutoCAD Electrical.

Description
Lists the drawing files associated with each open project. Use this to add new drawings, reorder drawing files, and change project settings. You cannot have two projects open in the Project Manager with the same project name. Copies an existing project to a new name and creates renamed copies of the drawing files.

Copy Project AECOPYPROJECT

Delete Project AEDELETEPROJECT

Deletes a project and provides the option to also delete the drawing files in the project. This is permanent and cannot be undone.

Zip Project AEZIPPROJECT

Creates a zip file of the .wdp file for the active project and one or more drawing files it references. The zip file can optionally include a copy of the temporary database file for the project. Updates component tags, wire numbers, ladder references, and select drawing settings.

Places an invisible mark on each component before sending the drawings to a client. When the drawings are returned, a list is generated that includes any components or wire numbers that have been modified, edited, or copied. NOTE This command writes information to the project database file that is used to check for deleted components. Your drawings must be named and part of the active project to use this command.

Other Tools panel
Command
Surfer AESURF

Description
Moves from reference to reference across the project drawing set. A new window opens and the original window closes when Surf is selected unless you hold the Shift key while running the command. Continues a previous surf session from the point where you left off.

Continue Surfer AESURFCONT

Previous DWG AEPREV

Loads the drawing listed above the current drawing in the project explorer, and closes the current drawing.

12 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

Command
Next DWG AENEXT

Description
Loads the drawing listed below the current drawing in the project explorer, and closes the current drawing.

Migration Utility AEMIGRATION

Migrate database and support files from a previous version of AutoCAD Electrical to the current release.

Language Conversion AELANG

Translates component description text from one language to another. Description text and switch position text is processed on schematic and panel components. Opens the current language table for review and modification. The default table is wd_lang1.mdb.

Edit Language Database AELANGDB

Title Block Setup AESETUPTITLEBLOCK

You can link some AutoCAD Electrical project description data entries and some of the drawing values to the attributes in the title blocks. There are two methods, an attribute mapping file or a mapping attribute embedded on the title block. Automates updating title block information for the current drawing or the entire project drawing set. Project and drawing specific settings are linked to one or more attributes contained in the title block. Updates component tagging based on a change in the IEC tagging mode.

Title Block Update AEUPDATETITLEBLOCK

IEC Tag Mode Update AEUPDATEIECTAG

Project tab | 13

Command
Update to New WD_M Block, Values, Layers AESWAPWDM

Description
Replaces the schematic wd_m.dwg block in the current drawing with a newer copy, and converts to the newer configuration values and layers. Replaces the schematic wd_m.dwg block in the current drawing with a newer copy, but keeps existing configuration values and layer names. Replaces the panel wd_pnlm.dwg block in the current drawing with a newer copy, and converts to the newer configuration values and layers. Replaces the panel wd_pnlm.dwg block in the current drawing with a newer copy, but keeps existing configuration values and layer names.

Update to New WD_M Block, No changes AESWAPWDMNOCHANGE Update to New WD_PNLM Block, Values, Layers AESWAPPNLM

Writes the attribute settings for the wd_m block in the current drawing to the wd_m.dwg drawing file in the symbol library.

Settings List Utility AEDWGCFG

Reports the settings of each drawing in the project, and provides the means to edit the report and update the drawing properties with the edited values. Lists extended entity data, xdata, on a selected object.

Inserts schematic symbols by choosing a catalog number or a component description from a user-defined pick list. The data displayed in this pick list is stored in a database in generic Access format. The file name is wd_picklist.mdb and can be edited with Microsoft® Access or from Add/Edit/Delete along the bottom of the pick list's dialog box. The AutoCAD Electrical normal search path sequence is used to locate this file.

Insert Component (Equipment List) AECOMPONENTEQ

This spreadsheet organizes the selected usercreated equipment list and presents the list in a pick list. As you pick an item from the pick list, the appropriate schematic symbol is found and inserted in the drawing at your pick point. You can open a comma-delimited file, Microsoft® Excel® spreadsheet, or Microsoft Access database file for input.

Generates PLC I/O modules on demand, in a variety of different graphical styles via a parametric generation technique. It is driven by a database file (ace_plc.mdb) and a handful of library symbol blocks. Inserts PLC I/O modules that are fixed library symbol blocks.

Insert PLC (Full Units) AEPLC

Schematic tab | 19

Command
Location Box AELOCATIONBOX

Description
Draws a dashed box around selected components. A description can be assigned to the box, and components within the box can have their location and installation code(s) changed. Inserts location marks on symbols that are identified with location code in text form.

Location Symbols AELOCATIONSYMBOL

Insert Connector AECONNECTOR

Generates a connector symbol from userdefined parameters. The symbol is created on the fly, and inserted as a block insert into your active drawing file. Since these are created on an as-needed based, it eliminates the need for you to create and maintain a library of connector symbols. Imports a connector wire list from another application, such as Autodesk® Inventor™ Professional Cable & Harness. NOTE If the AutoCAD Electrical drawing is missing one end of the connector or if a connection was not found, wiring information is displayed next to the pin and the information is written into a log file so you know AutoCAD Electrical was unable to resolve the wire connections in the drawing. The log file name is {drawing filename.LOG} and is found in the same folder as the drawing file.

Insert Connector from List AECONNECTORLIST

Insert Splice AESPLICE

Inserts a splice symbol selected from the onscreen icon menu.

20 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

Command
Link Components with Dashed Line AELINK

Description
Draws a smart dashed line between stacked contacts of a multicontact component. When the dashed link line inserts, certain attributes automatically flip to invisible. Use the Attribute Hide command to turn the visibility of the selected attributes back on. Draws a dashed line from a component to a “To” arrow symbol.

Insert Reference Arrow To AEREFARROWTO

Insert Reference Arrow From AEREFARROWFROM

Draws a dashed line from a component to a “From” arrow symbol.

Insert Stand-Alone CrossReference AESAXREF

Inserts standalone cross-reference symbol (not tied to a wire). You use standalone cross-reference symbols just as you would wire source/destination arrow symbols but without the wires. Insert a source reference symbol, and then tie one or more destination reference symbols to it. These can be on the same drawing or scattered across the project drawing set. Inserts Pneumatic components from an onscreen icon menu. This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Project Properties dialog box. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu. Inserts hydraulic components from an onscreen icon menu. This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Project Properties

Insert Pneumatic Components AEPNEUMATIC

Insert Hydraulic Component AEHYDRAULIC

Schematic tab | 21

Command

Description
dialog box. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu.

Insert P&ID Component AEPID

Inserts P&ID components from an on-screen icon menu. This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Project Properties dialog box. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu.

Adds, changes, or deletes internal jumpers on a selected component. When wire numbers are inserted, these internal jumpers are read and wire numbers are assigned accordingly. Toggles selected component tag between fixed and normal.

Fix/UnFix Component Tag AEFIXTAG

Copy Catalog Assignment AECOPYCAT

Inserts or edits catalog part numbers onto the currently selected component or footprint.

22 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

Command
Edit User Table Data AEUSERTABLE

Description
Edits user-defined Xdata on component or wire numbers and populates the User table in project database file. You can add, edit, or remove free-form user data records attached to the selected block insert. Removes the selected component from the drawing. If you erase a parent schematic component, you have the option to search for related child components, surf to them, and delete them. Inserts a copy of an existing component into the drawing and updates the component tags.

Delete Component AEERASECOMP

Copy Component AECOPYCOMP

Copy Circuit AECOPYCIRCUIT

Copies existing circuits and pastes the copied circuit to a specified location. The components are automatically retagged based on their new line reference locations. Moves the selected circuit to a specified location. The components are automatically retagged based on their new line reference locations and cross-references are updated. Saves windowed portions of circuitry for later reuse. Up to 24 circuits can be saved at any one time in this scratch menu.

Move Circuit AEMOVECIRCUIT

Save Circuit to Icon Menu AESAVECIRCUIT

Scoot AESCOOT

Scoots selected components along their connected wires or scoots entire wires, including components, along the bus. A rectangle indicates the selected items.

Schematic tab | 23

Command
Align AEALIGN

Description
Aligns selected components with a master component. All connected wires are adjusted, and wire numbers recentered if necessary. You can align vertically or horizontally by flipping the command by typing V or H at the command line. Automatically moves the selected component to a new position.

Move Component AEMOVE

Reverse/Flip Component AEFLIP

Reverses or flips selected component graphics and its associated attributes NOTE This tool only operates on a component with 2-wire connections (ex: limit switch contact symbol).

Stretch PLC Module AESTRETCHPLC

Stretches or compresses the windowed portion of PLC modules (or any block insert) while maintaining all of the original block information, including attributes. Splits selected PLC module into two separate block definitions (i.e. parent and a child or a child and another child).

Split PLC Module AESPLITPLC

Retag Components AERETAG

Retags components with contact updates. Run this when something changes on your drawing or project that affects the component tags. This can include revising the ladder line reference numbers or changing the tag format. Retag redoes each selected primary component tag, and then updates the related secondary components. You can select to update a single component, a group of components, a drawing, drawings within your project, or the entire project.

24 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

Command
Find/Edit/Replace Component Text AEFINDCOMPTEXT

Description
Finds and replaces component and terminal text values or find and replace substrings within those values. You can do this on the active drawing or across the project drawing set. Finds and replaces terminal number text values or find and replace sub-strings within those values. You can do this on a selection from the active drawing, the entire active drawing, or across the project drawing set. Moves the selected attributes to a picked point. The attributes remain tied to the block inserts

Find/Replace Terminal Text AEFINDTERMTEXT

Move/Show Attribute AEATTSHOW

Edit Selected Attribute AEEDITATT

Edits an attribute's text by picking right on the attribute. A dialog box displays and you type in a new attribute value. This utility also works on invisible attributes. It finds and displays the closest attribute to your pick point on a block insert. Hides selected attribute; to unhide pick on block graphics and un-toggle attribute name in the list. Select the graphic of a target block insert to display a listing of all attribute names and values. You can switch attributes between hidden and visible or you can edit individual attribute values. Hides window selected attributes you specify in a list of names.

Hide Attribute (Single Picks) AEHIDEATT

Hide Attributes (Window/Multiple) AEHIDEATTRIB

Schematic tab | 25

Each click on the attribute dynamically changes the attribute's width factor by 5%.
Squeeze Attribute/Text AEATTSQUEEZE
Compresses an attribute to make it fit into a tight spot (such as between closely spaced components). After rotation. component description text. press M and [space] to flip into the Move Attribute mode. Changes the justification of wire number text. or attributes.
Rename Attribute AERENAMEATTRIB
Adds a new attribute to an existing instance of a block insert.
Rotate Attribute AEATTROTATE
Rotates the selected attribute text or MTEXT string 90 degrees from its current orientation. Expands an attribute.
Change Attribute Justification AEATTJUSTIFY
26 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
.
Stretch Attribute/Text AEATTSTRETCH
Change Attribute Size AEATTSIZE
Changes attribute text size when components or wire numbers have already been inserted onto your drawings.
Add Attribute AEATTRIBUTE
Adds a new attribute to an existing instance of a block insert. Each click on the attribute dynamically changes the attribute's width factor by 5%.Command
Unhide Attributes (Window/Multiple) AESHOWATTRIB
Description
Unhides window selected attributes you specify in a list of names.

Wire connections are also maintained even if the new symbol is slightly wider or narrower than the original.
Toggle NO/NC AETOGGLENONC
Swap/Update Block AESWAPBLOCK
Reverse Connector AEREVERSE
Rotate Connector AEROTATE
Stretch Connector AESTRETCH
Schematic tab | 27
. You identify which end of the connector is to be altered and the measurement of displacement. Attribute values are retained during the swapping process. Use to update or change blocks in place. None of the existing wire connections automatically reroute to the reverse side of the connector and you will have to resolve wiring using the wire editing tools. The wire connections do not reroute with each rotation of the connector. It looks at the picked contact. Rotates the connector about its insertion point in 90 degree increments. press OK and then select the attributes to change to the target layer. Increases or decreases the connector's overall shell length. Select the target layer (type it in or select from the list). You must resolve wiring using the wire editing tools. It then substitutes 1 or 2 for the found character. Reverses the orientation of the connector about its horizontal or vertical axis. You might do this to make room for new pins or to capture previously added pins that fell beyond the connector shell. and checks the 5th character position for either 1 or 2. reads its block name.Command
Change Attribute Layer AEATTLAYER
Description
Forces attribute text entities to a given layer. Flips a contact from one state (open or closed) to the other.

they just need to have the same TAG1/TAG2/TAG_*/TAG attribute values. NOTE You cannot swap a combination connector with a single plug or receptacle connector. you cannot use this tool to swap pins from one side of a connector to the other. if the connector has a defined pin list.Command
Split Connector AESPLIT
Description
Splits the parametric connector into two separate block definitions (i. Components do not have to be of the same family to be cross-referenced.
Component Cross-Reference AEXREF
Collects and annotates groups of components that carry the same TAG text string value (such as “101CR”).
Add Connector Pins AECONNECTORPIN
Adds pins to an existing connector.
28 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
.
Move Connector Pin AEMOVEPIN
Swap Connector Pins AESWAPPINS
Exchanges one set of connector pin numbers for another on an existing connector or between connectors on the drawing.e. Moves connector pin associated to selected connector. Additionally. frees this deleted pin to be re-inserted later on this connector or on a related child of this connector.
Delete Connector Pins AEERASEPIN
Removes a pin from an existing connector and. parent and a child or a child and another child).

A complete list of components is extracted from the project drawing set. or project-wide. The underlying attribute value is maintained. A bill of material check can be performed to see if the item's description indicates that the quantity of contacts can be accommodated. The MTEXT entity updates. Displays all associated and parent components to the selected component. It can update your source or destination signals singly.
Update Stand-Alone Cross-Reference AEUPDATESAXREF
Change Cross-Reference to Multiple Line Text AEXREF2TEXT
Cross-Reference Check AEXREFCHECK
Child Location/Description Update AECHILDLOCUPDATE
Schematic tab | 29
.Command
Hide/Unhide Cross-Reference AEHIDEXREF
Description
Changes the visibility of cross-references. Updates child and panel components with installation. and description values carried by the associated parent schematic component. Updates cross-reference information for two types of cross-reference symbols: wire number signal arrow symbols and standalone crossreference symbols. and behaves as if it is an attribute tied to the component block. In most cases the cross-referencing should be visible but there are times when you may not want the cross-referencing displayed on parent symbols. Converts a long string of relay coil or source/destination cross-reference text to a multiline text entity (MTEXT). but flipped to visible. scoots. The MTEXT entity is created at the same XY location as the underlying attribute. The component's tag is read. location. then all associated components are found and listed in the dialog box. drawing-wide.

group. Panel terminals are removed from any schematicpanel relationships. Associates two or more terminal symbols together. The settings specified using this tool override the drawing properties. Removes the component overrides so the cross-referencing commands use the settings for the drawing or project. Schematic terminals are removed from any multi-tier relationship and any schematic-panel relationships.
Associate Terminals AEASSOCTERMINAL
Break Apart Terminal Associations AEBREAKASSOC
30 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. or pick a similar master component. The number of schematic terminals that can be combined is limited to the number of levels defined for the block properties. Breaks one or more terminal symbols out of an existing association. similarly they are applied to multiple inserts of the same component. Associating schematic terminals combines the terminals into a single terminal block property definition. Component overrides are copied when the component is copied. or mount codes to all of the components you select. You can define components to have different crossreferencing styles.
Remove Component Override AERMOVERRIDE
Cross-Reference Table AESHOWXREFTABLE
Displays a cross-reference table for all standalone PLC I/O points that carry the selected component tag. installation. You either type in the desired code.Command
Copy/Add Component Override AECOPYOVERRIDE
Description
Copies and/or adds cross-reference component overrides from another symbol.
Copy Installation/Location Code Values AECOPYINSTLOC
Performs mass copies of location. pick from an on-line list.

If it crosses any existing wiring.
Insert 22.
Interconnect Components AECONNECTCOMP
Inserts wires between aligned connection points on a pair of selected components.
Insert Wire Gap AEWIREGAP
Inserts a gap/loop at the point of two crossing lines. Gaps are automatically inserted when a new wire crosses another.
Insert 67.
Insert 45 Degree Wire AE45WIRE
Inserts an angled (45 degree) line wire segments on a wire layer (the wire layer does not have to be the current layer).
Multiple Wire Bus AEMULTIBUS
Inserts vertical or horizontal bus wiring.5 degree) line wire segment on a wire layer (the wire layer does not have to be the current layer). wirecrossing gaps automatically insert (if the drawing is so configured).
32 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
.5 Degree Wire AE675WIRE
Inserts an angled (67.5 degree) line wire segments on a wire layer (the wire layer does not have to be the current layer).Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel
Command
Insert Wire AEWIRE
Description
Inserts single line wire segments on a wire layer (the wire layer does not have to be the current layer). Bus spacing defaults to the default ladder rung spacing for horizontal bus.5 Degree Wire AE225WIRE
Inserts an angled (22. Multiple bus wiring automatically breaks and reconnects to any underlying components that it finds in its path.

PLC I/O Wire Numbers AEPLCWIRENO
Inserts wire numbers based on the I/O address that each PLC connected wire touches.
Fan In/Out Destination AEFANINDEST
Changes the connected common wires on the fan-out side to non-wire layer but leaves the individual segments on the opposite side of marker on the original wire layer. Copies wire number from a source-arrowed wire network to any/all associated destinationarrowed wire network.
Source Signal Arrow AESOURCE
Destination Signal Arrow AEDESTINATION
Retrieves the wire number for a destinationarrowed wire network from its associated source-arrowed wire network. NOTE A Destination signal arrow cannot be tied to a wire network that carries a pre-assigned fixed wire number.Command
Insert Wire Numbers AEWIRENO
Description
Inserts or updates wire numbers associated with wire line entities. Wire numbers go in as FIXED which means that they will not change if a wire number retag is run later on.
Fan In/Out Source AEFANINSRC
Inserts in-line source marker symbols and changes the connected wire on the fan-in side to be on a non-wire layer.
3 Phase Wire Numbers AE3PHASEWIRENO
Inserts special wire numbering generally associated with 3-phase bus and motor circuits.
Schematic tab | 33
.

Insert Ladder AELADDER
Inserts ladders of a set width and length onto the drawing. Inserts the X grid labels for drawings that use X Zones for the Format Referencing. You can also change other settings from here (such as origin) instead of going back into the Drawing Properties dialog box. You can also change other settings from here (such as origin) instead of going back into the Drawing Properties dialog box.
X Zones Setup AEXZONE
Wire Number Leader AEWIRENOLEADER
34 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. reference-only arrows. Multiple ladder fragments in the same vertical column need to be vertically aligned along their left-hand side. NOTE These limitations do not apply when X-Y Grid or X-Zone referencing is selected.
XY Grid Setup AEXYGRID
Inserts the X-Y grid labels for drawings that use X-Y Grid for the Format Referencing. Your drawing must be configured for X-Y Grids.Command
Wire Arrows for Reference Only AEREFWIREARROWS
Description
Inserts non intelligent. Repositions the wire number text with an attached leader. Set the Format Referencing in the Drawing Properties dialog box to X-Y Grid. There is no limit to the number of ladders that can be inserted into a drawing. but ladders may not overlap each other. Your drawing must be configured for X Zones. Set the Format Referencing in the Drawing Properties dialog box to X Zones.

you can edit existing cable marker sets. or even delete cable markers from this dialog box.
Multiple Cable Markers AEMULTICABLE
Insert Dot Tee Markers AEDOTTEE
Insert Angled Tee Markers AEANGLETEE
Schematic tab | 35
. Cable markers carry a cable TAG value. You cannot insert a tee connection symbol into empty space.Command
Wire Color/Gauge Labels AEWIRECOLORLABEL
Description
Inserts wire color gauge labels with a leader on your drawing's wiring. this replaces an existing angled wire connection symbol with a dot connection symbol. Inserts a dot tee connection symbol at a manually drawn wire intersection. this replaces an existing wire connection dot with a tee connection symbol. In addition. Inserts all the markers for a particular cable. A valid line wire ending (not crossing) at a tee intersection somewhere along the length of another line wire is needed.
Cable Markers AECABLEMARKER
Inserts cable markers onto the drawing. Inserts an angled tee connection symbol at a manually drawn wire intersection. You cannot insert a tee connection symbol into empty space. This means that it will not insert a tee connection symbol at a 90-degree wire turn. If present.
In-Line Wire Labels AEINLINEWIRE
Inserts a reference-only in-line wire label. If present. They can also carry a conductor color value (carried as a RATING1 attribute value on the marker block symbol). just like any parent/child device combination.

Moves the wire number out of the hide layer so that the number is visible on the screen. For example.Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel
Command
Edit Wire Number AEEDITWIRENO
Description
Allows manual edit of an existing wire number or insert of a new one if none exists.
Fix Wire Numbers AEFIXWIRENO
Fixes all or many wire numbers on a drawing at their current values. Fixing a wire number means that the wire number tag is left unchanged if later processed or reprocessed by the automatic wire numbering utility. The new hide layer is created from the wire number layer name with a “_HIDE” suffix. Swaps wire numbers between two wire networks.
Hide Wire Numbers AEHIDEWIRENO
Unhide Wire Numbers AESHOWWIRENO
36 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. Moves the wire number to a special hide layer so that the number is no longer visible on the screen. if the wire number text layer is called WIRENO then the hide layer name is called “WIRENO_HIDE.” The layer is created automatically when needed and you are asked if you want to freeze this layer. You can do this on the active drawing or across the project drawing set.
Swap Wire Numbers AESWAPWIRENO
Find/Replace Wire Numbers AEFINDWIRENO
Finds and replaces wire number text values or substrings within those values.

Add Rung AERUNG
Finds the nearest line reference location and places a ladder rung at that reference position (both bus wires must be visible on the screen for this to work. Use the grid control to sort and select the wire types for easy modification.Command
Trim Wire AETRIM
Description
Removes a wire segment and dots as required. Use the grid control to sort and select the wire types for easy modification. AutoCAD Electrical erases just that copy but leaves the network’s main wire number and any other copies in place. NOTE If you erase a wire number and select right on an extra wire number copy. You can select a single wire or draw a fence through multiple wires to trim. however it doesn't change existing ladder rung spacing. If the new rung encounters a schematic device floating in space. Adjusts the line reference numbering along the side of the ladders.
Revise Ladder AEREVISELADDER
Renumber Ladder Reference AERENUMBERLADDER
Renumbers the ladder for the selected drawings from the active project.
Change/Convert Wire Type AECONVERTWIRETYPE
Changes between wire types and converts lines to wires.
Schematic tab | 37
.
Create/Edit Wire Type AEWIRETYPE
Creates and edits wire types. it tries to break the wire across the device.
Delete Wire Numbers AEERASEWIRENUM
Deletes selected wire numbers.

These copies follow the network's main wire number attribute.
Stretch Wire AESTRETCTWIRE
Lengthens a wire until it meets another wire or an AutoCAD Electrical component. If you assign a color to this layer that is different than the normal wire number and fixed wire number layers. Adjusts the gap between the wire and the wire number text of wire numbers that are in-line with the wire. If AutoCAD Electrical modifies it. Inserts extra wire numbers such that they appear in-line with the wire rather than above or below the wire. then it is easy to tell them apart from the network's main wire number. If you assign a color to this layer that is different than the normal wire number and fixed wire number layers.
38 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. then any wire number copies on the network also update. These copies follow the network's main wire number attribute. Extra wire numbers go on their own layer that is defined in the Define Layers dialog box. Extra wire numbers go on their own layer that is defined in the Define Layers dialog box. then it is easy to tell them apart from the network's main wire number.
Copy Wire Number (InLine) AECOPYWIRENOIL
Adjust In-Line Wire/Label Gap AEWIRELABELGAP
Move Wire Number AEMOVEWIRENO
Moves an existing wire number from one segment of the network to another.Command
Copy Wire Number AECOPYWIRENO
Description
Inserts extra wire numbers anywhere on a wire network. if AutoCAD Electrical modifies it then any wire number copies on the network also update.

the selected wire number toggles to in-line.
Show Wires AESHOWWIRE
Highlights all wires and displays wire number to wire segment relationships. If it starts as above or below.
Check/Trace Wire AETRACEWIRE
Helps troubleshoot problems with unconnected or shorted wires and invalid wire crossing gap pointers by single stepping through and highlighting each connected wire of the selected wire network. Flips the wire number across its associated wire. When a wire is defined at a right angle you can modify the wire and create a new right angle bend while maintaining the original wire connections to the components.Command
Bend Wire AEBENDWIRE
Description
Bends a wire in a right angle and makes 3 right angle turns to avoid or add geometry.
Flip Wire Number AEFLIPWIRENO
Toggle Wire Number Inline AETOGGLEWIRENO
Switches the wire number between above or below and in-line. NOTE If there isn't room for a wire number to become an in-line wire number. it toggles to above or below based on the default Wire Number Placement setting in the Drawing Properties dialog box.
Schematic tab | 39
. If the selected wire number is in-line. NOTE This tool terminates if the bend attempts to connect two different wire networks or if the bend bypasses more than a single right angle turn. it remains an above or below line wire number.

This replaces any dot tee symbols with angled tee symbols. and press ESC when the appropriate one displays.
Edit Wire Sequence AEEDITWIRESEQUENCE
Predefines a wire network's connection sequence. either in a single drawing or across multiple drawing files. AutoCAD Electrical makes the gapped wire solid and flips the gap/loop to the crossing wire(s). Right-click to toggle through the various tee connection orientations. Flips the gap to the other wire.
Flip Wire Gap AEFLIPWIREGAP
Delete Wire Gap AEERASEWIREGAP
Removes a gap/loop that is no longer needed in an existing wire. appropriate pointers are established.
Show Wire Sequence AESHOWWIRESEQ
Shows the wire sequence defined using the Define Wire Sequence tool.
40 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. If the wire sequence crosses multiple drawings and you try to view the sequence as an animation. a dialog box listing the off-drawing wire connection information displays so that you can indicate to go to the other drawings to continue viewing the sequence.
Check/Repair Gap Pointers AEGAPPOINTER
Verifies that the invisible Xdata pointers on both sides of a wire gap/loop are valid. If not.Command
Toggle Angled Tee Markers AETOGGLETEE
Description
Toggles an existing angled tee connection symbol (or windowed symbols) through a total of 4 possible orientations. and then toggles through the 4 possible orientations for each.

Single Line Layer AEFANIN
List Signal Code AELISTSIG
Show Signal Paths AESHOWSIG
Displays signal source and destination paths on the active drawing.” Schematic symbols created or converted using the Symbol Builder are fully
Schematic tab | 41
. Follows a signal from a specific source or destination symbol and lists the signal code references.
Fan In/Out . Defines a special layer or set of layers for the wires going out of a Fan In/Out source marker and the wires coming into a destination marker. and other custom devices or for converting existing non-AutoCAD Electrical symbols to make them “AutoCAD Electrical smart. custom components on the fly. filters. controllers. Wire number signal arrow symbols and standalone crossreference symbols.Command
Update Signal References AEUPDATESIGREF
Description
Updates cross-reference information for two types of cross-reference symbols.
Other Tools panel
Command
Symbol Builder AESYMBUILDER
Description
Converts existing symbols or creates new. It works nicely for quickly building power supplies. drives.
Multiple Cable Markers Update AEUPDATECABLEMARKERS
Updates cable marker assignments defined or edited in a from/to listing.

For example.env. signal references. if DEMO-WIRES is currently assigned as an AutoCAD Electrical wire layer.” Defines defaults for component and wire tag formats. component. or replace an existing icon menu with your own custom menu.
Settings Compare AESHEETCOMPARE
42 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
.
Icon Menu Wizard AEMENUWIZ
Launches the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify or expand an icon menu. The default icon menu can also be redefined in “wd. break wires upon insertion. In addition to renaming the layer. Allows update. the new layer name is substituted for DEMOWIRES in the AutoCAD Electrical wire layer name list. cross references. this also updates the AutoCAD Electrical layer assignment information carried on the drawing's WD_M block.
Drawing Properties AEPROPERTIES
Rename Schematic Layers AERENAMELAYER
Renames layers one by one. and you rename it using this utility. Displays differences between drawing and project settings. or multiple layers at once by using the Find/Replace method.
Modify Symbol Library AEUPDATESYMLIB
Performs an update of all library symbol scaling and text heights in the folder. and layers. You can change the default icon menu using the Project Properties dialog box.Command
Description
compatible with AutoCAD Electrical. and appear in the various BOM. and wire connection reports.

or replaced with your own custom menu.
Panel tab
Insert Component Footprints panel
Command
Insert Footprint (Icon Menu) AEFOOTPRINT
Description
Inserts panel footprint selected from on-screen icon menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Project Properties dialog box. NOTE Certain components don't need a PASSPWR flag (such as terminals and contacts) since they are automatically passed through.
44 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu. If a component carries the PASSPWR flag the Power Report program will pass through the component and continue looking for load values on the network.
Mark Component To Pass Power AEPASSPWR
Power Load Check Report AEPOWERLOADREPORT
Scans the wire interconnections and reports if there is too much load on a given power source. The PASSPWR flag instructs the Power Report to pass through the marked component when calculating the load on a given source. This icon menu can be modified. expanded.Command
AEPOWERLOADLEVELS
Description
ports if there is too much load on a given power source Marks a component with a PASSPWR flag.

For each schematic component selected. to find a match in the project. This report provides error checking between the schematics and the panel layout drawings. location.
Insert Footprint (Catalog List) AEFOOTPRINTCAT
Panel tab | 45
. Inserts and annotates panel footprint from user-defined list of components with catalog assignments. then it further compares catalog information looking for any discrepancies. The data displayed in this pick list is stored in a database in generic Microsoft Access format. This can save a lot of time if you frequently use the same vendor and panel components.
Insert Footprint (Manual) AEFOOTPRINTMAN
Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu) AEFOOTPRINTMFG
Inserts and annotates panel footprint using manufacturer-specific icon menu. and installation information. If a match is found. The AutoCAD Electrical normal search path sequence is used to locate this file. Inserts panel footprint using a generic shape or by converting an existing non intelligent AutoCAD block. The program looks at each selected panel component looking for a matching schematic component in the same way.Command
Insert Footprint (Schematic List) AEFOOTPRINTSCH
Description
Inserts and annotates panel footprint by referencing the project's schematic component list. the routine tries to find a matching panel component based on tag.mdb and can be edited with Access or from Add/Edit/Delete along the bottom of the pick list's dialog box. The program looks at the selected components. both schematic and panel. You can even apply this method to create client-specific menus making it easier to use the vendor or components that each client prefers. The file name is wd_picklist.

both schematic and panel. The terminal strip's function (installation) code. Some schematic components may not carry manufacturer/catalog information or have a part number assigned that is not listed in the footprint lookup file. The program then looks at each selected panel terminal looking for a matching schematic terminal in the same way. looking for any discrepancies. For each schematic terminal selected. it tries to find a matching panel terminal based on tag.WDP). then it compares catalog information. In such a case. location code. location. select or create a footprint. AutoCAD Electrical cannot determine what footprint block needs to be used so you have to select to make catalog assignments. or create a lookup entry on the fly. and description information. Inserts and annotates panel terminal footprint using a generic shape or by converting an existing non intelligent AutoCAD block. and installation information. looking for a match in the project. and tag are written to the Page Description Field inside of the Project Listing (*. If a match is found.Command
Terminal Strip Table Generator AETSEGENERATOR
Description
Controls the Tabular Terminal layout format automatically.
Insert Terminal (Schematic List) AEPANELTERMINALSCH
Insert Terminal (Manual) AEPANELTERMINAL
Panel tab | 47
. Inserts and annotates panel terminals by referencing the project's schematic terminal list. This report provides error checking between the schematic terminals and panel layout terminals. The program looks at the selected terminals. This creates a new drawing file with each section break and automatically adds them to the project listing.

and delete them. This extracts all panel components and nameplates and resequences their item numbers starting at the value you provide. In some cases. they are properly updated when copied using this utility. Removes the selected footprint from the drawing. Since AutoCAD Electrical establishes invisible Xdata pointers when these are tied to a footprint.
Copy Footprint AECOPYFOOTPRINT
Resequence Item Numbers AERESEQUENCE
Delete Footprint AEERASECOMP
48 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. surf to them. Converts selected block if it is not AutoCAD Electrical compatible. click No to leave the existing footprint block as is or click Yes to set up a footprint lookup database file or manually draw a simple footprint representation.Edit Footprints panel
Command
Edit Footprint AEEDITFOOTPRINT
Description
Edits panel footprint or terminal. You have the option to search for related components. Assigns or resequences item number assignments on a drawing or project. Resequencing is based on the main MFG/CAT/ASSYCODE value combination. Additional multi-catalog numbers on a specific component are ignored. a footprint update may be required due to manufacturer. Only the main part number combination is used to group similar components together under a common item number. catalog or assembly value changes. When asked whether to manually force a footprint change. Copies selected panel footprint on active drawing. Use the Copy Footprint tool instead of AutoCAD Copy when a panel component footprint has a balloon or a nameplate associated to it.

It works nicely for quickly building power supplies.
Copy Group Code AECOPYGROUPCODE
Copies Group Code to one or more selected panel footprints.” Schematic symbols created or converted using the Symbol Builder are fully compatible with AutoCAD Electrical.
Copy Mount Code AECOPYMOUNTCODE
Copies Mount Code to one or more selected panel footprints.
Copy Assembly AECOPYASM
Copies one or more selected panel footprints. and other custom devices or for converting existing non-AutoCAD Electrical symbols to make them “AutoCAD Electrical smart. filters.Command
Copy Installation Code AECOPYINST
Description
Copies Installation Code to one or more selected panel footprints. custom components on the fly.
Copy Location Code AECOPYLOC
Copies Location Code to one or more selected panel footprints. controllers. drives. break
Panel tab | 49
.
Other Tools panel
Command
Symbol Builder AESYMBUILDER
Description
Converts existing symbols or creates new.

Icon Menu Wizard AEMENUWIZ
Launches the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify or expand an icon menu. For example. component.” Sets panel footprint drawing defaults such as text sizes and layer assignments.env.
Panel Configuration AEPANELCONFIG
Rename Panel Layers AERENAMEPANLELLAYER
Update Footprint Layers AEFPLAYERS
50 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. Updates selected footprint layer assignments to match panel drawing settings layer assignments. You can change the default icon menu using the Project Properties dialog box. and you rename it using this utility. and wire connection reports. If your current drawing does not have this block present when any AutoCAD Electrical panel layout command is invoked. or multiple layers at once by using the Find/Replace method. The default icon menu can also be redefined in “wd.Command
Description
wires upon insertion. The Panel Layer Rename utility makes it easy to rename layers one by one. if DEMO-WIRES is currently assigned as an AutoCAD Electrical wire layer. Configuration settings are saved as attribute values on a nonvisible block named WD_PNLM (that inserts at 0. AutoCAD Electrical pauses and asks you for permission to insert this block.0). Renames panel-related layers and updates panel drawing settings. this also updates the AutoCAD Electrical layer assignment information carried on the drawing's WD_M block. the new layer name is substituted for DEMO-WIRES in the AutoCAD Electrical wire layer name list. In addition to renaming the layer. and appear in the various BOM. or replace an existing icon menu with your own custom menu.

Conduit Tools panel
The Conduit Tools Panel is off by default. The footprint lookup database links a manufacturer's catalog part numbers to appropriate footprint block . Inserts as a conduit tag. descriptions. you
Panel tab | 51
.mdb).
Conduit Marker (From/To List) AECONDUITMARKERLIST Edit Conduit Marker AEEDITCONDUITMARKER
Formats an inter-wiring list from a subset of a component from/to report.dwg files. and wire assignments. Command
Conduit Marker (Pick) AECONDUITMARKER
Description
Formats an inter-wiring list from a selection of interconnected components.
Edits conduit marker tag. Extractable conduit marker symbols are named “WWAY*. Inserts as a conduit tag.Command
Make Xdata Visible AESHOWXDATA
Description
Converts any piece of non-visible extended entity data (Xdata) into a visible attribute tied directly to the footprint block. However.
Footprint Database File Editor AEFOOTPRINTDB
Edits the catalog number and footprint block name lookup file. This information is in a multitable Access database file (footprint_lookup.
Conduit Marker Report AECONDUITMARKERRPT
Extracts conduit marker information into a report.” A conduit can be represented by a line or a polyline and by itself does not carry any intelligence.

wda file is saved in the same folder as the project definition file (*.XLS”). can drive automatic generation of the I/O schematic drawings. The Default . in spreadsheet or database format. The list file name can be the same as the active project or named Default to be used by the entire system.wda) of userdefined attributes defined on AutoCAD Electrical block files. After the spreadsheet file is created use the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool to automatically create PLC style drawing files. as a table in an Access Database file (. or you can save your information out to a comma-delimited format (“CSV”) and then let AutoCAD Electrical construct a set of PLC I/O wiring diagrams directly from your data. while the <project_name>. The User Defined Attribute List is used by report tools to determine which additional attributes are listed in a report. Your information can be read directly in Excel format (“.xsy) files into AutoCAD Electrical to reformat the data into a PLC import spreadsheet. A project's PLC I/O requirements. Creates a set of PLC I/O drawings from spreadsheet data.wdp).xhw) and I/O variable (.wda file is saved in the base project folder.MDB). Ladders and
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility AESS2PLC
54 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
.
Import/Export Data tab
Import panel
Command
Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet AEUNITYPROSS
Description
Imports Unity Pro hardware (.Command
User Defined Attribute List AEUDA
Description
Creates an attribute text file (*.

attribute text only.
Export panel
Command
Autodesk Inventor Professional Export AEAIPEXPORT
Description
Extracts wire list information into an XML export file to be used exclusively with Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable and Harness. from edits to the project's scratch database file.
Update from Project Scratch Database AEIMPORTDB
Updates project drawings. terminal text. NOTE You must first configure wire numbering to be On per Wire Basis for export and set up the appropriate variables before running the report. breaking at the bottom of one ladder and continuing on the next (or on to the next drawing).
Import/Export Data tab | 55
. or PLC I/O. and retags or updates components. wire numbers.
Update from Spreadsheet AEIMPORTSS
Imports data from an edited spreadsheet.
RSLogix 500 Export to Spreadsheet AERSLOGIX
Prepares RSLogix 500 exported data to be processed by the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility.Command
Description
modules insert automatically.
Insert Spreadsheet Data to Table AEINSERTSSTABLE
Inserts comma-delimited spreadsheet data into a drawing as a table.

Adds AutoCAD geometry to a template block file to be created as part of a unique block instance. The XML file contains the PLC I/O addresses and descriptions for import into the Unity Pro software. Adds wire connection attributes to the existing tagged block file. Exports the selected data category to a comma-delimited. or Access MDB file format for editing. You can subsequently create a new block file if the block is exploded. Select line endpoints or geometry to add the appropriate wire connection attributes to.Command
Unity Pro Export AEUNITYPRO
Description
Creates the Unity Pro I/O variable file (. It examines the current symbol attributes on the drawing and maps them to the equivalent AutoCAD Electrical attribute to make them AutoCAD Electricalsmart. It creates a new block definition with the newly added geometry. Excel XLS.
Export to Spreadsheet AEEXPORT2SS
Conversion Tools tab
Tools panel
Command
Promis·e Conversion AEP2E
Description
Converts drawing files from promis·e to AutoCAD Electrical.xsy) in the Unity Pro XML format. A new block definition is created with the newly added wire connec-
Add Geometry AEGEOMETRY
Add Wire Connections AEWIRECONN
56 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
.

Check/Repair Gap Pointers AEGAPPOINTER
Verifies that the invisible Xdata pointers on both sides of a wire gap/loop are valid. You can subsequently create a new block file if the block is exploded.
Change Attribute Size AEATTSIZE
Changes attribute text size when components or wire numbers have already been inserted onto your drawings.
Xdata Editor AEXDATA
Allows display and edit of an object's “1000” type extended entity data (Xdata).Command
Description
tions. If not.
Convert Ladder AE2LADDER
Change/Convert Wire Type AECONVERTWIRETYPE
Changes between wire types and converts lines to wires. Use the grid control to sort and select the wire types for easy modification. You can take advantage of the tagging tools to modify the text entities to attributes and the linking tools to make various blocks.
Conversion Tools tab | 57
. appropriate pointers are established.
Special Explode AEEXPLODE
Explodes attributes and blocks to geometry and text entities while maintaining the value previously defined in the attributes.
Convert to Schematic Component AEBLK2SCH
Takes non-AutoCAD Electrical blocks or graphics representing a symbol and replaces it with an AutoCAD Electrical block and transfers the attribute or text values to this new AutoCAD Electrical block. Converts the upper-most line reference number on a non-intelligent ladder to be AutoCAD Electrical-aware.

Adds a new attribute to an existing instance of a block insert. This is an attribute definition possibly on a library symbol that becomes an attribute when the symbol drawing is inserted as a block into another drawing. This automatically maps the unconverted drawing's non-AutoCAD Electrical block inserts and attributes to appropriate AutoCAD Electrical-smart component symbols drawn from a symbol library. Attribute values are retained during the swapping process. Wire connections are also maintained even if the new symbol is slightly wider or narrower than the original. Use to update or change blocks in place. Converts a text object to an AutoCAD Electrical compatible wire number. Replaces a non-AutoCAD Electrical destination arrow with a smart AutoCAD Electrical destination arrow.
Add Attribute AEATTRIBUTE
58 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
.
Swap/Update Block AESWAPBLOCK
Convert Text to Wire Numbers AETEXT2WIRENO
Convert Text to Attribute Definition AETEXT2ATT
Converts a text object into an attribute definition object. This is not an attribute associated to an already-inserted block.
Convert Block to Destination Arrow AEBLK2DEST
Block Replacement AEBLOCKREPLACE
Performs drawing-wide and project-wide block replacements using a user-defined spreadsheet.Command
Convert Block to Source Arrow AEBLK2SRC
Description
Replace a non-AutoCAD Electrical source arrow with a smart AutoCAD Electrical source arrow and maps the information to the new AutoCAD Electrical source.

The template block file (HDV1_CONVERT. Makes selected text entities an attributed PLC address associated to a PLC tag.DWG or VDV1_CONVERT. select a PLC Tag or place one into the symbol definition for use with AutoCAD Electrical.DWG depending on the drawing properties) contains attributes found useful for PLC addressing.Command
Map Attributes from Old to New AEMAPATT
Description
Reassigns attributes from a converted block to those expected by AutoCAD Electrical. PLCIO_CONVERT. Use this if you did not finish mapping values from your non-AutoCAD Electrical block.
Tag PLC AETAGPLC
Conversion Tools tab | 59
. After the addressing is defined on the block.DWG.
Stretch Wire AESTRETCTWIRE
Schematic panel
Command
Tag Schematic Component AETAGSCH
Description
Makes selected text entities an attributed block file with the TAG1 attribute visible. or PLCIO_V_CONVERT.DWG. This allows you to continue what you started with Convert to Schematic Component. PLCIO_V_ADDR_CONVERT. Lengthens a wire until it meets another wire or an AutoCAD Electrical component. The template block file (PLCIO_ADDR_CONVERT.DWG depending on the drawing properties) contains attributes for a schematic component.DWG.

The template block file (HT0W_CONVERT. The template block file (ACE_NP_CONVERT.DWG or VT1T_CONVERT.
Tag Schematic Terminal .DWG depending on the drawing properties) contains attributes used for a terminal block component containing a wire number as the terminal number. The template block file (ACE_P_TAG1_CONVERT.DWG) contains attributes used in nameplate symbols. If the description text strings were previously defined as attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical panel component block definition. Makes the selected text entities an attributed block file with the TAGSTRIP and TERM01 attribute visible.Wire Number Change AETAGWIRENOCHANGE
Panel panel
Command
Tag Panel Component AETAGPANEL
Description
Makes selected text entities an attributed block file with the P_TAG1 attribute visible.Wire Number AETAGWIRENO
Description
Makes the selected text entities an attributed block file with the TAGSTRIP and WIRENO attribute visible.Command
Tag Schematic Terminal .DWG depending on the drawing properties) contains attributes used for a terminal block component that changes the wire number. Makes selected text entities an attributed block file with the DESC1-3 attributes visible. the attrib-
Tag Nameplate AETAGNAMEPLATE
Conversion Tools tab | 61
.DWG) contains attributes for a panel component. This creates a terminal number block that has a different wire number for each wire connected to it.DWG or VT0W_CONVERT. The template block file (HT1T_CONVERT.

During the conversion process.DWG) contains attributes for terminal numbers. The template block file (ACE_TERMT_CONVERT. During the conversion process. the text entity is removed and replaced with the next available PLC address description attribute. the text entity is removed and replaced with the next available description attribute.DWG) contains attributes for panel terminal symbols.Command
Description
ute values on the panel component are hidden and the nameplate attributes DESC1-3 are added and made visible. Links simple text to a PLC address attribute as PLC I/O address description attributes.
Link PLC Address Descriptions AELINKPLC
62 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
.
Tag Panel Terminal Wire Number AETAGWIRENO
Attributes panel
Command
Link Descriptions AELINKDESC
Description
Links simple text as Description 1-3 attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical block file.
Tag Panel Terminal Terminal Number AETAGPANELTERMINAL
Makes selected text entities an attributed block file with the TERM01 terminal number attribute visible. You can link them as description attributes to one or more existing template block definitions. up to 3. The template block file (ACE_TERMW_CONVERT. up to 5. Makes selected text entities an attributed block file with the WIRENO wire number attribute visible.

the text entity is removed and replaced with the TERM01 or WIRENO attribute. the text entity is removed and replaced with the Catalog Number attribute. If only one template block is selected for the link. The entity value is used as the Catalog Number value for one or more template block definitions. The entity value is used as the Location value for one or more template block definitions. Links simple text as manufacturer attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical block file. During the conversion process.
Link Manufacturer AELINKMFG
Link Catalog Number AELINKCAT
Link Location Code AELINKLOC
Link Installation Code AELINKINST
Conversion Tools tab | 63
.Command
Link Terminal Number AELINKTERMINAL
Description
Links simple text to a TAGSTRIP attribute as a terminal number attribute on an AutoCAD Electrical terminal block symbol. If only one template block is selected for the link. If only one template block is selected for the link. the text entity is removed and replaced with the Installation attribute. Links simple text as Installation attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical block file. the text entity is removed and replaced with the Manufacturer attribute. the text entity is removed and replaced with the Location attribute. If only one template block is selected for the link. Links simple text as Location attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical block file. The entity value is used as the Installation value for one or more template block definitions. The entity value is used as the Manufacturer value for one or more template block definitions. Links simple text as Catalog Number attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical block file.

Create the device Tag using the TAG1. up to 99. If only one template block is selected for the link. Links simple text as Rating 1-12 attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical block file.Command
Link Split Tag AELINKSPLITTAG
Description
Links another string of text to a tag attribute. Selects the tagged template block file and displays everything (such as description. Links simple text as an Item Number attribute on an AutoCAD Electrical Panel block file. If only one template block is selected for the link. Links simple text (that is not an attribute definition or part of geometry) as User (01-99) attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical block file. up to 12. The entity value is used as the rating value for one or more template block definitions. and then use this tool to select the existing TAG attribute on the drawing and link another string of text. TAG. or P_TAG1 attributes. The first TAG becomes the Part1 of the split tag while the linked portion becomes the Part2 of the split tag. location. During the conversion process. and catalog number codes) that has been linked to it. creating a split tag. creating a split tag situation. manufacturer.
Link User AELINKUSER
Link Rating AELINKRATING
Link Item Number AELINKITEM
Show Links AESHOWLINK
64 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. Window selection is allowed. the text entity is removed and replaced with the user attribute. the text entity is removed and replaced with the rating attribute. The entity value is used as the user value for one or more template block definitions. the text entity is removed and replaced with the Item Number attribute (P_ITEM).

The floating panel remains open until you return it to the ribbon.
Floating Panels
If you pull a panel off of a ribbon tab and into the drawing area or onto another monitor.Overview of the Ribbon
The ribbon is displayed automatically when you create or open a file. that panel floats where you placed it. By default. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel.
Expanded Panels
An arrow to the right of a panel title indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls.
106 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. Ribbon panels contain many of the same tools and controls available in toolbars and dialog boxes. even if you switch ribbon tabs. providing a compact palette of all of the tools necessary to create your file. To specify which ribbon tabs and panels are displayed. To keep a panel expanded. right-click the ribbon and. You can dock the vertical ribbon to the left or right of the application window. on the shortcut menu. click or clear the names of tabs or panels. which are organized into tabs labeled by task.
Ribbon Tabs and Panels
The ribbon is composed of a series of panels. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel.
Display and Organize the Ribbon
The ribbon is displayed horizontally or vertically. Click the icon to display the associated dialog box. The vertical ribbon can also float in the file window or on a second monitor. An icon in the lower-right corner of the panel indicates that you can display a related dialog box.
The horizontal ribbon is displayed across the top of the file window. Some ribbon panels display a dialog box related to that panel.

Contextual Ribbon Tabs
When you execute some commands. The contextual tab is closed when you end the command. and then click one of the minimize options.
To close the ribbon
■
At the Command prompt. Pointing device: Double-click the name of the active ribbon tab or anywhere in the ribbon tab bar. Minimize to Panel Titles: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab and panel titles are displayed. enter ribbonclose. Command entry: RIBBONCLOSE
To return a floating panel to the ribbon
■
Hover over the right side of the floating panel and click the Return Panels to Ribbon icon. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options:
■
Minimize to Tabs: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab titles are displayed. Shortcut menu: Right-click the ribbon tab bar.
The Ribbon | 107
. a special contextual ribbon tab is displayed instead of a toolbar or dialog box.
To display the ribbon
■
To display the vertical ribbon
■
To minimize the ribbon
1 Click the ribbon minimize button to the right of the ribbon tabs. Show Full Ribbon: Displays tabs and full panels. click Minimize.
■
■
NOTE Minimize behavior is available only for the horizontal ribbon. including controls.

and release.
Customize the Ribbon
You can customize the ribbon depending on your needs. 3 Click an available tool palette group from the list. right-click a ribbon panel and click Tool Palette Group.
To associate a tool palette group with a ribbon panel
1 Click Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Tool Palettes. Under Panels. drag it to the desired position.To display or hide a ribbon panel
■
Right-click anywhere inside the ribbon. 2 On the ribbon. click or clear the name of a panel.
To show or hide text labels on ribbon panels
■
Right-click the ribbon tab bar and click Show Panel Titles.
108 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
.
To display the tool palette group associated with a ribbon panel
■
Right-click a ribbon panel and click Show Related Tool Palette Group. Click the tab you want to move.
You can customize the ribbon in the following ways:
■
You can change the order of ribbon tabs.

V key. New connector editing commands add to the features versatility:
■
Scoot .
114 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. Using the existing the Insert Wire command. The parametric connector build process allows you to select number of pins. and orientation to create connector definitions in active drawing files quickly without having to build or maintain a connector library of symbols. the x' indicates the connector insertion point and the arrow indicates the plug side wire direction. simply select the two connection points and let AutoCAD Electrical do the rest. and split the connector into two separate block definitions. Reverse. relative to the wires that are connected to the connector. without running through your existing geometry. Swap Connector Pins . The rounded corners are the plug side of the connector.
Wire Collision Avoidance
Instead of drawing each line segment between components on your point to point drawings.
■
■
Parametric Twisted Pair Symbols
The icon menus were enhanced to include parametric twisted pair symbols. When you click Insert an outline of the connector displays for placement on the drawing. click Miscellaneous ➤ Shields ➤ Twisted Pair. Scoot also moves the wires and pins along the connector axis. or move the pins found inside of the connector. select Components ➤ Insert Component. increase. Move. remove. You can change the connector orientation before insertion using the Tab.allow you to reverse a connector about its horizontal or vertical axis. select a connection point on each component and your wire is automatically routed. Stretch. To insert a twisted pair symbol. spacing. rotate a connector about its insertion point at increments of 90 degrees. On the Insert Component icon menu. Rotate. or X key on your keyboard. or decrease the overall length or width of the connector. Delete.What's New in 2007 Release
Connector Generation
Automatically generate a multi-pin parametric connector on the fly with the new Insert Connector command.(existing Scoot feature) moves the parametric connector horizontally or vertically. Split Connector . Add.use to add.

You can do it immediately after inserting a leader if you
What's New in 2007 Release | 115
. you can modify the wire and create a right-angle bend while maintaining the original wire connections to the components.
Reposition Wire Number Leaders
When defining wire number leaders you can type "C" at the command prompt to go into a wire leader collapse mode to collapse the wire leader back to the wire number block.Splices
The new Splice tool allows you create up to two wire-to-wire connections per side while maintaining connectivity throughout your drawing and project. If it starts as above or below. These include:
■
Temporary wire graphics change color to indicate when an electrical connection can be made. below.
Wire Number Placement
AutoCAD Electrical supports the automatic placement of new wire numbers above. When a wire is defined at a right angle. Wires are drawn with an angled wire connection if a wire is already connected to the selected wire connection point. You can use the new Toggle Wire Number In-Line tool to switch the wire number between in-line and the drawing default (above or below the wire). or directly in-line with the wire. You can set the wire number placement for all new wires inserted.
■
■
Bend Wires
Bend a wire into a right angle turn to avoid or add geometry using the new Bend Wire tool. Wire connection points display as a green 'x' at the wire connection point attributes' insertion point.
Wire Connection Improvements
Enhancements were made to the Insert Wire command to make generating point to point drawings easier. the selected wire number toggles to in-line. it toggles to above or below the wire based on the default Wire Number Placement setting in the Drawing Properties > Wire Numbers dialog box. If the selected wire number is in-line.

regulators. Pneumatic Symbol Library: This library includes operators. restrictors. flow arrows and more. flow arrows and more. instrumentation. manifolds.1 Instrumentation Standard
■
■
116 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. pumps. you can place all wire connections to all components on the drawing file. logic functions. all adhering to the NFPA/T3. motors. quick disconnects. hydraulic.1-1993 standards. quick disconnects.
Link to Autodesk Inventor Professional . all strictly adhering to the ANSI/ISA's S5.10.determine that you do not want the leader or you can re run the Wire Number Leader command if you want to remove the leader from existing wire numbers. meters. cylinders. Once the wiring information is determined the wires are routed making sure to miss existing geometry on the drawing. tanks.Cable & Harness
You can now communicate your electrical designs bi-directionally between AutoCAD Electrical and Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness. filters. you can select from a list of connectors defined in the export and then place the connectors onto a 2D drawing file. cylinders. pressure switches. valves. Autodesk Inventor Professional users can now pass wire connectivity information to AutoCAD Electrical for the automatic creation of the corresponding 2D schematics. Employing the widely used XML language format. motors. meters. AutoCAD Electrical parses through the file data to determine all wire From and To connections.4R1-1990 and AS1101. pumps. mufflers. fittings. flow paths. nozzles. From the XML import from Autodesk Inventor Professional into AutoCAD Electrical. and flow arrows. Once the connectors were inserted onto the drawing. and P & ID drawings. valves. actuators. AutoCAD Electrical users can pass electrical intent information for cables and conductors to Autodesk Inventor Professional for the automated creation of a 3D harness design. P & ID Symbol Library: This library includes equipment.
■
Hydraulic Symbol Library: This library includes filters. you can transfer design data back and forth while maintaining structure and organization. The wire insertion tool finds the best possible route with the least amount of wire loops in between the connection and the wires are connected in the appropriate position on the connector representation.
Multi-discipline Symbol Libraries
AutoCAD Electrical now includes comprehensive symbol libraries for creating pneumatic. flow. valves.

Table style cross-referencing updates
Tabular cross-referencing styles now function at the same level as graphical and text styles. and component level. drawing. you can configure a new multiple wire bus that automatically routes from an existing multi-contact component or bus or in empty space. Identify and clean up problems that might affect an AutoCAD Electrical drawing using the improved Electrical Audit tool.Real-time Error Checking
AutoCAD Electrical monitors and alerts users to potential design errors as they occur. While you define the wires.
User Defined Attributes
Add and define your own attributes for existing AutoCAD Electrical symbols.
Multiple Wire Bus
With a single command. You can locate the problem component automatically using the Surf command. AutoCAD Electrical looks to the component for its settings information before using the drawing settings. The new User Defined Attribute List tool allows you to determine selectively which non-AutoCAD Electrical attributes are allowed in the AutoCAD Electrical report generators. those are used. This tool displays a report of detected problems for the active project. During normal operation of cross-referencing commands. otherwise only those attributes defined inside of AutoCAD Electrical for each component category are processed in the project database and subsequent reports.
Cross-reference updates
Cross-reference settings are now supported at the project. If there are both component and drawing cross-reference settings on the same drawing. updated your drawing in real-time and benefit from increased flexibility with the way you display cross-referencing information. The newly defined metadata is easily customized and can be extracted for various reports. You can save this file for reference or surf the file to view and correct the errors. If the component has settings defined. the component settings are used where applied and the
What's New in 2007 Release | 117
. Create customizable tables. temporary display graphics appear on your cursor to indicate the direction and number of wires to place on the drawing file.

sensors.
Improved Performance
Improved memory management and script-based command reallocation have dramatically improved the performance of AutoCAD Electrical 2007. Drawings open more quickly. such as wire way and panel enclosures. In most cases. the catalog database now includes a greater number of Asia Pacific and European vendors. zero length wires. lights and numerous panel devices. the cross-referencing should be visible but there are times when you may not want cross-referencing displayed on parent symbols.
Catalog Content Updates
AutoCAD Electrical ships with a manufacturer's catalog database that contains over 45. Use the new Copy/Add Component Override tool to set display settings for a specific component that are different from the drawing or use the new Remove Component Override tool to remove component overrides so the cross-referencing commands use the settings for the drawing. These components provide a full spectrum of input and output devices including switches.
Wire Label Report
Use the new Wire Label report to list wire and cable labels that exist in your drawing or project. This report can be exported as a script file for post processing or sent directly to a printer. and visually verifies all wires in your display. Microsoft Excel. In order to support our worldwide user base.drawing settings are used for the rest of the components. The audit checks for wire gaps. The new preformatted wire label report is ready for export and can be printed on any ASCII. After the report is generated. Access. bad wire numbers or colors. CSV.
Enhanced Drawing Audit Report
The Drawing Audit utility can be used to clean up certain problems that might affect your design connectivity. or XML-compatible wire label printer.
118 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. Use the new Hide/Unhide Cross-reference tool to change the visibility of cross-references.000 components from the most popular vendors in the industry. wire number floaters. with enhanced editing and referencing speed. you can still edit the format or change the data before exporting to your desired file format.

and descriptions. In a single dialog box. add drawing name. Now you can type in the hotkey "T" for immediate access to the Set Wire Type dialog box where you can quickly assign the wire type. border. the current wire type displays at the command prompt. The new project automatically becomes the active project. You can use this hotkey with the following commands:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Wires > Insert Wire Wires > Angle Wires > Insert 22.5) Wires > Multiple Wire Bus Wires > Add Rung Wires > Ladders > Insert Ladder
Use the new Create/Edit Wire Type tool to create new or edit existing wire types or use the new Change/Convert Wire Type tool to convert lines to wires. where you can view and edit project settings.
Simplified configuration settings
Configuration settings have been condensed into a centralized Properties dialog box. the New Drawing tool helps reduce the hassle of configuring new drawings to specific standards.
What's New in 2007 Release | 119
. During wire insertion. and the settings and options defined within the project. The new drawing then automatically becomes part of the active project. In a single dialog box you can define the minimum requirements to create an AutoCAD Electrical project definition file (WDP). which are then stored and available for future use. format styles and select default drawing settings for the entire project or a single drawing.New Project Command
Creating new projects and applying project properties is now easier using the New Project tool.
New Drawing Command
When you are faced with multiple customers or many one-off designs. you can apply a template. the folder in which the project is maintained.5 Degree Wire (also 45 or 67. drawing type.
Simplified wire type selection
Managing wire properties from the Layer Manager is no longer necessary.

Use the new Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet tool to import Unity Pro XML export files to aid in the creation of PLC-style ladder drawings and panel layout drawings (in both vertical and horizontal format) in the active project. New controls in Vault make it easier to navigate to and find AutoCAD Electrical data. Employing the widely used XML language format. You can now use Autodesk Vault to manage AutoCAD Electrical bill of materials (BOMs) by controlling the release and change of a design using the Change Order environment. The Unity Pro export files also contain catalog information. quantities. you can transfer design data back and forth while maintaining structure and organization.
What's New in 2008 Release
PLC I/O Import/Export
You can now communicate your electrical designs between AutoCAD Electrical and Unity Pro from Schneider Electric.
120 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. You can reformat it to generate an equipment list to aid in the creation of a rack layout drawing used in panel layouts or separate rack layout drawings. It supports a single-user environment where the Vault working folder is local to the customer or a multiple-user environment where the Vault working folder is shared by many users on a shared network resource. You can now get previous versions of the drawing or project file. catalog numbers. The multi-user environment in AutoCAD Electrical now provides drawing status indicators and better control of project-wide commands when you are logged into Autodesk Vault. Additional enhancements include: Vault now supports AutoCAD Electrical components. and balloon numbers.Autodesk Vault Integration
Autodesk Vault integration provides tools for running Vault operations on the entire project or individual drawing files listed within the project. Additional enhancements include: You can now check out individual files as they are needed rather than having to check out the entire project at once while maintaining drawing file versioning. Vault Explorer supports all Vault and AutoCAD Electrical data.

or Wire Number cell) the Tagstrip value is surfed for the terminal strip. You can now define a starting drawing file name or start with the active drawing. For More Information on page 1227
What's New in 2008 Release | 121
.Use the new Unity Pro Export tool to create a Unity Pro I/O variable file (*. Additional enhancements include:
■ ■ ■
Default settings are now read automatically the first time you run the tool. even if the Tagstrip is not included in the title. you can click various report cells to find the corresponding devices quickly within the schematic or panel layout drawings in the active project. you can click the title cell to surf on the Tagstrip value. The Unity Pro export file is generated from the PLC drawings and their respective PLC symbols.
For More Information on page 679
Surfable Reports
When reports are placed into a drawing as a table.
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Enhancements
You no longer have to create and save the starting drawing for the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool. If you select a cell that is not surfable (such as the Tag.000 intelligent PLC I/O modules from the most popular manufacturers in the industry. You can select a settings file and make it the default. For More Information on page 691
PLC I/O Libraries Enhancements
You can quickly create PLC I/O drawings by selecting from a library of over 3. You can have the newly created drawings added automatically to the end of the active project. Catalog.xsy) in the Unity Pro XML format from your AutoCAD Electrical drawings. When surfing on a table inserted by the Terminal Strip Editor.

Icon only. You can also easily modify the existing icon or menu properties like changing the name. The most recently used icon displays at the top. image. You can now copy and paste icons from one submenu into another.
■
■
■
■
Icon Menu Wizard Enhancements
Use the Icon Menu Wizard to customize the icon menus easily. The menu is created by reading the *. Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol icons and submenu icons corresponding to the selected menu. the icon name and block/circuit/command names display as tooltip information. display a submenu. Right-click the menu or icon on the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box and select Properties. or execute a command. This list follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window and the total number of icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit box. Tooltips When you move the cursor over an icon. View Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check mark.Insert Component and Insert Footprint Enhancements
The Insert Component and Insert Footprint dialog boxes are updated to improve ease of use when selecting components to insert into your drawing. or List view.dat file with the new changes. Clicking the menus displays the corresponding menu icons in the Symbol Preview window.
122 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. or block name.dat file: insert a component or circuit. Enhanced dialog box controls include:
■
Menu tree structure Displays the main menu and submenus from which you can freely navigate. Options include: Icon with text. Clicking an icon performs one of the following functions based on the icon properties as defined in the *. and create new icons to use when inserting components. drag and drop icons to place the icons that are commonly used at the top of the Symbol Preview window and the icons that are used less frequently at the bottom of the window. Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing session. The existing data is overwritten in the *.dat file defined in the Project Properties dialog box.

use the Show Wire Sequence tool to show the new sequencing graphically. The third must be reported as jumpered to one of the other two devices. the updated information is accurately reflected in the from/to wire list report. you can either select a terminal strip for editing.”
■
What's New in 2008 Release | 123
. For More Information on page 1065
Visual Wiring Sequence Indicators
Once you define additional wire connection sequences. the third field device can be sequenced directly to the terminal and the Wire From/To report shows all three field devices tied directly to the terminal. The Terminal Strip Editor dialog box now has an enhanced grid control with bolder grid lines that provide better visual definition for the terminal strip. For example. Now. with the support for secondary direct-to-terminal sequences. When any changes are made to a wire sequence. You can now start designs with a terminal strip layout drawing representing the terminal strip. In the modified Terminal Strip Selection dialog box. one side of a schematic terminal might be connected to three field devices. A specific wire connection sequence can be defined to force the connection reporting. or create a terminal strip definition in the project and maintain its properties in the graphical terminal strip layout drawing. but it is limited to reporting the terminal as a common connection point for only two of the three field devices. Other enhancements to the dialog box include:
■ ■
The Terminal Pin (TPin) column is now “T.” The TERM column is now “Number” to indicate the terminal numbering. The Function column is now “Installation. whether it is a wire number or user-defined number.For More Information on page 1269
Direct Wire Sequencing
You can now use the Edit Wire Sequence tool to define additional direct-to-terminal wire connection sequences in schematic networks. For More Information
Terminal Strip Editor Enhancements
The Terminal Strip Editor provides an easy way to manage and edit terminals used throughout a project.

” The Cable Preview tab is now “Cable Information. For More Information on page 1113
Inserting Spare Terminals
Extra terminal block definitions and accessory information is now maintained and saved on the graphical terminal strip layout. and provides a means for automatic updating. you can define and manage the terminal numbers and levels as well as all connectivity information with no added complexity. Terminals must be in the same terminal strip and be in the same project to associate together. The Preview tab is now “Layout Preview. more flexibility with the style. Using AutoCAD Electrical. separate levels from a multiple level terminal block into separate terminal blocks. For More Information on page 1152
Multi-Level Terminals
Multi-level terminal blocks are quickly becoming an industry standard. reverse the left and right wiring information for a terminal. You can now associate schematic terminals to build a multi-level terminal block that is limited to the number of levels defined in the block properties. Tooltip instructions display once you move your cursor over 1 of the tool buttons in the dialog box. It allows for more accurate representations of what is in the Terminal Strip Editor. You can insert spare terminals and have them accurately update the Bill of Materials as well as various terminal reports. There is better context menu support that is based on individual cells. Use the new Add/Modify Associations tool to search project terminal strips for existing multi-level terminal blocks so that you can define and maintain terminal associations. The Layout Preview tab of the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box was enhanced to allow table objects in AutoCAD to be inserted as a terminal strip.■ ■
A new column (on the far left side of the grid) indicates the level definition.”
■ ■ ■
New tools are available on the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box to create associations. You can also remove a terminal from
124 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. and edit terminal block properties such as the number of levels and number of wires per connection.

If you later decide you want to install content from another manufacturer. edit.
Pin List Data Management
Pin list data is now managed based on manufacturer. Jumpers now display on the panel drawing so you have a visual representation of jumpers that appear on tabular terminal strips. Three columns of jumpers are supported within a single jumper column in the table.any multi-level relationship and copy terminal properties from one terminal symbol to another. The _PINLIST table in the default_cat.
Terminal Jumper Support
Use the new Edit Jumper tool to add. or remove jumpers between terminals that share the same potential in a schematic drawing. The continuation columns were removed. Use the new Terminal Properties Database Editor tool to select the manufacturer table to edit or create a new one in the catalog database for the active project. The number of schematic terminals that can be combined is limited to the number of levels defined for the block property. Terminal associations can also tie together a set of schematic terminal block symbols to one panel representation of a terminal footprint. Cells of a table row are joined with a graphical jumper that looks like two circles connected by a solid thick line. reducing the size of the content databases and data redundancy. Associating schematic terminals combines the terminals into a single terminal block property definition. You can display temporary line graphics between the primary terminal and secondary terminals within the same drawing.mdb file now uses a single PINLIST column and a single PEER_PINLIST column. Use the Pin List Database Editor tool to select the pin list table to edit or create a table. open the Add or Remove
What's New in 2008 Release | 125
. For More Information on page 1095
Terminal Properties Database Editor
Terminal properties data is now managed based on manufacturer. For More Information on page 1335
Installer Improvements for Manufacturer Content
You can now selectively install content based on manufacturer.

Most notably.
Catalog Content Updates
AutoCAD Electrical ships with a catalog database of a manufacturer that contains over 350. sensors. and then select the manufacturers to install on the Manufacturer Contents Selection screen. the Project Database Service (PDS) now only monitors the active project. To insert a twisted pair symbol.000 components from the most popular vendors in the industry. These components provide a full spectrum of input and output devices including switches. click Components > Insert Component.
64-bit AutoCAD Electrical
AutoCAD Electrical now ships in 64-bit and 32-bit versions. if the DWG file is owned by AutoCAD. such as wireway and panel enclosures. and click Change/Remove. and numerous panel devices. click Next on the first screen. select AutoCAD Electrical 2008. The 64-bit version supports the same functionality as the 32-bit version. click Miscellaneous and click Cable Markers.
126 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
.
Parametric Twisted Pair Symbol Enhancements
The icon menus are enhanced to include three new parametric twisted pair symbols.
Improved Performance
Significant improvements in running commands that affect other drawings have dramatically improved the performance of AutoCAD Electrical 2008.Programs tool in your Control Panel. lights. When you move the cursor over a DWG icon. For example. double-clicking the file in Windows Explorer automatically opens the file in AutoCAD. Click Add/Remove Features. the tooltip identifies which Autodesk product and version was used to create the DWG.
DWG product recognition
Easily identify which Autodesk product created a DWG file and open the file with the application that owns the DWG file. On the Insert Component icon menu.

It provides notifications of software and content updates through a balloon notification mechanism. InfoCenter. adding wiring between components. This PDF is accessible from the home page of the AutoCAD Electrical Help. control circuitry and motor horsepower. AutoCAD Electrical builds the selected circuit on-the-fly. It searches AutoCAD and AutoCAD Electrical Help systems to give you the most relevant information for any query you enter.
What’s New for Previous Releases
You can now quickly see which features were added or enhanced in past releases of AutoCAD Electrical. such as breaker type. InfoCenter replaces the Communication Center.
What's New in 2009 Release
Circuit Builder
The Circuit Builder feature comes with many predefined motor control circuits. is included on the title bar of the main AutoCAD Electrical window. and annotating the circuit based on motor horsepower and industry standards. matching the rung spacing. You can customize the Circuit Builder feature to build your custom circuits. Insert a circuit by picking from the list of motors and selecting the location on your drawing. and easily provide feedback to Autodesk. support RSS feeds.
What's New in 2009 Release | 127
.User’s Guide
A User’s Guide for AutoCAD Electrical is now available in PDF format. Click the “x” for a particular feature to get more information about what functionality was added for that release. You can also publish internal content within your team. The spreadsheet defines the available options for the circuit and the defaults for each option. You can filter content and add frequently used content to the Favorites section. Select the location for the circuit and a custom circuit is built based on the selected options. It is accessible from the Launchpad and the home page of the Help. Select the options to define the circuit. The feature is driven by a spreadsheet and drawing templates.
InfoCenter
A new search engine. Inserting a custom motor control circuit can also be as easy as a few mouse clicks.

These jumper charts are updated automatically when the graphical terminal strip is updated. and delete jumpers inside Terminal Strip Editor. Use the Drawing to Preview slider to preview each drawing.
■
Controls added to insert. Columns added for the display of internal jumpers. The Table Preview now takes angle and scale into account. For More Information on page 703
Terminal Strip Editor
Enhancements to the Terminal Strip Editor make it a more comprehensive utility.The drawing template defines the placement for the individual components and the wiring. or block properties. All the block editor features are available along with AutoCAD Electrical dialog
128 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. Controls for number of rows per section. offset distance. and add-on jumpers. New Jumper Chart option to display graphically all jumpered terminals in a table object placed on a drawing.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■ ■
For More Information on page 1113
Symbol Builder
The Symbol Builder now takes advantage of the block editor environment. Internal jumper support for multi-level terminals based on the catalog assignment. Additional control over the jumper circles in the table object and jumper chart. This preview reflects all table settings include drawing template. Options to split the table object into multiple sections are provided. section placement. Option to launch Automatic Wire Numbering once terminal updates are complete if jumper changes are made. The preview includes a list of drawings if the settings result in multiple drawings. and offset direction are available. as defined in the TERMPROPS table. shown on the left of the terminal number as squares. edit. An additional Preview is available while defining table settings. number of sections per drawing. shown on the right as circles.

icon menu files. The existing files are found and listed for migration selection. Save the migration settings to use at a later time or to repeat the migration for another user or computer. save it using the suggested symbol name following the AutoCAD Electrical naming standards.boxes. Select which files to migrate. including the environment file. other file types allow you to keep your custom file or overwrite it with the default AutoCAD Electrical file. and your files from a previous release are ready for the latest AutoCAD Electrical release. Each multiple catalog assignment can receive its own item number. 2 Select Properties. recent projects. Start with a template supplied with attributes for the specific component type you want to create. 4 Click Item Numbering. When your symbol is ready. user circuits. or enter your own symbol name. All necessary attributes are immediately available for insertion along with any optional attributes. define the migration options. lookup database files. Audit your symbol to see any potential issues with your symbol. and so on. Some file types allow you to merge the default AutoCAD Electrical file and your custom file. The Migration utility includes the option to merge the catalog database and supports other files types and settings.
What's New in 2009 Release | 129
. 3 Select the Components tab. table styles drawing. For More Information on page 135
Item Numbering
You can now assign an item number on a per part basis. 5 Click Per-Part Number Basis (excluding ASSYCODE combinations). Set the item numbering options for a project: 1 Right-click on the project name in Project Manager. It is easy to adjust the graphics of the component and add the necessary attributes for each type of AutoCAD Electrical component. For More Information on page 350
Migration Utility
The Migration utility replaces the Merge utility which dealt exclusively with the catalog database. Drag them from the dialog box into your symbol. Select to migrate from a specific AutoCAD Electrical release.

you want a module to have a Rack value of “2”. In the spreadsheet. NOTE An item number can be assigned to the main catalog entry and any multiple catalog entries. AutoCAD Electrical creates the drawing before generating the next module in the spreadsheet. and a Rating2 value of “Hazardous Duty”. A graphic drawing (. an Installation value of “MACH1”. You can also surf on an item number in a report table. Run the Surf command and click the item number text in the report table. enter
130 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. When an item number is modified or removed.dwg) file is assigned to a specific contact block file name through a new cross-reference mapping table in the catalog lookup database. It cannot be assigned to a catalog entry based on an assembly code. in the CODE column of the spreadsheet at the point where you want to start a new drawing. For example. Right-click an item balloon and select surf. Multiple balloons are inserted automatically if a component carries multiple item number assignments. For More Information on page 244
Spreadsheet to PLC/IO
You can now direct the Spreadsheet to PLC/IO utility to start a new drawing before generating the next module.6 Click OK. For More Information on page 1229
Cross-referencing
The graphics used to represent each contact type in the table cross-reference style are now customizable. the item balloon is updated or deleted. For More Information on page 225
Surfing
The ability to surf on an item number was added. The Insert Balloon feature supports multiple balloons per component. or type the item number in the Surf dialog box. You can now predefine other attributes on the module like the inline device fields. The assigned graphic drawing file is inserted as a block in the table cell in the TYPE column. NEW_DWG. in the RACK column. Enter the keyword.

removed from the list.INST=MACH1. Project descriptions can be used in the AutoCAD Electrical title block update and the drawing list report.
Toggle Wire Number
Toggling a wire number from above or below the wire to an in-line wire number now keeps its original center point.Title Block Update
The project description values in Vault can now be written back to AutoCAD Electrical drawings.RATING2=HAZARDOUS DUTY”. place the symbol on or near the wires and the wires are angled and trimmed to meet the motor symbol. NOTE For pre-2009 symbols. you are prompted to import the Vault values in to the project descriptions.
Flip Component
When you use the Flip Component feature. existing dashed link lines are recalculated and reinserted if necessary. The active project is closed. Assign these values to the AutoCAD Electrical project description values. you must add a default attribute prompt value.
3-Phase Wiring
Connecting the 3-phase wiring to the motor symbol is now automatic. and the next project becomes the active project. For More Information
Vault . to the X0TERMxx attributes. When you insert a motor symbol and 3-phase wiring is already present.
Project Manager
You can now right-click the active project and select Close. When this module is generated these extra attribute values are assigned. If the project descriptions are out of date when these features are used. “X0STRETCH”.
What's New in 2009 Release | 131
.“2. rather than centering it on the wire.

This replaceable parameter allows for adding a suffix and/or prefix to the TAGSTRIP text. it also looks for and updates any COPYTAG attributes present on the symbol with a copy of the TAGSTRIP text. Start the command and select the Fence option. You can add a value to this attribute in the Insert/Edit Stand-alone Signal/Destination dialog boxes. Select the first fence point and pan the drawing to select the next fence point. COPYTAG is the optional TAG copy attribute.
Export to Spreadsheet
The option to export information from parent components only was added. and so on. name the attributes COPYTAG01.
132 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
. can be encoded onto the prompt value of the COPYTAG attribute definition. A special replaceable parameter.
Edit Wire Sequence
The Edit Wire Sequence command remains active until you choose to exit the command by not selecting a wire. COPYTAG02. If you need more than one extra TAGSTRIP copy on a symbol.Trim Wire
You can now use the dynamic pan and zoom while using the Trim Wire command. press Alt+A to add the conductor to the list. This feature makes it more efficient to assign a wire sequence to multiple wire networks. Once you type in the conductor color. All wires are trimmed that cross the fence rather than just the wires on the screen.
Cable Conductor Table
Adding a cable with many conductors is more efficient with the Alt+A hot key.
COPYTAG for Terminals
Terminals now support the COPYTAG attribute. "%T". The description field is an available field in the Stand-alone cross reference report. When AutoCAD Electrical updates a TAGSTRIP attribute.
Stand-alone Cross Reference
The DESC1 attribute is now supported on stand-alone cross-reference symbols.

A symbol library preview guide lists the library symbols supplied with AutoCAD Electrical. Continue to pause the mouse over the command icon and the next level of information is displayed in the tooltip. The first level of information for that command is displayed. For more information about any command. was added. Pause the mouse over the command icon. For More Information on page 373
Toolbar Tooltips
Some of the commonly used AutoCAD Electrical commands now provide an additional level of information in the tooltip.
What's New in 2009 Release | 133
. and limit switches.Catalog Content Updates
Pneumatic catalog content was added to the catalog database of over 350. PLC. press the F1 key while the tooltip is displayed.000 components from the most popular vendors of the industry. Additional catalog content for terminal blocks.
Help Updates
The New Features Workshop provides an outline and graphical view of new features this release.

134
.

The following default paths are searched by the Migration Utility.C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\ User Support folder . You select which files to migrate and which migration option to use. used to merge database files and panel content. It is now part of the Migration Utility.0\{language}\Support\ Program Support folder .
Files types for migration
The Migration Utility supports many files types. The Migration Utility migrates these custom changes to the current release.C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\R17. Various default folders are searched for these file types. You can have the Migration Utility look in other folders. There are three migration workflows:
■ ■ ■
Migrate from an earlier release Custom migration Migrate from saved settings
NOTE The Merge Utility. Many files within AutoCAD Electrical are customizable. is no longer a separate utility.Migration
2
Migration Utility
The Migration Utility migrates settings and files from a previous AutoCAD Electrical release to the current release.C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Support\
■
135
.
■ ■
Install folder .

0\{language}\Support\User\ Catalog folder .C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\AcadE {version}\AeData\ Project folder .mdb
Migration Options
Copy or Merge Copy or Merge Copy Copy Copy Copy or Merge
136 | Chapter 2 Migration
.C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\AcadE {version}\AeData\Proj Library folder .
■
Merge . If overwrite is not selected.
■
Use this table to see which files the Migration Utility supports. If overwrite is not selected.dat *. Copy .C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\R17. the default search paths.C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\AcadE {version}\AeData\PLC
■
■ ■
■
■
There are two migration options depending on the file type.env *.slb *.compare the two files and merge the data according to the selected options.png *.sld and *.C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\ User folder .dll and *.■
Data folder .copy the file in the current version to the selected file. and the available migration options for each file type.bmp default_cat. only new files are copied. File Type
Environment File Symbol menu Library menu images Miscellaneous slide images Style images Catalog database
Default Folder
Data User Support User Support User Support PLC and Install\acade Catalogs
File
wd.C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\AcadE {version}\AeData\Catalogs PLC folder . only new lines are merged.

For example. <SRC_TABLE>=<DEST_TABLE> TD1N=TD TD1NT=TD TD1NF=TD TD1FT=TD Wildcard mapping for catalog database tables is allowed on the source (left) database side of the mapping file. catalog numbers.map). NOTE The default file location is C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\.
Table mapping files for footprint lookup database merges
A mapping file for the footprint lookup database (ACEDBMergeUtil_footprint_lookup. TD*=TD. use the mapping file. NOTE There are additional mappings for vendors. [Table map] . It controls which tables to take from the source database and place into the destination database under a single table.map) is located in the same directory as the main executable program. When the table or wildcard mapping is used and the source database table is component-specific. It provides the symbol name for the initial filter used in the catalog lookup window. See the file for further instructions on how to format and construct the mapping strings. The file ia a framework that needs to be modified to provide customized merges. This file follows the same rules as the mapping file for catalog merges (ACEDBMergeUtil. and fields.map) is provided. To consolidate all the timer relay (TD) tables into one table. No rules are predefined in this mapping file. the merge utility places the table name into the WDBLKNAM field of the destination database. See the mapping file for information about these mappings.Table mapping file for catalog merges
You can choose to impose an input mapping file to direct where to place the data inside the catalog destination database.
Migration Utility | 139
. The mapping file (named ACEDBMergeUtil. The default file location is C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\.

If the PLC database file is migrated. For example.
■ ■ ■
1 .AO*.*OUT* *OTHER*.*IN *. if the DESCRIPTION field contained the string “*IN*”. or combination. the Spreadsheet to PLC/IO utility determined the module category based on the value in the DESCRIPTION field or the PLC database table name.Combination module
The PLC Database Migration utility updates all tables in the PLC database based on these values.inserted centered between the bus lines of the ladder. Combination module .A0*. Output module .inserted near the left or top bus line of the ladder.
■ ■ ■
Input module . the Migration Utility automatically runs the PLC Database Migration utility using the following default settings.IO*.AI*. the PLC database contains a CATEGORY field.
Input Output Combination DI*. the correct CATEGORY value is entered for that module.Output module 3 .Input module 2 . output. the database table name is compared. If a match is not made.D0*. it was considered an input module.
140 | Chapter 2 Migration
.*IN.PLC Database
The Spreadsheet to PLC/IO utility uses the module category to calculate the insertion point of a module.inserted near the right or bottom bus line of the ladder.*INP*. In AutoCAD Electrical 2009 and later.I0*
The PLC Database Migration utility compares the values in the DESCRIPTION field of the PLC database to default values for input.*IN/* DO*. For example.
Before AutoCAD Electrical 2009. “IN{space}*” matches “IN module” but does not match “INPUT”. If a match is made to the DESCRIPTION field or table name. NOTE Blank spaces within the text are included as part of the search string.

for example merge .env file can contain settings that direct AutoCAD Electrical where to locate certain files.env. The suggested destination folder for the migrated catalog database is the path in the migrated wd.env file are used when these dependent files are migrated.Overwrite Merge
WD_CAT={default path} WD_CAT={default path}
WD_CAT=n:\shared\ WD_CAT={default path}
If you also select the catalog database for migration. and information about the files migrated.env file.env merge
The wd. These files can include the catalog and lookup databases. If you change the migration status of the wd.log. the data from the source catalog database is migrated to the destination catalog database based on the selected migration options. and user circuits.wd. The log file is stored in the User folder. For example: Migration Option Previous version wd.env
Merge . The paths from the migrated wd.env settings. slide libraries. the user name.
Log file
Each time you run the Migration Utility. This log file contains the date of the migration.env
WD_CAT=n:\shared\ WD_CAT=n:\shared\
Current version wd. the migration information is written to the file acemigration.env
Final wd. The default location is:
■
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release number}\{country code}\Support\User\ Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release number}\{country code}\Support\User\
■
Migration Utility | 141
. you are prompted to update these dependent files to make sure that the location of each file matches the wd.overwrite.

9 (optional) Select Save As to save the migration settings to a file to use to migrate from these saved settings. Different file types have different migration options. AutoCAD Electrical searches for previous installations of AutoCAD Electrical.
1 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Migration Utility. 8 Select OK.Back-up copies
A back-up copy of each migrated file is made. but with the extension ". The back-up file is created in the same directory as the original file and its name is the same as the original. 4 Click within the Copy/Merge Option cell. 6 Click within the Source cell and browse to change the source file. Existing files are selected for migration by default. AutoCAD Electrical searches for files from the selected release." NOTE Backup copies are not created for library symbol drawing files and slide images. The files within that category are shown in the Migration files section. 7 Click within the Destination cell and browse to change the destination file. 2 Select the release to migrate from.bak. and select OK. 10 Review the migration items. and select the Browse tool to change the migration option for a file. The Copy/Merge Options dialog box opens. including whether to overwrite or not.
5 Select the Copy/Merge option.
Migrating from an earlier release
The Migration Utility migrates your settings and customized files from an earlier release of AutoCAD Electrical to the current release. 3 Click the category name in the Migration items list.
142 | Chapter 2 Migration
. The Migration Review dialog box opens.

you define each file that you want to migrate. 13 Select OK. The Migration Review dialog box opens. 5 Click within the Source cell and type the file name or browse to the file you want to migrate. 3 Check the box next to the category name. 13 Select Done. 9 Repeat for each file you want to migrate. 11 (optional) Select Save As to save the migration settings to a file that to use to migrate from these saved settings. 12 Review the migration items. 10 Select OK.
8 Select the Copy/Merge option and select OK. When you select a custom migration.
Migration Utility | 143
. Different file types have different migration options. The Copy/Merge Options dialog box opens. and select the Browse tool to change the migration option for the file. 2 Select Migrate from: <Custom>.11 Select OK.
1 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Migration Utility. 14 Review the Migration Complete information. This option is also used to synchronize multiple computers.
Custom migration
Use the Migration Utility to migrate settings and customized files. This option is useful when you have files from an earlier release that are not in the default location. 6 Click within the Destination cell and type the file name or browse to the destination file. 7 Click within the Copy/Merge Option cell. 4 Click the category name in the Migration items list. 12 Review the Migration Complete information.

5 Select OK.
Migrating from the saved settings file
1 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Migration Utility. You define the migration settings on the first computer and save those settings to an external file. 3 Select OK on the AutoCAD Electrical Migration Utility dialog box. The Migration Review dialog box opens.
Migrating from saved settings
Migrating from saved settings is useful if you migrate settings and files on multiple computers.
Saving the settings file
1 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Migration Utility. 3 Select the saved . When you use the Migration Utility on another computer select the file containing the saved settings. 2 Select External File to migrate from the saved settings. 4 Select Save As to save the migration settings to a file. 6 Continue the migration or Cancel. 7 Select Done.migr file and click Open.
AutoCAD Electrical Migration Utility
144 | Chapter 2 Migration
. 5 Enter a file name and click Save. 6 Review the Migration Complete information. 4 Review the migration items. 2 Set your migration settings using either the steps for Migrating from an earlier release on page 142 or a Custom migration on page 143.15 Select Done.

expand the tree structure to see each level. Highlight the category name to display the individual files and migration options within the Migration files section. Migrate from saved settings.
Migration Utility | 145
. If you are migrating from a previous version of AutoCAD Electrical. If the category contains additional subcategories. Select a file category check box if you want to migrate files from that category. All installed AutoCAD Electrical versions.
Migrate from
Select to migrate from a previous version of AutoCAD Electrical or to perform a custom migration.
Migration items
Available migration items are listed in a tree structure. Click External file to browse to a previously saved migration settings file. 2004 or newer.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Migration Utility. Custom migration.
Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Migration Utility Command entry: AEMIGRATION Many files and settings within AutoCAD Electrical are customizable. and which option to use:
■ ■ ■
Migrate from an earlier release. any existing files are selected for migration by default. Select which files and settings to migrate to the current release.Migrates settings and files from a previous AutoCAD Electrical release to the current release. are options in the dialog box list.

for the category highlighted in the Migration items section.
Copy/Merge Options Displays the current migration option. the source file is copied to the file location for the current release. To change the source file. select within the Copy/Merge Options cell. source file.
Merge/Copy Options
The Migration Utility supports various file types for migration to the current release of AutoCAD Electrical. select within the Destination cell
Opens the Select destination file dialog box. If you choose not to overwrite the existing files. Opens a preview dialog box showing the migration changes for the selected file. and migration options. Use this section to change the migration option. Destination Displays the current destination file or folder for migration. Source Displays the current source file or folder for migration. To change the destination file.
146 | Chapter 2 Migration
. Copy/Merge options differ depending on the selected file type. Red text indicates changed lines. Blue text indicates added lines. You can choose to overwrite any existing destination files. Remove Preview Remove the selected files from the list of file for migration.
Copy
If the Copy option is selected. There are two file migration options: copy or merge. Different file types have different migration options.Migration files
The Migration files section lists the files. The Preview button is available only when merging the Environment File. only new files are migrated. To change the migration option for a file. select within the Source cell
Opens the Select source file dialog box. or Line Type.
Opens the Copy/Merge Options dialog box. or destination file. Symbol Menu.

it was considered an input module. the module is assigned a CATEGORY value of 1 for input.
■ ■ ■
1 . If there is a match. used to match to the DESCRIPTION value. If there is a match. output. Output module . and Web hyperlink field in overwritten records when merging catalog databases. In AutoCAD Electrical 2009 and later. comma delimited. For example.Input module 2 .
Before AutoCAD Electrical 2009. Combination module .
■ ■ ■
Input module . or combination. used to match to the DESCRIPTION value. comma delimited. the CATEGORY value is entered for that module. the PLC database contains a CATEGORY field.inserted centered between the bus lines of the ladder.Combination module
Input
Enter text.
Output
Migration Utility | 147
. You can indicate to maintain the user fields. the module is assigned a CATEGORY value of 2 for output. If you choose not to overwrite existing entries. the database table name is compared.inserted near the left or top bus line of the ladder. The Migration utility compares the values in the DESCRIPTION field of the PLC database to values you assign as input.inserted near the right or bottom bus line of the ladder. text value field. the Spreadsheet to PLC/IO utility determined the module category based on the value in the DESCRIPTION field or the database table name.Merge
If the Merge option is selected. Enter text. you can choose to overwrite existing entries. If a match is not made. If there is a match to the DESCRIPTION field or table name.Output module 3 . if the DESCRIPTION field contained the string “*IN*”.
Migration Options
Provides options for merging the PLC database file. only new entries are merged. The Spreadsheet to PLC/IO utility uses the module category to calculate the insertion point of a module.

Save As
148 | Chapter 2 Migration
. Select to overwrite any existing CATEGORY values. If no match is made for a module. only blank CATEGORY fields are modified. Select a “Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Insertion Point” option on the Module specifications on page 662 dialog box. “IN{space}*” matches “IN module” but does not match “INPUT”.
Migration Review
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Migration Utility. comma delimited. used to match to the DESCRIPTION value. Use the PLC Database File Editor to assign a category to a module.
Files selected for migration Status: indicates the migration option. Source: name and path of the file containing the data to migrate.Combination
Enter text.
Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Migration Utility Command entry: AEMIGRATION The Migration Review dialog box opens after selecting OK on the AutoCAD Electrical Migration Utility dialog box. For example. If there is a match. such as Merge/Overwrite or Copy/Overwrite. Opens the Save Settings dialog box.
Overwrite existing settings
The Migration utility updates all tables in the PLC database based on these values. If not selected. Enter a file name to save the migration settings. The dialog box displays all the migration items and the options for each item. Destination: name and path of the file to receive the values from the source file. the CATEGORY field is not modified. the module is assigned a CATEGORY value of 3 for combination. NOTE Blank spaces within the text are included as part of the search string. This file is used when migrating from an external file on page 144.

An AutoCAD Electrical project file:
■
Is an ASCII text file with any path and any name followed by the .
Use recently opened projects
The Project Manager displays a list of recently opened projects so you can easily select another project to open without having to browse for it. you may want to store them in client-specific subdirectories to take advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to access client-specific catalog files and library symbols. When you create a project file.WDP extension. but only one project can be active at a time. In some cases. Lists the complete path to each wiring diagram drawing included in the project. You can have as many projects as you wish.
149
. lists the AutoCAD drawing file names that make up the wiring diagram set. An ASCII text file.
■
■
Project files default to the directory pointed to by your project subdirectory (given by the WD_PROJ setting in your environment file). Carries default settings that can be referenced when new drawings are created and added to the project. called the project file. you can save it to any subdirectory. The project list is dynamic with the last project you worked on appearing at the top of the list.Project Management
3
Overview of projects
A project is a set of interrelated wiring diagram drawings. It is not mandatory.

The .WDP extension is automatically added to the filename. Use the default or click Browse to select a previously defined project definition file.
3 In the Create New Project dialog box. If you adjust this file. 4 Select or create the directory where you want to save the project.The list of recent projects is saved in a text file called lastproj.
150 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. you can control what project is active when AutoCAD Electrical starts up and what other projects is shown in the Project Manager window. add drawings to a project. click the New Project button. or modify existing information associated with a project.
2
On the Project Manager. enter the name for the new project. 5 (Optional) Specify an existing project file (WDP) to use. "1"=listed as Open.fil in the user subdirectory. The last piece of data in the line identifies what the project state is when AutoCAD Electrical is started: "2"=Active. access an existing project.
Create a project
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. either manually with a text editor or programmatically (see the AutoCAD Electrical API Help). NOTE You can also create a project by right-clicking at the bottom of the tree inside the Project Manager and selecting New Project or by clicking the arrow on the Project Selection menu and selecting New Project.
■
Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\User\ Windows Vista: \Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\User\
■
Each line in this file gives the information for one project.
Work with projects
Use the Project Manager to create a project. "0"= not listed in window but available from the Recent Projects dialog box.

click the New Drawing button. 2 In the Project Manager. wire numbering. The drawing is added to the end of the existing list. You can select multiple drawings using the Shift or Control keyboard keys. You can enter up to 12 description lines per page. cross-references. 3 In the Select Files to Add dialog box. styles. components. You can also select the check boxes for the information to include in reports generated for the project. All information defined in these tabs is saved to the project definition file as project and drawing defaults.
Add a new drawing to the current project
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.
2
On the Project Manager. 4 In the Project Manager. 4 Click Add. and select Add Drawings.
3 Create a new drawing on page 181 and click OK. and drawing formats.
Overview of projects | 151
.6 (Optional) Click Descriptions to enter descriptions for the project. 7 (Optional) Click OK-Properties to modify your project default settings for project settings. NOTE The order in which you select drawings determine how they are listed in the project drawing list. right-click the project name. 8 Click OK.
Add existing drawings to the current project
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. select the drawings to add to the current project. right-click the project name and select Add Active Drawing.

2 Enter the name of the project to copy. The copied project becomes the active project. Before you run the Copy Project operation.
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Copy. Process: Selects one or more drawings from the project drawing list to copy to the new project. Click Browse to select a project to copy.WDP extension is automatically added to the filename. Reset: Moves all selected drawings back to the project drawing list. (See the following list. 10 Select the project-related files to copy. 7 Select one or more drawings to copy to the new project. 4 Select the directory where you want to save the new project. and creates renamed copies of the drawing files.)
152 | Chapter 3 Project Management
.
■ ■
Click Copy active project to copy the current project. by Section/sub-section: Selects drawings by sections and subsections.
■
Do All: Selects all drawings from the project drawing list to copy to the new project.
3 Click OK. The . 9 Enter the directory path where to save the new project.
■
■ ■
■
8 Click OK.The drawings are added to end of the project drawing list. 5 Enter the name for the new project.
Copy a project
Copies an existing project and project specific files to a new name. If the directory does not exist. Un-select: Moves one or more drawings back to the project drawing list. 6 Click Save. close the drawings you plan to copy. it is created.

enter a section or subsection code for the drawing. click the Settings on page 235 tab.
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. 4 In the Sheet Values section. 5 Click OK. making sure to assign the same section or subsection code to each. 2 In the Project Manager. on just a portion of the drawing set. cross-referencing. right-click the drawing name. and select Reorder Drawings. Repeat for each drawing you want to group.
154 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. 2 In the Project Manager. 3 In the Drawing Properties dialog box.
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.Group drawings within a project
You can create groups of drawings within your project list by assigning sections and subsection codes to each drawing. 3 Find and highlight the drawing you want to move in the list. You can change the drawing order using the Reorder Drawings tool. 4 Click Move Up or Move Down until the drawing moves to the appropriate position in the list. and reporting functions can then operate on the whole project (default) or. right-click the project name. The AutoCAD Electrical project-wide tagging. using this section/subsection coding. 5 Click OK. and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.
Change the order of drawings in the project
The order in which drawings appear in the drawing list of the project is the order in which AutoCAD Electrical processes them in project-wide tagging and cross-referencing operations.

Overview of projects | 155
. The drawing is instantly removed from the project but it is not deleted.
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. right-click the drawing name. Select the drawings to remove from the Select Drawings to Process dialog box. enter a description for the drawing. 2 In the Project Manager. Flipping the drawing list to display the drawing details can make it easier to find a specific drawing among dozens or hundreds in a project file. Select from a list of predefined descriptions from the active project by clicking the arrow.
Preview a drawing
You can preview a drawing from the Project Manager. TIP These descriptions can link to an attribute in the title block for automatic update. 2 In the Project Manager.Remove a drawing from the active project
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. right-click the drawing name. and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. and selecting Remove Drawings. 3 In the Drawing Properties ➤ Settings on page 235 dialog box. NOTE You can remove all drawings from a project by right-clicking the project name in the Project Manager. 4 Click OK.
Assign a description to each drawing
You can assign a 3-line description to each drawing listed in your project. and select Remove. You can then toggle the project drawing list back and forth between drawing preview and drawing details. and click OK.

double-click a drawing name to see a preview of that drawing. 3 In the Details pane. The list of recent projects is saved in a text file called lastproj. 4 Click Details to return to the drawing description for the drawings. 3 In the Recent Projects dialog box. 6 Click OK. Click Pick Project. select the project from the list. The selected project becomes the active project. An image of the highlighted drawing displays. In the Project Drawings dialog box.
156 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. The project list is dynamic with the last project you worked on appearing at the top of the list.
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. click the arrow on the Project Selection menu. 4 Click Drawings to see a list of the drawings in the selected project.fil in the user subdirectory. Open Drawing to make the selected project the active project and open the selected drawing or click Back to return to the Recent Projects dialog box. the preview remains on.
Pick a different project
AutoCAD Electrical displays a list of recently opened projects so you can easily select another project to open without having to browse for it. click Preview. 2 In the Project Manager. 5 (Optional) Click Remove to remove a project from the project list. Once selected. 2 In the Project Manager. and select Recent. select a drawing from the list.1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. Each time you highlight another drawing in the project list the display updates with an image of the selected drawing.

dock. and configures project-wide settings.
Right-click menu
You can right-click in empty space in the Project Manager to display the following options:
New Project Creates a project.NOTE If you know the drawing name but you are not sure what project the drawing is in.
Project manager
Opens or creates a project of one or more drawings. In the Find Drawing in Recent Projects dialog box. Open Drawing to activate the project and open the selected drawing. You can dock the Project Manager into a specific location on the screen or hide it until you want to use the project tools. close. or set the transparency for the Project Manager. Once a list of possible projects is presented.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. Once created. hide. close. Right-click the properties icon for options to move. NOTE You cannot have two projects open in the Project Manager with the same project name. reorder drawing files. enter the name of the drawing (wildcards are accepted) and click Find. Double-click the drawing name in the list to preview the drawing. click Find in the Recent Projects dialog box. size.
Overview of projects | 157
.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT Lists the drawing files associated with each open project. the new project automatically becomes the active project. Right-click the properties icon to display options to move. select the project name and click Drawing List to see a list of the drawings contained in the project. dock. Add new drawings. or set the transparency for the Project Manager. and change project settings. hide. Click Pick Project. size.

Creates a drawing file and adds it to the active project. In the Select Project dialog box. the new project automatically becomes the active project. navigate to the project to open and select it. Opens a different project from a file selection dialog box.
New Drawing
Project Selection menu
You can default to a predefined directory by adding an entry to your . (you must be logged into the vault) Allows you to browse to the vault to open a project and make it active inside of the Project Manager.
158 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. The new drawing displays at the bottom of the project drawing list for the active project. In the Select Project File dialog box. Click the arrow next to the Open button and select one of the following options: Open (Check Out).
New Project
Open Project
Open Project from Vault
Buttons
New Project Creates a project.env file with any generic text editor (such as Wordpad). Add this line: WD_PICKPRJDLG. Open (Check Out All). Once created. Creates a project.env file. or Open Read-only. navigate to the project to open and select it.Open Project
Opens a different project from a file selection dialog box. AutoCAD Electrical default pick proj
Recent Opens a different project from a list of recent projects or from a file selection dialog box. the new project automatically becomes the active project. Exit AutoCAD and open the . Once created. n:/{your directory}/. navigate to the project to open and select it. In the Select Project File dialog box.

Files that have changed and are currently checked out to you are not updated. then the Vault icon indicates that the file needs reloading (the Vault icon turns red). Files that are checked out to another user are updated to their current version. If the Vault version is newer. device tagging. For Vault: Checks for changes in external file references and updates the Vault icons in the Project Manager. Files that are checked out to another user are updated to their current version on your local drive. Configures the display options.
Drawing List Display Configuration
Publish/Plot
Overview of projects | 159
. Batch plots one or more drawings in the active project.
Project Task List
Project-Wide Update/Retag
Updates the related line reference numbers.
Refresh
Refreshes the drawing list inside of the Project Manager. cross-reference text.New Drawing
Creates a drawing file and adds it to the active project. and signal reference updates on the selected drawing files inside of the active project. There are ten values that can be associated with the drawings listed so you can display the information based on your requirements. Performs pending updates on any drawing files inside of the active project that have been modified.

section. The order determines how the drawings are processed for project-wide tagging and cross-referencing operations.set file to use for the report.
Title Block Update
Drawing List Report
New Drawing Add Drawings
Add Active Drawing
Reorder Drawings
Remove Drawings
160 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. specify whether to apply the project default values to the drawing settings (in the WD_M block definition). When prompted. just the reference to the drawing. redisplay the previously run report or select a format . NOTE The drawing file is not deleted.Projects
Displays all the open projects in a list. The new drawing appears at the end of the project drawing list. On the Drawing List Report dialog box. Adds an active drawing to the active project. and file names. Descriptions can then be included in report headers and title blocks. Displays unlimited lines describing the project. but only one project can be active at a time. The active project appears in bold text and is always found at the top of the list. When prompted. Automates updating title block information for the active drawing or for the entire project drawing set. specify whether to apply the project default values to the drawing settings (in the WD_M block definition). Generates a report that lists project drawing information from the title blocks such as drawing descriptions. Moves drawings up or down in the project's drawing list. Adds one or more drawings to the active project. select to run a new report. Right-click the project name to display the following project editing options: Descriptions Edits the existing project descriptions. Creates a drawing file and adds it to the active project. Removes one or more drawings from the current project. You can have as many projects open as you need.

wdp) along with its drawing files to the vault.WDP). You can vault just the project file using the Project Check In command or you can vault the project file along with its drawing files using the project Check In All command. publish to DWF. Controls project-wide settings including tagging.Task List
Performs pending updates on any drawing files inside of the active project that have been modified. you must first activate another project in the list. Displays a list of drawing file(s) that have different settings from the project definition file (. and catalog lookup file preferences. If all drawing files match the . NOTE You cannot close the active project.
Overview of projects | 161
. The status of the selected object determines which vault commands are available for selection.
Publish
Settings
Exception List
Properties
Activate
Close
Vault
You must be logged into the vault to see this menu in the Project Manager. or create a zip file of the project. publish to the Web. Check In All Adds the project definition file (. the dialog box indicates that there are no exceptions. component crossreferencing options. Closes an open project.wdp. Makes an open project the active project in the AutoCAD Electrical session. This also sends the project list to the top of the dialog box. You can then use the Settings Compare tool to display the differences. Launches dialog boxes to plot the project. Displays the project's settings and information about the AutoCAD Electrical environment.

Retrieves an updated copy. otherwise use Check Out All.wdt) appear in the Vault Check In All dialog box if they share the same file name as the project.wdl and . Use this if you want to check out only the project definition file and none of its drawing file dependencies. Removes the reservation/lock from the master project definition file.
Check In
Check Out
Reserves and locks the master project definition file.NOTE Files used to support the project (such as .
Check Out All
Reserves and locks the project definition file along with the associated drawing files listed in the Project Manager. NOTE Files used to support the project (such as . Any modifications made to the local copy are not checked back into the vault. otherwise use Check In All. Use this if you want to check in only the project definition file and none of its drawing file dependencies.
Undo Check Out/Undo Check Out All
162 | Chapter 3 Project Management
.wdt) appear in the Vault Check In dialog box if they share the same file name as the project. you can still check out the drawings available for editing. Adds the project definition file to the vault and creates a version of the file. The master file is now available for others to check out. If the project definition file is unavailable for checkout.wdl and . if necessary.

To make a drawing a reference drawing. You can select multiple drawings from the project list to open. Indicates that the file is a drawing file. Older files are indicated by the status indicator displaying a red background.
Indicates that a drawing file is a reference drawing. apply project defaults. or paste properties all at once. You can turn this off by clicking the Drawing List Display Configuration button and selecting Show selection highlight only when active.
Right-click the drawing name to display the following drawing editing options: Open Opens the selected drawing in a new window. the selected drawing highlights in the project drawing list regardless if the Project Manager is active or not.
Close
Overview of projects | 163
.
Project Drawing List
Displays the drawings associated with a project. remove. Closes the selected drawing. right-click on the drawing name and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.Undo Check Out All removes the lock from all of the checked out drawing files and project definition file listed inside of the Project Manager for the selected project. close. You cannot select multiple drawings from two or more projects. By default. You can also double-click a drawing name or select a drawing name and press Enter to open the drawing. The active drawing appears in bold text in the list. Get Latest/Get Latest All Retrieves the latest master copy from the vault and copies it into your working folder.

For a first time check in of a drawing file. Assigns drawing descriptions to the drawing files. Assigns. enter a new file name and select the project to save the drawing to. Displays differences between all drawing settings and their associated defaults in the project definition file.
Remove Replace
Rename Drawing Properties
Apply Project Defaults
Copy
Paste
Applies the copied drawing settings and options from one drawing to the selected drawing(s). Select the folder to copy the drawing to. (you must be logged into the vault) Adds a file to the vault and creates a version of the file. edits. Renames the selected drawing directly in the drawing list. Copies the drawing settings and options from one drawing to be applied to one or more drawing(s). and removes section and subsection coding for a drawing. When prompted. specify whether to apply the project default values to the drawing settings (in the WD_M block definition). the project definition file is forced to be checked in at the same time since it needs to be vaulted first to establish a location in the Vault database.Copy To
Copies the selected drawing into the same or another open project. Applies project settings to new drawing files where the project default settings for the drawing(s) were not applied at creation time. Removes the selected drawing from the current project.
Settings Compare
Check In
164 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. Replaces the selected drawing with one that you select from a file selection dialog box. NOTE Drawing-specific information (found on the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings tab) cannot be copied from one drawing to another.

Checks out the drawing files when the project file is under Vault control. and the name of the last user who modified the file. The drawing details are updated when you highlight a drawing file and remain visible until a new drawing file is selected. Displays the last saved thumbnail view for the highlighted drawing in the drawing list. (you must be logged into the vault) Removes the reservation/lock from the master drawing file. last saved date. Use the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard to switch drawings.
Undo Check Out
Get Latest
NOTE Two projects can reference the same drawing file. Any modifications made to the local copy are not checked back into the vault. Older files are indicated by the status indicator displaying a red background. if necessary. Information that is listed includes the status. file size. (you must be logged into the vault) Retrieves the latest master copy from the vault and copies it into your working folder.
Details
Switches between displaying drawing previews and drawing descriptions. file name.
Preview
Vault Status Icons
(you must be logged into the vault) The Vault Status Icons indicate the status of your local copy of the files as compared against the master copy of those same files in the vault. Retrieves an updated copy.
Overview of projects | 165
. however doing so can lead to conflicts if both projects try to modify the same drawing with a project-wide tagging or cross-referencing function.
Details Displays project and drawing detail based on what is highlighted in the Project pane.Check Out
(you must be logged into the vault) Reserves and locks the master drawing file. file location. The master file is now available for others to check out.

but the version you are working on is newer than the latest version in the vault. This typically means that your local file was changed without checking it out. Use Reload to update to the latest available version. but the version you are working on is older than the master file in the vault. and the version you are working on is the same as in the vault.
File is in the vault in a checked-in state. and checked it out to promote it to the latest. These icons are crucial to the overall understanding of how to work in a vaulted environment. and the version you are working on is the same as in the vault. but the version you are working on is newer than the master file in the vault. This typically means that you started with a version for the vault that was older than the latest. check out the file. Also referred to as the Latest Version. but the version you are working on is older than the latest version in the vault. File is checked out to another user. This typically means that another user made changes since your last update. This typically happens if the other user did not check changes back into the vault.The Vault Status indicate when the local copy is in sync with the master and when it is not.especially when the local copy is no longer in sync with the master.
166 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. File is in the vault in a checked-in state. If you want to save these changes. File is checked out to you. File is checked out to you. The tooltips help guide you to the next logical steps . The blank icon indicates that the master file is available for checkout. but have not checked it back in. Also referred to as the Latest Version. File is in the vault in a checked-in state.
Icon Meaning File is not in the vault. The master file is checked out to you and the version you are working on is the same as in the vault. and then select the Don't get local copy option. This typically means that you made changes to the model since the last time you checked out the file.

NOTE The . the project definition file is created at the WD. but kept the file checked out. the folder in which the project is maintained.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. and the version you are working on is newer than the file in the vault.
Overview of projects | 167
. NOTE You can also create a project by right-clicking at the bottom of the tree inside the Project Manager.ENV project location.
Location
Specifies the location for a project definition file and folder definition. Use Refresh from Vault to update to the latest available version. If left blank. Use Refresh from Vault to update to the latest available version. This typically happens if the user checked in changes to the vault.File is checked out to another user.
Name Specifies the name for the new project.
Create new project
Defines the minimum requirements to create an AutoCAD Electrical project definition file (WDP). and selecting New Project.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT Click the New Project button or select New Project from the Project Selection menu. and another user checked out this file. File is checked out to another user. Click Browse to pick a folder where the new project file/folder is created. Enter a name to define any of the project properties. but the version you are working on is older than the latest version in the vault. and the settings and options defined within the project.wdp extension is not required in the edit box.

Copy Active Project Copies the active project. You can select a previously defined project setting and apply it to your new project definition file.
Toolbar: Project Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Copy Project Command entry: AECOPYPROJECT NOTE If the active drawing is one of them to copy to a new project.NOTE You cannot have duplicate project names in the same location. Click Browse to select a previously defined project definition file to copy over and apply settings to the new project being created.
168 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. Specifies the project settings.
Create Folder with Project Name
Creates a folder with the same name as the project where the drawing files and project definition are stored.
Copy Settings from Project File
Descriptions
OK-Properties
Copy project: step 1 . cancel the dialog box. Descriptions can be included in report headers and title blocks Creates the project definition file in the specified location before opening the Project Properties dialog box where you can define default settings and options for your project which are saved in the project definition file. The folder is created following the path defined in the project location edit box. open a new drawing. Specifies the project descriptions.select existing project to copy
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Copy. and then restart the Copy Project command.

WDP) lists all the drawings that are part of a project. You can use the Project Manager to:
■
Check projects in and out of the vault The most basic requirement of the vault is that you never work directly on a file in the vault.Browse
Selects another project to copy. You can use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical for drawing management. Check out the project to the working folder on your local drive to edit it. The projects in the vault are the Masters and cannot be edited. version control. TIP Other people can view updates you made to a project while you continue modifying the project. The project file (. you are not logged into the vault. You must install Autodesk Vault to vault projects. Tooltips provide descriptions of the icons. several people can work on a project at the same time. Log into Autodesk Vault using the File ➤ Vault menu to vault projects. AutoCAD Vault ARX adds vaulting functionality to the Project Manager. The vault commands are available by right-clicking a project or drawing within the AutoCAD Electrical Project Manager. When edits are complete.
About collaborative design
In a collaborative design environment. The vault status icons indicate when the local copy is in sync with the master and when it is not. To maintain the relationship between the drawing files that are defined in the project file. Pause the
About collaborative design | 169
. and revision labeling. NOTE You must have all references of a project file downloaded to your working folder to edit the project file.
■
View the status of files in a design. When you finish working on the project. check out all files specified in a project file to modify one or more files. the project can be checked back into the vault. Vault status icons indicate the status of your local copy of the files as compared against the master copy of those same files in the vault. Upon initial start-up of AutoCAD Electrical. Select the Keep Checked Out option on the Check In dialog box. It checks in the updates you made to the project and keeps the project checked out to you. check the project back into the vault. Autodesk Vault prevents engineers from working on the original version of a project in the vault.

Each Vault user can optionally set a local working folder (physical location on disk) for the root of the vault or rely on the default one (C:\My Documents\Vault) provided by Vault. In addition. When you check out a project. The vault is referred to as the virtual location of the files. The working folder can be changed. Opening a project from the vault checks all files out to the working folder of the Vault user. that project is copied from the virtual location in the vault to the physical location in the working folder. When you are ready to check the project back in.cursor over a status icon to see a detailed description. Setting up a working folder creates a user-defined virtual-to-physical mapping that is maintained for as long as the user works with the vault. but the mapping itself cannot be removed. Each user must have a physical location on their disk mapped to the corresponding vault location. especially when the local copy is no longer in sync with the master. The vault database is also located on the server. The tooltips also help guide you to the next logical steps. The vault status icons are crucial to the overall understanding of how to work in a vaulted environment.
■
■
■
■
The essential rules to remember when working with AutoCAD Electrical Vault ARX are:
■
The projects in the vault are the masters. Users do not work directly on the master files. A file must be checked out from the virtual location in the vault to a physical location in the working folder before it can be modified. The database maintains the metadata for the files in the file store and the relationships between those files. the mapping tells the vault where to check the files in from. NOTE The vault status icons are only available in the list view and only appear when you are logged into the vault. you can open a file in a checked-in state as read only. It can be on the same or a different server from where the file store is located.
170 | Chapter 3 Project Management
.
Key Concepts
■
The master files are stored and maintained in the file store on the Vault server. A folder that has been mapped to the root folder ("$") in a vault is called a working folder.

close. or set the transparency for the Project Manager. NOTE You cannot have two projects open in the Project Manager with the same project name. You can dock the Project Manager into a specific location on the screen or hide it until you want to use the project tools. or set the transparency for the Project Manager. Once created. dock. dock. hide. reorder drawing files. set up a working folder on the disk. Right-click the properties icon to display options to move. and configures project-wide settings. close.
About collaborative design | 171
. the new project automatically becomes the active project. hide. size.
Right-click menu
You can right-click in empty space in the Project Manager to display the following options:
New Project Creates a project. size. Right-click the properties icon for options to move.■ ■
You can check a project or a single drawing out of the vault to modify it.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.
Project manager
Opens or creates a project of one or more drawings. To check out a project for editing.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT Lists the drawing files associated with each open project. and change project settings.
Refer to the Managing Your Data book for more information on AutoCAD Electrical Vault ARX. Add new drawings.

Open (Check Out All).env file with any generic text editor (such as Wordpad). or Open Read-only. Once created.env file.Open Project
Opens a different project from a file selection dialog box. navigate to the project to open and select it. (you must be logged into the vault) Allows you to browse to the vault to open a project and make it active inside of the Project Manager. navigate to the project to open and select it.
New Drawing
Project Selection menu
You can default to a predefined directory by adding an entry to your . n:/{your directory}/. Exit AutoCAD and open the . navigate to the project to open and select it. Opens a different project from a file selection dialog box. In the Select Project dialog box. Once created. Creates a project. AutoCAD Electrical default pick proj
Recent Opens a different project from a list of recent projects or from a file selection dialog box. Add this line: WD_PICKPRJDLG. the new project automatically becomes the active project. In the Select Project File dialog box.
New Project
Open Project
Open Project from Vault
Buttons
New Project Creates a project. In the Select Project File dialog box.
172 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. Click the arrow next to the Open button and select one of the following options: Open (Check Out). The new drawing displays at the bottom of the project drawing list for the active project. the new project automatically becomes the active project. Creates a drawing file and adds it to the active project.

Project Task List
Project-Wide Update/Retag
Updates the related line reference numbers. device tagging. Configures the display options. Files that are checked out to another user are updated to their current version. For Vault: Checks for changes in external file references and updates the Vault icons in the Project Manager. Files that have changed and are currently checked out to you are not updated. If the Vault version is newer. then the Vault icon indicates that the file needs reloading (the Vault icon turns red). Performs pending updates on any drawing files inside of the active project that have been modified.
Drawing List Display Configuration
Publish/Plot
About collaborative design | 173
.
Refresh
Refreshes the drawing list inside of the Project Manager. cross-reference text. There are ten values that can be associated with the drawings listed so you can display the information based on your requirements. Batch plots one or more drawings in the active project.New Drawing
Creates a drawing file and adds it to the active project. Files that are checked out to another user are updated to their current version on your local drive. and signal reference updates on the selected drawing files inside of the active project.

section. NOTE The drawing file is not deleted. On the Drawing List Report dialog box. You can have as many projects open as you need. When prompted.
Title Block Update
Drawing List Report
New Drawing Add Drawings
Add Active Drawing
Reorder Drawings
Remove Drawings
174 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. redisplay the previously run report or select a format . Automates updating title block information for the active drawing or for the entire project drawing set. Descriptions can then be included in report headers and title blocks. but only one project can be active at a time. The active project appears in bold text and is always found at the top of the list.set file to use for the report. The new drawing appears at the end of the project drawing list. select to run a new report. Creates a drawing file and adds it to the active project. Right-click the project name to display the following project editing options: Descriptions Edits the existing project descriptions. and file names. just the reference to the drawing.Projects
Displays all the open projects in a list. Moves drawings up or down in the project's drawing list. specify whether to apply the project default values to the drawing settings (in the WD_M block definition). Adds an active drawing to the active project. Displays unlimited lines describing the project. Generates a report that lists project drawing information from the title blocks such as drawing descriptions. The order determines how the drawings are processed for project-wide tagging and cross-referencing operations. Adds one or more drawings to the active project. specify whether to apply the project default values to the drawing settings (in the WD_M block definition). When prompted. Removes one or more drawings from the current project.

Task List
Performs pending updates on any drawing files inside of the active project that have been modified. Displays the project's settings and information about the AutoCAD Electrical environment. component crossreferencing options. Displays a list of drawing file(s) that have different settings from the project definition file (. You can then use the Settings Compare tool to display the differences. The status of the selected object determines which vault commands are available for selection. publish to DWF. publish to the Web. you must first activate another project in the list.wdp.
About collaborative design | 175
.WDP). the dialog box indicates that there are no exceptions. Check In All Adds the project definition file (. Controls project-wide settings including tagging.wdp) along with its drawing files to the vault. or create a zip file of the project. This also sends the project list to the top of the dialog box. and catalog lookup file preferences. Makes an open project the active project in the AutoCAD Electrical session. Closes an open project. If all drawing files match the . Launches dialog boxes to plot the project. You can vault just the project file using the Project Check In command or you can vault the project file along with its drawing files using the project Check In All command. NOTE You cannot close the active project.
Publish
Settings
Exception List
Properties
Activate
Close
Vault
You must be logged into the vault to see this menu in the Project Manager.

Removes the reservation/lock from the master project definition file.wdl and .wdt) appear in the Vault Check In dialog box if they share the same file name as the project. NOTE Files used to support the project (such as . Adds the project definition file to the vault and creates a version of the file. Use this if you want to check in only the project definition file and none of its drawing file dependencies. If the project definition file is unavailable for checkout.
Undo Check Out/Undo Check Out All
176 | Chapter 3 Project Management
.
Check Out All
Reserves and locks the project definition file along with the associated drawing files listed in the Project Manager.NOTE Files used to support the project (such as . if necessary.wdl and . otherwise use Check In All. otherwise use Check Out All.wdt) appear in the Vault Check In All dialog box if they share the same file name as the project. The master file is now available for others to check out. Any modifications made to the local copy are not checked back into the vault.
Check In
Check Out
Reserves and locks the master project definition file. Use this if you want to check out only the project definition file and none of its drawing file dependencies. Retrieves an updated copy. you can still check out the drawings available for editing.

By default. Indicates that the file is a drawing file.Undo Check Out All removes the lock from all of the checked out drawing files and project definition file listed inside of the Project Manager for the selected project. You can also double-click a drawing name or select a drawing name and press Enter to open the drawing. You can select multiple drawings from the project list to open. Get Latest/Get Latest All Retrieves the latest master copy from the vault and copies it into your working folder.
Indicates that a drawing file is a reference drawing. right-click on the drawing name and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. Closes the selected drawing. or paste properties all at once. You can turn this off by clicking the Drawing List Display Configuration button and selecting Show selection highlight only when active. You cannot select multiple drawings from two or more projects.
Close
About collaborative design | 177
. Older files are indicated by the status indicator displaying a red background.
Project Drawing List
Displays the drawings associated with a project. the selected drawing highlights in the project drawing list regardless if the Project Manager is active or not. The active drawing appears in bold text in the list. apply project defaults.
Right-click the drawing name to display the following drawing editing options: Open Opens the selected drawing in a new window. close. To make a drawing a reference drawing. remove.

edits. the project definition file is forced to be checked in at the same time since it needs to be vaulted first to establish a location in the Vault database. specify whether to apply the project default values to the drawing settings (in the WD_M block definition). Select the folder to copy the drawing to. Assigns. enter a new file name and select the project to save the drawing to.
Settings Compare
Check In
178 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. Removes the selected drawing from the current project. and removes section and subsection coding for a drawing. When prompted. Applies project settings to new drawing files where the project default settings for the drawing(s) were not applied at creation time.Copy To
Copies the selected drawing into the same or another open project. Renames the selected drawing directly in the drawing list. (you must be logged into the vault) Adds a file to the vault and creates a version of the file. Replaces the selected drawing with one that you select from a file selection dialog box. Displays differences between all drawing settings and their associated defaults in the project definition file. Copies the drawing settings and options from one drawing to be applied to one or more drawing(s).
Remove Replace
Rename Drawing Properties
Apply Project Defaults
Copy
Paste
Applies the copied drawing settings and options from one drawing to the selected drawing(s). For a first time check in of a drawing file. NOTE Drawing-specific information (found on the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings tab) cannot be copied from one drawing to another. Assigns drawing descriptions to the drawing files.

Information that is listed includes the status. last saved date. The master file is now available for others to check out. Displays the last saved thumbnail view for the highlighted drawing in the drawing list. and the name of the last user who modified the file.
Details Displays project and drawing detail based on what is highlighted in the Project pane. file name. Use the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard to switch drawings.
Undo Check Out
Get Latest
NOTE Two projects can reference the same drawing file. (you must be logged into the vault) Removes the reservation/lock from the master drawing file.
About collaborative design | 179
. file size.
Preview
Vault Status Icons
(you must be logged into the vault) The Vault Status Icons indicate the status of your local copy of the files as compared against the master copy of those same files in the vault. (you must be logged into the vault) Retrieves the latest master copy from the vault and copies it into your working folder. if necessary. however doing so can lead to conflicts if both projects try to modify the same drawing with a project-wide tagging or cross-referencing function. Checks out the drawing files when the project file is under Vault control.
Details
Switches between displaying drawing previews and drawing descriptions. Retrieves an updated copy. file location. Any modifications made to the local copy are not checked back into the vault. The drawing details are updated when you highlight a drawing file and remain visible until a new drawing file is selected.Check Out
(you must be logged into the vault) Reserves and locks the master drawing file. Older files are indicated by the status indicator displaying a red background.

and checked it out to promote it to the latest. Also referred to as the Latest Version. and the version you are working on is the same as in the vault. This typically means that another user made changes since your last update.
Icon Meaning File is not in the vault. and then select the Don't get local copy option. If you want to save these changes. but the version you are working on is older than the master file in the vault. This typically means that you made changes to the model since the last time you checked out the file. File is checked out to you. and the version you are working on is the same as in the vault. Use Reload to update to the latest available version. File is in the vault in a checked-in state. Also referred to as the Latest Version. but the version you are working on is newer than the master file in the vault. but have not checked it back in. This typically means that your local file was changed without checking it out. This typically means that you started with a version for the vault that was older than the latest. These icons are crucial to the overall understanding of how to work in a vaulted environment. File is checked out to another user. This typically happens if the other user did not check changes back into the vault. The master file is checked out to you and the version you are working on is the same as in the vault. The blank icon indicates that the master file is available for checkout. The tooltips help guide you to the next logical steps . but the version you are working on is newer than the latest version in the vault. check out the file. but the version you are working on is older than the latest version in the vault.The Vault Status indicate when the local copy is in sync with the master and when it is not. File is checked out to you.especially when the local copy is no longer in sync with the master. File is in the vault in a checked-in state.
File is in the vault in a checked-in state.
180 | Chapter 3 Project Management
.

The . Click Browse to select a template drawing or enter the path and name of a template in the box.dwg extension is automatically added to the file name. This typically happens if the user checked in changes to the vault.
Create a drawing
Create a drawing
Use the Project Manager to create a drawing. and drawing list reports.DWT file is used. enter the name for the new drawing. 5 Select or create the directory where you want to save the drawing. but the version you are working on is older than the latest version in the vault. You can enter up to three description lines for the drawing file.
2
In the Project Manager. 6 (Optional) Enter descriptions for the drawing. click the New Drawing tool. custom drawing properties. Use Refresh from Vault to update to the latest available version. The description displays in title block updates. NOTE You can also create a drawing by right-clicking at the bottom of the tree inside the Project Manager and selecting New Drawing or by right-clicking on the active project name and selecting New Drawing. If left blank. 4 Specify the template drawing to use for the creation of the drawing file. and another user checked out this file.File is checked out to another user.
3 In the Create New Drawing dialog box. the default ACAD. and the version you are working on is newer than the file in the vault.
Create a drawing | 181
. but kept the file checked out. Use Refresh from Vault to update to the latest available version. File is checked out to another user. Select from a list of predefined descriptions from the active project by clicking the arrow.
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.

Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. NOTE You can also create a drawing by right-clicking at the bottom of the tree inside the Project Manager and selecting New Drawing or by right-clicking on the active project name and selecting New Drawing. click the New Drawing button. 9 (Optional) Click OK-Properties to define settings and options for your drawing. Enter a file name to define any of the drawing properties or to create a drawing. 8 (Optional) Specify the sheet and drawing number value for the WD_M block definition.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT
On the Project Manager. NOTE The . installation. Additionally. Changes you make through the Drawing Properties dialog box are saved as attribute values on the invisible WD_M block of the drawing.
Create new drawing
Creates a drawing file to add to the active project.
Drawing File
Name Specifies the file name for the new drawing. and location fields.dwg extension is not required in the edit box. you can specify the values to use for a section or subsection.7 (Optional) Specify the IEC default values for the project. 10 Click OK.
182 | Chapter 3 Project Management
.

the default ACAD.Template
Specifies the path and filename for an AutoCAD Electrical template drawing (. Click Browse to select a template drawing or type in the path and name of a template. Specifies the location for a drawing file. Installation (%I). and Location (%L) fields. The description displays in title block updates and custom drawing properties.
For Reference Only
Indicates that the drawing should not be included in tagging. cross-referencing. If selected. and reporting functions. the drawing is included in projectwide plotting and title block operations. Click Browse to pick a folder where the new drawing is created.
Location
Description 1-3
Specifies up to three lines of description text for the drawing file. NOTE The previously used drawing template is retained in the dialog box. You can override the default location for the drawing file and create additional folders. When you insert a component. the %I and %L
Create a drawing | 183
. NOTE Drawing descriptions are disabled when you are modifying the properties of a drawing that is not in a project or if the project file is unavailable for edit.
IEC-Style Designators
Specifies IEC default values for the drawing. the drawing file is created at the same location as the definition file of the active project. such as Project (%P).dwt) to use for the creation of a new drawing file. If left blank. Select from a list of predefined descriptions from the active project by clicking the arrow.DWT file is used. NOTE You cannot have duplicate drawings in the same location. If left blank.

This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %S. and cross-reference tagging use replaceable parameters in their format.
Installation Code
Location Code
Drawing
Project
Sheet Values
Component.LOC file.
Project Code Specifies a project code for the drawing settings on all WD_M blocks.INST or Default. If you reference the sheet number or drawing number in any of your tagging formats. Specifies the section value for the drawing file saved in the project definition file (. Displays a list of previously defined Installation or Location codes to select from the active project or from the Default. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %I.
Drawing
Section
184 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. then specify a default drawing-wide value to use.wdp). Specifies the Location code for the WD_M block definition. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %L.default values are used if the Installation and/or Location values would normally be blank. Displays a list of Installation or Location codes to select from the active drawing.
Sheet Specifies the sheet number value for the drawing settings. wire. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %A. Specifies the drawing number value for the drawing settings. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %D. Specifies the Installation code for the WD_M block definition. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %P.

If your current drawing does not have this required block present when any AutoCAD Electrical schematic command is invoked.Sub-Section
Specifies the subsection value for the drawing file saved in the project definition file (. By default drawings are identified by the drawing file name in the Project Drawing List. click the Drawing List Display Configuration tool.0.
Change drawing display options
Change drawing display options
You can use the Drawing List Display Configuration tool to change the way your drawings are listed in the Project Manager.
OK-Properties
Creates the drawing file in the specified location before opening the Drawing Properties dialog box where you can define settings and options for your drawing. Changes you make through this dialog box are saved as attribute values on the invisible WD_M block of the drawing. Options include:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Installation Code (%I) Location Code (%L) Section Sub Section Sheet Number (%S)
Change drawing display options | 185
.
3 Determine which display options to show in the drawing list.wdp). This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %B.
2
On the Project Manager.
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. AutoCAD Electrical automatically inserts this block at 0.

To rearrange this list. The Project Drawing List automatically updates in the Project Manager. You can display the information based on your requirements.3-phase motor control. I/O list 2 .
Drawing List Display Example
In this example.Flow and Interconnection diagram. The display option you selected moves to the Current Display Order list. select an option and click Move Up or Move Down.
186 | Chapter 3 Project Management
.
Drawing List Before demo01. To remove an option from the list.■ ■ ■
Drawing Number (%D) Drawing Description 1-3 File Name
4 Select the display option from the Display Options list and click the >> button or add all of the options by clicking the All >> button. I/O module feeds
Drawing list display configuration
Configures the display options. you can select to highlight your selection only when the Project Manager drawing list is active. The default separator value is a dash (-). Control circuit 3 . By default the drawing file you select in the drawing list is highlighted at all times.dwg Drawing List After 1 .dwg demo02. 6 (Optional) Change the way the selection highlights in the listing depending on whether the Project Manager is active or not. 5 (Optional) Change the character to use between the values in the listing. There are ten values that can be associated with a drawing listed. Sheet Number (%S) and Drawing Description 1 were selected as the display options and the separator value is a dash. 7 Click OK. select the option and click the << button.dwg demo03.Power supplies.

click the Drawing List Display Configuration tool. By default the drawing file you select in the drawing list is highlighted at all times. You must have one entry specified. select the option and click the << button. select the display option from the Display Options list and click the >> button or add all of the options by clicking the All >> button. Changes the way the selection highlights in the listing depending on whether the Project Manager is active or not. To remove an option from the list. you can select to only highlight your selection when the Project Manager drawing list is active.Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. Type the character in the input box or use the default (-). Lists the values to display in the listing.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT On the Project Manager.
Current Display Order
Separator Value
Always show selection highlight/Show selection highlight only when active
Move Up
Change drawing display options | 187
. Moves the selected display option up one spot in the Current Display Order list. To add an option to the list. Specifies which character to use between the values in the listing. Moves the selected display option into or from the Current Display Order.
Display Options Arrow keys
Lists the values that you can associate to a drawing.

Overview of project-related files
There are some optional project-related files that AutoCAD Electrical supports.WDD in the various AutoCAD Electrical search paths and AutoCAD support paths (subdirectory search sequence “A” below).MDB (default catalog lookup file).wdd extension (<project>.MDB is searched for in the same folder as the active project file. It is an Access-format MDB file that is named <project>_cat. This file can be a family-specific ASCII text file with a .wdd extension (for example.wdd description file. it prompts for browsing to a . then the DEFAULT_CAT. If neither a family-specific or project-specific file is found. These files provide various functions such as keeping a project consistent. it defaults to searching for a general description file WD_DESC. it needs to be in the same folder where the <project>. "PB. then it searches for a file with the same path and name as the active project with a . or providing custom settings for various tools such as the PLC I/O module insertion tool.WDD" for family “PB” push buttons).wdd). Lists various standard component description selections.Move Down
Moves the selected display option down one spot in the Current Display Order list. If the project-specific . helping update custom title blocks across a project. Optional AutoCAD Electrical project-related files include:
Catalog lookup Database for choosing catalog part number assignments. It is also referenced when automatically generating various bill of materials reports.mdb (project-specific version of a catalog lookup file) or DEFAULT_CAT. If a project-specific version is not found. If none are found.mdb file is used.Component Insert/Edit dialog boxes.wdp file is located. If the family-specific file is not found. accessible by clicking Defaults on the Insert/Edit Component and Panel Layout .
Description defaults
188 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. and then in the paths defined in subdirectory search sequence "C" below.

”
Family tag code map
Overview of project-related files | 189
.wdx extension. On subsequent command invocations. the contents of the file display in a dialog box so you can select a line of data.txt. up to a “. When accessed." The file WD_FAM.wdx extension.When you click Defaults on the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout . The selected text. The tag code of a symbol is used in generating the tag-ID of inserted components. The elements in the selected line of file data can be mapped to the edited schematic or footprint symbol's attributes such as tag. like the "PB" of tag-ID "PB101" or the "K" of tag-ID "-K25. This text file can have a . <new>. For example. it is interpreted as having line breaks so the 2nd and 3rd description lines fill in as well. The data in this file can be comma-delimited or space-delimited and can be in any order. This is an ASCII text file in the format of <old>. AutoCAD Electrical defaults to the previously selected file name. add this line to the wd_fam. External component Component tagging pick list data carried in an external text file. Overrides the family tag code of the library symbols by mapping the codes to new values. description. It is broken down and displays in a dialog box for mapping to various attributes carried by the schematic component or panel footprint symbol being edited.Component Insert/Edit dialog box the contents of the ASCII text file display in a dialog box where you can select a line of text to use as the description text. AutoCAD Electrical searches for a file with the same path and name as the project’s .” comment delimiter if any. then displays in the description edit box on the Insert/Edit dialog box. and catalog part number. location.csv or . If you do not browse to and select a specific file.” To override this tag code and substitute a family code of “LITE” without editing the library symbols.DAT is searched for in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below. . accessed when you click External List on the Insert/Edit dialog box for schematic or panel layouts.dat: “LT. If the selected text has one or more “|” characters. the default family tag code for a JIC library pilot light is “LT” and generates tags such as “LT101.wdp file but with a . LITE.

If the file is not found. then the default FOOTPRINT_LOOKUP. A file with the same path and name as the project but with a “_FOOTPRINT_LOOKUP.Footprint lookup
Database for graphical footprint assignments based on the catalog part number assignments. If the file is not found. then the default SCHEMATIC_LOOKUP. A file with the same path and name as the project with an .MDB file is searched for in the same directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory search sequence "B" below.INST file is searched for in the same directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below.Component Insert/Edit dialog boxes (select Include external list from the location's Project list subdialog box).MDB file is searched for in the same directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory search sequence "B" below. A file with the same path and name as the project but with a “_SCHEMATIC_LOOKUP.inst extension is searched for first. then the DEFAULT.Component Insert/Edit dialog box (select
Schematic lookup
Installation codes
Location codes
Group codes
190 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. A file with the same path and name as the project with a . Database for schematic components inserted from panel footprints.MDB” suffix and extension is searched for first. If the file is not found. Lists the default location codes for selections found in the Insert/Edit Component and Panel Layout .MDB” suffix and extension is searched for first.Component Insert/Edit dialog boxes (select Include external list from the installation's Project list subdialog box). Lists the default installation codes for selections found in the Insert/Edit Component and Panel Layout . Lists the default group codes for selections found in the Panel Layout . If the file is not found.loc extension is searched for first. then the DEFAULT.LOC file is searched for in the same directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below.

grp extension is searched for first. If the file is not found. PS.GRP file is searched for in the same directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below.WDR for pressure switches).Component Insert/Edit dialog boxes. For example. then the DEFAULT. Mount codes Lists the default mount codes for selections found in the Panel Layout . If the file is not found. picking an entry "30A|60A" would put "30A" into the first RATINGx attribute and "60A" into the RATING(x+1) attribute. The "|" character can be used to delimit consecutive RATINGx value assignments. A file with the same path and name as the project with a . A file with the same path and name as the project but with a .Include external list from the location's Project list subdialog box).wdl extension is searched for first. Alternately.Component Insert/Edit dialog boxes (select Include external list from the location's Project list subdialog box).wdr extension is searched for first.mnt extension is searched for first.MNT file is searched for in the same directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below.WDL file is searched for in the same directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below. then the default WD_RATINGS. A file with the same path and name as the project with a . then the DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDR file is searched for in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below.
Project labels
Rating defaults
Overview of project-related files | 191
. If the file is not found. A file with the same path and name as the project with a . Customizes the generic LINEx labels in the various title block and project information dialog boxes. The contents of this ASCII text file display in a dialog box. a family-specific file can be accessed (for example. Lists the default rating values found in the Insert/Edit Component and Panel Layout . then the DEFAULT. If the file is not found.

WDF file is searched for in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below and. The default settings file is DEMOPLC. then the file DEFAULT_RSLOGIX. PE.WDN file in the project folder: Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Proj\ Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Proj The default . A file with the same path and name as the project but with a .wdn is not found. then the DEFAULT. If the file is not found. then the
Spreadsheet to PLC tool
Title block
192 | Chapter 3 Project Management
.wdf extension is searched for first.WDI. such as WordPad.wdn file contains the terminal number filers GND.wdn file is a text file used specifically for auditing. and E. Edit this file with an ASCII text editor. If <project_name>. You can use wildcards to exclude a range of terminals for duplication checking such as all terminals with a tag name starting with "T" and with terminal number "1. A file with the same path and name as the project but with a .WDT file is searched for in the same directory as the project file.wdn file are not checked for terminal number duplication.wdp).Real time error checking
The .wdn file in the same folder as the project definition file (.wdi extension. If the file is not found. file _DEFAULT_RSLOGIX. Defines the settings for the AutoCAD Electrical Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility. Terminal numbers listed in the . The attribute name mapping support file for the AutoCAD Electrical title block update tool. if not found.WDF is then searched for. You are prompted to browse to a file with a . If the file is not found.wdt extension is searched for first." AutoCAD Electrical searches for the <project_name>. AutoCAD Electrical looks for the DEFAULT. They are ignored when checking for duplication and are not listed in the Electrical Audit report.
RSLogix import
Defines the optional mapping of RSLogix codes to AutoCAD Electrical symbol block names for an RSLogix file import.

Wire color and gauge labels
Subdirectory search sequence "A"
1 Full path (if full path name given) 2 User subdirectory Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\User\ Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\User\ 3 Active project's .file is searched for in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below. If the file is not found.WDW file is searched for in the same directory as the project file. The DEFAULT.WDA file is saved in the base project folder. If the file is not found. Maps color and gauge wire descriptions based on wire layers.wdp).wdp file subdirectory 4 AutoCAD Electrical support Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\AeData\
Overview of project-related files | 193
. A file with the same path and name as the project but with a . then the DEFAULT. User defined attributes An attribute text file of user-defined attributes defined on AutoCAD Electrical blocks.wdw extension is searched for first. The list file name can be the same as the active project or named Default to be used by the entire system. then the file is searched for in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below. while the <project_name>.wda file is saved in the same folder as the project definition file (. The User Defined Attribute List is used by report tools to determine which additional attributes are listed in a report.

This current project "copy" of the drawing properties settings can migrate to each new AutoCAD Electrical drawing.the settings of the drawing are set to match the "?[n]" settings listed in the . check this switch on. If multiple paths. It eliminates the need to go back into the properties of a new drawing and adjust the wire tagging format setting to match the project. Here is a general breakdown of the . you have an active project that is set up for a one-of-a-kind wire tagging format that is different from all your other projects. It overwrites the defaults carried on the WD_M. It is also different from the default carried on the WD_M.dwg library symbol.Overview of the project file format
A “. ON . Many of these values are mirrored on attributes carried by the invisible WD_M block of each drawing.wdp file of the current project. AutoCAD Electrical manages this file automatically. the search for a given library symbol file name includes the sequence of the paths listed here in the order given. For example.wdp" project file is a text file that lists the drawing files to treat as a multi-drawing wiring diagram. The check box controls the drawing settings: OFF .dwg block insert of the symbol library. When you start a new drawing for the project. The special settings of your active project update the values on the inserted WD_M block insert and cause it to match the special settings of the project.dwg library symbol as it inserts. The WD_M block alert box displays for permission to insert into a new or non-AutoCAD Electrical drawing. Default schematic library path Marked with "+[1]" in columns 1-4 followed by path or semicolon delimited paths.wdp file format:
Project description All lines of text marked with "*[n]" in columns 1-4 followed by the line of project data (n=1 to xxx) Entries marked with "?[n]" in columns 1-4.the settings of the drawing are the defaults carried on the WD_M.
Project default settings
Overview of the project file format | 197
.

0 or entry omitted = use component-specific only. 2= use MISC_CAT if component-specific table not found. It can be a full path or just the icon menu file name itself (such as ACE_JIC_MENU. Marked with "+[6]" followed by 1=always use MISC_CAT for catalog lookup.
Default panel library path
Panel icon menu file
Cross-Reference Options
Use MISC_CAT table
LINEx entries for reports
Combined Installation/Location/Tag
Marked with "+[10]" followed by 0= Combined Installation/Location component tag mode is “off”. Marked with "+[13]" followed by 0 or missing= wire tagging normal mode (wires combined into one wire number as-
DESC case mode
Wire network mode
198 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. Marked with "+[3]" in columns 1-4 followed by base panel library path or semicolon delimited base paths. Marked with "+[5]" followed by 1’s bit set = automatic/realtime cross-referencing mode is “on”. If multiple paths. 3= mode is “on” and include Installation/Location as a tag prefix. 1= mode is “on”. It can be a full path or just the icon menu file name itself (such as ACE_PANEL_MENU. the search for a given footprint library symbol includes the sequence of paths listed here in the order given. missing or 1= force all entered DESC1-DESC3 values to uppercase. 2’s bit set = peer to peer cross-referencing mode is “on”.DAT). Marked with "+[9]" followed by comma-delimited list. 0 or entry omitted = all options are off. Marked with "+[4]" in columns 1-4 followed by file. Gives a list of project properties ➤ description entries that are included as a header for generated reports.Schematic icon menu file
Marked with "+[2]" in columns 1-4 followed by file. Marked with "+[11]" followed by 0= allow entered DESC1DESC3 to be upper/lower case.DAT). 4’s bit set = Suppress Installation/Location codes when match the drawing defaults mode is “on”.DAT or ACE_IEC_MENU.

value= offset from left or upper end of wire segment.env file does not exist or cannot be found. If this alternative . 0 or blank or missing= normal centering of wire numbers on the wire segment. IEC style Installation/Location tag Marked with "+[14]" followed by 0 or missing= add prefix to TAG when output to reports. Marked with "+[15]" followed by 1= component insert to auto-fill Installation/Location attributes with drawing defaults. Marked with "+[20]" followed by the file name. meaning annotation ends up formatted into an Mtext entity. and "+[22]" holds the layer
Auto-fill Installation/Location
Schematic. 1=suppress adding the prefix to TAG for reports. 3=suppress Installation/Location tag prefix when match drawing-wide Installation/Location default values for reports. the default wd.env file is used. 1=per wire basis mode (each connected wire gets its own wire number assignment).➤ Panel wire format
Auto-hide wire number
Wire number offset
Alternate WD. and "+[17]" for format of data written onto target TERMxx/WIRENOxx attributes carried on the panel wiring diagram device footprint.ENV
Wire number by layer
Overview of the project file format | 199
. Marked with "+[18]" followed by 1= auto-hide a wire number on a wire network when a wire number terminal is present on the network (so that the same wire number does not display twice on the single wire network). This option is only used when +[10] above is set to 1 or 3. 0= normal mode (do not hide any wire number text). Marked with "+[21]" followed by 0= wire number by layer mode is “off”. 0 or missing= normal mode (do not auto-fill attribute values). 1= mode is “on”.signment). Marked with "+[19]" followed by wire number offset value. Marked with "+[16]" for the format that is to deal with wire connection entries when there is no existing terminal pin number text on the panel wiring diagram device footprint.

Marked with "+[34]" to suppress the dash (-) if it is the first character of a tag when the Combined installation/location component tag mode is “on.0) to aid in the calculation of the "CLEN" column (calculated wire length) in a from/to report that is able to map schematic wire connections to panel physical layouts.. <layer name>.
Exclude wire number range
Wire number terminal override
Calculation of the "CLEN" column
Tag/Wire number order
Real-time error checking
Grid column headers
Suppress dash
200 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. Format of layer setup is semicolon delimited in repeating groups of four elements per layer definition.” See the [+10} entry. “100199. This value is the extra amount to add to each end of a calculated wire segment for connection purposes.<starting wire number>.<suffix list>. Marked with "+[31]" and set in the Project Properties dialog box.. The value can be blank (no sort order override) or 07 for the various horizontal/vertical sort orders listed in the dialog box.500-699.” Marked with "+[29]" followed by 0= normal wire numbering mode or 1=calculate reference-based wire number based on the location not the first terminal in the wire network (or revert to normal wire numbering mode if no terminal in the network).” Marked with "+[33]" to indicate a string of column names used in grid column headers in the Wire Type commands. Marked with "+[30]" and set as a global variable (default is 0.setup. Alternate catalog lookup Marked with "+[23]" followed by 0= alternate catalog file not defined. (blank or missing= no wire numbers excluded) For example. Marked with "+[32]" followed by 0= real-time error checking mode is “off”. 1= mode is “on. Marked with "+[27]" followed by the wire number ranges to exclude for sequential wire numbering.<tag format>.. 1=defined and "+[24]" holds the alternate catalog lookup file name.

this information follows the drawing name in subsequent lines.
Overview of the project file format | 201
. Circuit Builder searches for a table using the following sequence:
Item number mode
Item assignment
Electrical code standard
1 Tables with the three character Electrical code standard suffix. Additionally Project scratch database (+[12]) was replaced by the PDS. If one to three lines of description are defined. The drawing name is given first. If special "sec/sub" groupings are defined. Marked with "+[38]" followed by the three character suffix which defines the Electrical Code Standard used by Circuit Builder when searching for a specific table in ace_electrical_standards.
Project drawing list
All remaining entries give the relative path (relative to the location of the . 2 Tables without a suffix.Panel wire annotation delimiter
Marked with "+[35]" to indicate the delimiter character used to separate multiple panel wire annotation values for the same wire connection. if special assignments or descriptions are defined for the drawing. Marked with "+[36]" followed by 1= item assignments per drawing.mdb on page 1949. Then. each is preceded by a "===" entry. 0 or missing= item assignments project wide. then a drawing's "sec" is preceded by a "=" entry and "sub" by a "==" entry. Each line is prefixed with a code.
NOTE The following options are no longer valid since they are now drawing settings: Cross-reference fill format (+[7]). If a drawing is marked "Ref only". Cross-reference text between (+[8]) and Cross-reference order (+[28]). Marked with "+[37]" followed by 1= allow item assignment for each part number.wdp file of the project) to each drawing that is part of the project. 0 or missing= allow item assignment for component only. it is preceded by a "====REF" entry. 3 Tables with an “NEC” suffix.

NOTE All drawings to be included in the zipped file must be closed before running the zip utility.
This utility can also be accessed from within some AutoCAD Electrical routines that access and modify multiple drawings. 2 Create an entry for the utility labeled WD_ZIP followed by a comma and then the full path name to the executable zip program.wdp file and one or more drawing files it references. 2 Select the drawings to process and click OK. enter the zip name of the file to create or update. The zip file can optionally include a copy of the temporary database file of the project to eliminate the need to rebuild the database when the project is unzipped at a later date.
Project zip
Zips the drawing list in the current project with your zipping program.
202 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. a zip application must be installed on the system running AutoCAD Electrical. For the zip utility to function.Archive a project
The zip utility creates a zip file of the current project's . 4 Indicate whether to include the project database.c:\Program Files [(x86)]\winzip\winzip32. Initial Configuration 1 Edit the . 5 Click OK.
Archive a drawing set
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Zip.exe.env file to point to the zip utility. 3 In the AutoCAD Electrical Project Zip dialog box. This utility can also be accessed from within some AutoCAD Electrical routines that access and modify multiple drawings. For example. WD_ZIP.

the utility can be accessed from within some AutoCAD Electrical routines that access and modify multiple drawings. If you want to update a file. Your zip program may generate an error message if the active drawing is one of the drawings to zip. 2 Find and select the . Specifies to include the project database file (.mdb) in the zip file. Menu: Projects ➤ Zip Project Command entry: AEZIPPROJECT Select the projects to zip and click OK.Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Zip. browse to the zip file.
Enter zip file name to create/update Lists the name and location for the zip file to create. .
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Delete.
Include project database file
Delete a project
Deleting a project and any of the drawings is permanent and cannot be undone. Select to delete:
■ ■ ■
Project definition file.wdp All project drawings Specific drawings from a list of project drawings
Deleting a project
Deletes a project and provides the option to also delete the drawing files in the project.
Delete a project | 203
.wdp project definition file. Additionally. 3 Click Open.

deletes the selected .wdt in the base subdirectory of the client. For example. parts libraries. Client-specific drawing borders.deletes all files listed in the project definition file unless the List option is used.
Client subdirectory structure
Set up a subdirectory structure where each client is assigned their own subdirectory.wdp).nap\ n:\j-m\ n:\jeep_toledo\
Set up title block mapping files for clients
Use the AutoCAD Electrical Title block setup tool to create a default. List .
204 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. it might look like the following example: n:\campbell. Only available if the drawing files option is selected. and part number lookup files can be set up to be automatically selected by AutoCAD Electrical when working on the project of a specific client.
■
Work with Multiple Clients
Overview of setup for multiple clients
You can set up AutoCAD Electrical to deal with multiple clients. each with its own title block and library requirements.wdt One way to do it: 1 Use AutoCAD Electrical to create a project in the base subdirectory of the client (for example: n:\campbell. Store this default. title blocks.nap\default.wdp file.select specific drawings to delete from the project drawing list.wdt file for the title block of each client.4 Select from the available options:
■ ■
Delete “wdp” project list file . For example: n:\campbell.nap\dummy. Delete project’s AutoCAD drawing files .

4 In the Title block link method dialog box.wdl in the subdirectory of the client where you store the project (. You can change these labels so that they match up with the actual link to the title block of the client.
Specify client-specific library symbols
If the client has special symbols or text size settings that are different from the default libraries provided with the AutoCAD Electrical product.
Overview of setup for multiple clients | 205
. Try updating the Title Block from the Project Manager. set the AutoCAD Electrical Symbol Library path to point at the library of the client. The file should contain one line per label in the format LINEx=label. and so on. The entries do not have to be in order and line numbers may be skipped. 2 Edit the file as necessary.wdt" mapping file. When you start a new project for this client. Notice all of the updated labels. What you want to see when AutoCAD Electrical displays a title block-related dialog box is not "LINE10" but "Drawn by. Use any generic text editor like the Windows Notepad or Wordpad.2 Open the drawing border drawing or any existing drawing that contains the title block of the client (block with attributes). "LINE2". create and maintain a client-specific symbol library subdirectory with smart AutoCAD Electrical symbols that have been adjusted to meet that standards of the client.WDT file for any project found in subdirectory n:\campbell.
Customize labels for title blocks
Several title block-related dialog boxes in AutoCAD Electrical display generic labels like "LINE1". select the middle option listed under "Method 1" -. 5 Click OK. in the ".
3 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Title Block Setup. 6 Follow the dialog boxes and pick options to build the default.the DEFAULT. For example.wdp) files. you might have linked the AutoCAD Electrical data "LINE10" value to the "DRAWN_BY" attribute on the title block of the client. 3 Save and exit.wdt file." 1 Create a file called default_wdtitle.nap.

wdp" stored in the n:\campbell. The actual drawings for the project can be stored anywhere but you might want to store them in a "job number" subdirectory under the base client subdirectory.nap network drive subdirectory.nap\default. It causes AutoCAD Electrical to look in the client-specific symbol library first before going to a default AutoCAD Electrical symbol library.1 In the Project Manager. For example. for client "Campbell" you have a new project. Click Add and enter the path of the library into the edit box. 3 Click OK.wdt and wdtitle. AutoCAD Electrical automatically uses the client-specific title block mapping file (n:\campbell. anytime you work on a Campbell project (project file ". Make it the first or only path listed.wdp (along with any other Campbell projects that were already created). It is where to save the drawings for that project.
Start a project for a client
1 Create and save the AutoCAD Electrical project . create subdirectory n:\campbell.nap\12345.wdp file to the base subdirectory of the client where the default.wdl files are stored.nap\wdtitle. Make sure that the new project also points at the symbol library of the client.nap\P12345. 2 In the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box. Under the N:\campbell. For example.wdt) and the client-specific dialog box label file (n:\campbell. 12345.wdl). click the plus sign (+) next to Schematic Libraries. right-click the project name. NOTE Make sure you also update the Panel Footprint Library path.nap directory). but their drawing sets are isolated into unique job number subdirectories).
206 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. They are all grouped in this base subdirectory. 2 Create a project and save it to the base subdirectory. With the previous setup.wdp and save it to n:\campbell. create project P12345. and select Properties.

Freshen parent/child cross-reference annotation Remove any leading dash character from component tags
Indicates whether any leading "-" characters for component tags are suppressed (box checked) or added (box unchecked). click the Project Task List tool or right-click the project name and select Task List. the active drawing only.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.
Task list
Task list
Change the drawing files that were accumulated while drawing files were unavailable for editing. select Update: Select from list of drawings and click OK. It is controlled from the Project Properties ➤ Components dialog box. On the Update from dialog box.
Force Installation and Location attributes to be visible or invisible
Switches the visibility of Installation and Location attributes on each component.If a change to the IEC component tag mode format is detected. use this tool to freshen the tag format.
Freshen tags for Specifies whether to freshen the entire project. Reruns the cross-reference update. or selected components in the active drawing.
208 | Chapter 3 Project Management
.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT
On the Project Manager. It makes sure that component tags are displayed per the change.

the fields needed for the catalog lookup function). component tag. file name. Selects all of the tasks in the list.The tasks that still need to be performed on the selected drawings are listed in the upper portion of the dialog box.
Sort Sorts the list of tasks to be performed. The 'x' indicates that the source of the change no longer matches the task list. type. all of the pending tasks are performed on the selected drawings. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list. Specifies the name of new table to add to the selected catalog database. The new. attribute. Menu: Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Add Table To Catalog Database Command entry: AEADDCATALOGTABLE
MDB file to modify Specifies the file name of the Catalog Database file to modify.
Existing tables Add new table
Miscellaneous Reference files | 209
.
Select All
Remove
Miscellaneous Reference files
Add new table to MDB
Add new table to MDB
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Add Table to
Catalog Database. installation and location codes. The login name of the user creating the task. Removes the selected task from the list. old value and new value are all displayed. Lists the existing tables found in the file. When you click OK. status. blank table inserts with the default fields defined (for example.

With some care (described in the following section). which complicates use of this command over previous versions of AutoCAD Electrical. Project Database Service (PDS). it is automatically generated from the drawing set of the project. Alternately. Ribbon: Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ From Project MDB.wdp file name. This file is for scratch use only. Any changes are written back to the appropriate objects.
Toolbar: Schematic Reports Menu: Projects ➤ Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Update from Project Scratch Database Command entry: AEIMPORTDB Select the database table to update then select the drawings to process.project drawing files update
Project database table data -. save the scratch database file with a new name. The scratch database file of the project can be used to write back to text data carried on symbols on the drawings.mdb where <project> matches the current project's . there is a chance that the
210 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. you can edit the database directly and then import the information back to the drawings. Cautionary Note AutoCAD Electrical 2006 and later introduced an automatic scratch database "freshen" function. If you edit the scratch database with all of the changes you want to write back to your project set. If the scratch database file is missing or corrupted. The file name is <project>. and then reference this file when the command starts. edit. The PDS automatically updates the scratch project database without your intervention (and without your knowledge).Project database table data -. it is not part of the intelligence stored in an AutoCAD Electrical project. stored in Microsoft Access format that is used to speed up certain project-wide operations.project drawing files update
AutoCAD Electrical maintains a scratch database for a project.

Full rebuild: Performs a full rebuild of the project database file.
Rebuild database file
Rebuild database file
Rebuilds or freshens the temporary project database.
■
■ ■
Select drawings to process
Select drawings to process
Rebuild database file | 211
. If you select OK. do not update the drawings while editing the scratch database file and answer "NO" to the Qsave prompt when invoking the actual update command. erases changes for current drawing).PDS comes in.
Toolbar: Project Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Rebuild/Freshen Project Database Command entry: AEREBUILDDB
■
List: Lists the drawings that appear to be out-of-date with the wire connection table of the project. It is because the command. without warning. Freshen only: Updates the wire connection table with the out-of-date files. then the PDS sees a change and updates the database (for example. You can trigger an update when the dialog box is open or you can defter to auto-update when a wire report is run. just as the command is getting ready to process. and remove all of these edits (to match the current state of the unmodified drawings) before you have a chance to run the command to update the drawings. may ask you if it is OK to Qsave the active drawing. Include wire connection processing: Indicates to process wire connections when updating the database file or the wire connection table. just before it begins the update. To prevent it. Even if you are careful not to update the drawings while doing the mdb edit (so that the PDS does not update anything). you can still lose all your edits when you launch the Update from Project Scratch Database command.

Moves one or more drawings back to the project drawing list. Moves all selected drawings back to the project drawing list. Selects one or more drawings from the project drawing list. Task (saves) all modifications in a task list to run at a later time. Select to run any of the project-wide commands. Not all commands can write to the task list.
Retry Now Tries to gain full write access to the entire list of drawing files previously selected. Cancels the update and returns to the Select Drawings to Process dialog box.mdb).
Do All Process Selects all of the drawings from the project drawing list. Selects drawings by user-defined sections and subsections. Select other files to update or try to gain write access to the entire list of drawings to process. If you gain full access. the files are locked out by you and other users cannot modify until the project-wide command finishes. and location of the drawing is listed in the dialog box for review. The file name.
Task
Cancel
212 | Chapter 3 Project Management
. status. The task list is maintained inside of the Project Task List database file (project_update. See the following list of commands that can be tasked.
Reset
Un-select
by Section/subsection
Files unavailable for processing
Files unavailable for processing
If some of the drawings selected for processing are unavailable (such as in a read-only state) this dialog box appears.Lists the drawings available to update in the current project.

wire numbers.wdp). You can specify settings for the project or drawing defaults. and the drawing format using either the Project
215
. If the drawing is part of a project. Then have the settings used for new drawings or the settings added to the project. These settings override the project properties set in the Project Properties dialog box. components.
Settings that apply to project settings and are saved inside the project definition file (.Drawing and Project Properties
4
Overview of project and drawing properties
Use the Project Properties dialog box to define settings when creating a project. cross-references. In the Project Properties dialog box. styles.
Use the Drawing Properties dialog box to define settings for a new or selected drawing.
Settings that are saved in the project file as drawing defaults. Otherwise text displays indicating that the drawing is not part of a project and drawing-related edit fields that are saved in the .wdp file are disabled. the project name displays in the dialog box. icons indicate whether the settings apply to project settings or drawing defaults. Drawing related data to add to the project when running the Add Drawing command is saved as Drawing Custom Properties.

Settings
Project settings include:
■ ■ ■
Library and Icon Menu paths Catalog lookup file preferences Real-time error checking options
Drawing settings include:
■ ■
Drawing type and descriptions IEC default values for the Project (%P).
216 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
.Properties or Drawing Properties dialog boxes. Switch between sequential or line reference based wire numbers. An overview of the available options for each tab are listed in the following section.
■
Wire Numbers
Use this tab to:
■ ■ ■
Set the wire number format. Switch between sequential or line reference based tags. Set wire number options such as hidden numbers. or displaying numbers on a per wire basis. Set component tag options such as using combined Installation/Location tags or suppressing the Installation/Location tag on reports. and Location (%L) fields Sheet values for the sheet and drawing in addition to section or subsection codes
■
Components
Use this tab to:
■ ■ ■
Specify the way new component tags are created. Display description text in uppercase. Installation (%I). excluded numbers.

You can also change the display format setup from this dialog box. Define and manage wire and component layers.
■
■
■ ■
Overview of project and drawing properties | 217
. or Reference Numbers. Define wire number leaders. Define wire number placement: above. Add or remove layers from the layer list. Set the tag/wire number sort order. and wiring.
Cross-references
Use this tab to:
■ ■
Define the cross-reference annotation format. or in-line. and width values for any new ladders inserted on the drawing. X Zones. or table.
Drawing Format
Use this tab to:
■
Set the default orientation.
■
Styles
Use this tab to:
■ ■
Change default styles for arrows. graphical. Set the scale factor used when inserting new components or wire numbers on the drawing. spacing. plcs. fan-in/out markers. below. Set cross-reference options such as suppressing Installation/Location codes or using real-time signal and contact cross-referencing between drawings. Set component cross-reference display: text. Specify the format referencing style: X-Y Grid.■ ■ ■
Set up wire number layer options.

Moves the selected path up one spot in the libraries tree structure. NOTE You can only specify one search path for the icon menu. panel library. and select Settings to view the active search path for the project. In the Project Manager. or other schematic libraries in the path. Moves the selected path down one spot in the libraries tree structure.wdp file.ENV) into the list box tree view for all search paths found underneath the highlighted folder. pneumatic. enter the file name. Schematic Libraries) and highlight the path to change. right-click the project name.
Icon Menu File
To use an icon menu for the project that is different from the default.
Add Browse Remove Move Up Move Down
Adds a new entry into the libraries tree structure. double-click the folder (for example.Library and Icon Menu Paths
Select which schematic library. Then browse to the path of the schematic or base footprint symbol library to use for the project. This menu reference is saved in the project's . You can also include a series of paths for AutoCAD Electrical to search in order. and icon menus to use.
Libraries To modify existing input fields in the tree structure. Removes the selected path from the libraries tree structure. Browses for a folder to select a symbol library or icon menu from. NOTE The symbol search path includes the User and Project folders (and potentially the AutoCAD search paths) before the paths listed here. You can include electrical.
Default
Overview of project and drawing properties | 219
. Brings the default paths from the environment file (WD.

Circuit Builder searches for a table using the following sequence:
Tag/Wire Number Sort Order
Electrical Code Standard
220 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. Sets the Electrical code standard used by Circuit Builder. the family name table is searched.
Other File Always use MISC_CAT table
Use MISC_CAT table only if componentspecific table does not exist
Options
Real-time error checking Performs real-time error checking on the project to determine if duplications of wire numbers or component tags occur in the project.Catalog Lookup File Preference
Use component-specific tables Searches for the component name as the catalog table. A blank line separates one error record from another. An error log file is created for every project regardless whether you chose to display the real-time warning dialog box or not. If a log file exists. The real-time warning is saved in the log file named "<project_name>_error. You can search other component tables if the catalog number is not found in the MISC_CAT table.wdp project file. the new content is added to the same file. The suffix is used when searching for a specific table in ace_electrical_standards. If the component table is not found. Sets the default wire numbering and component tag sort order for the project.mdb on page 1949. Searches only the MISC_CAT table. use the Catalog Lookup File dialog box to create a component or family table or select a different table. If neither table is found. Uses the MISC_CAT table if the component or family tables are not found in the catalog database.log"and is saved in the User subdirectory. Defines a secondary catalog lookup file. A three character suffix code is saved to the.

2 Tables without a suffix. schematic_lookup.
Overview of project and drawing properties | 221
.mdb.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT On the Project Manager.mdb. Defines a secondary catalog lookup file that functions as such: ■ ■ For catalog part number selection.1 Tables with the three character Electrical Code Standard suffix. Catalog Lookup File Preference section. Optional: Define a secondary catalog lookup file for this project Specifies to define a secondary lookup file for the project. click Other File.mdb. wd_lang1. 3 Tables with an “NEC” suffix. The file that is used depends on what was selected on the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. For BOM report generation.mdb. and wd_picklist.
Single catalog lookup file Specifies to use only one catalog lookup file. right-click on the Project name and select Properties.mdb. switches to a secondary catalog lookup file. In the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box. footprint_lookup. queries the secondary catalog lookup file when the target part number is not found in the default file. Catalog lookup files provided with AutoCAD Electrical include: default_cat.
Catalog lookup file
It defines a secondary catalog lookup file to use.

Select the Components tab.
222 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. right-click the project name. If found. NOTE This setting is saved in the MISC_FLAGS attribute on the WD_M block of the drawing.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. All information defined in this tab is saved to the project definition file as project defaults and settings. "CR" and "100" to yield a tag like CR100 or 100CR). Optionally.Project properties: components tab
Modify your project default settings for components.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager.
Search for PLC I/O address on insert
Searches for a connected PLC I/O module's I/O point. a component tag might contain a sheet number or some userspecified separators. the I/O address value is substituted for the "%N" part of the default component tag. enter the values in the edit boxes in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box. If your format includes the sheet number %S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter. NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides a predefined format for you to use or you can enter your own format using replaceable parameters on page 252. The tag consists of a minimum of two pieces of information: a family code and an alphanumeric reference number (for example. and select Properties. NOTE The %N parameter is mandatory in any component tag format you define.
Component TAG Format
Tag Format Specifies the way new component tags are created.

As you insert components on any drawing of the project set. in the component tag format (for example. Use this list to create unique reference-based tags when multiple components of the same family are located at the same reference location. "A". Use the Suffix position parameter. The suffix is added to the end of the component tag.AutoCAD Electrical does this using a suffix list of " ". (For example. %N%X . Example:
Overview of project and drawing properties | 223
. three push buttons on the same line reference "101" could be labeled PB101. You can force AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within the tag format.
Line Reference
Set up the unique format tag suffix list. NOTE The component tag suffix is automatically added to the end of the tag.Sequential
Enter the beginning sequential number for the drawing. and so on). a gap appears in the numbering sequence for that drawing. To add it to the inside of the tag. but return to the first drawing to add another component and sequential tag. and PB101B -. List suffix characters for duplicate family components on the same line reference or in the same zone (to keep tags unique). Sequential tags can continue uninterrupted from one drawing to the next if you assign the same beginning sequential number to every drawing in your project. use "%X" in the Tag Format.
Suffix Setup
Displays the suffix list.%F). %X. AutoCAD Electrical starts with the value you set and works its way up until it finds the next unused sequential number tag for the target component family. Use the AutoCAD Electrical Project-wide Update/Retag tool to retag the whole drawing set. The individual items in the suffix list are given in the row of edit boxes across the top of the dialog box. PB101A. NOTE If you finish a drawing and move to the next. "B".

or retagged. It also does not have a leading Installation/Location prefix. For example. -100CR. "-K101" dash is suppressed to "K101" but "+LOC1-K101" remains unchanged. (For example. if it is not on.
Suppress Installation/Location in tag when match drawing default
224 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
.
Suppress dash when first character of tag
Format Installation/Location into tag
Specifies to exclude the Installation and Location code values as part of the tag when displaying.
Component TAG Options
Combined Installation/Location tag mode Uses the combined installation/location tag for interpreting component tag names. a tag might show up as K16 in the Surf dialog box. edited._ NOTE This suppression takes place automatically in reports. Suppresses any single-dash character prefix in an IEC tag that does not have a leading Installation/Location prefix. For example. but if selected the tag might show up +AAA-K16 (where AAA is the location). -100CR relay contact marked with location code PNL1 is interpreted as being associated with a different relay coil than relay contact -100CR marked with location code PNL2. and takes place graphically only when a component is inserted.%N-%F or %N-%F%X = suffix at the end (such as 101-CRA) %N%X-%F = add to number. both contacts are associated with the same parent relay coil. before family code (such as 101A-CR) Select from the default lists or manually enter your own suffix list in the row of edit boxes. If this setting is not selected.) When switched OFF. Suppresses Location and Installation values on components if they match the drawing default values. it automatically adds a single dash character to an IEC tag that does not already have a single leading dash prefix. tag "K101" becomes "-K101" but "+LOC1K101" remains unchanged. (For example.

Component Options
Description text upper case Item Numbering Forces description text to upper case. It can result in a disruption of the child and parent component relationship under certain circumstances. Launches the Item Numbering Setup dialog box. these edit boxes and attributes are not filled in and are assumed. For example.If not selected.
NOTE Avoid using a mixture of drawings in the project when using the Combine Installation/Location Tag mode.
Item Numbering Setup
Define the item numbering settings for the project. The attributes on the block with drawing default or last used values (if no drawing default). and per-part number or percomponent item numbering.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. do not include some drawings with drawing-wide Installation or Location values and some without drawing-wide values.NOTE Update cross-reference text using the AutoCAD Electrical Cross-reference command. Fills the Installation and Location edit boxes on the Insert/Edit component dialog box.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT
Overview of project and drawing properties | 225
. The dialog box contains options for project or drawing wide item numbering.
Suppress Installation/Location in tag on reports Upon insert: automatic fill Installation/Location with drawing default or last used
Specifies to exclude Installation and Location values as part of the tag when displayed in reports.

right-click on the project name and select Properties.
Item Assignments
Project properties: wire numbers tab
Modify your project default settings for wire numbers. The wire number tag format must include the %N parameter that is the base sequential or reference-based value per the
226 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. Select the Components tab and click Item Numbering. Select the Wire Numbers tab. and select Properties.In the Project Manager.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager. Per-Part Number Basis . Per-Component Basis . This setting controls an Item Resequence and the “Next>>” buttons on any “Insert/Edit” dialog boxes.allow item number assignment for each catalog entry on a component. NOTE Item numbers cannot be assigned to part numbers based on ASSYCODE combinations.allow item number assignment to the main catalog part number only.
Format Specifies the way new wire number tags are created. It includes the main catalog part number and any multiple catalog part numbers.
Wire Number Format
Wire number tags can be sequential or reference-based.
Item Numbering Mode Sets item numbering to either project-wide or perdrawing. All information defined in this tab is saved to the project definition file as project defaults and settings
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. right-click the project name.

or alphanumeric) for the drawing. Use the Suffix position parameter. AutoCAD Electrical uses the concept of a wire tag format string with replaceable parameters. If DEMO1 has more than 100 wire numbers it starts using wire number 200 and above while DEMO2 would begin its wire numbers where DEMO1 left off (making sure that duplicate wire numbers are not assigned). but you can force AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within the tag format. individual items in the suffix list are applied to the wire tags to keep multiple wires in the same reference location unique.
Search for PLC I/O address on insert
Specifies to use PLC I/O address values for wires that connect to an addressed I/O point.
Overview of project and drawing properties | 227
. %X%N). the wire numbers on DEMO1 start at 100 and those on DEMO2 start at 200. These are added to the end of the tag. A typical format string might be just this %N parameter. NOTE Like component tags.
Sequential
Enter the starting sequential number (alpha. NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides a predefined format for you to use or you can enter your own format using replaceable parameters on page 252.selection above. If your format includes the sheet number %S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter. New wires or wire renumbering on the current drawing will show PLC I/O addressbased wire numbers automatically. you must enter the values in the edit boxes in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box. If you set DEMO1 to 100 and DEMO2 to 200. NOTE For reference-based wire number tagging. %X. in the component tag format (for example. AutoCAD Electrical confirms at insertion time that a new sequential wire number tag is not repeated on any other drawing. The %N parameter must always be part of the wire format string. numeric. This overrides both Sequential and Reference-based tagging. If you enter the same starting sequential number for every drawing of your wiring diagram set.

Increment
The default is "1".
Line Reference
Suffix Setup
Wire Number Options
Based on Wire Layer Assigns a different wire number format based on the wire layer. 9. Displays a suffix list. wire number format. If there are multiple wire number terminals on this network. This list is used to create unique reference-based wire number tags for multiple wire networks beginning at the same reference location (such as wire network beginning at a location per line reference number. Change the wire layer name. and so on. and wire number suffix. Sets the wire number tag suffix. If there is a schematic terminal symbol that carries the WIRENO attribute located on line reference 103 and this option is enabled. AutoCAD Electrical calculates a reference-based wire number using 103 instead of 100. starting wire sequence. X-Y grid reference. Overrides the default wire number format by using layer defined formats.
Layer Setup
Based on Terminal Symbol Location
Hidden on Wire Network with Terminal Displaying Wire Number
228 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. For example. Specifies to use a wire number terminal on a wire network as the wire network's line reference value for calculating a reference-based wire number. the line reference value of the upper left-most terminal is used. 11. 5. or X-Zone reference). 3. Specifies to automatically hide the wire number for a wire network that has a wire number-type terminal. Setting it to "2" with a starting sequential of "1" would yield wire numbers 1. 7. List suffix characters for wire numbers beginning on the same line reference or in the same zone (to keep wire numbers unique). a wire network starts at line reference 100 and drops down and over on line reference 103. Select one of the four predefined suffix lists or enter your own custom suffix list.

4. Multiple ranges are allowed and must be separated with a comma or semi-colon (for example.
Exclude
New Wire Number Placement
NOTE The Insert Wire Number tool does not take the current wire number setting (in-line. Specifies the wire number ranges to exclude if using sequential wire numbers.
Above Wire In-Line Gap Setup Below Wire Centered Places the wire number above the physical wire. Use the Toggle Wire Number In-Line tool for flipping existing wire numbers among the three modes. user-defined offset distance from the left or top of the first wire segment found on the wire network. You can also use 2. Specifies a fixed.6 for values not in a range. Specifies to insert the wire number tags the specified offset distance.4.2500-2599. (This option is unavailable for in-line wire numbers) AutoCAD Electrical places wire numbers on leaders when it determines that
Offset
Offset Distance
Leaders
Overview of project and drawing properties | 229
. above or below) into account when updating existing wire numbers. this setting is used only when inserting new wire numbers. 10001099. (applied to the %N part of the wire number tag format) Syntax is <starting>-<ending> to show range (for example 1000-1499). Defines spacing between the wire number and the wire itself.). Places the wire number below the physical wire.On per Wire Basis
Specifies to assign a wire number for each wire rather than the default one wire number per wire network. Places the wire number in line with the wire.6 or 2. Specifies to insert the wire number tags in the center of each wire segment.

Select the method for inserting new wire numbers as leaders: As Required. NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides some predefined formats for you to use or you can enter your own format using replaceable parameters on page 252. Create/Edit Wire Type.
Project properties: cross-references tab
Modify your project default settings for cross-referencing. You can use the same format for both. must always be part of the cross-reference format string. Use Same Drawing for on-drawing references and Between Drawings for off-drawing references. %N. and Change/Convert Wire Type dialog boxes. NOTE This change does not affect wire numbers that are already present on the drawing. One replaceable parameter.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager.the wire number text bumps into something (it does not check if the leader itself overlays another object). and select Properties.
Wire Type
Displays the Rename User Columns dialog box that is used for renaming User1 to User20 header columns in the Set Wire Type. Select the Cross-References tab.
Cross-reference Format
Defines the cross-reference annotation format. or Never. right-click the project name.
230 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. Any new drawing files created within the project are saved with the project default settings for cross-referencing.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. Always. A typical format string might be the %N parameter.

Displays cross-referencing using the AutoCAD Electrical graphical font or using contact mapping edit boxes while displaying each reference on a new line. NOTE Run the Component Cross-reference command to update any existing cross-referencing text. that automatically gets updated in real time. click Project Task List on the Project Manager. To update the pending updates. NOTE If this option is not selected. you are prompted to authorize the update.
Component Cross-reference Display
There are different styles of cross referencing AutoCAD Electrical supports:
Text Format Displays cross-referencing as text with any string as a separator between references on the same attribute. Any unauthorized update is queued up in a Project Task List.Cross-reference Options
Real time signal and contact cross-referencing between drawings Automatically updates relay and wire source and destination symbols cross-referencing across multiple drawings. Displays cross-referencing in a table object.
Peer to Peer
Cross-references related components while using pneumatic features. You then return to the active drawing. Example: schematic .
Graphical Format
Table Format
Setup
Overview of project and drawing properties | 231
.➤ pneumatic. so you can define the columns to display. Displays a dialog box for setting the display defaults for each component cross-reference display format. The target drawing is automatically opened and updated.
Suppress Installation/Location codes when matching the drawing defaults
Suppresses IEC prefixes.

Sets the default for the Insert Ladder command. or solid (no gap). Specifies the width of the ladder.
Spacing Default: insert new ladders without references
Width
Overview of project and drawing properties | 233
. by default. Specifies the default mode of operation when wires cross each other: insert gap with no loop. insert gap and loop. Specifies the spacing between each rung. dot. Select the Drawing Format tab. Specifies the default wire tee marker: none. right-click on the project name and select Properties.
Wire Tee
Project properties: drawing format tab
Allows you to modify your project default settings for drawings. New ladders you insert do not have line reference numbering.Remove Wire Cross
Removes the selected layer from the defined layer list.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.
Ladder Defaults
Vertical/Horizontal Specifies whether to create ladders horizontally or vertically. All information defined in this tab is saved to the project definition file as a project default.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager. angle1. or angle2.

Scale
Feature Scale Multiplier Sets the scale factor used when inserting new components or wire numbers on the drawing. and origin on the X Zones setup dialog box. Select inch if your drawing is to use library symbols from the JIC1/JIC125 libraries or mm full size for the metric scaled symbol libraries. TIP Use a negative zone spacing value if you want the zone reference origin to be at the right side of the drawing.
Reference Numbers Setup
Each ladder column has a column of assigned reference numbers. Set the horizontal labels. and so on. TIP Use negative spacing values for Horizontal or Vertical to change the origin of the X-Y grid system to be other than the upper left-hand corner of the drawing. but there is not a Y-axis.Multi-wire Spacing
Specifies the spacing between each rung in multiwire phases. Set the vertical and horizontal index numbers and letters of your drawing. This change does not affect components and wire numbers that are already present on the drawing. There are three modes:
X-Y Grid All referencing is tied to an X-Y grid system of numbers and letters along the left-hand side and top of the drawing. change the edit box value from 1. and origin in the X-Y grid setup dialog box. To insert everything 25% bigger than normal.
X Zones
Like X-Y Grid.
Format Referencing
Specifies the default referencing system. spacing. the sheet and number values. It adjusts the wire
inch/inch scaled to mm/mm full size
234 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. Specifies how to display reference numbers -number only. numbers in a hexagon. spacing.25.00 to 1.

NOTE If the drawing is not in any of the currently open projects. Sets the values you enter for drawing description. it is locked by someone else. and layers.Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: AEPROPERTIES Select the Drawing Settings tab. This happens when a project file is read only. Select from a list of predefined descriptions from the active project by clicking the arrow or select a description from the drawing by clicking Pick. "Drawing not in open project" displays instead of the project name. This is saved in the project . you are unable to assign a description for the drawing. signal arrows. When the project is not open or available for edit. cross-referencing. wire numbers. Indicates that the drawing should not be included in tagging.wdp file. or the folder where the project is located is read only. If the drawing is in an open project but it cannot be edited. Overrides the project properties set in the project Properties dialog box. ladders. sheet. location. This is saved in the project . project.wdp file. cross-references. Sets the format for component tags. and reporting functions. the drawing is included in project-wide plotting and title block operations.
For Reference Only
236 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. installation. it is not checked out in Vault. If selected. PLC modules. and drawing code. "Project not available for edit" displays instead of the project name. The description displays in title block updates and custom drawing properties.
Description 1-3
Specifies up to three lines of description text for the drawing file.
Drawing File
Project Specifies the project that the drawing is found in.

do not include some drawings with drawing-wide Installation or Location values and some without drawing-wide values. It can result in a disruption of the child and parent component relationship under certain circumstances.
Sheet Specifies the sheet number value for the drawing settings. Specifies the location code for the WD_M block definition.IEC-Style Designators
Specifies IEC default values for the drawing. For example.
Overview of project and drawing properties | 237
. such as Project (%P). and cross-reference tagging use replaceable parameters in their format. Displays a list of previously defined Installation or Location codes in the active project or from the Default. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %L.
Sheet Values
Component. Displays a list of Installation or Location codes from the active drawing.
Installation Code
Location Code
Drawing
Project
NOTE Avoid using a mixture of drawings in the project when using the Combine Installation/Location Tag mode.
Project Code Specifies a project code for the WD_M block definition.INST or Default. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %S. When you insert a component. wire.LOC file. If you reference the drawing's sheet number or drawing number in any of your tagging formats. Installation (%I). the %I and %L default values are used if the Installation and/or Location values would normally be blank. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %P. Specifies the installation code for the WD_M block definition. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %I. then specify a default drawing-wide value to use. and Location (%L) fields.

enter the values in the edit boxes in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box. AutoCAD Electrical starts with the value you set and works its way up until it finds the next unused sequential number tag for the target component family. NOTE This setting is saved in the MISC_FLAGS attribute on the WD_M block of the drawing. "CR" and "100" to yield a tag like CR100 or 100CR). Sequential tags can continue uninterrupted from one drawing to the next if you assign the same beginning sequential number to every drawing in your project. NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides a predefined format for you to use or you can enter your own format using replaceable parameters on page 252.Command entry: AEPROPERTIES Select the Components tab. The tag consists of a minimum of two pieces of information: a family code and an alphanumeric reference number (for example. If found. the I/O address value is substituted for the "%N" part of the default component tag. NOTE The %N parameter is mandatory in any component tag format you define.
Search for PLC I/O address on insert
Searches for a connected PLC I/O module's I/O point.
Tag Format Specifies the way new component tags are created. Optionally. If your format includes the sheet number %S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter.
Overview of project and drawing properties | 239
. a component tag might contain a sheet number or some userspecified separators. As you insert components on any drawing of the project set.
Sequential
Enter the beginning sequential number for the drawing.

Use the Suffix position parameter. "A". but you can force AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within the tag format. a gap appears in the numbering sequence for that drawing. NOTE The component tag suffix is automatically added to the end of the tag. PB101A. but then later come back to the first drawing to add another component and sequential tag. Use this list to create unique reference-based tags when multiple components of the same family are located at the same reference location (for example.
Suffix Setup
Displays the suffix list. %X.
Line Reference
Set up the unique format tag suffix list. before family code (such as 101A-CR) Select from the default lists or manually enter your own suffix list in the row of edit boxes. "B". and so on). The individual items in the suffix list are given in the row of edit boxes across the top of the dialog box.%F). To add it to the inside of the tag.
Drawing properties: wire numbers tab
Apply a drawing-specific wire number settings that are maintained inside the drawing's WD_M block. Example: %N-%F or %N-%F%X = suffix at the end (such as 101-CRA) %N%X-%F = add to number. three push buttons on the same line reference "101" could be labeled PB101. Use the AutoCAD Electrical Project-wide Update/Retag tool to retag the whole drawing set.AutoCAD Electrical does this using a suffix list of " ".NOTE If you finish a drawing and move to the next.
240 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. use "%X" in the Tag Format. and PB101B -. The suffix is added to the end of the component tag. in the component tag format (for example. List suffix characters for duplicate family components on the same line reference or in the same zone (to keep tags unique). %N%X .

If DEMO1 has more than 100 wire numbers it starts using wire number 200 and above while DEMO2 would begin its wire numbers where DEMO1 left off (making sure that duplicate wire numbers are not assigned)." Setting it to "2" with a starting sequential of "1" would yield wire numbers 1. AutoCAD Electrical uses the concept of a wire tag format string with replaceable parameters. %X. This list is used to create unique reference-based wire number tags for multiple wire networks beginning at the same reference location (such
Increment
Line Reference
242 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. NOTE Like component tags. These are added to the end of the tag. 7.NOTE For reference-based wire number tagging. The %N parameter must always be part of the wire format string. 3. or alphanumeric) for the drawing. New wires or wire renumbering on the current drawing shows PLC I/O address-based wire numbers automatically. in the component tag format (for example.
Sequential
Enter the starting sequential number (alpha. but you can force AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within the tag format. A typical format string might be just this %N parameter. individual items in the suffix list are applied to the wire tags to keep multiple wires in the same reference location unique. The default is "1. 11. 9. the wire numbers on DEMO1 start at 100 and those on DEMO2 start at 200.
Search for PLC I/O address on insert
Specifies to use PLC I/O address values for wires that connect to an addressed I/O point. numeric. %X%N). AutoCAD Electrical confirms at insertion time that a new sequential wire number tag is not repeated on any other drawing. and so on. Use the Suffix position parameter. If you set DEMO1 to 100 and DEMO2 to 200. Sets the wire number tag suffix. If you enter the same starting sequential number for every drawing of your wiring diagram set. 5. This overrides both Sequential and Reference-based tagging.

Defines spacing between the inline wire number and the wire itself.
Below Wire Offset
Centered
Offset Distance
Leaders
Overview of project and drawing properties | 243
.
New Wire Number Placement
NOTE The Insert Wire Number tool does not take the current wire number setting (in-line.
Above Wire In-Line Gap Setup Places the wire number above the physical wire. Use the Toggle Wire Number In-Line tool for flipping existing wire numbers among the three modes. Specifies a fixed. Always. Specifies to insert the wire number tags the specified offset distance. (This option is unavailable for in-line wire numbers. List suffix characters for wire numbers beginning on the same line reference or in the same zone (to keep wire numbers unique). this setting is used only when inserting new wire numbers. Select the method for inserting new wire numbers as leaders: As Required. or X-Zone reference). Specifies to insert the wire number tags in the center of each wire segment.as wire network beginning at a location per line reference number. above or below) into account when updating existing wire numbers. X-Y grid reference. user-defined offset distance from the left or top of the first wire segment found on the wire network. Suffix Setup Displays a suffix list. or Never.) AutoCAD Electrical places wire numbers on leaders when it determines that the wire number text bumps into something (it does not check if the leader itself will overlay another object). Places the wire number below the physical wire. Select one of the four predefined suffix lists or enter your own custom suffix list. Places the wire number inline with the wire.

Displays a dialog box for setting the display defaults for each component cross-reference display format. Displays cross-referencing using the AutoCAD Electrical graphical font or using contact mapping edit boxes while displaying each reference on a new line.Cross-reference Format
Defines the cross-reference annotation format. Displays cross-referencing in a table object.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2
Overview of project and drawing properties | 245
.
Component Cross-reference Display
There are different styles of cross referencing AutoCAD Electrical supports:
Text Format Displays cross-referencing as text with any string as a separator between references on the same attribute.
Graphical Format
Table Format
Setup
Drawing properties: styles tab
Apply a drawing-specific component styles settings that are maintained inside the drawing's WD_M block. One replaceable parameter. %N. must always be part of the cross-reference format string. You can use the same format for both.
Any drawing
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. A typical format string might be just the %N parameter. that automatically gets updated in real time. You can define the columns to display. NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides some predefined formats for you to use or you can enter your own format using replaceable parameters on page 252. Use Same Drawing for on-drawing references and Between Drawings for off-drawing references.

248 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. Set the vertical and horizontal index numbers and letters.
Spacing Default: insert new ladders without references
Width Multi-wire Spacing
Format Referencing
Specifies the default referencing system. Sets the default for the Insert Ladder command. There are three modes:
X-Y Grid All referencing is tied to an X-Y grid system of numbers and letters along the left-hand side and top of the drawing.
Reference Numbers
Each ladder column has a column of assigned reference numbers. by default. Specifies the spacing between each wire in multi-wire phases.Select the Drawing Format tab. and origin on the X Zones setup dialog box. TIP Use negative spacing values for Horizontal or Vertical if you want to change the origin of the X-Y grid system to be other than the upper left-hand corner of the drawing. Specifies the width of the ladder. Specifies the spacing between each ladder rung. and origin in the X-Y grid setup dialog box. spacing. spacing.
X Zones
Like X-Y Grid. New ladders you insert do not have line reference numbering. Set the horizontal labels. but there is not a Y-axis. TIP Use a negative zone spacing value if you want the zone reference origin to be at the right side of the drawing.
Ladder Defaults
Vertical/Horizontal Specifies whether to create ladders horizontally or vertically.

00 to 1. you can set the wire numbers to go in a reverse order from the I/O point on a PLC I/O drawing. You can set sorting on a per-drawing basis and override the projectwide default setting defined in Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog box. For example. To insert everything 25% bigger than normal.Setup
Specifies how to display ladder line reference numbers .
Scale
Feature Scale Multiplier Sets the scale factor used when inserting new components or wire numbers on the drawing. wires always go to a wire layer and components to component layers.
Layers
Define Defines and manages wire and component layers. Select inch if your drawing is to use library symbols from the JIC1/JIC125 libraries or mm full size for the metric scaled symbol libraries.number only.
X zones setup
Overview of project and drawing properties | 249
.
inch/inch scaled to mm/mm full size
Tag/Wire Number Order
Sort Order Sets the default wire numbering sort order for the active drawing. This change does not affect components and wire numbers that are already present on the drawing. and so on. It adjusts the wire connection trap distance that determines whether closely spaced wire ends connector not. NOTE No matter what layer is current.25. numbers in a hexagon. change the edit box value from 1. but have the wire numbers going from left to right for non-PLC I/O drawings. the sheet and number values.

Enter the horizontal value. Enter the horizontal value.
Spacing
Specifies the spacing between the grid columns. or menu) Specifies whether to insert the grid labels. B. toolbar. or menu) Specifies the labels for the grid columns.
Origin Specifies the origin for the X Zone grid. If you enter a list. You can enter the first value only or a complete list. NOTE The Pick button is not available when accessed through the properties dialog box.
Toolbar: Ladders Command entry: AEXZONE NOTE You can also access this dialog box from the Project Properties or Drawing Properties dialog boxes. If you select to insert the labels. Click pick to select the origin on the drawing or enter X and Y values. D.such as "A.Use this tool to insert the X grid labels for drawings that use X Zones for the Format Referencing." (only available when accessed from the ribbon. separate the values with commas . toolbar. NOTE Your drawing must be configured for X Zones. (only available when accessed from the ribbon. C. You can also change other settings from here (such as origin) instead of going back into the Drawing Properties dialog box. Some options are not available when you access the dialog box through the properties dialog boxes.
Zone labels
Insert zone labels
X-Y grid setup
250 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. Set the Format Referencing in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box to X Zones. enter the column counts. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert
Ladder drop-down ➤ X Zones Setup.

If Vertical is selected then the vertical values are used for the first part and the horizontal values used for the second. Some options are not available when you access the dialog box through the properties dialog boxes. Set the Format Referencing in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box to X-Y Grid. You might get a %N value of "B2". Enter the horizontal and vertical values. toolbar. NOTE Your drawing must be configured for X-Y Grids.
Command entry: Ladders Command entry: AEXYGRID NOTE You can also access this dialog box from the Project Properties or Drawing Properties dialog boxes. If it is set to Horizontal. You can also change other settings from here (such as origin) instead of going back into the Drawing Properties dialog box.9 and it is set to Horizontal. the horizontal values of the grid are used as the first part.Use this tool to insert the X-Y grid labels for drawings that use X-Y Grid for the Format Referencing." (only available when accessed from the ribbon.
X-Y Format
Grid labels
Overview of project and drawing properties | 251
. For example. and the vertical value as the second.
Spacing
Specifies the spacing between the grid columns. if it is set to Vertical you might get a %N value of "2B. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert
Ladder drop-down ➤ XY Grid Setup. NOTE The Pick button is not available when accessed through the properties dialog box.F and Vertical values of 1 . Click pick to select the origin on the drawing or enter X and Y values.
Origin Specifies the origin for the XY grid. Specifies the order that is used from the X-Y grid in determining the %N part of the tag. or menu) Specifies the labels for the grid columns. You can enter the first value only or a complete list. Enter the horizontal and vertical values. you have Horizontal values of A .

%F Component family code string (for example. this format is encoded on to the TAGFMT attribute of the WD_M block. "PB. wire annotation. B. D." "SS.
Use replaceable parameters
The Drawing Properties dialog box makes use of codes as replaceable parameters that are encoded on to attributes of the invisible WD_M block of the drawing." "CR. toolbar. wire numbering. separate the values with commas .If you enter a list. if you set your component tag format to be %F%N.
For device tagging. C. enter the horizontal and vertical column counts." "MTR") Sheet number of the drawing (for example." Insert X-Y grid labels (only available when accessed from the ribbon. cross-referencing and wire numbering
Defined in the Drawing Properties. or menu) Specifies whether to insert the grid labels. Replaceable parameters are also used for device tagging. cross-referencing." "FLT.such as "A. If you select to insert the labels. For example. and graphical terminal strips. this format is read and the codes are replaced with the appropriate values. "01" entered in upper right) Drawing number Wire layer name Sequential or Reference-based number applied to the component Suffix character position for reference-based tagging (not present = end of tag) IEC-style project code (default for drawing)
%S
%D %G %N %X
%P
252 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. When AutoCAD Electrical assigns a TAG to a component.

101B-PB Example of Wire Number Formats (For wire number 50 on sheet 3) %S/%N = 3/50 %N = 50
Use replaceable parameters | 253
.If you have a Parent on a drawing that has a default Location of “M” and its child is on a drawing that has a default Location value of “MC. NOTE If you include %I or %L in the Tag code of the component. PB101A. you are prompted to recalculate the tag if you change the Installation or Location value of the component once it is inserted.” the cross-referencing on the parent shows the “MC” (drawing default location value of the drawing the child is on) and the child shows the “M” (drawing default location value of the drawing the parent is on) no matter what the location value is on either the parent or child.%I %L %A %B
IEC-style installation code (default for drawing) IEC-style location code (default for drawing) Project drawing list's SEC value for active drawing Project drawing list's SUB-SEC value for active drawing
The %L and %I values used for cross-referencing are the Drawing Default Location and Installation values from the corresponding Parent or Child drawing and not the Location and Installation values of the component itself. Example of Component Tags (For relay number 50 on sheet 3) %F%S%N = CR350 %F%N = CR50 %F-%S-%N = CR-3-50 (For 3 push buttons on line reference 101 using reference-based tagging) %F%N = PB101. 101A-PB.101-PBB %N%X%F = 101-PB. 101-PBA.PB101B %N-%F = 101-PB.

%1
Destination component tag ID. It makes the settings available as defaults for new drawings that you might add later to the project. You can use only one of the (%number) parameters.
Save settings to the project file | 255
.
Save settings to the project file
Save settings to the project file
The changes you make to the configuration of the current drawing are saved on the invisible WD_M block of the drawing. Equivalent of "%1:%P" (comp tag:term) Equivalent of "%1:%P:%D" (comp tag:term:termdesc) Equivalent of "%L%1" (IEC comp tag) Equivalent of "%L%1:%P" (tag:term) Equivalent of "%L%1:%P:%D" (tag:term:termdesc) Equivalent of "%I%I%1" (INST prefix+IEC comp tag) Equivalent of "%I%L%1:%P" (tag:term) Equivalent of "%I%L%1:%P:%D" (tag:term:termdesc)
%2 %3 %4 %5 %6 %7 %8 %9
The part after the colon(:) is suppressed if the value is blank in %2 . The ":term" part is suppressed if blank. %2=comp tag:term). you can retrieve selected settings previously saved in the project file and assign them to the current drawing. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties
drop-down ➤ Settings Compare.%9 parameters (for example. Alternately. You can save a copy of these settings to the project file.

wdp project list file. 4 Click OK.
Compare drawing and project settings
Displays differences between project defaults and drawing default properties and allows an update. 3 Click Match Project to make the settings of the drawing match the project defaults or click Match Drawing to make the settings of the project match the settings of the current drawing. NOTE Changing these settings does not automatically change components and wiring already present in your drawing.
Toolbar: Drawing Properties Menu: Projects ➤ Settings Compare Command entry: AESHEETCOMPARE This tool compares the general/schematic settings carried on the invisible WD_M block of the drawing with a copy of the settings saved in the project's . Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties
drop-down ➤ Settings Compare. When one column is matched to the other. Any differences are displayed in a three-column dialog box. the cell changes in color to indicate that the record were changed.AutoCAD Electrical reads both the settings on the WD_M block of the current drawing and a copy of the settings maintained in the current project's . If the Settings Description cell displays in light blue the project and drawing settings do not match. You can update selected drawing settings (multiple selection is allowed) to make them match the values carried in the master project file or vice versa.wdp file. 2 Highlight the settings you want to copy over from the drawing to the project or vice versa or click Select All to change all the settings quickly. The dialog box list updates automatically when you make changes and then switch between showing all settings or showing just the different settings.
256 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
.

NOTE Changing these settings does not automatically change components and wiring already present in your drawing. Select the settings from the list. NOTE You can also access this dialog box by right-clicking a drawing name in the Project Manager and selecting Properties ➤ Settings Compare. Changes the selected drawing setting to make it match the project.
1 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Settings List Utility.
Show All Show Differences Shows all of the settings in the drawing.wdp file. Select the settings from the list. Displays settings that are different between the WD_M block and the . and then click the button. and then click the button. Selects all of the settings in the list so you can quickly change all settings to match either the project or the drawing.
Select All
Match Project
Match Drawing
Settings List Utility
Settings List Utility
Reports the settings of each drawing in the project. Changes the selected project default setting to make it match the drawing. You can also right-click any row to access the Match Project or Match Drawing options.
Settings List Utility | 257
. and provides the means to edit the report and update the drawing properties with the edited values.

Moves the currently selected lines to the bottom of the report. 3 Edit the values or change the drawing order.
Move Down
Move to Top Move to Bottom
258 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. 7 Click OK. 5 Click Close. If you edit the information in the Configuration Report. Move Down. Menu: Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Settings List Utility Command entry: AEDWGCFG Click Edit Mode.
Edit report
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Settings List
Utility. Moves the currently selected lines to the top of the report. If you re-order the lines.2 Click Edit Mode. you have an option to update the project and drawings with the new information. and Move to Bottom buttons. 4 Click OK-Return to Report.
Move Up Moves the currently selected lines up one place in the report. Moves the currently selected lines down one place in the report. Move to Top. Re-order the lines with the Move Up. 6 Select the options for update.WDP) can be updated to match. the order of the drawing list in the project file (.

If you change any of the IEC_P data. If you change any of the SH data.
SUBSEC
SH
SHDWGNAM
IEC_P
IEC_I
IEC_L
SH-DESC
Update Configuration Changes
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Settings List
Utility. If you change any of the SHDWGNAM data. If you change any of the Sec data. the Sheet (%S) field for that drawing can be updated to match. If you change any of the Sub-Sec data.WDP) can be updated to match.
DWGNAM SEC Specifies the drawing name. the IEC Project (%P) field for that drawing can be updated to match. the Sub-Section data held in the project file (. the Dwg no. (%D) field for that drawing can be updated to match. the Section data held in the project file (. Double-click any line to go directly into edit. the IEC Installation (%I) field for that drawing can be updated to match.Edit
Edits the values of the currently selected line.WDP) can be updated to match. the Description data held in the project file (. If you change any of the SH-DESC data.
Settings List Utility | 259
. If you change any of the IEC_L data.WDP) can be updated to match. If you change any of the IEC_I data. the IEC Location (%L) field for that drawing can be updated to match.

WDP) Section (in .WDP).WDP) Sheet (%S) (on drawing) Drawing (%D) (on drawing) IEC Project (%P) (on drawing) IEC Installation (%I) (on drawing) IEC Location (%L) (on drawing) Description (in . Update the Dwg no. Update the first Description data held in the project file (. Move Down.Menu: Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Settings List Utility Command entry: AEDWGCFG 1 Click Edit Mode. the order of the drawing list in the project file (.
260 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. Update the Sheet (%S) data on each drawing.WDP). you have an option to update the project and drawings with the new information.WDP) Sub-Section (in . Update the IEC Location (%L) data on each drawing. If you re-order the lines. 3 Click OK-Return to Report. (%D) data on each drawing. 2 Edit the values or change the drawing order.WDP).WDP).
Drawing Order (in . Re-order the lines with the Move Up. If you edit the information in the Configuration Report. Update the IEC Installation (%I) data on each drawing.WDP) can be updated to match. and Move to Bottom buttons. Update the Section data held in the project file (. Update the Sub-Section data held in the project file (. Move to Top. Update the IEC Project (%P) data on each drawing. 4 Click Close.WDP) Update the drawing order in the project file (.

Create a template drawing
Create a template drawing
Using a template. settings adjusted. With this template. you can start a new drawing with the WD_M block inserted. and standard AutoCAD Electrical layers predefined. 1 Open a new drawing or start with a copy of your standard drawing border/title block drawing. AutoCAD Electrical does not have to pause and ask permission to insert the block as you start each new wiring diagram drawing.
Create a template drawing | 261
.DWT extension. 6 Save the drawing as an AutoCAD Drawing Template file with a .
Any drawing
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. This template appears in the list of saved templates the next time you open a new AutoCAD Electrical drawing. 2 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties
drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. modify any drawing settings (such as layer naming conventions and tagging formats) and click OK. 4 Select Format ➤ Layer to create any layers you referenced in the Drawing Properties dialog box. 3 In the Drawing Properties dialog box. 5 In the AutoCAD Layer Properties Manager dialog box.
Drawing properties: drawing settings tab
Sets default values for a drawing. It triggers AutoCAD Electrical to insert the invisible WD_M block. adjust layer colors and click Apply.

Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager. signal arrows. When the project is not open or available for edit. right-click the drawing name. location. Select the Drawing Settings tab. it is not checked out in Vault. Overrides the project properties set in the project Properties dialog box.
262 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. NOTE If the drawing is not in any of the currently open projects. wire numbers.
Active drawing
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties
drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. and layers. project. "Project not available for edit" displays instead of the project name. cross-references. If the drawing is in an open project but it cannot be edited. it is locked by someone else. ladders. or the folder where the project is located is read only. and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. This happens when a project file is read only. PLC modules. you are unable to assign a description for the drawing. and drawing code. sheet. "Drawing not in open project" displays instead of the project name.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: AEPROPERTIES Select the Drawing Settings tab.
Drawing File
Project Specifies the project that the drawing is found in. Sets the format for component tags. installation. Sets the values you enter for drawing description.

wdp file. The description displays in title block updates and custom drawing properties. and Location (%L) fields. This is saved in the project . the %I and %L default values are used if the Installation and/or Location values would normally be blank. such as Project (%P). Specifies the location code for the WD_M block definition. the drawing is included in project-wide plotting and title block operations. cross-referencing.
Installation Code
Location Code
Drawing
Project
Create a template drawing | 263
.wdp file.
For Reference Only
IEC-Style Designators
Specifies IEC default values for the drawing. Indicates that the drawing should not be included in tagging.Description 1-3
Specifies up to three lines of description text for the drawing file. Installation (%I). Specifies the installation code for the WD_M block definition. Displays a list of Installation or Location codes from the active drawing. Displays a list of previously defined Installation or Location codes in the active project or from the Default. When you insert a component.INST or Default.
Project Code Specifies a project code for the WD_M block definition. This is saved in the project . This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %P.LOC file. If selected. and reporting functions. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %L. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %I. Select from a list of predefined descriptions from the active project by clicking the arrow or select a description from the drawing by clicking Pick.

Specifies the drawing number value for the drawing settings. sorted by category:
264 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
.wdp). Specifies the section value for the drawing file saved in the project definition file (. It can result in a disruption of the child and parent component relationship under certain circumstances. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %A. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %S.NOTE Avoid using a mixture of drawings in the project when using the Combine Installation/Location Tag mode. Specifies the subsection value for the drawing file saved in the project definition file (.
Sheet Values
Component. For example.
Sheet Specifies the sheet number value for the drawing settings. wire. Here is an attribute list of information that is carried on the WD_M block of the drawing. The WD_M. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %B. If you reference the drawing's sheet number or drawing number in any of your tagging formats.dwg is found in the default symbol library. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %D. then specify a default drawing-wide value to use.
Drawing
Section
Sub-Section
Updating the WD_M Block
Overview of the WD_M block
A special invisible block must be present on the drawing. do not include some drawings with drawing-wide Installation or Location values and some without drawing-wide values. and cross-reference tagging use replaceable parameters in their format.wdp).

schematic settings to modify and click OK. if your drawing was created with an older WD_M block it may not carry these attributes.1 Open an existing AutoCAD Electrical drawing and set the properties and layer names.
Add missing attributes to the WD_M block
As AutoCAD Electrical adds new features.
3 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Update Symbol
Library WD_M Block. Select one of the following options:
Update to New WD_M Block.dwg block in the current drawing with a newer copy. 1 Select Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel. new attributes are sometimes added to the default WD_M block. Layers.
Overview of the WD_M block | 271
. 4 Select the WD_M . The settings and layer names are collected from the drawing and appropriate adjustments are made to the WD_M block. However. 6 Open your template file. 2 Save the drawing. The new version of the WD_M block replaces your existing one.
7 Click Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Update to New
WD_M Block. Values. and converts to the newer configuration values and layers. NOTE Update the version of your template drawing of the inserted WD_M block if a template drawing exists for your project. Layers Replaces the schematic wd_m. 5 Save the modified WD_M drawing. AutoCAD Electrical provides an easy way to swap older WD_M blocks with the new WD_M block. Values.

WD_M WD_PNLM Defines the default schematic settings.
272 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. No Changes
2 Select the WD_M drawing to use as the new WD_M block in the drawing.
Alert
A drawing needs an invisible block. but keeps existing configuration values and layer names. WD_M. on the drawing to be compatible with AutoCAD Electrical. Values. 3 Click Open. and converts to the newer configuration values and layers. Replaces the panel wd_pnlm. No Changes
Replaces the schematic wd_m.Update to New WD_M Block.dwg block in the current drawing with a newer copy. Layers
Update to New WD_PNLM Block.dwg. Replaces the panel wd_pnlm. Defines the default panel settings.
Update to New WD_PNLM Block.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Update Symbol
Library WD_M Block.dwg block in the current drawing with a newer copy. Menu: Projects ➤ Swap WD_M or WD_PNLM Blocks ➤ Update Symbol Library WD_M Block Command entry: AECOPY2SYMLIB The WD_M and WD_PNLM blocks carry attribute values that define the default AutoCAD Electrical settings. but keeps existing configuration values and layer names.dwg drawing file in the symbol library.
Copy active drawing settings to
Writes the attribute settings for the wd_m block in the current drawing to the wd_m.dwg block in the current drawing with a newer copy.

NOTE If the drawing includes panel layout symbols. You can use your own layer naming convention with AutoCAD Electrical. To insert a WD_M or WD_PNLM block
■
If the WD_M block is not present in a new or existing drawing.
Using Layers | 273
. If the WD_PNLM block is not present in a new or existing drawing when using panel layout symbols.
Manage panel layers
1 Click Panel tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Panel Configuration drop-down
➤ Configuration. click OK to insert the block at location 0.The WD_M. non-text graphic layers. the block WD_PNLM. and nameplate layers. layer names.0. as well as change the layer naming used on an existing AutoCAD Electrical drawing using the following tools. select the check box. This block carries about 50 attributes that define settings. 3 Specify information for the panel component layers. The WD_M and WD_PNLM blocks can be present on the same drawing.
■
■
Using Layers
Manage layers
Manage layers
AutoCAD Electrical provides tools for managing and renaming panel and schematic layers. and other default settings that are referenced by AutoCAD Electrical commands. click OK to insert the block. 2 Click Layers Setup.dwg is also needed.dwg block is located in the default symbol library. To force the drawing settings to match the project settings.

specify information for the component layers and wire number layers. 4 Click OK. Enter a new layer name and click OK. For example.When AutoCAD Electrical inserts a footprint. select the layer to edit from the list and click Edit. 2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box. The layer names you choose are what AutoCAD Electrical uses as it inserts the parts and pieces of component symbols and wire numbers. click Define. click the Drawing Format tab.
Manage schematic layers
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties
drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. click Find/Replace.
Rename panel layers
The Rename Panel Layers tool makes it easy to rename layers one by one. 1 Click Panel tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Panel Configuration drop-down
➤ Rename Layers . the new layer name is substituted for DEMO-PNP in the AutoCAD Electrical Panel layer name list. AutoCAD Electrical also updates the AutoCAD Electrical layer assignment information carried on the WD_PNLM block of the drawing. if DEMO-PNPG is currently assigned as the Name Plate graphics layer and you rename it to PNPG using the AutoCAD Electrical rename layer utility. 3 To edit multiple layer names. Click OK.Enter the text to find and the text to replace it with in the edit boxes. 2 To edit an individual layer name. 3 In the Layers section. If the
274 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. it is modified on the fly to match the layering scheme set up in this dialog box. 4 In the Define Layers dialog box. The advantage to using the AutoCAD Electrical layer rename is that in addition to renaming the layer. or multiple layers at once by using the Find/Replace method.

NOTE You can also change layer properties using the Project Manager tool. Click OK. In the Drawing Format tab. 2 To edit an individual layer name. 3 To edit multiple layer names. click Define.
Manage layers | 275
. AutoCAD Electrical creates that layer on the fly. select the layer to edit from the list and click Edit.Enter the text to find and the text to replace it with in the edit boxes. click Find/Replace. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties
drop-down ➤ Rename Layers. The settings are applied to new drawings). 6 In the Drawing Properties dialog box.
Define layers
AutoCAD Electrical automatically manages the wire number and component layers you set up in the drawing settings. right-click on the drawing name and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties (or to change the project default settings. NOTE You can also change layer properties using the Project Manager tool. right-click on the project name and select Properties. Enter a new layer name and click OK. click OK.layer name you enter does not exist when it comes time for AutoCAD Electrical to insert something onto that layer. In the Project Manager. The settings are applied to new drawings). 5 Click OK. Layers section.
Rename schematic layers
The Rename Schematic Layers tool makes it easy to rename layers one by one. No matter which layer is active. wires always go to a wire layer and components go to component layers. or multiple layers at once by using the Find/Replace method. right-click on the drawing name and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties (or to change the project default settings. Layers section. right-click on the project name and select Properties. In the Project Manager. click Define. In the Drawing Format tab.

Type layer names into the edit boxes. and select Properties.
Non-text Graphics Component Tags Layer name for all non attribute graphics of a symbol Layer name for all parent and child component name tags (for example. right-click the project name.
Component Block Layers
Displays layer names. AutoCAD Electrical creates that layer on the fly. Multiple categories can be tied to the same layer name (enter the same layer name into multiple edit boxes).Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties
drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. The layer names you choose are what AutoCAD Electrical uses as it inserts the parts and pieces of component symbols and wire numbers. The settings are applied to new drawings). based upon attribute function. right-click the drawing name. In the Project Manager.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: AEPROPERTIES In the Drawing Properties dialog box. the graphics of the block are inserted onto the layer listed in the Non text Graphics box. click Define. If the layer name you enter does not exist when it comes time for AutoCAD Electrical to insert something onto that layer. It does not matter what layer is current at the time. In the Drawing Format tab. (To change the project default settings. A blank entry inserts that category on the current layer. In the Layers section. click Define. The attribute text of the block is automatically moved to the layers listed in the other boxes. When a schematic component is inserted. NOTE You can also change layer properties using the Project Manager tool. "CR101")
276 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. click the Drawing Format tab. Layers section. and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.

"MASTER RELAY") Layer name for child contact functional description text (a copy of the description of the parent) Layer name for parent cross-reference text Layer name for child cross-reference text Layer name for terminal pin number text Layer name for optional location and installation code text Layer name for switch position text Layer name for all other component annotation Layer name for dashed lines that can be inserted to show multiple components linked together Layer name for Location Boxes If a given layer name exists. create your symbol
Description
Description (Child)
Cross-reference Cross-reference (Child) Pin Numbers Installation/Location Positions Miscellaneous Text Dashed Link Lines
Location Box Freeze
Apply to entities on layer "0" only
Manage layers | 277
. to hide all child cross-reference text. You can also use the AutoCAD LAYER command to do the same thing. If you do not want an attribute or the graphics of a specific electrical symbol block to move to the defined AutoCAD Electrical layers.Fixed Tags
Layer name for component tags that are fixed and are not changed if processed by the retag command Layer name for parent functional description text (for example. it moves the parts and pieces of the symbol to the category layers listed in this dialog box. select Freeze next to the Cross-reference (child) edit box. As AutoCAD Electrical inserts a component. use this switch (Freeze/Thaw) to hide (freeze) all attributes on that layer. For example.

the description text to DESC. when you use the AutoCAD Electrical icon menu to insert a 2-position selector switch.
Wire Numbers Wire Copies Fixed Numbers Layer name for normal wire numbers Layer name for extra wire number copies Layer name for fixed wire numbers that do not change when other wires are renumbered Layer name for wire number copies that are part of a terminal or signal arrow symbol
Terminal/Signal
If your current layer is BORDER. If a new wire number inserts as a result of the switch breaking an existing numbered wire.
Wire Number Layers
Displays wire number layers. switch position text to POS. The lines and circles of the switch symbol automatically go to layer SYMS. and then select this switch.
Rename schematic or panel layers
Renames schematic-related layers and updates schematic drawing layer properties. while your layer BORDER is current.
Toolbar: Panel Miscellaneous Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Miscellaneous Panel Tools ➤ Rename Panel Layers
278 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
.with the entities on some layer other than 0. the wire number automatically goes to layer WIRENO.
Rename Panel Layers
Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Panel Configuration
drop-down ➤ Rename Layers. and soon. All of this happens automatically. the tag of the component to layer TAGS.

In addition to renaming the layer. Edits the selected layer name.
Manage layers | 279
. Replaces a name or substring within a layer name. the new layer name is substituted for DEMO-WIRES in the AutoCAD Electrical wire layer name list.
Find/Replace Edit
Panel component layers
Sets the panel component layers. it is modified on the fly to match the layering scheme set up in this dialog box. this also updates the AutoCAD Electrical layer assignment information carried on the drawing's WD_M block.Command entry: AERENAMEPANLELLAYER
Rename Schematic Layers
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties
drop-down ➤ Rename Layers.
Toolbar: Drawing Properties Menu: Projects ➤ Rename Schematic Layers Command entry: AERENAMELAYER The Layer Rename and Panel Layer Rename utilities make it easy to rename layers one by one. and nameplate layers.For example. When AutoCAD Electrical inserts a footprint. if DEMO-WIRES is currently assigned as an AutoCAD Electrical wire layer. or multiple layers at once by using the Find/Replace method. Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Panel Configuration
drop-down ➤ Configuration. non-text graphic layers.
Layer Name Lists the drawing layer names referenced in either the Drawing Properties dialog box or the Panel Layout Configuration dialog box. and you rename it using this utility.

and whether the wire layer is to be processed for wire numbers) are saved in
280 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. Change the layer name for a tag by entering a new name in the edit box.
Panel Component Layers Lists all of the component layers.
Non-text Graphic Layers
Nameplate Layers
F
Find/Replace
Use wire layers
The Set Wire Type tool is used for setting a wire type for new wires only. the block is inserted on the current layer if it is one of those listed in the "Non-text Graphics" layer list (wild-cards allowed). and descriptions. The wire layer name and the associated wire properties (such as wire color. the block is inserted on the first layer in the list. click the Ignore above for symbol's non-layer “0” entities toggle. Performs a global find and replace on the layer names. When a panel component is inserted.Toolbar: Panel Layout Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Panel Configuration Command entry: AEPANELCONFIG Click the Layers Setup button. (Available if a layer exists already) Freezes or thaws any of the panel layers. tags. size. Lists existing nameplate layers for the graphics. If you do not want an attribute moved to a PNL layer. Then. Attributes are moved to the layer defined for its type. If the current layer is not in this list. place that attribute on some other layer than “0” on the block.

ignoring the current layer and current wire type. The chosen wire layer for a new wire is determined by the following:
■
When a wire is created from an existing wire. The Layer Name is automatically created. the name RED_20 is assigned to the wire layer you are creating. When a new wire is started at an existing wire and ends at another existing wire. 4 If you do not want wires on this layer processed for wire numbers. the new wire takes on the layer of the beginning wire.
Create wire layers
Wire layer names for drawings are set up in the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box. 2 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box.
■
■
■
■
Use the Create/Edit Wire Type tool to create new or edit existing wire types or use the Change/Convert Wire Type tool to convert lines to wires. the new wire takes on the wire layer of the ending wire. the new wire is drawn on the current wire type instead of the layer of the wires already tied to the same component connection points. When a wire starts in empty space and ends at the component wire connection point (or vice versa). select No for the Wire Numbering option. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire
Type drop-down ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type. the new wire is drawn in the WIRES layer. When the new wire is started in empty space but ends at an existing wire.
Use wire layers | 281
.the drawing file. 3 Click inside the Size column and specify a value for the size. It ignores the current layer and the current wire type. If you specified Wire Color: Red and Size: 20. If there are no wire layers in the drawing. the new wire takes on the same layer as the existing wire. click inside the Wire Color column for a blank row and specify a value for the new wire layer.

highlight the layer in the dialog box and click Remove Layer. or Lineweight to assign new values for the layer. click Color. You can then go back into the Layers for Line "Wires" dialog box and select another layer to add. 6 Click OK. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify
Wire Type drop-down ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type. define the layer name and click OK. 6 Click OK. select No for the Wire Numbering option. 2 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box.5 Click Color. 5 If you do not want wires on this layer processed for wire numbers. NOTE If you want the new wire layer to be the default. or Lineweight to assign values for the new layer. Linetype. Linetype.
282 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. click Mark Selected as Default. click Add Existing Layer. The layer displays in the wire type grid.
Create/edit wire type
Defines and edits wire types. You can either enter a name in the edit box or click Pick to select a name from the existing layer list. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire
Type drop-down ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type. If you selected the wrong wire layer.
Add existing wire layers to the drawing
Wire layer names for drawings are set up in the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box. 3 In the Layers for Line "Wires" dialog box. 4 In the Create/Edit dialog box.

specify a new column name and click OK.
■
■
NOTE Manually maintain wire layer type consistency through signal arrows. TIP Use the Change/Convert Wire Type tool to convert lines to wires or type "T" at the command prompt during wire insertion to use the Set Wire Type tool. a blank value in this column indicates that the layer name exists in the drawing but it is not currently being used. such as wire color.
Wire type grid
Displays the wire types used in the active drawing. To rename the User1. Use the grid control to sort and select wire types to modify. If a wire network already has a non-fixed wire number. no new wire number is inserted.Toolbar: Wires Menu: Wires ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type Command entry: AEWIRETYPE The program saves the wire layer name and associated properties. the existing non-fixed wire number is updated or a new wire number is inserted. In the Project Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog box. whether the wire layer is to be processed for wire numbers. The current wire type is highlighted with a gray background. select “No” Wire Numbering for that layer. Use the Delete Wire Numbers command to remove the wire number. in the drawing file. selected wire types highlight in blue. If any wire in the network is on a layer set “Yes” for Wire Numbering. You cannot rename the
Use wire layers | 283
. Wire Type section.User 20 column headers. The Insert Wire Numbers command follows these rules:
■
If all wires in the network are on layers set “No” for Wire Numbering. Renaming of user-defined columns is project-specific. The wire layer name and the wire properties like color. If you do not want wire numbers assigned to wires on a specific layer. size. right-click the project name in the Project Manager and select Properties. and whether the wire layer is to be processed for wire numbers. size. it is updated regardless of the Wire Numbering setting. and user-defined properties are listed in the grid. click Rename User Columns. In the Rename User Columns dialog box. An “x” in the Used column indicates that the layer name is currently used in the drawing.

Paste. You cannot delete or remove a layer if it is the default layer. or Layer Name columns. Size. you can deselect this option if you later decide you want some layers to be wire layers and others to be line layers. Placeholders are supported at any place in the format (that is. The program should fill the layer name automatically once you enter a value in color. You can move the wire type records inside the grid to whatever position you want using drag and drop. Cut. Once you select to make all of the layers valid wire layers. Select the wire type records to move and drag to the new position in the grid. You can select multiple layers to edit or remove by using the Shift or Ctrl keys on your keyboard while picking the wire layer in the wire type list.
Layer
Allows you to format the layer name. define or edit the layer color. linetype. and pasted to another column. Add layers again using the Add Existing Layer option. cut.Color. For example if you enter BLK for color and 10AWG for size. Right-click options include: Copy.
Layer Name Format Format the layer name. If you want to rename a layer. and Rename Layer. Delete Layer. and line weight. Valid wire name format codes are: ■ %C = Wire Color
284 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. All of the data corresponding to the header column can be copied. size based on the format. All text fields are editable except for the Layer Name cell. Left-click to edit the cell or right-click in a cell to display options for modifying the cell contents. It cannot be edited for existing layers. then the layer name is filled in automatically as BLK_10AWG based on default %C_%S format. right-click on a cell and select Rename Layer.
Option
Make All Lines Valid Wires Makes all existing layers valid wire layers and displays them in the wire type grid. All the layers are removed from the wire type grid. "CUST%C-THIN%S).

The default color for new records is white. You can also click Pick to select the layer name from the existing layer list that consists of all the layers in the drawing inclusive of the non-wire layers. Enter a wire layer name in the dialog box. All wire layers that were selected can be changed to the color. The default lineweight for new records is default. Displays the Layers for Line Wires dialog box for specifying a layer name. Undefined colors for layers use the default color while creating the layer. Multiple selection is allowed. Multiple selection is allowed. Undefined linetypes for layers use the default linetype while creating the layer.lin text file. NOTE If you need special linetypes for constructing P&ID or point to point diagrams. Only lines on pre-selected layers are processed as wires.User 5
Color
Displays the AutoCAD dialog box for Layer colors election. The Lineweight dialog box highlights the lineweight corresponding to the wire type record. A wildcard used in the name selects a group of layers
Add Existing Layer
Use wire layers | 285
. All wire layers that were selected can be changed to the desired linetype. Multiple selection is allowed.■ ■
%S = Wire Size %1-%5 = User 1 .
Linetype
Lineweight
Displays the AutoCAD dialog box for lineweight selection. Displays the AutoCAD dialog box for linetype selection. Undefined lineweights for layers should use the default lineweight while creating the layer. This Select Linetype dialog box highlights the linetype corresponding to the wire type record. All wire layers that were selected can be changed to the desired lineweight. The Select Color dialog box highlights the color corresponding to the wire type record. The default linetype for new records is continuous. load the special linetypes from theacade.

? * | .(for example. the wire layer is created on the fly and the wire layer name and properties are saved in the drawing file. = ' ><
286 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. In order for the layer to create the following rules apply:
■ ■ ■
The layer name must be unique The layer name cannot be left blank The layer name cannot contain special characters such as / \ " : . If multiple layers of one color exist in the drawing. you must select all three layers in the wire type grid to enable the button. For example. Remove Layer Removes the selected layer name from the wire type grid. if there are multiple RED* layers such as RED_AWG18.
Mark Selected as Default
Makes the selected layer the default layer for new wire layers and displays the layer name in the dialog box. Makes the selected wire type the current wire type.and RED_AWG25.
OK
NOTE This is available only when one wire type record is selected in the list. NOTE Only unused layers in the active drawing can be deleted. you must select all layers of that color in the wire type grid to activate this button. The layer is no longer a valid wire layer. however the layer remains in the drawing as an AutoCAD line layer. RED_AWG20. If the selected wire type does not exist on the drawing. RED_* selects all layers that begin with "RED_").

Use the following commands:
■
Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Insert Wires drop-down ➤ Wire. the current wire type displays at the command prompt. 3 Make any selections in the dialog box. all wires in the wire network are changed to the new wire type. If Convert Lines to Wires is selected. the selected lines are changed to the new wire type. only the selected wire is changed.Change wire types
Change wire types
You can change the wire type using the Change/Convert Wire Type tool or by typing a "T" at the command prompt during wire insertion commands. you can right-click on an existing wire and select Change/Convert Wire Type. the wire type corresponding to the selected wire layer is highlighted in the list. If unselected.
Change wire types | 287
. If unselected. Optionally. 2 In the Change/Convert Wire Type dialog box.
Override wire type at command prompt
During wire insertion. If you right-clicked on a wire and selected Change/Convert Wire Type. If Change all wires in the wire network is selected. 4 Click OK. or click Pick to select a wire type record from the drawing. in the Change/Convert Wire Type dialog box. The new wire type becomes the current wire type and the command continues with the wire insertion. 5 Select the wires or lines in the drawing to change and press Enter. select a wire type record in the wire type list. the lines are ignored. You can override this by typing in the hot key "T" and selecting a new wire type from the Set Wire Type dialog box. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel ➤ Modify Wire
Type drop-down ➤ Change/Convert Wire Type.

it is updated regardless of the Wire Numbering setting. The wire layer name and the wire properties like color. no new wire number is inserted. In the Rename User Columns dialog box.
■
■
NOTE You should manually maintain wire layer type consistency through signal arrows. whether the wire layer is to be processed for wire numbers. A “No” in the Wire Numbering column indicates that wires on this layer will not receive a wire number. In the Project Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog box.User 20 column headers.
Change wire types | 289
. If any wire in the network is on a layer set “Yes” for Wire Numbering. cut. you can add the layer where the line resides to the list of valid wire layers. A new wire type record is created automatically. Wire Type section. Renaming of user-defined columns is project-specific. If a wire network already has a non-fixed wire number. Once you pick a wire. specify a new column name and click OK. or Layer Name columns. Use the Delete Wire Numbers command to remove the wire number. If you pick a line in the active drawing. a blank value in this column indicates that the layer name exists in the drawing but it is not currently being used. To rename the User1. and user-defined properties are listed in the grid. You cannot rename the Color. The Insert Wire Numbers command follows these rules:
■
If all wires in the network are on layers set “No” for Wire Numbering. the existing non-fixed wire number is updated or a new wire number is inserted. size.
Pick
Allows you to pick a wire or line in the active drawing. the corresponding wire type record is highlighted. and pasted to another column. right-click the project name in the Project Manager and select Properties. All of the data corresponding to the header column can be copied. Size.Wire type grid
Displays the wire types used in the active drawing. click Rename User Columns. An 'x' in the Used column indicates that the layer name is currently used in the drawing.

size. whether the wire layer is to be processed for wire numbers. TIP Use the Create/Edit Wire Type tool to create and edit wire types or the Change/Convert Wire Type tool to convert lines to wires.Change/Convert
Change All Wire(s) in the Network Changes all the wires in the wire network to the selected wire type record. If unselected.
Convert Line(s) to Wire(s)
OK
NOTE This is available only when one wire type record is selected in the list. Type "T" at the command prompt during wire insertion. The wire layer name and the wire properties like color. = ' ><
Set wire type
This tool sets wire types for new wires. If the selected wire type does not already exist on the drawing. and user-defined properties are listed in the grid. Makes the selected wire type the current wire type. Changes the lines to the selected wire type in the wire type grid. a blank value in this column indicates that the layer name exists in the drawing but it is not currently being used. An 'x' in the Used column indicates that the layer name is currently used in the drawing.
Wire type grid
Displays the wire types used in the active drawing.
290 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. ? * | . In order for the layer to create the following rules apply:
■ ■ ■
The layer name must be unique The layer name cannot be left blank The layer name cannot contain special characters such as / \ " : . only a single wire is changed to the selected wire type. the wire layer is created on the fly and the wire layer name and properties are saved in the drawing file. Use the grid control to sort and select the wire types for easy modification.

If a wire network already has a non-fixed wire number.
OK
NOTE This is available only when one wire type record is selected in the list.User 20 column headers. If any wire in the network is on a layer set “Yes” for Wire Numbering. The Insert Wire Numbers command follows these rules:
■
If all wires in the network are on layers set “No” for Wire Numbering.
■
■
NOTE You should manually maintain wire layer type consistency through signal arrows.
Change wire types | 291
. Use the Delete Wire Numbers command to remove the wire number. it is updated regardless of the Wire Numbering setting. the wire layer is created on the fly and the wire layer name and properties are saved in the drawing file. The layer name cannot contain special characters such as / \ " : . To rename the User1. and pasted to another column. Makes the selected wire type the current wire type. the existing non-fixed wire number is updated or a new wire number is inserted. ? * | . In the Project Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog box. All of the data corresponding to the header column can be copied. click Rename User Columns. the following rules apply:
■ ■ ■
The layer name must be unique. = ' > <. You cannot rename the Color. no new wire number is inserted. Size. Wire Type section. If the selected wire type does not exist on the drawing. or Layer Name columns. Renaming of user-defined columns is project-specific.A “No” in the Wire Numbering column indicates that wires on this layer will not receive a wire number. The layer name cannot be left blank. In the Rename User Columns dialog box. right-click the project name in the Project Manager and select Properties. For the layer to create. specify a new column name and click OK. cut.

For a given project. you can assign the appropriate ENV file to the project. The ENV file name reference is saved in the WDP drawing list file of the project.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. Customer-specific ENV files can be created to store customer settings.
292 | Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties
. the settings in the referenced ENV file are automatically restored. click Environment file. and menus. Whenever the project is selected. On the Current Settings dialog box. paths.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT Right-click the project name and select Settings. libraries.Optional ENV file assignment for current project
Optional ENV file assignment for current project
You can create an alternate environment settings ENV file and assign it to the active project.

Add the appropriate library path as a prefix to this block name to obtain the path to the ". Here is an example of how the data looks in this file.
293
.Symbol Libraries
5
Determine symbol block names
The symbol folder on page 218 contains hundreds of component symbols in standard AutoCAD ".dwg" file of the symbol.dwg" file format. The default library path is
■
Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\ Windows Vista: \Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\
■
METHOD B
The icon menu on page 218 file lists the symbol descriptions and file names of all components referenced in the AutoCAD Electrical icon menuing system. "On delay coil | S2(SHTD1N) | HTD1N". You can pick the symbol names from this file. They are referenced by AutoCAD Electrical and its icon menuing system and are inserted as standard AutoCAD blocks with attributes. There are two ways to determine the block name of an existing symbol:
METHOD A
Insert the symbol from the AutoCAD Electrical icon menu and then use the AutoCAD LIST command to display the block name.

LIM LT. the file name of the library symbol is htd1n. follow the naming convention outlined in the following section if you create new AutoCAD Electrical-smart symbols for use with AutoCAD Electrical. The next two characters are "W0.
Cable Marker Symbols
AutoCAD Electrical cable conductor marker symbols follow this convention:
■ ■
The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion.
Library Symbol Naming Conventions
Overview of symbol naming conventions
AutoCAD Electrical depends on a specific naming convention to enable some of its automation features to work. You can select a different name for a component family by creating or editing the WD_FAM. The remaining characters are not specified." Use the RETAG command to update previously inserted components. to limit switches be tagged "LIM" instead of "LS" and you want pilot lights to be "PL" instead of "LT".dat file. the second in a slide-library reference. New limit switch components you insert receive the "LIM" family code annotation instead of the library default of "LS. In this example.PL The change takes effect when you exit and reload AutoCAD Electrical. Though not mandatory. The vertical version of this symbol is vtd1n.dwg. and the third is the actual symbol file name." A zero (0) means that the symbol does not trigger a wire number change through it. The fourth character is either 1 or 2: "1" for parent marker or "2" for child marker. For example. Custom symbols can take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical features. The first piece is the description that appears in the side bar of the menu.The "|" characters divide the entry into three sections." and pilot lights are tagged with "PL" instead of "LT.dwg. you would add the following two lines to the file (or create the file if it does not exist): LS.
■
■
294 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
.

If the symbol is a contact. horizontal wire insertion Child cable marker. T0 for terminals. vertical wire insertion Child cable marker.dwg HCR21. vertical rung insertion Horizontal relay contact. a 0 in the overall symbol name) means that the symbol does not trigger a wire number change through it.dwg VW02. vertical wire insertion
Components .dwg Control relay coil. and discrete motor control devices (but not PLC I/O symbols) follow this naming convention:
■
32-character block name maximum.Examples:
HW01. switches. They are used to keep names unique. PB for push buttons. (For example. horizontal wire insertion Parent cable conductor marker.dwg HW02.dwg Parent cable conductor marker.) The fourth character is generally a 1 or a 2: 2 for child contacts and 1 for everything else (parent or standalone component). A zero (0) as the second character of the family type (for example.O.
■
■
■
■
Examples:
HCR1. horizontal rung insertion Control relay coil. 2 for normally closed.dwg VCR1. N. pilot lights. The remaining characters are not specified. C0 for connectors. W0 for cable markers. then the fifth character is a 1 for normally open. The next two characters are reserved for family type (for example. first character is either "H" or "V" for horizontal or vertical wire insertion.
Overview of symbol naming conventions | 295
. CR for control relays.dwg VW01.General
Schematic components such as relays. LS for limit switches).

but for a ladder that lies on its side. The fifth character is "_" The sixth character is 1-9 for the style number. user-defined alternative to WD_MLRH. The next two characters are "CN" for connector.dwg HCN1_11J. AutoCAD Electrical uses this symbol name when you select 'User Block' from the Line Reference Numbers subdialog box of the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box (on the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box. J = Jack (Receptacle) (Only) specifies the wire direction: 1 = right.single (plug) wiring connects from left or bottom Vertical child . 4 = left.dwg Horizontal parent . 2 = top.dwg
Overview of symbol naming conventions | 297
.dwg
Optional.
NOTE The ladder line reference block used by AutoCAD Electrical is determined by the ladder reference configuration selected in the Format Referencing section of the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box.single (plug) wiring connects from left or bottom Horizontal parent .
Connector Symbols
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal or vertical orientation. The fourth character is either 1 or 2: 1 for parent or 2 for child.WD_MLRHX. The seventh character: (Combo) specifies the plug or jack ID: P = Plug. select Reference Numbers and click Setup). and 8 = bottom.dwg. Format Referencing section.
■
The eighth character is either "P" or "J": P = Plug.
WD_MLRVX.dwg
Same as previous symbol. J = Jack (Receptacle)
Examples:
HCN1_14P.single (receptacle) wiring connects from right or top
VCN2_18P.

HCN1_14P_nnn Horizontal connector. Each connector is labeled with a unique naming convention within the same project.
298 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. The next three characters are "T0_" The remaining characters are undefined.dwg Horizontal standalone cylinder. The next two characters are the first two letters of the family name (for example. It can be small.VCN2_12P. but it must be present for AutoCAD Electrical to correctly "see" the in-line inserted block as it traces the wire network. plunger_cyl is the meaningful name for the symbol
Inline Wire Marker Symbols
Construct dumb inline wire marker symbols with a tiny piece of "pigtail" line entity at each connection point. CY for cylinders. Use "_" and enter a meaningful name corresponding to the symbol. where “nnn” is a random number for uniqueness
VCN1_18P_nnn
Hydraulic Symbols
The maximum number of characters for the block name is 32.single (plug) wiring connects from right or top
Upon completion of the parametric build connector. FI for filters.
■ ■
The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical. PM for pumps).stand-alone component.dwg
Vertical child . where “nnn” is a random number for uniqueness Vertical connector. See Overview of Hydraulic and P&ID on page 312symbols for a list of symbol family names. Inline wire marker symbols follow this naming convention:
■ ■ ■
The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion.
■ ■
Example:
HCYL1_plunger_cyl. a unique new block definition is created. The fourth character is "1" for hydraulic symbols .

each marking the point where that part of the dual circuit starts. The following bus-tap symbols are supplied:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
HDV1_BT_1-. To make the symbol names unique.
Overview of symbol naming conventions | 299
. However.Example:
HT0_RED.with “dot” for vertical one-line circuit HDV1_BTT_1-. These bus-tap symbols allow various reports to accurately report on a one-line circuit. There is another version of the symbol on each of the two circuit "legs".dwg .dwg "RED" inline marker. Break into the one-line bus where the circuit connects.dwg . the one-line symbol block names have a “1-” suffix. whether a single circuit or a dual circuit representation. One at the normal point where the circuit ties into the bus. The bus-tap symbol can have two functions:
■
Provide an anchor point for the one-line circuit representation that begins at this point.dwg .“tee” connection for dual horizontal circuit VDV1_BTT_1-.dwg .
■
On a dual circuit one-line template. horizontal wire insert
One-line Symbols
One-line symbols follow the same naming convention as schematic parent and child symbols. or a value of “1-1” for a one-line bus-tap symbol.dwg .dwg . A one-line symbol is defined by the existence of a WDTYPE attribute on page 335 with a value of “1-” on the symbol. there are three of these.with “dot” for horizontal one-line circuit VDV1_BT_1-. the symbol name does not define the symbol as a one-line symbol.“corner” connection for dual vertical circuit
NOTE A bus-tap symbol is identified by a WDTYPE attribute with a “1-1” value.“corner” connection for dual horizontal circuit VDV1_BTL_1-.“tee” connection for dual vertical circuit HDV1_BTL_1-.

dwg VT0_TW. but the name must adhere to the AutoCAD 32-character block name limit. See Overview of Hydraulic and P&ID symbols on page 312 for a list of symbol family names.
Parametric Twisted Pair Symbols
A parametrically generated twisted pair representation consists to two instances of the same symbol (there are no parent/child versions).dwg Horizontal parametric connector symbol Vertical parametric connector symbol
300 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. The fourth character is "1" for P&ID symbols ." Parametric twisted pair symbols follow this naming convention:
■
The first four characters are "HT0_" or "VT0_" for horizontal or vertical parametric symbols. IN for instruments. The remaining characters can be anything (default is set to "TW")
■
Examples:
HT0_TW. Use "_" and enter a meaningful name corresponding to the symbol.dwg Vertical standalone cyclone. This symbol must carry attribute ACE_FLAG with a value of "3. ver_tank is the meaningful name for the symbol
Panel Layout Footprint Symbols
There is not a required naming convention to follow.P&ID Symbols
The maximum number of characters for the block name is 32.stand-alone component. GV for diaphragm valves. The next two characters are the first two letters of the family name (for example.
■ ■
Example:
VTK1_ver_tank. N for nozzles).
■ ■
The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical.

The digit corresponds to the selected PLC module style or look. "002".PLC I/O Parametric Build Symbols
These symbols begin with "HP" or "VP" (horizontal rung versus vertical) followed by a digit 1 through 9. The remaining characters are not specified. or "CN" if the connector DOES trigger a wire number change. (The "0" means that the wire number does not change.dwg Horizontal splice #1 Vertical splice #1 Horizontal splice #3
Overview of symbol naming conventions | 301
. "003. 6 through 9 can be user-defined).
■
Examples:
HSP1001. The fifth through seventh characters are "001".dwg VSP1001.) The fourth character is either 1 or 2: 1 for parent marker or a 2 for child marker. The next two characters are "C0" if the connector does not trigger a wire number change through it.
■
■
Splice Symbols
Splices follow this naming convention:
■
The first four characters are "HSP1" or "VSP1" for horizontal or vertical splices." and so on.
Plug/Jack Connector Pin Symbols
AutoCAD Electrical connector symbols follow this convention:
■ ■
The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion.dwg HSP1003. (1 through 5 are provided in the AutoCAD Electrical library.

set the default arrow style to "5" in the Drawing Properties ➤ Styles dialog box. For example. copy Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\jic1\ha1s*.dwg to ha5s*.dwg and Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\jic1\ha1d*.dwg to ha5d*.dwg AB 1761 model L16-AWA with 0.
■
You can create your own arrow styles using these unused digits (for example. The "?" character is the arrow style digit (1 through 4 are provided in the AutoCAD Electrical library and 5 through 9 can be user-defined). HA5S. single wire connection
Standalone Terminal Symbols
Stand-alone terminals follow this naming convention:
■ ■
The first two characters are "HT..Source/Destination Wire Signal Arrow Symbols
AutoCAD Electrical wire signal arrow symbols follow this convention:
■
The first four characters of these symbol names are either "HA?S" for source signal arrows or "HA?D" for destination symbol arrows. Characters 5 through 11 can be user-defined.5 unit rung spacing Standalone input point.
Stand-alone PLC I/O Point Symbols
These symbols begin with "PLCIO" and can be up to 32 characters long. to access your new arrow style.dwg." The third character is "0" if the wire number does not change through the terminal. Standalone Cross-reference Symbols: Same naming convention as the Source/Destination Signal symbols (that is.)..dwg PLCIOI1T.. "1" if the terminal symbol should trigger a wire number change. and HA5D. Then. There is no naming convention referenced by AutoCAD Electrical other than the "PLCIO" prefix. HA?S* and HA?D*) but without a WIRENO attribute present on the symbol.. Examples:
PLCIO50E1761-L16AWA. Access each copied arrow symbols in AutoCAD and edit to suit.
302 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
.

" The remaining characters can be user-defined. wire number does not change Same as previous symbol. but wire number changes through the terminal Dumb. below.
Wire Dot Symbols
AutoCAD Electrical expects this symbol name to be "WDDOT. Examples:
WD_WNH. the fourth through eighth character positions of the symbol file name are user-defined. The origin of the block insert lies on its wire with the wire number attribute floating above.dwg. Otherwise.dwg HT1001. no wire number change
HT0_01.dwg
User-defined Symbols
AutoCAD Electrical user-defined symbols follow this convention:
■ ■ ■
The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion.
Examples:
HT0001.dwg Square terminal with annotation. unannotated terminal symbol). square terminal with no annotation. The next two characters are "ZA" through "ZZ.■
The fourth character is an underscore (_) if the terminal carries no attributes for AutoCAD Electrical to process (such as a dumb."
Wire Number Symbols
An AutoCAD Electrical wire number is a block insert consisting of a single wire number attribute. or off to the side of the insertion point of the block.dwg WD_WNV.dwg Wire number for horizontal wire insertion Wire number for vertical wire insertion
Overview of symbol naming conventions | 303
.

short wire number Inline wire number marker. short wire number Inline wire number. CR for control relays. vertical wire insertion. PB for push buttons. Family Type
AM AN BA BV
Description
Ammeters Buzzers.dwg
Family type
The second and third characters of the symbol name are reserved for family type (for example. vertical wire insertion. longer wire number Inline wire number marker.dwg WD_WCV. LS for limit switches). bells Batteries Ball Valves
304 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. An inline wire marker has a block name that follows that of a terminal symbol that does not trigger a wire number change. medium wire width.dwg Inline wire number marker.dwg
Extra wire number copy for horizontal wire Extra wire number copy for vertical wire
AutoCAD Electrical also supports inline wire numbers that follow the value of the main wire number. horizontal wire insertion. The family type can be used to determine the catalog lookup table name on page 1305 and the tag name for a component.dwg
VT0_W2. Examples:
HT0_W1. horizontal wire insertion. The library symbols supplied with AutoCAD Electrical use the following family types.WD_WCH. horns. vertical wire insertion
HT0_W3.dwg
VT0_W1.

TAG1_PARTX (as well as TAG2_PART1. T1 TC TD TS VM VR WO XF
Description
Solenoids Toggle switches Terminals Thermocouples Timer relays Temperature switches Volt meters Variable resistors Cables.
Split a tag name into two pieces | 307
. 3 Add a new attribute definition TAG1_PART2. TG T0. 2 Rename the TAG1 attribute definition to read TAG1_PART1. TAG2_PART2.Family Type
SV SW. TAG1_PART2. You can create drawings with a mix of both symbols having split tags and other symbols carrying just the single TAG1 or TAG2 attribute. position one piece above the other on the symbol. TAG2_PARTX) are alternatives to TAG1 and TAG2 that allow you to split a tag name into two pieces and. multi-conductor cables Transformers
Split a tag name into two pieces
Split a tag name into two pieces
TAG1_PART1.dwg library symbol drawing that you want to modify. 1 Open up the . for example.

4 Position both attribute definitions inside of the circle graphics of the symbol (one above the other). If a parent symbol has split tag attributes. For example: C:/Documents and Settings/All Users/Documents/Autodesk/Acade {version}/Libs/. Enter the names of the libraries (in order) with a semicolon between them. You cannot have duplicate symbols in the various symbol libraries. add attribute definition TAG1_PARTX to the library symbol and mark it "invisible". right-click the project name inside the Project Manager. or other schematic libraries in the path. and you do not want the delimiter to show on one part or the other of the visible tag. related child symbols can have split tag attributes and vice versa. and another an IEC-style library. You can also include a series of library paths for AutoCAD Electrical to use. To set a symbol library to use for a particular project.C:/{user path}/{user library}. Each symbol library set must be in its own subdirectory. AutoCAD Electrical stores the delimiter of the split tag in the attribute. pneumatic. NOTE You can include electrical. click the plus sign (+) next to Schematic Libraries or Panel Footprint Libraries. related child symbols do NOT have to have split tag attributes. Click Add and enter the path of the library into the edit box or click Default to use the default libraries. The default value character string of the symbol for the tag should be annotated as a default value on the TAG1_PART1 attribute definition. In the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box. but adhere to the AutoCAD Electrical file naming convention. and select Properties.
Use multiple symbol libraries
You can select the library you want to use for each project. 5 For instances where there is a delimiter between the character and number parts of a tag. AutoCAD Electrical automatically splits tags like CR104 and 104CR into two pieces (where characters split from numbers to letters) and apply the pieces to these attributes. NOTE If a parent symbol has the single TAG1 attribute. With this setup. One project might require a JIC-style library.
308 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
.

wdp file is located. 7 Checks the current directory. 2 Checks for the specific file name if a full path name is provided. 2 From the Add or Remove Programs dialog box.
Set a symbol library as the default
1 Exit AutoCAD Electrical. 4 Checks in the directory where the active project's . you specified which symbol libraries to install.it is the library selected per the active project. You can install additional symbol libraries later. 4 On the Add/Remove Features page. 8 Checks the path given by the AutoCAD Electrical environment variable. select the latest version of AutoCAD Electrical and click the Change/Remove button. 6 On the Select Symbol Libraries page.AutoCAD Electrical search sequence
AutoCAD Electrical runs through specific search sequences when looking for your symbols. 7 Click Next to continue. 5 On the Manufacturer Content Selection page. click Next. 3 Checks in your user subdirectory (given by the WD_USER setting in the .
How to install additional symbol libraries
During installation.env file). select the libraries you wish to install and click Next. click Next.
Use multiple symbol libraries | 309
. click Add or Remove Features. 1 Looks on the drawing for a copy of the requested symbol. 3 On the AutoCAD Electrical Installation Wizard. 6 Checks the directory containing AutoCAD Electrical support files. 1 From the Control Panel select Add or Remove Programs. 5 Checks in the selected library -.

n:/elec/syms/. For example if the path to your new default library is now n:/elec/syms.env) file. Attribute
WDTYPE
Description
The attribute must be present and carry a value of “1-” to indicate it is a one-line symbol. WD_LIB." 5 Edit this line to reflect the path of your default library.AutoCAD Electrical symbols 6 Save and close the file. child. These one-line symbols use the same attributes as the schematic parent. 3 Open the . right-click a project name inside the Project Manager. Another method is to use an AutoCAD Electrical variable in the WD_LIB line of the . change the line to read: WD_LIB.env file. or “1-1” for the one-line bus-tap symbols. To find the full name and path of your environment (. A bus-tap symbol is used to mark the beginning of a one-line circuit. child.
310 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
.%ACAD_SUP_LAST%.AutoCAD Electrical symbols
Overview of one-line symbols
The one-line symbol library consists of all the one-line symbols and is found under
■
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\{library}\1Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\{library}\1-
■
A one-line symbol can be a parent. or terminal.2 Make a back-up copy of your environment (.env file in a text editor such as Wordpad. and terminal symbols but with the following exceptions.AutoCAD Electrical symbols WD_LIB. You could use %ACAD_SUP_LAST% or %ACAD_SUP_FIRST% to point to the last (or first) path defined in your AutoCAD Options ➤ Files ➤ Support file path.%ACAD_SUP_FIRST%. 4 Look for a line in the environment file that begins with "WD_LIB. and select Settings.env) file.

For convenience. It allows the design of one-line circuits. It means that they can be Surfed together and update each other when one is modified. terminal number text on one-line terminal symbols are not linked back to terminal number assignments on schematic or panel terminal representations. However. This is defined by the WDTYPE attribute on page 335 value of “1-” on the symbol. it can be edited in the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box. Tagging of schematic or panel components using existing commands can reference a pick list that includes components pulled from the one-line diagrams. Certain component and Bill of Material reports can report only one-line diagram components. NOTE One-line terminals are not processed by Terminal Strip Editor. If a TERM01 attribute is added to a one-line symbol and carries a nonblank value.
TERM01
One-line symbols follow the same naming convention as schematic parent and child symbols. to conform to a given electrical code.
RATING1
Omitted from one-line cable markers symbols since a one-line cable marker can represent multiple conductors. However.
■ ■
Motor control one-line symbols are accessible from the icon menu. or core color assignments. Circuit Builder supports building motor control one-line circuits dynamically. One-line component symbols can be related to parent/child counterparts on the schematic and panel layout drawings within a project. with component values and wire sizes. the one-line symbols provided have a “1-” suffix. Omitted from one-line terminal symbols since a one-line terminal can represent multiple independent terminals. or a “1-1” on a one-line symbol.
■
■
■
Overview of one-line symbols | 311
. the symbol name does not define the symbol as a one-line symbol. multiple wires.Attribute
Description
Schematic symbols do not carry this attribute or have the attribute but with a blank value.

dwg . The following bus-tap symbols are supplied:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
HDV1_BT_1-. Break into the one-line bus where the circuit connects.“corner” connection for dual horizontal circuit VDV1_BTL_1-.dwg .dwg .dwg .with “dot” for horizontal one-line circuit VDV1_BT_1-.dwg .“tee” connection for dual horizontal circuit VDV1_BTT_1-. There is another version of the symbol on each of the two circuit "legs".with “dot” for vertical one-line circuit HDV1_BTT_1-. whether a single circuit or a dual circuit representation. there are three of these.“tee” connection for dual vertical circuit HDV1_BTL_1-.“corner” connection for dual vertical circuit
NOTE A bus-tap symbol is identified by a WDTYPE attribute with a “1-1” value.
Overview of Hydraulic and P&ID symbols
The hydraulic symbol library consists of all the hydraulic symbols and is found under
■
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\hyd_iso125 Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\hyd_iso125
■
312 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
.
■
On a dual circuit one-line template. These bus-tap symbols allow various reports to accurately report on a one-line circuit. each marking the point where that part of the dual circuit starts.dwg . One at the normal point where the circuit ties into the bus.Bus-tap symbols
The bus-tap symbol can have two functions:
■
Provide an anchor point for the one-line circuit representation that begins at this point.

INS FLW. NOTE When a component is marked with a fixed tag. this attribute name is automatically changed with a "F" suffix (that is.
Schematic parent and child components
Attribute
TAG1
Description
(Parent only) Attribute for required component tag name (64 characters maximum). The default value you assign to this attribute definition becomes the family code character string AutoCAD Electrical uses to build the tag name of the component when the block is inserted into your schematic. FE
Instrumentation Flow
Attribute Requirements
Schematic attributes
Overview of schematic attributes
The following items are attribute requirements for various categories of schematic symbols. This default value character string is used as the Family Code (%F) portion of the tag format code of the drawing you set up in the Drawing Properties dialog box. Example: The TAG1 attribute definition on the symbol carries a default value of "MCR" and the tag format of the drawing is "%F%N" where %N is the placeholder for the line reference number or next sequential number. it is automatically assigned a tag name with an "MCR" prefix tacked on to the reference or next sequential number. As each instance of this symbol is inserted. TAG1 ➤ TAG1F). Some attributes are used in multiple categories.
Attribute Requirements | 315
.

not child contact symbols. it is saved on the inserted symbol as Xdata. (Parent only) Alternate to using a single TAG1 attribute (64 characters maximum). "MCR" or "PB" or "X")."
TAG1_PART1 TAG1_PART2
TAG2_PART1 TAG2_PART2 COPYTAG
(Child only) Same as previous but for child components (64 characters maximum). If these attributes are not present and AutoCAD Electrical stores the additional part number information. Attribute used to hold manufacturer name or code (24 characters maximum). is carried on the TAG1_PART1 piece of the attribute pair. NOTE MFG.MFG10: Optional invisible attributes for manufacturer name or code for up to 10 additional "Multiple Catalog" part number assignments (24 characters maximum each). then a third attribute definition marked invisible. "MOT-123" but just show "MOT" and "123"). This allows the component tag name to be split into two pieces (example: two lines . To include a delimiter character in the tag name but not show it on the drawing (for example.TAG1 or the split tag attribute combination (64 characters maximum). MFG01 . CAT. as described in TAG1 previously. AutoCAD Electrical pastes the values on these two attributes together when it processes the component. This attribute usually marked as invisible.Attribute
TAG2
Description
(Child only) This is a copy of the parent component's tag name of the component (64 characters maximum). and ASSYCODE generally appear on parent components only."MDOT" on first line and "123" on the second line for a full tag name of "MOT123"). Optional attribute that can carry a copy of whatever AutoCAD Electrical assigns to the tag name attribute . If a component with a split tag is marked as Fixed. the attribute names are automatically changed to "TAG1F_PART1" and "TAG1F_PART2. "TAG1_PARTX" can be added to carry the dash delimiter. NOTE The default for the %F tagging parameter.
MFG
316 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. If no parent tag is found then AutoCAD Electrical displays the attribute default value of the definition (for example.

On a family mismatch. 24 characters maximum). the default value of the FAMILY attribute definition is the same as the default value for the TAG1 or TAG2 attribute of the component. Optional component installation code (for example.
ASSYCODE
FAMILY
DESC1 DESC2 DESC3
INST
Schematic attributes | 317
. "M".CAT10: Optional invisible attributes for catalog number code for up to 10 additional "Multiple Catalog" part number assignments (60 characters maximum each). Invisible attribute that carries the components family type (for example. This attribute is usually marked as invisible. "PB". Generally. The value for this attribute is set automatically when you make a selection from the catalog lookup that carries subassembly information. it is saved on the inserted symbol as Xdata. Invisible attribute for optional subassembly code that causes AutoCAD Electrical to look for subassembly items to extract into BOM reports (60 characters maximum). DESC2: second line of description text. It is used as a check at the time child components are linked to a parent. Define these subassembly items in the active catalog lookup file in the ASSYCODE and ASSYLIST fields. CAT01 . A generic child device can be linked to any type of parent symbol if the Family attribute value of the child is left blank. If these attributes are not present and AutoCAD Electrical stores the additional part number information. AutoCAD Electrical fills it in on the fly with the FAMILY code of the parent when the link is made. an alert dialog box displays.ASSYCODE10: Optional invisible attributes for subassembly code for up to 10 additional Multiple Catalog part number assignments (24 characters maximum each). it is saved on the inserted symbol as Xdata. ASSYCODE01 .Attribute
CAT
Description
Attribute used to hold catalog part number assignment (60 characters maximum). first or only line of description text (60 characters maximum). If these attributes are not present and AutoCAD Electrical stores the additional part number information. "CR". DESC1: Description. DESC3: third line of description text. eight characters maximum). "MACH1". "TD".

NOTE If XREF is not present then non-NO/NC contacts are included with the XREFNO annotation. Optional contact state character string to denote relationship between switch positions and open/closed contact state. Use this attribute in two ways. then this XREF attribute is used to carry undefined. Use "NULL" as the value of the contact attribute to exclude the contact from being included in any AutoCAD Electrical cross-reference text annotation. 16 characters maximum). the first PINLIST value is assigned to TERM01 and the second to TERM02. "FIELD". AutoCAD Electrical underlines the closed contacts. If XREFNO and XREFNC are present. (Parent only) Attributes to hold normally open and normally closed cross-reference annotation. The attribute value is a two character string. If this attribute does not exist on the symbol. You can leave the default value blank and then fill it in at component insertion time. It is for display only.Attribute
LOC
Description
Optional component location code (for example.) Optional attribute that defines which TERMxx attribute receives the first PINLIST value. You can leave the default value blank and then fill it in at component insertion time. Attribute to mark switch position text where "n" is the position number digit (POS1 through POS12.
COMMON
POSn
STATE
318 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. for example “02”. non-NO/NC references. These attributes automatically switch to invisible if graphical cross-referencing is applied to the component symbol. "NO" or "NC" or any text string with an embedded "NO" or "NC" such as "NO-TC". 24 characters maximum).
XREFNO XREFNC
XREF
CONTACT
Invisible attribute present when the symbol is a contact. that matches with one of the TERMxx attributes found on the symbol. The value of this attribute is the de-energized state of the contact (for example. "JBOX2" . Use it for a combined list of normally open and normally closed contacts.

an instrument drawing might be included in an AutoCAD Electrical project drawing set with a valve marked "FY201". These assignments can be pulled into various AutoCAD Electrical reports. (Parent only) Like previous attribute. but has a parent coil and a peer reversing coil. inserting the peer reversing coil and referencing the parent. Then. The "?" is a digit that indicates the preferred link line connection direction and follows the wire connection convention (see X?TERMn). For example. Each is to receive its own unique pin list. RATING1 through RATING12) on the component symbol. instrument drawing or pneumatic drawing vs. It stores the cross-reference tag name of a related symbol shown on a different drawing type (for example. electrical schematic. Optional invisible attribute that allows AutoCAD Electrical to tie in dashed link lines automatically between related components (instead of cross-reference annotation). The catalog lookup assignment pulls both sets of pin lists to the parent. For example. On the electrical schematics. If this attribute is not present then any related pin list data is automatically stored on the symbol as Xdata. the solenoid for this instrument valve is tagged "SV456". the pin list of the peer is retrieved from this temporary storage attribute (or Xdata) on the parent and pulled over to the peer.Attribute
RATINGn
Description
Optional rating / value attribute text where "n" is a digit starting with "1" (60 characters maximum). (Parent only) Optional attribute carried on a parent symbol used for setting up a peer-to-peer relationship. a reversing motor starter contactor might be a single component with a single part number. (Parent only) Optional invisible attribute carried on a parent symbol for storing the allowed contact pin list for the child contacts of the parent (no limit on characters). but is used to hold a second pin list temporarily that is later retrieved during insertion of a peer parent device. AutoCAD Electrical supports up to 12 RATINGn attributes (for example. The WDTAGALT attribute carried on the schematic valve symbol can be annotated with the "FY201" instrument tag name and a WDTAGALT attribute on the symbol of the instrument diagram carries the "SV456" tag name pointing back at the schematic
X?LINK
PINLIST
PEER_PINLIST
WDTAGALT
Schematic attributes | 319
.

.
320 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
.xls. or ". and enable surfing from one drawing type to the other.doc" links that can be surfed on. Multiple weblink attributes can be assigned to a symbol.
WD_WEBLINK
Attribute carried on a parent symbol for embedding Internet URL's. ". or terminal. AutoCAD Electrical can cross-reference between them. or “1-1” for the one-line bus-tap symbols.pdf".
WDTYPE
Optional attribute used to define the component category. WD_WEBLINK1 and WD_WEBLINK2. Attribute
WDTYPE
Description
The attribute must be present and carry a value of “1-” to indicate it is a one-line symbol. make sure that the Peer-to-peer toggle is turned on (under Project Properties ➤ Cross-reference tab). NOTE For cross-referencing to include these peer references. AutoCAD Electrical reserves all two character values. These one-line symbols use the same attributes as the schematic parent. and terminal symbols but with the following exceptions. 1. or .pdf.doc document file name that should be displayed when selected from the Surf dialog box of the component. The attribute value should be the URL. User-defined values must be three or four characters long. Use attribute names with the WD_WEBLINK prefix. child. A bus-tap symbol is used to mark the beginning of a one-line circuit.Attribute
Description
representation. With it in place. . ".xls".
One-line
A one-line symbol can be a parent. child. do auto-update. for example.= one-line 1-1 = one-line bus-tap HY = hydraulic PI = P&ID PN = pneumatic NOTE The WDTYPE value can be a user-defined value.

RATING1
Omitted from one-line cable markers symbols since a one-line cable marker can represent multiple conductors. However.
TERM01
Wire connection/terminal pin number pairs
Attribute
X?TERMn
Description
Invisible wire connection attributes where an external wire connects to the origin point of the attribute. nearby wires try to connect to this type of attribute only if it has a default prompt value of “X0STRETCH”
Schematic attributes | 321
. terminal number text on one-line terminal symbols are not linked back to terminal number assignments on schematic or panel terminal representations. NOTE One-line terminals are not processed by Terminal Strip Editor. it can be edited in the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box.
NOTE When a component is inserted with. The "n" character is an incremented digit starting at "01" used to keep multiple wire connection point attribute names unique. If a TERM01 attribute is added to a one-line symbol and carries a nonblank value. The "?" character position is used to identify the preferred wire connection direction: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 1: wire connects to the attribute from the right 2: wire connects to the attribute from above 4: wire connects to the attribute from the left 8: wire connects to the attribute from below 0: special for motor connections that radiate from a circle.Attribute
Description
Schematic symbols do not carry this attribute or have the attribute but with a blank value. or core color assignments. Omitted from one-line terminal symbols since a one-line terminal can represent multiple independent terminals. It also provides a link to an associated terminal number (TERMn) and a terminal description (TERMDESCn) attribute. multiple wires.

For example. For example. stand-alone terminal symbol having a single terminal in number attribute TERM01 can carry four wire connection attributes to allow connection from any direction. meaning there is not an associated TERMn attribute. A single TERMn attribute can have two. and X?TERM06 are viewed as jumpered together. three. WD_JUMPERS attribute value of ((01 04)(02 05 06)) means that wire connection X?TERM01 and X?TERM04 are treated as internally jumpered together and X?TERM02. The value assigned to each termination description attribute can be extracted into various wire connection reports or merged onto panel wiring diagram representations of schematic symbols. X?TERM05. Optional internal wire jumpers attribute that can be encoded to link sets of terminals together so AutoCAD Electrical considers them internally jumpered when calculating wire number assignments and processing wire connection and from/to reports." "AZ. NOTE X?TERMn attributes can be stand-alone." "A1. All four wire number attribute names would end with 01 to link them all to the common terminal pin number attribute. Use these attributes to define a terminal as an internal or external connection. a round." "B0" and so on. or four wire connection attributes associated with it. a WD_JUMPERS attribute value of ((01 02)) flags AutoCAD Electrical to treat wire connection X?TERM01 as electrically jumpered to XD?TERM02. Optional terminal pin number attribute where "n" is a two-digit number (starting at 01) that is used to match up with the corresponding X?TERMn wire connection attribute (ten characters maximum).Attribute
Description
If more than 99 terminals are present on a single symbol."
TERMn
WD_JUMPERS
322 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. NOTE You can keep jumpers from displaying in Wire From/To reports by placing the jumpers on a layer that contains the substring "JUMPER. the "n" value can continue with double alpha letters/numbers such as "A0.
X?TERMDESCn
Optional wire connection description attributes that match up with X?TERMn wire connection attributes (128 characters maximum).

TAG2
INST LOC MFG CAT ASSYCODE FAMILY GENDER ACE_FLAG
(Parent only) Same as the FAMILY attribute definition.dwg.Schematic connector parametric build symbols
The parametric connector is made up of a series of master symbols. (Child only) Same as the FAMILY attribute definition.dwg). Same as the FAMILY attribute definition. HCN2_1*. VCN1_1*. Invisible attribute with a value of "2" for all parametric connector symbols and a value of "1" for splice symbols (1 character maximum).
Same as the FAMILY attribute definition.
DESC1 DESC2 DESC3 X?LINK
Same as the FAMILY attribute definition.
Schematic attributes | 323
.dwg. one parent and multiple children (default library symbol names HCN1_1*. Parent and Child Pin symbol attributes (parent symbol has "1" and child has "2" as fourth character of the symbol name) Attribute
TAG1
Description
(Parent only) Same as the FAMILY attribute definition. Same as the FAMILY attribute definition. Invisible attribute with blank value.dwg. See the following list of attributes for these symbol types. VCN2_1*.

The "?" is the wire connection direction digit (1. 2.Wire Connection attributes Attribute
TERM01P
Description
Attribute for terminal pin number (for plug pin number).
Parametric Connector . Attribute for terminal pin description for plug side and receptacle side respectively.Attribute
WDBLKNAM
Description
(Parent only) Invisible attribute with a value of "HC0" (0 = zero. The "?" digit is same as the FAMILY attribute definition. Attribute for terminal pin number (for receptacle pin number). 4. single character value (a ".") that must remain visible and must be placed at the exact insertion location of the XnTERM01P and XnTERM01J attributes. Visible attribute. small. Flags access of the "C0" connector table in the catalog lookup database file. 32 characters maximum). Attribute for wire connection annotation for plug side and receptacle side respectively.
TERM01J
X?TERM01P X?TERM01J
X?TERMDESC01P X?TERMDESC01J
X?WIRE01P X?WIRE01J
X?_TINY_DOT_DONT_REMOVE_01P X?_TINY_DOT_DONT_REMOVE_01J
324 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. Maintains wire connection integrity if a connector pin is moved beyond the end of the connector shell. The "?" digit is same as the FAMILY attribute definition. or 8). Invisible wire connection attributes for plug and receptacle side respectively. The "?" digit is same as the FAMILY attribute definition.

if the attribute is to carry a terminal pin assignment independent of the wire number.dwg. Attribute
TAGSTRIP X?TERM01
Description
Attribute to carry terminal strip tag name (24 characters maximum). Attribute for wire connection (up to four attributes positioned at each end of the horizontal and vertical axes of the symbol with the "?" part giving the wire connection direction digit as described previously).
X?TERMDESC01 STRIPSEQ
LINKTERM
WIRENO or TERM01
INST LOC MFG CAT ASSYCODE WDBLKNAM
Optional invisible attribute with value of "TRMS" to force access of the TRMS table in catalog lookup (32 characters maximum). Same as previous attribute. HT10*. HT0W*. Otherwise. Attribute used internally by the Terminal Strip Editor command to sort a terminal strip. then WIRENO attribute must be present.dwg. Same as previous attribute. Same as previous attribute. VT00*. Attribute used internally to associate schematic terminals within one multi-level terminal or to associate a schematic terminal to its panel representation. attribute TERM01 must be used. Attribute to carry the terminal number assignment (24 characters maximum).
Schematic attributes | 325
.dwg.dwg.Schematic terminal symbols
Use the following attributes for terminal symbols or multi-connection sequence terminal symbols (default library symbol block names HT00*. VT0W*.dwg.dwg). If the terminal is to display the wire number value of the wire network that it is inserted into. VT10*. Optional attribute for wire connection description.

dwg. 2. and any connected cable information.dwg. Use WD_1_INFO for the first terminal strip number and select from WD_2_INFO through WD_6_INFO for the next terminal number in the sequence. Default library symbol names are HAxSn.
326 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. same as previous attribute. Use WD_1_TERMNO for the first terminal strip number and select from WD_2_TERMNO through WD_6_TERMNO for the next terminal number in the sequence.dwg where "x" = style digit and "n" = orientation 1. Attribute
SIGCODE
Description
Attribute carries unique signal code that is user defined as the symbol is inserted (32 characters maximum). catalog. Attribute
WD_#_TAGSTRIP
Description
Attribute to carry terminal strip number (16 characters maximum). Attribute to carry additional information such as installation. This single symbol instance can be used to define a series of up to six terminal strip inter-connections (example. either within a drawing or across multiple drawing. Attribute to carry optional terminal number. 3 or 4. location. the "?" character is the wire connection direction.
WD_#_TERMNO
WD_#_INFO
X?TERM01 X?TERM02
Source/Destination wire signal symbols
These symbols allow a wire to jump from one place to another. This value is used to match up each source signal symbol with it one or more destination signal symbols. Use WD_1_TAGSTRIP for the first terminal strip number and select from WD_2_TAGSTRIP through WD_6_TAGSTRIP for the next terminal number in the sequence.Special Multiple Connection Sequence Terminal symbol
Use the following attributes for this special type of terminal symbol. Default library symbol block names H--1_multi*. V--1_multi*. and item number assignments. Attribute for wire connections on each end of the symbol. a wire that passes through a series of shipping split terminal strips). HAxDn.dwg.

Optional attribute for the DWGNAM (%D) value assigned in the Drawing Settings (40 characters maximum). Updates automatically with the Update Signal References tool or Auto Wire Numbers tool.
XREF
DESC1 SHEET
DWGNAM
X?TERM01
Stand-alone Source/Destination cross-reference symbols
These symbols are like the previous ones. Optional description attribute (60 characters maximum). Attribute carries the reference location for the matching source or destination symbols. Updates automatically with the Update Signal References tool or Auto Wire Numbers tool. and reconnect at each end. They carry a text label or wire number in the gap between the connected wire ends.
In-line wire labels or wire numbers
These symbols insert into a wire. They symbols can dynamically adjust their gap to accommodate the
Schematic attributes | 327
. break the wire. Optional attribute for the SHEET (%S) value assigned in the Drawing Settings (12 characters maximum). HAxD1_REF.dwg. Attribute for wire connection where the "?" character is the wire connection direction.dwg where "x" = style digit. This attribute can be hidden. Default library symbol names are HAxS1_REF. except there is no wire connection attribute and no WIRENO attribute. same as previous attribute.Attribute
WIRENO
Description
Attribute carries a copy of the wire number that gets assigned to the wire that the signal symbol is attached to (24 characters maximum). Updates same as previous attribute.

The "?" character position in each attribute name identifies the wire connection direction: ■ ■ ■ ■ 1: wire connects to the attribute from the right 2: wire connects to the attribute from above 4: wire connects to the attribute from the left 8: wire connects to the attribute from below
X?TERM01
X?_TINY_DOT_DONT_REMOVE
Visible attribute. small.dwg.") that must remain visible and must be placed at the exact insertion location of each of the XnTERM01 attributes. Attribute
COLOR or WIRENO
Description
Visible attribute for the text label (COLOR) or in-line wire text (WIRENO) (24 characters maximum).
TAGA01
328 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
.dwg and PLCIOO*.dwg. single character value (a ". Attribute
TAG1 TAG2
Description
Attribute for PLC I/O module tag name (parent / child) with the default attribute definition value for the parent symbol becoming the "%F" part of the tag name format (64 characters maximum). stand-alone I/O symbols with one or two wire connections.width of the in-line text.dwg.
PLC single I/O point symbols
These attributes must be present on single. This attribute is center or middle justified and placed midway between the pair of wire connection attributes listed below. Pair of invisible wire connection attributes where the wires connect. Default library symbol block names are HT0_*. Connection is made to the origin point of each attribute. Default library symbol block names are PLCIOI*. Attribute for the I/O address (32 characters maximum). This attribute allows the gap to auto-adjust to text width and to maintain connectivity through the symbol if the in-line label or wire number text is blanked or grows small compared to the total gap width in the wire. VT0_*.

default value "PLC" (eight characters maximum).
Schematic attributes | 329
. Attribute for terminal pin number on each side (ten characters maximum). (Parent only) Optional attribute for general description purposes (60 characters maximum).DESCE01
Attributes to hold up to five lines of description text (60 characters maximum). If just a single wire connection then the attribute name is TERMDESC01. Optional attributes to hold two lines of general text (example: "Rack" and "Slot" address numbers. Optional terminal pin description attribute on each side of the symbol (128 characters maximum).
X?TERM01L X?TERM01R
TERMDESC01L TERMDESC01R
MFG CAT ASSYCODE DESCA01 .
Same as above.
LINE1 LINE2 DESC
FAMILY
Splice symbols
Attribute
XnWIRE01
Description
Attribute for wire annotation. If just a single wire connection then the attribute name is X?TERM01 where the "?" character is the wire connection direction. (Parent only) Same as above. If just a single wire connection then the attribute name is TERM01.Attribute
INST LOC XREF TERM01L TERM01R
Description
Same as above. Same as above . 24 characters maximum). Attributes for wire connections on each side.

The next time you
ACE_OFFSET
330 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. A positive value extends the twist through the gap.") that must remain visible and must be placed at the exact insertion location of each of the XnTERM01 attributes. The "?" character position in each attribute name identifies the wire connection direction: ■ ■ ■ ■ 1: wire connects to the attribute from the right 2: wire connects to the attribute from above 4: wire connects to the attribute from the left 8: wire connects to the attribute from below
X?_TINY_DOT_DONT_REMOVE
Visible attribute. Attribute for wire connection description (128 characters maximum). Invisible attribute that carries the vertex offset distance measured from the midpoint of the symbol's two wire connection points. small.Attribute
XnWIRE02 TERMDESCxx ACE_FLAG
Description
Attribute for wire annotation.
Parametric Twisted Pair symbols
Attribute
X?TERM01
Description
Pair of invisible wire connection attributes where the wires connect. A value of 0. Connection is made to the origin point of each attribute. Invisible attribute (value set to "1" to identify a splice symbol) used for export to Autodesk Inventor Professional (1 character maximum). To change the height of the twist.0 makes the twist come up to the wire-gap midpoint. This attribute is needed to allow the gap to auto-adjust to text width and to maintain connectivity through the symbol if the in-line label or wire number text is blanked or grows small compared to the total gap width in the wire. open the symbol drawing file and edit this attribute definition. A negative value (default) decreases the height of the twist. single character value (a ".

The default value you assign to this attribute definition at the library symbol level (that is.
Schematic attributes | 331
. the twisted part takes on the new value. For example.
Overview of parent and stand-alone component attributes (TAG1)
AutoCAD Electrical puts the tag name of the component on this attribute. a later edit. NOTE If the TAG1 attribute carries no default value then AutoCAD Electrical uses the FAMILY attribute value of that symbol. You can override this family name at component insertion time. ". or automatically by use of the "wd_fam.
Overview of child component attributes (TAG2)
AutoCAD Electrical puts a copy of the parent tag name of the component on the child component attribute (TAG2).dwg" file of the symbol opened and displayed in AutoCAD) becomes the family code character string AutoCAD Electrical uses to build the tag name of the component when the block is inserted into your wiring diagram.
ACE_FLAG
Invisible attribute set to a value of 3 to identify a twisted pair symbol (1 character maximum).Attribute
Description
insert a twisted pair symbol into a new drawing. AutoCAD Electrical takes the parent tag name of the coil (carried on its TAG1 attribute) and copies it to the TAG2 attribute of this contact. During the AutoCAD Electrical tagging operation. use "PB" for a default value of the attribute definition TAG1 if the family name you want AutoCAD Electrical to use is "PB" (examples: "PB100". This default value character string is used as the Family Code (%F) portion of the tag format code of the drawing you set up in the Drawing Properties ➤ Components dialog box (example %F%N). "100-PB". names like "PB101" or "CR-55" (24 characters maximum).dat " mapping file. "PB4-100"). If no parent tag is found then AutoCAD Electrical displays the attribute default value of the definition.

AutoCAD Electrical simply inserts the schematic values as standard AutoCAD.
Footprint block attribute/Xdata names
The following table is a list of footprint block data names that can be inserted or read by AutoCAD Electrical. since AutoCAD Electrical does not have naming or attribute requirements. it copies various data to the footprint block such as component/device tag name.3 (60 char max) item/detail number
332 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. and catalog number. Or you may have your own in-house footprints set up. AutoCAD Electrical uses extended entity data with names based on the data names listed here but with a WD_ prefix (ex: "WD_DESC1"). nonvisible extended entity data (Xdata). AutoCAD Electrical uses that attribute to carry the specific piece of data. In either case. If the footprint block has an attribute with any name listed here. it immediately becomes AutoCAD Electrical smart.
FP FPT NP P_TAG1 DESC1-3 P_ITEM identifies block as a component footprint identifies block as a terminal footprint identifies block as a nameplate panel component tag (used on component footprints and nameplates) description line 1 . Otherwise. As AutoCAD Electrical inserts a footprint symbol into the drawing. these libraries can be used as is. all in AutoCAD format. It first looks for target attributes to copy the data to. but if not found. to-scale mechanical libraries of their control components. description. manufacturer code. When AutoCAD Electrical inserts such a block footprint symbol. Some manufacturers provide free.Panel attributes
Overview of panel attributes
AutoCAD Electrical does not have attribute or naming requirements for the mechanical footprint block symbols.

24 characters maximum). It annotates the terminal number.block must carry a minimum of one of the following:
Xdata name Attribute VIA_WD_NP NP (blank value)
Terminal block footprint symbols
Terminal block footprint symbols require special attributes in their definitions to help facilitate the Terminal Strip Editor graphical layout.Terminal footprint . It can be related to the attached wire number or independent of the wire number.
LOC
INST
TERM or WIRENO
MFG
334 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. AutoCAD Electrical generates a physical layout of the terminal strips. To accomplish this annotation. 16 characters maximum). and destination device of what is connected to the terminal block from the attributes. attributes are needed to accommodate the position of text relative to the terminal block symbol. Invisible attribute for optional terminal location code (for example. “MACH1”.block must carry a minimum of one of the following:
Xdata name Attribute VIA_WD_FPT FPT (blank value)
Panel nameplate . Attribute
P_TAGSTRIP
Description
Invisible attribute to carry terminal strip number (24 character maximum) for terminal footprint. Invisible attribute for optional terminal installation code (for example. “JBOX1”. Attribute to carry the terminal pin number assignment (ten characters maximum). wire number. Invisible attribute for optional manufacturer name or code (24 characters maximum).

Optional attributes for schematic interconnection annotation (24 characters maximum). These subassembly items must be defined in the active catalog lookup file in the ASSYCODE and ASSYLIST fields. a physical footprint representation). Optional attributes for schematic interconnection annotation (128 characters maximum). The value for this attribute is set automatically when you make a selection from the catalog "Lookup" that carries subassembly information. It is limited to four characters and can
Attributes for other symbol categories | 335
. Identifies the block insert as a panel item (that is. Invisible attribute or Xdata. Identifies the block insert as a panel terminal footprint representation.
ASSYCODE
WDBLKNAM
FP
FPT
WIRENOR WIRENOL TERMDESCR TERMDESCL
Attributes for other symbol categories
Overview of attributes for other symbol categories
WDTYPE attribute
The WDTYPE attribute value specifies a component category for a non-schematic. Invisible attribute that specifies the WD block name for catalog lookup (32 characters maximum). non-panel component.Attribute
CAT
Description
Invisible attribute for optional catalog number (60 character maximum). Default for terminals is "TRMS." Invisible attribute or Xdata. Invisible attribute for optional subassembly code that causes AutoCAD Electrical to look for subassembly items to extract into BOM reports (60 characters maximum).

Omitted from one-line cable markers symbols since a one-line cable marker can represent multiple conductors. NOTE AutoCAD Electrical reserves all two-character values.
RATING1
TERM01
336 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. or “1-1” for the one-line bus-tap symbols. child. Attribute
WDTYPE
Description
The attribute must be present and carry a value of “1-” to indicate it is a one-line symbol. and terminal symbols but with the following exceptions. multiple wires. For some schematic reports. child. User-defined values must be three or four characters long. Schematic symbols do not carry this attribute or have the attribute but with a blank value. Attribute Value
11-1 HY PN PI
Symbol category
One-line One-line bus-tap Hydraulic Pneumatic P&ID
One-line symbols
A one-line symbol can be a parent. or terminal. These one-line symbols use the same attributes as the schematic parent. Omitted from one-line terminal symbols since a one-line terminal can represent multiple independent terminals. AutoCAD Electrical uses the following WDTYPE attribute values. you can select a component category for the report based on the WDTYPE value.be user-defined. A bus-tap symbol is used to mark the beginning of a one-line circuit. or core color assignments.

the default value of the FAMILY attribute definition is the same as the default value for the TAG1 or TAG2 attribute of the component. Invisible attribute for optional catalog number (60 characters maximum). "FIELD". it can be edited in the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box.Attribute
Description
If a TERM01 attribute is added to a one-line symbol and carries a nonblank value. This default value character string is used as the Family Code (%F) portion of the tag format code of the drawing you set up in the Drawing Properties ➤ Components dialog box (example %F%N). terminal number text on one-line terminal symbols are not linked back to terminal number assignments on schematic or panel terminal representations. NOTE One-line terminals are not processed by Terminal Strip Editor. "JBOX2". The default value you assign becomes the family code character string AutoCAD Electrical uses to build the tag name of the component when the block is inserted into your wiring diagram.
INST
Optional attribute for component installation code (for example. Invisible attribute that carries the components family type (for example. Generally. 24 characters maximum). A generic child device can be linked to any type of parent symbol when the Family attribute value of the child is left blank. "INS". AutoCAD Electrical fills it in on the fly with the FAMILY code of the parent when the link is made. eight characters maximum). Optional attribute for component location code (for example. "MACH1". However. "FI".
Hydraulic and P&ID symbols
Attribute
TAG1
Description
Attribute for required component tag name (64 characters maximum).
LOC
FAMILY
CAT
Attributes for other symbol categories | 337
. 16 characters maximum).

an instrument drawing might be included in an AutoCAD Electrical project drawing set with a valve marked "FY201".
ASSYCODE
RATING1 DESC1. DESC2. You can annotate the The WDTAGALT attribute carried on the schematic valve symbol with the "FY201" instrument tag name. User-defined values must be three or four characters long. A WDTAGALT attribute on the symbol of the instrument diagram carries the "SV456" tag name pointing back at the schematic
338 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
.= one-line 1-1 = one-line bus-tap HY = hydraulic PI = P&ID PN = pneumatic NOTE The WDTYPE value can be a user-defined value. Optional attribute for rating/value text (60 characters maximum). instrument drawing or pneumatic drawing vs. first or only line of description text (60 characters maximum). DESC3
WDTYPE
WDTAGALT
Attribute carried on a parent symbol used for setting up a "peer-topeer" relationship (64 characters maximum). Optional attribute used to define the component category. Invisible attribute for optional subassembly code that causes AutoCAD Electrical to extract subassembly items into BOM reports (60 characters maximum). the solenoid for this instrument valve is tagged "SV456". electrical schematic). DESC1: Description. DESC3: third line of description text. not the user. It stores the cross-reference tag name of a related symbol shown on a different drawing type (for example. 1. AutoCAD Electrical reserves all two character values. On the electrical schematics.Attribute
MFG
Description
Invisible attribute for optional manufacturer name or code (24 characters maximum). DESC2: second line of description text. AutoCAD Electrical. For example. sets the value for this attribute.

Copy attributes
COPYTAG is the optional TAG copy attribute. A special replaceable parameter.Attribute
Description
representation. it also looks for and updates any COPYTAG attributes present on the symbol with a copy of the TAG text. Make sure to keep terminal pin number text paired with its wire connection attributes. name the attributes COPYTAG01. Invisible wire connection attributes where an external wire connects to the origin point of the attribute. and so on. If you need more than one extra TAG copy on a symbol. the 'n' value can continue with double alpha letters/numbers such as "A0. If there is no
Copy attributes | 339
.
XREF
Attribute used for a combined list of normally open and normally closed contacts (if XFREFNO and XREFNC are present). The 'n' character is an incremented digit starting at "01" used to keep multiple wire connection point attribute names unique. TAG2 or TAGSTRIP attribute." "A1. can be encoded onto the COPYTAG attribute prompt value of the definition. AutoCAD Electrical underlines the closed contacts. The "?" character position is used to identify the preferred wire connection direction: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 1: wire connects to the attribute from the right 2: wire connects to the attribute from above 4: wire connects to the attribute from the left 8: wire connects to the attribute from below 0: special for motor connections
TERM
X?TERMn
If more than 99 terminals are present on a single symbol." "B0" and so on. Optional terminal pin number attribute (ten characters maximum). COPYTAG02. AutoCAD Electrical can cross-reference between them. Or. It allows for adding a suffix and/or prefix to the TAG text. When AutoCAD Electrical updates a TAG1. and enable surfing from one drawing type to the other. used for non-NO/NC contacts (if XREFNO and XREFNC are not present). do auto-update. "%T"." "AZ.

When this symbol is inserted on a schematic drawing. and a TAG is assigned.prompt value encoded on the attribute definition. For example. Put the . NOTE AutoCAD Electrical uses regular AutoCAD blocks. you create a large "drive" schematic symbol with a TAG1 attribute for the tag-ID of the drive. The AutoCAD Electrical component insertion command always looks at this directory for the requested symbol before going to the selected symbol library. You want some other parts of this single symbol to carry the TAG1 value plus a suffix like "-POT" and "-DBRES".
Managing Library Symbols
Substitute symbols in the library
You can temporarily substitute an altered symbol for a symbol that is found in the standard library.
Change appearance of existing library symbols
Change appearance of existing library symbols
The AutoCAD Electrical symbol libraries are installed in
■
Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\ Windows Vista: \Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\
■
340 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
.dwg file of the altered symbol in your USER subdirectory (right-click a project name inside the Project Manager and select Settings to find the full path). insert an attribute definition "COPYTAG01" with a prompt value of "%T-POT" near the potentiometer graphic of the symbol and "COPYTAG02" with a prompt value of "%T-DBRES" near the dynamic braking resistor graphic. If you insert a block from one library and then try to insert the same block name from a different library. On your library symbol. Use the Swap/Update Block command in AutoCAD Electrical to make the change. you get a copy of the original version of the block. AutoCAD Electrical automatically updates each COPYTAG* attribute accordingly. AutoCAD Electrical simply applies a copy of the tag-ID to the COPYTAG* attributes.

This layer naming scheme is set up in the Define Layers dialog box If you want certain layer naming maintained on your inserted components. description. Let AutoCAD Electrical manage what layers the various parts and pieces of your symbol get put on at insertion time.
Tips and Hints
Leave all symbol attribute definitions and geometry on layer "0" and that entity color assignments are by layer. location. and cross-reference annotation attribute definitions to different locations to satisfy your drafting standards (attribute definitions look like text entities). 5 Edit these attributes by clicking Show/edit miscellaneous on the AutoCAD Electrical edit dialog boxes. for example JIC or IEC.The default {library} folder depends on installation choices.dwg format (using File ➤ Open). This tool provides a way to make mass changes to the library of symbols. Click Show/edit miscellaneous on any of the Insert/Edit dialog boxes. You can modify the ". you may want to look at the AutoCAD Electrical Modify Symbol Library on page 939 tool.
Change appearance of existing library symbols | 341
. and picking a different text font for the AutoCAD Electrical text style. including scaling each symbol. 4 Insert additional non-AutoCAD Electrical attributes that your applications might need. 2 Move the tag. 3 Adjust attribute definition text size to meet your requirements but avoid deleting any of the existing attribute definitions. non-layer "0" entities maintain their existing layer names as the component inserts into the drawing. It has some options. Attributes give the symbol full compatibility with AutoCAD Electrical features. With it checked. changing attribute height based on AutoCAD Electrical attribute type. 1 Open each symbol up in its native AutoCAD .
Edit miscellaneous and non-AutoCAD Electrical attributes
View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes.dwg" version of each symbol to comply with your specific standards or client requirements. select Apply to entities on layer "0" only. NOTE Before you spend a lot of time modifying each library symbol.

attribute values. terminal pin numbers. 1 Open the .dwg file of the symbol in AutoCAD.O.
Swap blocks
The block swapper tool can operate in several different modes:
■
Swap Block: Exchanges one block for another. rotation. In each case use DDEDIT to change the TERM01 and TERM02 attribute default values to be "1" and "2" respectively. or BOM catalog numbers prefilled with default values. call up and edit these symbol files: HLS11. The default symbol library path is Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\{library}\ Windows Vista: \Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\{library}\ 2 Use the DDEDIT or PROPERTIES command to change the default attribute values of the symbol. limit switch symbol to insert showing the two terminal pin numbers labeled as "1" and "2. and attribute positions (if Retain is selected)." In AutoCAD.DWG. swap out all standard red pilot lights with red press-test pilot lights.DWG. NOTE You can override the default values at insertion time.DWG. VLS11. HLS21.The attributes that can be modified depend on which Insert/Edit dialog box you are working in. use the tool to swap out a red standard pilot light with a green one. wire connections.DWG (modify both the jic1 and jic125 versions). or drawing-wide. these values show up as defaults.
342 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. For example. let's say that you always want your N. At insertion time. For example.
Predefine symbol annotation
Predefine symbol annotation
You can have certain symbols insert with switch position text. retaining the scale of the old block. and VLS21.

The Library mode works the same way as the Update mode.
■
Option B: Select to update a block by replacing it with a new version or substitute new versions of all blocks. old block scales. or project-wide. Again.■
Update: Updates all instances of a given block with an updated version of the same block.
■
Specify the file name of the block that to substitute for all instances of the selected block. Option A: Select to swap a block one at a time. all attribute values and wire connections are retained. and then reference the path to the new version of the symbol. pick a new block just like another block. AutoCAD Electrical quickly replaces all instances of the symbol it finds on the drawings with the new version of the same symbol. or retag if parent swap causes family changes. you may be doing a Library Update and the library symbols you are swapping out do not use standard AutoCAD Electrical attribute names. For example. drawing-wide. but swaps out all the blocks on the drawings.
■
Indicate whether to pick a new block from the icon menu. You want a quick way to update the library symbols. For example.
When you swap or update a block there may be times when you want the values of certain attributes mapped to different attribute names. an old AutoCAD Electrical project set must be used on a new project but the client likes the limit switches drawn a bit differently. Then use the Update option.
Update or change blocks in place
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Swap/Update Block.
2 Determine whether you want to exchange one block for another (Option A) or update all instances of a given block with an updated version of the same block (0ption B).
Swap blocks | 343
. or pick a new block from the File dialog box. select any limit switch on the drawing. Simply make client-specific versions of the limit switch symbols. but you do not want to lose information held on the current attributes. Determine whether you want to retain old attribute locations.

3 Select whether to use the same attribute names or use an attribute mapping file. and maintains existing attribute text values. Select Retain to keep the scale of the old block. select the icon from the Insert Component dialog box. select the drawings to process and click OK. 5 If you selected to pick a new block from the icon menu.
■
344 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. 7 If you chose to do a project-wide swap. wire connections. old block scales. 4 Click OK. and attribute positions. The chosen component is replaced with the symbol selected in the Insert Component dialog box. or copy the attribute values of the old block to new swapped block.
Swap block/update block/library swap
Swaps or updates a block insert instance. rotation. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Swap/Update Block. 6 Select the component to swap out. Update: Updates all instances of a given block with an updated version of the same block. attribute values.
Toolbar: Insert Component Menu: Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤ Swap/Update Block Command entry: AESWAPBLOCK
■
Swap Block: Exchanges one block for another.■
Determine whether you want to retain old attribute locations.

Swap a block .project wide
Pick new block from icon menu
Pick new block "just like"
Browse to new block from file selection dialog box Retain old attribute locations
Retain old block scale
Swap blocks | 345
. Specifies to retain the scale value from the original block. Specifies to select a new block from the icon menu. Specifies to select a new block like the original block.one at a time Exchanges one block for another one block at a time.
Swap Block (swap to different block name)
Swap a block . Specifies to select a new block from the file selection dialog box. Exchanges one block for another throughout the project. Exchanges one block for another throughout the drawing.Wire connections are also maintained even if the new symbol is slightly wider or narrower than the original.drawing wide
Swap a block . Specifies to retain the attribute locations from the original block.

Allow undefined Wire Type line reconnections
Specifies to include non-wire lines for reconnection when the new block swaps in.
Use attribute mapping file
Mapping file
Library swap -. the tag remains the same even if it does not match the new component's Family code of the new component. Otherwise. The mapping file may be an Excel spreadsheet.
Auto retag if parent swap causes family change
Update block (revised or different version of same block name)
Update a block Updates all instances of a given block with an updated version of the same block. or a simple text file with a space separating the current attribute name from the new attribute name.
346 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. Allows the values of certain attributes to be mapped to different attribute names. Determines how AutoCAD Electrical should map the attributes. a comma-delimited file (.CSV). The file should have two columns of attribute names. Automatically retags the component if the Family code of a component changed due to the swap. Updates all instances of a library symbol with an updated version of the same symbol
Library swap
Attribute mapping
Use same attribute names Uses the same attribute names from the original block. The first column should contain the current attribute name and the second column the new attribute name.all drawing
Updates all instances of a library symbol with an updated version of the same symbol on the active drawing or in a project.

Configuration Scale = the scale setting in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box.
Retain old attribute locations
Copy attribute values of old block to new swapped block
Specifies whether to copy the attribute values to the new block. Check Include subfolders if the symbols are in folders within the specified path. 1.4 = millimeter to inch scale factor.Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Swap/Update Block. To use a different library. 25. Specifies to retain the attribute locations from the original block.
Insertion scale
Scale Specifies which scale factor to use. to discard all old values.4 = inch to millimeter scale factor.0 = full scale.
Path to new block library
Specifies the path for the symbol library that is referenced for the block substitution. Retain old block scale Specifies to retain the scale value from the original block.
Toolbar: Insert Component Menu: Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤ Swap/Update Block Command entry: AESWAPBLOCK Select the Library Swap option and click OK. or to copy the old values only if the new value is blank. enter its path or click Browse.path\filename of new block
Swap blocks | 347
.
Update block . and 1/25. It is true for panel footprint symbols.

and 1/25. 25.
348 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. to discard all old values. Enter a file name or click Browse.
Insertion scale
Scale Specifies which scale factor to use.0 = full scale.
Toolbar: Insert Component Menu: Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤ Swap/Update Block Command entry: AESWAPBLOCK Select the Update a Block option and click OK.4 = inch to millimeter scale factor. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Swap/Update Block. Specifies to retain the attribute locations from the original block. or to copy the old values only if the new value is blank. Retain old block scale Specifies to retain the scale value from the original block.4 = millimeter to inch scale factor.Substitutes a new version of a component block for all inserted instances of that block found on a drawing or in a project.
Path\filename of new block
Specifies the path\filename of the block to substitute for all instances of the selected block. 1. Configuration Scale = the scale setting in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box.
Retain old attribute locations
Copy attribute values of old block to new swapped block
Specifies whether to copy the attribute values to the new block.

1 Open a new drawing using the appropriate symbol name. The symbols can be any size and width. or catalog number attribute values. jic125. rating attributes. Insert any pre-defined terminal pin. or user subdirectory (right-click a project name inside the Project Manager and select Settings to find the full path). You can manually enter the file name of the new symbol using Type it on the main icon menu page. Reposition them as required. You do not have to edit an external support file or database to register a symbol for use in an AutoCAD Electrical wiring diagram drawing. Avoid deleting the existing attribute definitions. Keep everything on layer 0. 5 Use DDEDIT to change the TAG1 or TAG2 and the FAMILY attribute values to the family code. 4 Reuse attribute definitions from the exploded symbol. 7 Save your work to the jic1. Consider the number of wire connection points. 2 Insert an exploded copy of an existing AutoCAD Electrical symbol that somewhat resembles what you need in the new symbol. Reposition and edit their default values as required. Start with a copy of a similar type and then modify to suit. Try to insert your new symbol into an existing piece of wire. description. To test it.
Create a library symbol | 349
. "X4TERM01" wire connection point attribute matched with "TERM01" terminal pin number text attribute). 6 Delete unneeded attribute definitions and graphics. call up a new or existing AutoCAD Electrical drawing. NOTE You can also use the Symbol Builder tool.Create a library symbol
Create a library symbol
AutoCAD Electrical uses stock AutoCAD blocks and attributes in its library symbols. and whether your new symbol is a parent symbol (attribute TAG1) or a child symbol (attribute TAG2). Make sure that you keep terminal pin number text paired with its wire connection attribute (the last two digits of each attribute name must match. 3 Clean up the graphics. but the quickest way to create a symbol might be to start with an existing AutoCAD Electrical compatible symbol.

terminal. Every symbol can have a different width. At insertion time the width of the symbol is determined by reading the locations of its wire connection attributes (attributes with name X?TERMn). but AutoCAD Electrical does not process them.Tips and Hints
Pigtails Avoid putting wire pigtails on your new symbols. You can insert additional DESCn attributes on your symbol and edit them with any attribute editing tool. A wire connection pigtail is mandatory when you insert a short pigtail at a wire connection point that has no other visible symbol geometry nearby since AutoCAD Electrical must see something tangible on a symbol at a wire connection point. Symbol origin The AutoCAD Electrical library symbols generally have their origin points centered between the first (or only) pair of wire connection point attributes.
350 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. The attribute names are DESC1. Wire connection points A symbol can have hundreds of connection points and a terminal pin number attribute tied to each (use suffix codes beginning with "01" and ending with "ZZ"). DESC2.
Symbol Builder
Symbol Builder
Defines new AutoCAD Electrical component. it helps AutoCAD Electrical determine the correct orientation for alignment with an underlying wire at insertion time. Symbol width There are no restrictions. Though it is not mandatory. and DESC3 and generally appear on both parent/stand-alone and child contact symbols. Component description text You can insert three lines of description text up to 60 characters long. and panel layout library symbols. Pigtails can defeat the AutoCAD Electrical SCOOT command and automatic wire numbering when two symbols with pigtails bump up against each other.

Selecting the objects allows the tool to track what standard attributes and wire connection points you already inserted. Symbols created or converted using Symbol Builder are fully compatible with AutoCAD Electrical. Must have a TAG1. or split TAG1 attribute. You can also exit the command and use regular AutoCAD commands to edit or finish the symbol you are creating. Schematic terminal with terminal number. and appear in the bill of material and various component and wire connection reports. They break wires upon insertion. New symbols you create are inserted with the AutoCAD Electrical Insert Component or Insert Panel Component commands. select objects from within the Select Symbol/Objects dialog box. TAG.
Symbol Types
Schematic Parent Schematic symbol is used as a stand-alone symbol or a parent component with related secondary contacts.
Schematic Child
Schematic Terminal
Symbol Builder | 351
. Must have a TERMNO attribute. You can add your new symbol to the icon menu. Schematic secondary symbol that is related to a parent component. The AutoCAD Wblock command writes it to disk.You can convert symbols or create custom components on the fly. Must have a TAG2 attribute. Each time you re-enter the Symbol Builder tool. You can also select it from the Type it or Browse options in the bottom left-hand corner of the icon menu.
You can exit the Symbol Builder command and re-enter it at any time.

The attribute template can contain attributes defined as required and others as optional. Must have a WIRENO attribute. Symbol builder uses attribute templates to facilitate adding these attributes to your symbol. Your initial selections can include symbol type. and insertion point. Panel nameplate symbol.
Block Editor Environment
Once you make the initial selections. you enter to the Block Editor environment. a Symbol Builder Attribute Editor on page 357 is available for inserting and modifying the AutoCAD Electrical attributes. Must have a P_TAG1 and FP attribute or xdata. The required attributes are expected
352 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. schematic parent. the associated attribute template is used to create a list of attributes. The supplied attribute templates are in the symbol library folders and all attribute template drawing names begin with “AT_”. When you select your symbol type. and so on. attribute template. existing objects. schematic child.
Panel Footprint
Panel Terminal
Panel Nameplate
NOTE Panel symbols do not require any attributes but uses xdata for any missing attributes. Must have a P_TAG1 and NP attribute or xdata.
Attribute Template
AutoCAD Electrical expects certain attributes for each symbol type. if a panel footprint does not have a P_TAG1 attribute it gets a VIA_WD_P_TAG1 xdata when inserted. Panel symbol that is not used as a terminal or nameplate. For example.Schematic Terminal
Schematic terminal that follows the wire number rather than having a terminal number of its own. There are different attribute templates for different types of symbols and for different family codes. Attribute template drawings are AutoCAD drawings with AutoCAD Electrical attributes. Must have a P_TAGSTRIP and FPT attribute or xdata. In addition to the Block Editor menus for adding and modifying the symbol graphics. All xdata values have a VIA_WD_ prefix followed by the name of the attribute it takes the place of. This xdata is added when the symbol is inserted using the appropriate AutoCAD Electrical panel insertion command. Panel terminal symbol.

You can create your own wire connection templates on page 2042 which are used when inserting wire connections. The {symbol} string is displayed in the Symbol list in the Select Symbol/Objects dialog box and the {type} string is displayed in the Type list. AT_{symbol}_{type}. Attribute templates follow the naming convention. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder drop-down
➤ Symbol Builder. NOTE The attribute templates do not carry wire connection attributes. 3 Click OK to enter the block editor environment. For more information see Create a Symbol Builder attribute template on page 2040.on the specific symbol type you are building. 8 Save on page 368 the symbol. default_cat. You can also map abbreviations for the {type} in the _FAMILY_DESCRIPTION table of the catalog database.mdb. and for a schematic symbol. 2 Select options on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 353 dialog box making sure to select the attribute template library path. or you can insert all the attributes from the template at one time. If you select a schematic symbol type. selecting an appropriate file name. 4 Insert attributes on page 356 using the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor on page 357. 5 (schematic symbol) Insert wire connection on page 362 attributes.
Select Symbol / Objects
Symbol Builder | 353
. For example rating or switch position attributes.
Creating a symbol
Creating an AutoCAD Electrical symbol includes adding the necessary attributes based on the symbol type. symbol. Add wire connection attributes to your symbol as needed. Symbol builder uses attributes templates to facilitate adding the attributes. symbol builder suggests a file name based on the AutoCAD Electrical naming conventions. Optional attributes are attributes that may not be necessary on this symbol type but are supported. 6 (schematic symbol) Insert link line on page 365 attributes. 7 (optional) Audit on page 371 to see any potential issues with the symbol. You can insert the attributes individually as needed. and type.

Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder Command entry: AESYMBUILDER
Name
Lists all block definitions in the current drawing. Browse to select a drawing file not listed in the current drawing.0 insertion base point for the symbol. These coordinates become the 0. Select <unnamed> to create a symbol from scratch. attributes. before entering the Block Editor. Select Specify on Screen to specify the insertion point after selecting OK. attribute definitions.
Select From Drawing
Select any existing objects that are to be part of the symbol you want to create or edit. before entering the Block Editor. Select an existing block to edit or use as a starting point for a new symbol. Browse to the folder or select from a list of the library paths for the current project.
354 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. and any symbol graphics. select existing objects. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder
drop-down ➤ Symbol Builder.Use this dialog box to define the type of symbol you are creating or editing. Select Specify on Screen to select objects after selecting OK.
Attribute Template
Library path Select a path to the symbol builder attribute templates. and define the insertion point.
Insertion Point
Enter the insertion point coordinates for the symbol or select Pick Point to select on the drawing. Existing objects can include an existing block.0. Select an existing block to edit or use it as the starting point for a new symbol.

Type
Select the type used to find the appropriate attribute template. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder
drop-down ➤ Symbol Builder. terminal. NOTE The list is built dynamically based on the attribute templates in the selected folder.
Symbol Configuration
Use this dialog box to select a different attribute template or redefine the insertion point.
Symbol Builder | 355
.
Preview
Displays a preview of the selected named block or the objects selected on the drawing. Attribute template block names begin with “AT_”. select the one-line folder which by default is “1-” under the schematic library folder.
Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder Command entry: AESYMBUILDER 1 Select options on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 353 dialog box. The category specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation of the symbol. It also defines whether it is schematic or panel. 2 Click OK to enter the block editor environment. and so on. and within those categories parent. child. Selected blocks are shown exploded.
Symbol
Specify a symbol category such as Horizontal Parent.NOTE To create a one-line symbol.

The coordinates become the 0. Specify a symbol category such as Horizontal Parent. child. This value is used to find the appropriate attribute template.3
Select the Symbol Configuration tool.
Library path
Select a path to the symbol builder attribute templates. and within those categories parent. Enter the insertion point coordinates for the symbol or select Pick point to select on the drawing. terminal. Browse to the folder or select from a list of the library paths for the current project. click Symbol Builder
tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Palette Visibility Toggle. 3 Click OK to enter the block editor environment. 2 Select options on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 353 dialog box. It also defines whether it is schematic or panel.0.0 insertion base point for the symbol. Attribute template block names begin with “AT_”.
Insertion Point
Inserting Attributes
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder drop-down
➤ Symbol Builder. The category specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation of the symbol. 4 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible.
Symbol
Type
Select the type. and so on. NOTE The list is built dynamically based on the attribute templates in the selected folder. before entering the Block Editor.
356 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. Select Specify on Screen to specify the insertion point after selecting OK.

Opens the Symbol Configuration on page 355 dialog box with options to change the attribute template. NOTE You can also drag to insert the selected attributes.
Convert existing text objects to the selected attributes.
NOTE A right-click menu is available containing functions appropriate for the selected attributes.
Opens the Symbol Audit on page 371 dialog box to find any potential issues with the symbol.
358 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
.
Required/Optional Attributes Tools
Insert the selected attributes.
Add an attribute to the list and define its properties.
Opens the Insert/Edit Attributes dialog box to set the properties for the selected attributes.Common Tools
The Symbol Builder Attribute Editor provides a few tools that are common to any symbol type.
Remove the selected attributes from the list.
Opens the Convert Text to Attribute on page 367 dialog box to map text objects to attributes.

Insert the selected wire connection attribute. or change attribute properties.
Indicates the attribute exists on the symbol.
NOTE A right-click menu is available containing functions appropriate for the selected attributes. Select the style. define related pin attribute values. Select Others to launch the Insert Wire Connections dialog box.Delete the selected attributes from the symbol.
Opens the Insert/Edit Attributes dialog box to set the properties for the selected attributes. Selecting Others from the Direction/Style list opens the Insert Wire Connection dialog box. make it the default.
NOTE A right-click menu is available containing functions appropriate for the selected attributes. You can also insert them individually. fill in default attribute values.
Direction/Style Select from a list of wire connection styles and direction. Use this section to add optional wire connection attributes. and add multiple wire connections.
Symbol Builder | 359
.
Wire Connection Tools
Wire connection attributes are inserted based on a style and direction selection.
Pin Tools
Pin attributes are added automatically when you add a wire connection attribute. Select the style/direction you want to insert and select the Insert tool.

Select the direction you want to insert and select the insert tool.
Delete the selected attributes from the symbol.
Direction Select from a list of link line directions.
Link Line Tools
Link line attributes are inserted based on a direction selection. Insert the selected link line attribute.
Indicates the attribute exists on the symbol.
NOTE A right-click menu is available containing functions appropriate for the selected attributes.
Remove the selected attributes from the list.
NOTE A right-click menu is available containing functions appropriate for the selected attributes.
Move a wire connection attribute and its related pin attributes.
360 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
.Convert existing text objects to the selected attributes.
Add the optional terminal description attribute to the selected wire connection.

Indicates the attribute exists on the symbol. 3 Select an attribute in the grid and click the Property tool. or double-click an attribute in the grid.
NOTE The Insert button is only available for new attributes added to the list using the Add tool. select the Add Next tool and pick an insertion point.Rating/Position Tools
AutoCAD Electrical allows up to 12 rating and position attributes.
Insert / Edit Attributes
Use this dialog box to enter default attribute values or modify attribute properties. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder
drop-down ➤ Symbol Builder. 2 Click OK to enter the block editor environment.
Add the next attribute to the list and prompt for the insertion point.
Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder Command entry: AESYMBUILDER 1 Select options on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 353 dialog box.
NOTE A right-click menu is available containing functions appropriate for the selected attributes.
Symbol Builder | 361
. To insert the next available attribute.

they are inserted with the wire connection attribute and added to the Pins section. 6 Click the Direction/Style list to expand the list of wire connection options. The list of wire connection options is built dynamically based on the template drawings found in the symbol library path. On the Insert Wire Connection dialog box you
362 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. 3 Click OK to enter the block editor environment. To see other styles. click Symbol Builder
tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Palette Visibility Toggle. or to change the default style. 5 Click the arrow on the Wire Connection section of the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor to expand the wire connection section.Inserting Wire Connections
Symbol Builder inserts a wire connection template drawing when adding a wire connection to your symbol. NOTE Only the options for the default style are shown in the list. select Others.
Others
Selecting Others on the Wire Connection Direction/Style list opens the Insert Wire Connection dialog box.
9 Select an insertion point for the attribute. 2 Select options on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 353 dialog box. 7 Select a wire connection. 4 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder drop-down
➤ Symbol Builder.
8
Click the Insert Wire Connection tool. NOTE If the wire connection template contains the optional TERMn and TERMDESCn attributes.

Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder
drop-down ➤ Symbol Builder. 1 Define the style and direction. or change the default style. The related pin attributes are inserted relative to the wire connection attribute based on the wire connection template.can insert multiple wire connection attributes. 4 (optional) Select an attribute in the Pin Information section and click Delete. 5 (optional) Select an attribute in the Pin Information section and click Properties to define the properties for the attribute using the Insert/Edit dialog box. NOTE Pin attributes added with each wire connection may differ based on symbol type. The attribute is removed from the list and is not inserted with the wire connection attribute.
Symbol Builder | 363
.
Insert Wire Connections
Use this dialog box to insert multiple wire connection attributes at a time or to select a style other than the default.
Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder Command entry: AESYMBUILDER 1 Select options on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 353 dialog box. 2 Enter the number of wire connections. Select the text for conversion as prompted. 2 Click OK to enter the block editor environment. select from a style other than the default. 3 (optional) Select an attribute in the Pin Information section and click Convert. 6 Click Insert. 7 Select the wire connection attribute insertion points.

Select Apply to save the current settings. Enter the X distance between each wire connection. Use the terminal style as the default in the Direction/Style list in the symbol builder attribute editor.
Row offset Column offset
Pin Information
Name/Default List of optional related pin attributes inserted with the wire connection attributes. Enter the Y distance between each wire connection. NOTE See Creating a custom wire connection style on page 2042 to add terminal styles. Use the scale value as the default insertion scale for wire connection attributes. Select the insertion point for each wire connection after clicking Insert. The list is built dynamically based on the wire connection templates in the library folder. Enter the insertion scale for the wire connection template.
Connection Direction
Select the direction the wire connects from.
Configuration
Terminal Style Select the wire connection style from the list.
Scale Use this configuration as default
Number and Offset Distance
Number Select on screen Enter the number of wire connection attributes to insert. Modify the default values.
364 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. Wire connection templates start with “BB”. Settings are saved automatically when Insert is selected.3 Expand the Wire Connection section and select Others from the Direction/Style list. The direction determines the connection attribute name.

The "?" is a digit that indicates the preferred link line connection direction.Convert
Dismisses the dialog box. Opens the Insert/Edit Attributes dialog box used to define the properties for the selected attributes. click Symbol Builder
tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Palette Visibility Toggle. The attributes are named X?LINK.
■ ■ ■ ■
1: connects to the attribute from the right 2: connects to the attribute from above 4: connects to the attribute from the left 8: connects to the attribute from below 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder drop-down
➤ Symbol Builder. 2 Select options on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 353 dialog box.
Symbol Builder | 365
. Select a text object for conversion to the selected attribute.
Delete
Properties
See also:
■
Wire connection/terminal pin number pairs on page 321
Inserting Link Line Attributes
AutoCAD Electrical uses invisible attributes to tie in dashed link lines automatically between related components (instead of cross-reference annotation). 3 Click OK to enter the block editor environment. Removes the selected attributes from the list so they are not inserted with the wire connection attributes. 4 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible.

Converting a single text object to an attribute definition
1 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible.
366 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. 2 Select the attribute from the list. 3 Click OK to enter the block editor environment.
3
Click the Convert Text tool at the top of the section for the attribute. 2 Select options on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 353 dialog box making sure to select the existing text objects.
8
Click the Insert Link Line tool. The text value becomes the default value for the attribute when the block is inserted on a drawing. 6 Click the Direction list to expand the list of link line options. 7 Select a direction. click Symbol Builder
tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Palette Visibility Toggle.
4 Select the text object.5 Click the arrow on the Link Lines section of the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor to expand the section.
9 Select an insertion point for the attribute.
Converting Text
You can convert text objects to attribute definitions on your symbol. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder drop-down
➤ Symbol Builder.

5 Specify the base point for symbol insertion. you are ready to save your library symbol. The default path is the image folder for the current icon menu. 2 Select WBlock in the Destination section. 10 Click OK to save the symbol. 9 Click Details to examine any errors found in the symbol audit on page 371. NOTE If you close the block editor without saving. the dialog box opens automatically. 3 Modify the block name as needed. 8 Modify the image File path as needed.
368 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
.dwg file for insertion on a drawing. NOTE The symbol is not automatically added to the icon menu but can be added using the Icon Menu Wizard on page 1269.To convert an existing text object to an attribute. Select the No button to close the block editor without saving the symbol changes.
Saving the Symbol
Once you have added the attributes and completed the symbol graphics. This image file can be used if you add the symbol to the icon menu. 4 Modify the wblock File path as needed. The following steps save your symbol as a . They also create an icon image to use when you add this symbol to an icon menu. 7 Modify the image name as needed. 6 Check Icon image to create a . The Save Symbol dialog box is displayed.
1 Click Symbol Builder tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Done. select the text and click the arrow pointing at the attribute.png file. The text string is used as the default value for the attribute and the text object is deleted.

Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder Command entry: AESYMBUILDER 1 Select options on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 353 dialog box. 3 Modify the symbol as needed as described in related topics. It is because the drawing file for the library symbol is opened. The Save Symbol dialog box is displayed.See also:
■
Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard on page 1269
Save Symbol
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder
drop-down ➤ Symbol Builder. this dialog box opens automatically. If Wblock is selected.
Symbol
Block/Wblock Select Block to insert your new component into your drawing or Wblock to save a copy of your new symbol.
Symbol Builder | 369
. the File path is available. The No button on this dialog box closes the block editor without saving the symbol changes. NOTE The Block option is not available if you browsed to an existing symbol on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 353 dialog box. 2 Click OK to enter the block editor environment.
4 Click Symbol Builder tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Done. NOTE If you close the block editor without saving.

catalog lookup. Symbol Name: The next two characters of the symbol name indicate the family type and can match the symbol to a catalog lookup table. The symbol file name. or user-defined for other symbol types. the WDBLKNAM value overrides the catalog lookup table defined by the second and third characters of the symbol name.
Catalog name
Type
The fourth character of the symbol name can be a “1” for a parent symbol. the fifth character is “1” for normally open or “2” for normally closed.Orientation
The first character of the symbol.
Contact
Unique identifier
Symbol name
File path
Details
370 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. They use “T0” for a terminal that does not trigger a wire number change. Additional characters added to the symbol name to make it unique. WDBLKNAM: On a schematic symbol. The WDBLKNAM value is always used on panel footprint symbols to match the symbol to a catalog lookup table. If the symbol is a schematic child. “H” for horizontal or “V” for vertical. Edit the symbol name as needed. The name of the folder for the symbol. otherwise it is userdefined. NOTE Schematic terminals use “T1” for a terminal that triggers a wire number change. “2” for a child symbol. Opens the Symbol Audit dialog box to view the specific errors. and unique identifier. contact. Symbol Builder suggests a file name based on the orientation. Browse to a folder or enter in the folder name. type.

Select Specify on Screen to specify the base point after selecting OK.png file type. 3 Add attributes as needed. Image files are created as a . The name of the folder for the image file. See Also: Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard on page 1269 The image file name. Browse to a folder or enter in the folder name.
Name File path
See also:
■
Overview of symbol naming conventions on page 294
Symbol Audit
This dialog box provides audit information on the attributes and symbol name.
Symbol Builder | 371
. The audit information is based on the symbol type.
Image
Icon image Create an image to use if you add this new symbol to an icon menu.Base point
Enter the base point coordinates for the symbol or select Pick point to select on the drawing.
Toolbar: Miscellaneous Menu: Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder Command entry: AESYMBUILDER 1 Select options on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 353 dialog box. 2 Click OK to enter the block editor environment. The coordinates become the insertion base point for the symbol. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Symbol Builder
drop-down ➤ Symbol Builder.

Lists the attributes on the attribute template but removed from the list. This error condition exists if neither the X or Y value of the insertion point matches the insertion point of at least one of the wire connection attributes. Lists layers other than 0 containing entities.
372 | Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries
. This error condition exists for a horizontal symbol without left or right wire connection attributes. The number of errors for each category is displayed in parentheses or. It also exists for a vertical symbol without top or bottom wire connection attributes.xml file for reference. (OK) if no errors exist within the category. such as MFG. based on the attribute template. but are not present on the symbol.
The tree structure lists categories of errors found on the symbol.
Duplicated attributes Missing values
Missing prompts
Missing group attributes
Template mismatch
Layers Insertion point
Orientation
Select Save As to save the error information as an .4
Select the Audit tool. Lists attributes with default values defined on the attribute template but are missing on the attributes on the symbol. CAT. Lists attributes with duplicated tags present on the symbol.
Missing required attributes Lists attributes that are in the required group. Lists attributes with default prompts defined on the attribute template but are missing on the attributes on the symbol. ASSYCODE. Lists attributes missing from common groups.

Symbol Preview Guide
373
.

374

JIC Symbols

6
Description Push Button Normally Open

Push Buttons
Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol

HPB11

VPB11

Push Button Normally Closed

HPB12

VPB12

Mushroom Head Normally Open

HPB11M

VPB11M

375

Mushroom Head Normally Closed

HPB12M

VPB12M

Illuminated Push Button Normally Open

HPB11L

VPB11L

Illuminated Push Button Normally Closed

HPB12L

VPB12L

Illuminated Mushroom Head Normally Open

HPB11ML

VPB11ML

Illuminated Mushroom Head Normally Closed

HPB12ML

VPB12ML

376 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols

2nd+ Normally Open Contact

HPB21

VPB21

2nd+ Normally Closed Contact

HPB22

VPB22

2nd+ Red Light

HPB2R

VPB2R

2nd+ Green Light

HPB2G

VPB2G

2nd+ Amber Light

HPB2A

VPB2A

Push Buttons | 377

2nd+ Yellow Light

HPB2Y

VPB2Y

2nd+ Blue Light

HPB2B

VPB2B

2nd+ White Light

HPB2W

VPB2W

2nd+ Clear Light

HPB2C

VPB2C

NOTE Lights will receive text to indicate the color at the time of insertion.

No Wirenumber Changes .Spare/Single Side
Horizontal Symbol Vertical Symbol Description Plug Right or up
HC01P_
VC01P_
Jack Left or Down
HC01_J
VC01_J
Plug Right or up (Combined tag/pin)
HC01P_1
VC01P_1
Jack Left or Down (Combined)
HC01_J1
VC01_J1
418 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
.Connectors .

2nd+ Plug Right or up
HC02P_
VC02P_
2nd+ Jack Left or Down
HC02_J
VC02_J
2nd+ Plug Right or up (Combined)
HC02P_1
VC02P_1
2nd+ Jack Left or Down (Combined)
HC02_J1
VC02_J1
Jack Right or up
HC01J_
VC01J_
Connectors .No Wirenumber Changes | 419
.

Plug Left or Down
HC01_P
VC01_P
Jack Right or up (Combined)
HC01J_1
VC01J_1
Plug Left or Down (Combined)
HC01_P1
VC01_P1
2nd+ Jack Right or up
HC02J_
VC02J_
2nd+ Plug Left or Down
HC02_P
VC02_P
420 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
.

Plug Right or up (Combined tag/pin)
HCN1P_1
VCN1P_1
Jack Left or Down (Combined)
HCN1_J1
VCN1_J1
2nd+ Plug Right or up
HCN2P_
VCN2P_
2nd+ Jack Left or Down
HCN2_J
VCN2_J
2nd+ Plug Right or up (Combined)
HCN2P_1
VCN2P_1
Connectors .Wirenumber Changes | 423
.

2nd+ Jack Left or Down (Combined)
HCN2_J1
VCN2_J1
Jack Right or up
HCN1J_
VCN1J_
Plug Left or Down
HCN1_P
VCN1_P
Jack Right or up (Combined)
HCN1J_1
VCN1J_1
Plug Left or Down (Combined)
HCN1_P1
VCN1_P1
424 | Chapter 6 JIC Symbols
.

3 Position Normally Closed Return From Left
HSS123L
VSS123L
3 Position Normally Open Return From Right
HSS113R
VSS113R
3 Position Normally Closed Return From Right
HSS123R
VSS123R
3 Position Normally Open Return From Both
HSS113B
VSS113B
3 Position Normally Closed Return From Both
HSS123B
VSS123B
472 | Chapter 7 IEC Symbols
.

you can interrupt it to break the module and then restart it at a different location. During the insertion process. in a variety of different graphical styles. As AutoCAD Electrical builds the module. whatever that value is. The PLC database contains the stack sequence and text values to annotate onto each symbol in the stack. all without a single. complete I/O module library symbol resident on the system. it reads the underlying ladder rung spacing and spreads out the stack or compresses it to match the rung spacing.MDB).
Generate PLC layout modules
635
. and can stretch or break into two or more pieces at insertion time. Modules automatically adapt to the underlying ladder rung spacing.PLC
8
AutoCAD Electrical can generate any of hundreds of different PLC I/O modules on demand. It is possible because AutoCAD Electrical generates PLC I/O modules through a parametric generation technique driven by a PLC database (ACE_PLC.

breaks the wires. and produces a completed I/O module. and produces a completed I/O module. The selected unit inserts into the ladder. draws a rectangular box around the entire assembly. AutoCAD Electrical selects the appropriate symbols to use.mdb) is used to drive the PLC I/O module generation process. Each symbol is a building block with a different arrangement of attributes and wire connection points. You can modify the PLC database file manually or using the PLC Database File Editor on page 650 (recommended method). Full Units
Parametric PLC symbols are stored in
■
Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\ Windows Vista: \Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\
■
The file names begin with the characters "HP" (Horizontal ladder rungs / PLC) or "VP" (Vertical ladder rungs) followed by a digit that corresponds to a PLC I/O style number. it can be inserted as a single unit using the Insert PLC (Full Units) on page 639 command. If a PLC module symbol is built with the appropriate attributes in place and the symbol name follows naming convention of AutoCAD Electrical (the block name begins with "PLCIO"). Some PLC units may not lend themselves well to parametric generation. and annotates the attributes of the new module.mdb) is installed in
■
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Plc Windows Vista:C:\Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Plc
■
Each Parametric PLC symbol is a building block with a different arrangement of attributes and wire connection points. stacks them together in the order defined by the parametric data file. creates a single block out of the collection. AutoCAD Electrical inserts the symbols based upon the rung spacing of the underlying ladder. AutoCAD Electrical selects the appropriate symbols to use.Parametric PLC symbols vs. and then reconnects.
PLC parametric selection
636 | Chapter 8 PLC
. explodes them. stacks them together in the order defined by the data file. The PLC database file (ace_plc. The AutoCAD Electrical PLC database file (ace_plc.

ACE_PLC. drives generation.mdb. "ace_plc.
Manufacturer Catalog tree
Provides a complete list of the PLC modules available to AutoCAD Electrical.
Generate PLC layout modules | 637
.MDB. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert PLC
drop-down ➤ Insert PLC (Parametric).Inserts a parametrically generated PLC I/O module. The Manufacturer Catalog tree is compiled from the database file."
Module List
Displays the defined modules. Once you select a module type or a specific module from the Manufacturer Catalog tree.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ Insert PLC (Parametric) Command entry: AEPLCP Generate PLC I/O modules on demand in a variety of graphical styles with no complete I/O module library symbols. A PLC database. Modules adapt to the underlying ladder rung spacing. You can stretch or break them into two or more pieces at insertion time. It contains the stack sequence and the text values to annotate onto each symbol in the stack. Select from this list to begin the PLC module insertion process. AutoCAD Electrical reads through the information contained in the database.

Scale
Specifies the scale for the PLC module.dwg" where "?" is the style number. click OK. Styles 6-9 may be user-defined. Styles 1-5 are provided with AutoCAD Electrical. If you wish to override this spacing. and place the PLC in the drawing.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ Insert PLC (Parametric) Command entry: AEPLCP Select the PLC module to insert.
Spacing
Specifies the spacing for the module. You can also specify to apply a border to the PLC module upon insertion. An easy way to create a style is to copy the symbols of an existing style to one of the unused style numbers (6. or 9) and edit each library symbol.
Module layout
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert PLC
drop-down ➤ Insert PLC (Parametric). They are located in
■
Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\{library}\ Windows Vista: \Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\{library}\
■
The symbols carry the file name "HP?*. 8.Graphics Style
Specifies the graphical appearance of the PLC module. Select a style number and a sample portion of a PLC module displays. modify the number shown in the spacing edit box. The arrows below this box increment the number by
638 | Chapter 8 PLC
. To create a user-defined style: There are about two dozen symbols associated with each style. 7. The module defaults to the underlying rung spacing.dwg" or "VP?*.

Select Allow Spacers/Breaks and after each I/O you have the opportunity to insert a space.
Insert PLC modules | 639
. if the rung spacing is 0.the rung spacing. dummy terminals with no electrical connection). If the module's definition (in the Attributes column of the Module Terminal Information table of the ace_plc.
Include unused/extra connections
Specifies to include all of the extra connections to the PLC. break the module. or insert the rest normally. then the Note highlights and the module automatically prompts you for permission to break at the correct point during module insertion. You can also add extra space between adjacent I/O points.mdb file) or by selecting "When Including Unused" or "When Excluding Unused" in the Show column of the PLC Database File Editor dialog box. For example. Some modules may have terminals that are not used (that is. but you can set up the PLC modules to show unused terminals optionally.5 then each time you click ">" the number increases by 0.
Insert PLC modules
Insert PLC modules
In AutoCAD Electrical. This results in the most compact representation of the module. You can break a module into as many pieces as you want at insertion time. It is useful for a module that does not fit into a single ladder column. It allows for the extra room needed for parallel components.\SPECIAL=BREAK" flag.mdb file or by selecting the check box in the Break After column of the PLC Database File Editor dialog box) carries a ". you can insert either PLC I/O points as independent symbols or as a complete PLC module into your drawing.
I/O points
Specifies whether to include all of the points or break the module into many pieces.5. Unused terminals are skipped by default. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert PLC
drop-down ➤ Insert PLC (Full Units). It is done by adding in "\SPECIAL=INCLUDE" and "\SPECIAL=EXCLUDE" flags (in the Attributes column of the Module Terminal Information table of the ace_plc.

I/O point address. When you select an I/O address from the list the I/O Point Description: Address automatically updates. and click OK. Lists any I/O points already assigned to the drawing or project. or catalog information for a plc module that was imported using the Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet tool may result in problems when you export the data back to Unity Pro. Specify the values you need and press OK. 3 Specify the insertion point on the drawing.2 In the PLC Fixed Units dialog box.
Edit PLC module
Use this dialog box when inserting or editing a PLC module.
Used: Drawing or Project
640 | Chapter 8 PLC
.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the PLC module to edit. 4 Add or edit any information in the Edit PLC Module dialog box. select the PLC module to insert. Select a tag from the list to copy. or to increment for this new component.
Addressing
First Address List Specifies the first I/O address for the PLC module. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components
drop-down ➤ Edit. Lists the available I/O addresses to select from. The values are then annotated onto the selected module. An alert displays to ask whether you want to proceed with the changes. NOTE Editing the first address.

Line1/Line2
Specifies optional description text for the module. To achieve this tag override you would enter "IO-%N" for the tag override format. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. a certain PLC module must always have an "IO" family tag value instead of "PLC" so that retag. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup.
Insert PLC modules | 641
. For example. The tag value can be manually typed in the edit box. assigns IO-100 instead of PLC100.
Assembly
Lists the assembly code for the I/O point. May be used to identify the relative location of the module in the I/O assembly (example: Rack # and Slot #). Retag Component can then use this override format value to calculate a new tag for the PLC module. for example.
Options
Substitutes a fixed text string for the %F part of the tag format. Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected cable. Database queries are set up in the 3 lists across the top of the dialog box with the database hits listed in the main window of the dialog box.
Catalog
Lists the catalog number for the I/O point. The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together.
Manufacturer
Lists the manufacturer number for the I/O point.
Catalog Lookup
Opens the I/O point's PLCIO table in the catalog database from which you can manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values.Tag
Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each I/O point.

Displays contents of an external comma-delimited ASCII text file of I/O point descriptions.
Next/Pick List descriptions
I/O
Wired Devices
External File
Installation/Location codes
Changes the installation or location code s. Lists the I/O point descriptions currently assigned to each I/O point on the module or connected. Selecting one of the buttons next to this displays a different list of description in the box below. May be used to identify the module type (for example. Pick to copy the description. Pick to copy. Pick an entry in the file and then copy the values to edit boxes in the Edit dialog box. Enter up to five lines of description attribute text.Description
Optional line of description text.24VDC")
I/O Point Description
Address Description 1-5 Specifies the I/O address assignment. Optional description text. Lists I/O point descriptions used so far on the module. Selects a description from a module on the current drawing. You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation and location codes. "16 Discrete Inputs . wired devices in a pick list. Lists descriptions of wired devices that are found to be connected to the I/O module. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of codes used so far is returned.
642 | Chapter 8 PLC
. Select from the list to update the module automatically with the installation or location code.

Overview of the PLC database file
You can modify the PLC database file manually or using the PLC Database File Editor on page 650 (recommended method). Series. Select Defaults to display a list of default values.mdb) is installed in
■
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Plc Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Plc
■
By default the AutoCAD Electrical PLC database file contains the "PLC_Manufacturer". We recommend that you do not edit this table. NOTE PLC Parametric build symbols are best used on ANSI D-Size and IEC A1 page sizes. "PLC_MSG" and "PLC_Styles" tables in addition to several module specification and module terminal information tables. You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a module.Pins
Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the module. This table is for internal use only.
Show/Edit Miscellaneous
View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes.
PLC_Manufacturer This table lists the Manufacturer. and Table Name.
Ratings
Specifies values for each ratings attribute. The AutoCAD Electrical PLC database file (ace_plc. the module you are editing does not carry rating attributes. NOTE If Ratings is unavailable. Type.
PLC_MSG
Overview of the PLC database file | 643
.

The following are optional parameters for parametric build symbol placement: Box color/linetype/layer You can instruct AutoCAD Electrical to draw the rectangular box using non-default line properties for color. METRIC_BOX_BOTTOM METRIC_BOX_SPLIT_BOTTOM.5 COLOR CYAN LTYPE HIDDEN2 BOX_TOP=0. linetype. 3 = inserted centered between the bus lines of the ladder. 2 = inserted near the left or top bus line of the ladder.
Specifies the insertion position for the module when inserted during the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O utility. METRIC_BOX_TOP. "BOX_TOP" and "BOX_BOTTOM" entries in the specification table of a module. METRIC_BOX_SPLIT_TOP CATEGORY
NOTE You can suppress the rectangular box around the finished module by removing these entries from the specification table of a module. the following makes the left and right-hand sides of the enclosing box cyan using linetype 'Hidden2' and the top and bottom blue using the default linetype: BOX_RIGHT=0. "BOX_LEFT". layer.5 COLOR CYAN LTYPE HIDDEN2 BOX_LEFT=0.
CODE Catalog number of the module
Overview of the PLC database file | 645
. For example. or ltscale. METRIC_BOX_LEFT.METRIC_BOX_RIGHT. The keywords are encoded into the "BOX_RIGHT". Encode this information as a series of keywords as if you were using the CHPROP command in AutoCAD to make the change.5 COLOR BLUE BOX_BOTTOM=0. ■ ■ ■ 1 = inserted near the right or bottom bus line of the ladder.375 COLOR BLUE
Module Terminal Information table (ends with _Data)
Example: "allen-bradley_1746_analog_input_Data" This file contains terminal information for the module type.

bit number format. do the following: 1 Prompt for Rack and Group values in the first entry of the module. Dealing with non-sequential addresses Some modules may have I/O address assignments that do not sequentially increment from one terminal to the next. %%2. address prefix or suffix. %%x prompt values.%%2PROMPT=Group number. TERMDESC_=1:%%1%%2/00 for the first I/O point TERMDESC_=1:%%1%%2/01 for the 2nd I/O point User Attributes You can add and annotate your own attributes to the parametric symbols if they are referenced in the Module Terminal Information table.TAGA_=IN-%%N" to each I/O parametric data entry in the block of data of the module. Optional attributes for the terminal. group or slot. Address prefix or suffix You can include a prefix or suffix to each address value that is inserted. The "?" gets filled in during insertion and the block name uses either a "H" or "V" depending on the selected orientation. For example.
ATTRIBUTES
The following are optional parameters for parametric build symbol placement: Use of %%x prompt values After entering values such as rack. Use the "%%A" flag to represent the beginning address of the module. the values are available for use on any subsequent I/O point of the module. In the example shown below. 2 Encode the TERMDESC_ value using %%1. reprompt of I/O address. The %%N represents the calculated I/O address and the "IN-" is the prefix that gets added.SEQUENCE BLOCK
Terminal sequence number Block name used for insertion. the address
646 | Chapter 8 PLC
. and a bit number suffix. Includes user attributes. If you want to use each I/O point's TERMDESC_ attribute to carry the I/O address in Rack/Group. breaks. including unused terminals and special spacing. non-sequential addresses. %%1PROMPT=Rack number. if you want "IN-" to come in as a prefix for inputs on a given module you would edit the database file and add ".

. Add "\SPECIAL=BREAK" on the line where you want the break to occur.TAGA_=%%A+5 TERM_=2. If you want to break the module sooner you can use the PLC Database File Editor to add the break command or do the following in the Module Terminal Information table. CODE
D2-08ND3
BLOCK
HP?--WLR
ATTRIBUTES
TERM_=C.TAGA_=%%A+1 TERM_=5.TAGA_=%%A+2 TERM_=6. You can trigger AutoCAD Electrical to prompt for a new beginning address number when the parametric build
Overview of the PLC database file | 647
.C.CAT=D208ND3. For example. If the module exceeds 20 terminals the break is placed in a logical location. a 32 I/O point card could have 36 terminals on it.TAGA_=%%A+6 TERM_=3.TAGA_=%%A+4 TERM_=1. 20 terminals are allowed on the parametric build symbols by default.sequence is non-sequential.TERM_07\SPECIAL=BREAK Triggering for reprompt of I/O address Some modules include inputs and outputs. Note the use of the "TAGA_=%%A+ <some value>" flags. the module definition would run the break command at 18 (after the first set of 16 I/O addresses).TAGA_=%%A+7
D2-08ND3 D2-08ND3 D2-08ND3 D2-08ND3 D2-08ND3 D2-08ND3 D2-08ND3 D2-08ND3
HP?WA-DQ HP?WA-DR HP?WA-DQ HP?WA-DR HP?WA-DQ HP?WA-DR HP?WA-DQ HP?WA-DR
Forcing a break You can pre-define a module break point in the Module Terminal Information table. such as after a grouping of I/O addressing...MFG=PLC-DIRECT. TERM_=0 TERM_=4.TAGA_=%%A+3 TERM_=7. HP?WA-D.

it uses a factor of the rung spacing.TERM_=VDC HP?WA-D.5 inserts the point down an extra half run spacing than normal while 0. You can override it by using the "\SPECIAL=SPACINGFACTOR=<val> in the Module Terminal Information table.TERM_=COM.TERM_=01 HP?W--. When AutoCAD Electrical sees it on an I/O point or wire connection entry line. A value of 1. Including unused terminals Some modules may have terminals that are not used.5 HP?WA-D.5" for a given I/O or wire connection entry flags AutoCAD Electrical to insert this point down 0.
648 | Chapter 8 PLC
.0 inserts the I/O point at the same location as the preceding one.flips from inputs to outputs or vice versa.\SPECIAL=SPACINGFACTOR=0.5 HP?W--.TERM_=01 HP?W--. For example. Unused terminals are skipped by default. edit the file to read: HP?WA-D. You can set up the PLC database file to show unused terminals optionally by adding "\SPECIAL_INCLUDE" and "\SPECIAL_EXCLUDE" in the Module Terminal Information table. resulting in a compact representation of the module. it uses the current rung spacing for I/O and wire connection point spacing.TERM_=VDC.TERM_=02 If you want the two middle terminal symbols to group into one rung space instead of taking up two spaces.TERM_=02
Copy modules
You can copy an entire module into a new module using the PLC Database File Editor. Add "\SPECIAL=ADDR_OUT" on the line where you want a prompt for a new output address or add "\SPECIAL=ADDR_IN" if you want a prompt for a new beginning input address. the following four lines in a parametric data file inserts four points spread out over four-ladder rung spaces: HP?WA-D. For example. a "\SPECIAL=SPACINGFACTOR=0.5 rung spacing instead of a full rung spacing. Special spacing Normally when AutoCAD Electrical generates a PLC module.\SPECIAL=SPACINGFACTOR=0.TERM_=COM HP?W--.

2 Select the module to modify from the tree structure. and context menus that you can use to modify the terminal information.1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database Editors
drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor. right-click the module.
Overview of the PLC database file | 649
. select Rename. 1746. you would find Discrete Input under Allen Bradley ➤ 1746 in the tree. 3 Select the terminals to modify. and enter a new name. 2 In the PLC selection list.
Adjust the terminal information
When you highlight an exiting module part number in the PLC Database File Editor tree structure. Discrete Input. If you attempt to copy a PLC Module part number into a PLC Type that already has a module with the same name. text boxes. 3 Right-click the Type in the tree that you want to copy to. 4 Select Paste Module. if you want to copy the new module to Allen-Bradley. Inside the terminal grid control there are drop-down list boxes. 5 To change the name for the module. right-click on the module that you want to copy from and select Copy. the terminal grid control becomes populated with the terminal information previously defined for the module. the PLC Database File Editor prompts you to change the name of the new module being copied. You can select multiple fields to edit at the same time by dragging your mouse across contiguous fields or by holding down the Control key while selecting non-contiguous fields. For example.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database Editors
drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor.

MDB). either make your changes on the PLC Database File Editor dialog box (using the drop-down list boxes or text boxes) or select a single terminal (making sure to select the entire row if you want to change more than one field).
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database
Editors drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor.
■
If you want to modify the terminals one at a time.
PLC database file editor
This tool creates and modifies PLC modules. 6 Click Done to save your changes and exit the dialog box or click Done/Insert to save your changes and insert the PLC module into your drawing. and select Edit Terminal from the menu. All editing and creation of PLC data is stored within the PLC Database File (ACE_PLC. Changes that you make in this box will be applied to all of the selected terminals in the terminal grid control.You can also select multiple terminals if you want the terminals to carry the same information. click the right mouse button. click the right mouse button. make any modifications to the selected terminals. and select Edit Terminal from the menu.
■
4 In the Select Terminal Information dialog box.
Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor Command entry: AEPLCDB
PLC Selection List
Provides a complete list of the PLC data files available to AutoCAD Electrical. The PLC Selection list uses an expandable and collapsible tree structure for
650 | Chapter 8 PLC
. 5 Click OK to save your changes and return to the PLC Database File Editor. If you want to modify multiple terminals at the same time. select the terminals.

type. The type then appears in the PLC Selection tree structure in alphabetical order. The manufacturer then appears in the PLC Selection tree structure in alphabetical order. and Part Number. Type. The module then appears in the PLC Selection tree structure in alphabetical order. (available only for the Type and Module/Code branches of the tree structure) Defines a new PLC module underneath the respective Manufacturer. Renames a PLC module. Series. You cannot have duplicate names in the same branch of the tree structure. (available only for the Manufacturer branch of the tree structure) Defines a new PLC series underneath the respective Manufacturer. or manufacturer in the tree structure. Deletes an entire PLC module. (available only for the Type branch of the tree structure) Copies the PLC module to the highlighted PLC Type branch. renaming. and creating PLC data. type. or a new PLC Type category. (available only for the Series branch of the tree structure) Defines a new PLC type underneath the respective Manufacturer and Series. The right-click controls for the selection list are:
New Manufacturer (available only for the PLC branch of the tree structure) Defines a new manufacturer. You can then paste the code into the same PLC Type. or manufacturer from the tree structure and the PLC database (ACE_PLC. and Type. series. series. Series. These PLC categories are: Manufacturer.
New Series
New Type
New Module
Paste Module
Delete
Rename
Cut
Overview of the PLC database file | 651
. (available only for the Module branch of the tree structure) Cuts the highlighted module code from the tree structure. This option becomes active after you copy or cut a PLC module inside the Module/Code branch of the tree structure. deleting. The series then appears in the PLC Selection tree structure in alphabetical order.the PLC categories.MDB). The tree structure supports right-click controls for copying.

Prompts for a new beginning address number when the parametric build flips from inputs to outputs or from outputs to inputs. select Break After. If Include Unused/Extra Connections in the Module Layout dialog box is selected. all terminal entries marked (in the PLC Database File Editor dialog box) with 'when excluding unused' are skipped and all terminal entries marked with "when including unused" are shown.
Terminal Type Specifies the type for the terminal.
Terminal Grid Control
Highlight a module from the PLC Selection tree structure to populate the Terminal Grid Control with the terminal information that was previously defined for the module. On the line where you want AutoCAD Electrical to prompt for a new output address. a value of two inserts the point down two times the rung spacing instead of a full rung spacing. the PLC Database File Editor prompts you to change the name of the new module being copied. select Output. select Input from the list. Shows terminals that are not used. For example. Specifies for the module to break automatically after a specific terminal type. When creating a PLC module. To activate the prompt for an automatic break in the PLC module. Overrides the current rung spacing for I/O and wire connection point spacing.
Show
Optional Re-prompt
Break After
Spacing Factor
652 | Chapter 8 PLC
.
NOTE If you attempt to copy a PLC Module part number into a PLC Type that already has a module with the same name. the PLC Database File Editor lists as many blank Terminal Type fields since are terminals defined within the New Module dialog box. Select from the various predetermined types of addressable terminals and non-addressable terminals. If you want AutoCAD Electrical to prompt for a new input address.Copy
(available only for the Module branch of the tree structure) Copies the highlighted module code from the tree structure into the same PLC Type. or a new PLC Type.

Series Type. the New Module dialog box opens with data already specified for the Manufacturer.
Module Specifications
Opens a dialog box for modifying some of the specifications previously defined during the creation of a new module.
Overview of the PLC database file | 653
. These attributes can have predefined values. Series. or delete a terminal from the grid control. NOTE The Manufacturer. NOTE If you right-click a type or module in the PLC Selection window and select New Module.
Style Box Dimensions
Opens a dialog box for defining the module box dimensions (such as the offset values and line properties) based upon the style number used when the PLC was created. and Terminals fields are not active since they are under the control of the tree structure in the PLC Selection window and the total number of terminals listed in the Terminal Type grid control. insert a new terminal before or after the selected terminal in the grid control. Series. you get a prompt asking whether to save your changes. including some values that you specify at insertion time. Code. If you exit the PLC Database File Editor without clicking Save Module. You can select multiple fields to update at the same time by dragging your mouse across contiguous fields or by holding down the Control key while selecting non-contiguous fields. A series of boxes are used to type in or select the values required to define the module. and Series Type.You can right-click any row in the grid control to activate a menu of commands that allows you to edit the terminal.
New Module
Opens a dialog box for defining the module descriptions and parameters.
Save Module
Saves the module to the PLC database file.
Terminal Attributes
Displays attributes associated to the selected terminal.

and then click the Module Box Dimensions button. break the line across terminal graphics. NOTE A value for the Split Top and Split Bottom dimensions must be set before you can specify their line properties. and bottom offsets for the rectangle that surrounds the module. See the CHPROP command in the AutoCAD Help for more information about the various properties you can set. top. The optional Split Top and Split Bottom specify the offsets for a split module where Split Top specifies the offset for the top of a split module and Split Bottom specifies the offset for the bottom of the split module. AutoCAD Electrical uses the rectangle Top and Bottom values.Command entry: AEPLCDB Click the New Module or Module Specifications button.
Module Box Dimensions
NOTE Enter at least one of the Top. For linetype.
Line Properties
Sets the properties for the lines that make up the box. you can reference your custom AutoLISP function in this box. Within your function use "(entlast)" to reference the drawn line entity. enter the keyword “ERASE” or “_E”. If you do not want the line drawn. You can select multiple fields to edit at the same time by dragging your mouse across contiguous fields or by holding down the Control key while selecting non-contiguous fields. To predefine the color. for example.
Overview of the PLC database file | 655
. enter "COLOR colorname" into the box. left. Left or Right dimension values to assign settings specific to this module.
Select terminal information
Adds or modifies the type of terminal being used. enter "LTYPE linetypename" into the box. Sets the right. You can set the color and linetype using the properties fields. If you want to apply some special procedure to the drawn line. If left blank. Bottom.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database
Editors drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor.

Recently Used
Shows an image of the terminals that were recently used. and Terminal.
Types for Category
Displays the types for the terminal category. and select Edit Terminal from the menu.
Optional Re-prompt Address
Specifies whether to prompt for a new beginning address number when the parametric build flips from inputs to outputs or from outputs to inputs. Top Input and Top Output are addressable terminals. if you select the Show and Spacing Factor fields for multiple terminal entries in the Terminal Grid Control section of the PLC Database File Editor dialog box and then you activate this dialog box.
Show
Specifies whether to show terminals that are not used. you can update both fields through this dialog box for the selected terminals. For example. The dialog box options enable depending on the fields selected at the time the dialog box was activated. all terminal entries marked (in the PLC Database File Editor dialog box) with 'when excluding unused' are skipped. If the 'Include unused/extra connections' option in the Module Layout dialog box is selected. Output. Other categories to select from are Input.
Category
Lists the terminal categories to select from. Browse the list of images to determine which terminal type is appropriate for the terminal. while the Top Terminal category consists of non-addressable terminals.Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor Command entry: AEPLCDB Right-click in the terminal grid control section of the dialog box. On the line where you want AutoCAD Electrical to reprompt for a new output
656 | Chapter 8 PLC
.

A series of boxes are used to type in or select the values required to define the module. and Series Type.address. Series. a value of 2 causes AutoCAD Electrical to insert the point down two times the rung spacing instead of a full rung spacing. To activate the prompt for an automatic break in the PLC module. For example. If you want AutoCAD Electrical to reprompt for a new input address.
New module
Defines the module descriptions and parameters.
Spacing Factor
Overrides the current rung spacing for I/O and wire connection point spacing. select Output.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database
Editors drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor.
Break After
Specifies for the module to break automatically after a specific terminal type. Series Type. and Code (Catalog Number) for the new module. NOTE If you right-click a type or module in the PLC Selection window and select New Module.
Overview of the PLC database file | 657
. check the Break After check box. Series. Select from the list or enter the name in the edit box.
Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor Command entry: AEPLCDB Click New Module.
New Module Controls
Specifies the Manufacturer. the New Module dialog box opens with data already specified for the Manufacturer. select Input from the list.

They are typically used for inserting groups of symbols and wires.
Rating Terminals
Addressable Points
Specifies the total number of termination points on the PLC module that receives the PLC address attributes.
AutoCAD Block to insert
Specifies an AutoCAD block file to insert directly below the last I/O point inserted parametrically.PLC Selection Expanded Description Listing Controls
These controls display as an expanded description when the module is highlighted in the tree structure of the PLC Selection dialog box. They are typically used for block files that represent DIP switch settings and notes on how to configure the PLC module.
658 | Chapter 8 PLC
. Select from Octal. Specifies the total number of terminals defined on the PLC module. Decimal. and Prompt.
AutoLISP file to run at module insertion time
Specifies an AutoCAD Lisp routine to run after the program executes the parametric build of the PLC module. or modifying attributes on symbols to accommodate a more custom PLC module build. NOTE It is not active since it is under the control of the total number of terminals listed in the Terminal Type grid control. Hexadecimal. and Hexadecimal. Specifies whether the PLC module addressing follows an industry standard. Prompt asks you at module insertion time for Octal. Specifies the power rating value for the PLC module. Decimal. They include:
Description Module Type Base Addressing Describes the PLC module being defined. Gives an abbreviated type to the PLC module.

Overview of the PLC database file | 659
. You can add a terminal to the list by clicking in any box in the last entry of the list. give it a description.
Block File Name
Defines the AutoCAD drawing file name that is inserted if this terminal is included in your PLC module.
Module Prompts
Opens a dialog box for defining up to nine prompts to use at the time of module insertion. assign it to a terminal category for selection. A blank entry line is added to the bottom of the list. These PLC symbols are stored in the symbol library of the active project with the other AutoCAD Electrical component symbols. or you can remove prompts from this dialog box.
Terminal block settings
Adds or updates the symbols available to build a module.
Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor Command entry: AEPLCDB Click Settings. The box dimensions are calculated from the insertion point of the parametrically built PLC symbols. Define the block name. Their file names begin with the characters "HP" (Horizontal ladder rungs/PLC) or "VP" (Vertical ladder rungs/PLC) followed by a digit that corresponds to a PLC I/O style number.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database
Editors drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor. You can specify the prompt number and the accompanying text. and assign a bitmap to uses for dialog box displays.Module Box Dimensions
Opens a dialog box for defining the outer box dimensions of the module.

Sample Bitmap File
Specifies the bitmap file for the terminal type. you can create corresponding bitmap files.dwg or bitmap file for the selected terminal. When you add a new terminal. There are about two dozen symbols (with a file name "HP?*. This new category is added to the list. the bitmap is displayed. The next time you select a terminal type. styles 6-9 may be user-defined.
Graphics Style
Specifies the graphical appearance of the PLC module.
660 | Chapter 8 PLC
. copy symbols of an existing style to one of the unused style numbers (6-9) and edit each library symbol.dwg" where "?" is the style number) associated with each style. You can see the attributes of a specific terminal and the placement of each.
View Drawing or View Bitmap
Displays the AutoCAD . Styles 1-5 are predefined. you select from a list of terminal categories and that group of terminals is displayed. If you are adding your own terminals.
Unique Description
Specifies the description that appears underneath the terminal in the Select Terminal Information dialog box. They are located in
■
Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\ Windows Vista: \Users\Public\Documents\\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\
■
To create a style.Category
Defines the category for the terminal. Enter your bitmap name in the box or Browse for it. Select a style number . They are visible on the Select Terminal Information dialog box. There are some categories by default (such as Input or Output) but you can add your own by typing in the edit box.a sample portion of a PLC module displays.

a sample portion of a PLC module displays. Select the module from the list and click OK.
Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor Command entry: AEPLCDB Click Style Box Dimensions. Select a style number .dwg" where "?" is the style number) associated with each style. styles 6-9 may be user defined. Styles 1-5 are predefined.
Graphics Style
Specifies the graphical appearance of the PLC module. There are about two dozen symbols (with a file name "HP?*.
Overview of the PLC database file | 661
. NOTE Set a value for the Split Top and Split Bottom dimensions before specifying their line properties.
Style box dimensions
Defines the module box dimensions (such as the offset values and line properties) based upon the style number used when the PLC was created.Add Blocks From Module
Opens a dialog box for selecting a module to add terminal blocks from. copy symbols of an existing to one of the unused style numbers (6-9) and edit each library symbol. They are located in
■
Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\ Windows Vista: \Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\
■
To create a style.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database
Editors drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor.

Module specifications
Modifies specifications previously defined during the creation of a new module.
662 | Chapter 8 PLC
. You can set the color and linetype using the properties fields.Module Box Dimensions for Selected Style
Sets the right. top. NOTE These fields are not active since they are under the control of the tree structure in the PLC Selection window. the rectangle Top and Bottom values are used. If left blank. To predefine the color.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database
Editors drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor. enter "LTYPE linetypename" in the box. left.
Line Properties
Sets the properties for the lines that make up the box. Series Type. For linetype. and Code (Catalog Number) for the module.
Module Controls
Specifies the Manufacturer.
Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor Command entry: AEPLCDB Click Module Specifications. enter "COLOR colorname" into the box. Series. and bottom offsets for the rectangle that surrounds the module. The optional Split Top and Split Bottom specify the offsets for a split module where Split Top specifies the offset for the top of a split module and Split Bottom specifies the offset for the bottom of the split module.

Gives an abbreviated type to the PLC module. They are typically used for block files that represent DIP switch settings and notes on how to configure the PLC module. and Prompt.
AutoCAD Block to insert
Specifies an AutoCAD block file to insert directly below the last I/O point inserted parametrically.
Overview of the PLC database file | 663
. Hexadecimal. Specifies whether the PLC module addressing follows an industry standard. Select from Octal. NOTE It is not active since it is under the control of the total number of terminals listed in the Terminal Type grid control. They include:
Description Module Type Base Addressing Describes the PLC module being defined. or modifying attributes on symbols to accommodate a more custom PLC module build.PLC Selection Expanded Description Listing Controls
These controls display as an expanded description when the module is highlighted in the tree structure of the PLC Selection dialog box.
Rating Terminals
Addressable Points
Specifies the total number of termination points on the PLC module that receives the PLC address attributes.
AutoLISP file to run at module insertion time
Specifies an AutoCAD Lisp routine to run after the program executes the parametric build of the PLC module. and Hexadecimal. Prompt asks you at module insertion time for Octal. Specifies the power rating value for the PLC module. Decimal. They are typically used for inserting groups of symbols and wires. Decimal. Specifies the total number of terminals defined on the PLC module.

Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database
Editors drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor.
Module Prompts
Opens a dialog box for defining up to nine prompts to use at the time of module insertion.inserted near the left or top bus line of the ladder.Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Insertion Position
Specifies the insertion position for this module when inserted during the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O utility. or Right/Bottom.
Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor Command entry: AEPLCDB Click the New Module or Module Specifications button. You can specify the prompt number and the accompanying text.
■ ■ ■
Center .
Prompts at module insertion time
Defines up to nine prompts to use at the time of module insertion. Select from the list of options.inserted centered between the bus lines of the ladder.
Module Box Dimensions
Opens a dialog box for defining the outer box dimensions of the module.inserted near the right or bottom bus line of the ladder.
664 | Chapter 8 PLC
. Right/Bottom . Left/Top. or you can remove prompts from this dialog box. Left/Top . then click the Module Prompts button. Center. You can specify the prompt number and the accompanying text. The box dimensions are calculated from the insertion point of the parametrically built PLC symbols. or you can remove prompts from this dialog box.

the Spreadsheet to PLC/IO utility determined the module category based on the value in the DESCRIPTION field or the database table name. modify the text in the edit box. In AutoCAD Electrical 2009 and later. and click Change. Combination module . and click Change.inserted near the right or bottom bus line of the ladder.
■
To assign a prompt.
■ ■ ■
Input module . Output module .
■
■
Example
If you assigned RACK NUMBER to the prompt %%1 and SLOT NUMBER to the prompt %%2. To remove a prompt. select the prompt number from the list. To modify a prompt. select the prompt number from the list and click the Remove Selected Prompt button.
PLC Database Migration Utility
The Spreadsheet to PLC/IO utility uses the module category to calculate the insertion point of a module.You can define up to nine different prompts at insertion time. if the DESCRIPTION field contained the string “*IN*”. Use these prompts in the attribute grid to fill in attribute values or partial attribute values at module insertion time.
Overview of the PLC database file | 665
. The SLOT NUMBER value is saved under the %%2 variable name.
Before AutoCAD Electrical 2009. For example.inserted centered between the bus lines of the ladder. the PLC database contains a CATEGORY field. Enter values for the RACK NUMBER and SLOT NUMBER fields right before the module is built. The value you enter in the RACK NUMBER edit box is temporarily saved in memory under the variable name %%1. At insertion time. the I/O Point dialog box opens. select the prompt number from the list.inserted near the left or top bus line of the ladder. it was considered an input module. enter the prompt text in the edit box.

you are prompted to run the PLC Database Migration utility. output. The PLC Database Migration utility compares the values in the DESCRIPTION field of the PLC database to values you assign as input.
Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor Command entry: AEPLCDB When you use the PLC Database Editor.Input module 2 . the CATEGORY value is entered for that module.PLC Database Migration Utility
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ PLC Database
Migration Utility. If a match is not made.
■ ■ ■
1 . used to match to the DESCRIPTION value.Output module 3 .
666 | Chapter 8 PLC
. If there is a match to the DESCRIPTION field or table name. the module is assigned a CATEGORY value of 1 for input.Combination module
Input
Enter text. If there is a match. Command entry: AEPLCMIGRATE
PLC Database File Editor
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database
Editors drop-down ➤ PLC Database File Editor. if the CATEGORY field is not present in the table for the selected series type. the database table name is compared. or combination. comma delimited.

5 In AutoCAD Electrical. only blank CATEGORY fields are modified. run the PLC Database Migration Utility. Enter text. comma delimited. the CATEGORY field is not modified. 4 Save the database file. 6 Enter the text strings for each category.
Combination
Overwrite existing settings
The PLC Database Migration utility updates all tables in the PLC database based on these values. 2 Open the table for the series type. Use the PLC Database File Editor to assign a category to a module. 1 Using Microsoft Access. NOTE Blank spaces within the text are included as part of the search string. If there is a match. If not selected. “IN{space}*” matches “IN module” but does not match “INPUT”. 3 Remove the CATEGORY field from the table. the module is assigned a CATEGORY value of 2 for output. open the PLC database file ace_plc. For example. If there is a match.
How to re-run the PLC Database Migration Utility
If you do not get the desired results you can run this utility again. Select a “Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Insertion Point” option on the Module specifications on page 662 dialog box. the module is assigned a CATEGORY value of 3 for combination. comma delimited. used to match to the DESCRIPTION value.
Overview of the PLC database file | 667
.Output
Enter text. used to match to the DESCRIPTION value. If no match is made for a module.mdb. 7 Click OK. Select to overwrite any existing CATEGORY values.

Stand-alone I/O Points
Modify single. stand-alone PLC I/O symbols are in
■
Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\ Windows Vista: \Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\
■
The symbols do not follow the normal AutoCAD Electrical naming convention. wire left. wire right First output. Their file names must start with "PLCIO" in order for AutoCAD Electrical to find and process them along with the full PLC modules in the various BOM and PLC reports.dwg PLCIOO1. wire left. stand-alone PLC layout symbols
The single.dwg PLCIOI2T.dwg PLCIOI1. and right First output. single wire left 2+ input. and right 2+ output.Single. Here are the file names of the default symbols:
PLCIOI1T. Open each in AutoCAD and modify the appearance to suit your needs. wire left. and right 2+ input.dwg PLCIOO2T.dwg PLCIOO1T. single wire left First input.dwg PLCIOI2. and right
668 | Chapter 8 PLC
. The last three characters need not follow any naming convention.dwg First input.dwg PLCIOO2. wire left. wire right 2+ output.

Annotate stand-alone I/O points
The Edit PLC I/O Point dialog box appears when a stand-alone I/O point symbol is inserted or edited. NOTE Select from the upper row for the first I/O point of a module. 3 Change the I/O point.Insert PLC layout points
PLC I/O points can be inserted as independent symbols spread out over your drawing set. AutoCAD Electrical provides a small set of single I/O point library symbols that you can expand and modify to suit your needs.
Modify single. 4 Add or edit any information in the Edit PLC I/O Point dialog box and click OK. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components
drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. NOTE Single I/O points are selected from the second and third rows of the sub dialog box. 3 Select the component to insert and specify an insertion point. To edit a point. right-click on an I/O point and select Edit Component from the context menu. These symbols carry attributes for catalog BOM assignment. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components
drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. stand-alone PLC layout symbols | 669
. Use this dialog box to change your selected I/O point. 2 On the main icon menu select PLC I/O. 2 Select to insert PLC I/O points (found on the second and third rows of the sub dialog box) and specify an insertion point. Select from the bottom row for the second through nth points of a module (which are children symbols of the first symbol parent).

5 (Optional) To assign the description.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT Select to insert a PLC I/O point. Select a tag from the list to copy. uses the PLC address number in the tag name of the component.
Address
I/O Address Searches for a wire connection to a nearby PLC I/O address and.
Edit PLC I/O point
Use this dialog box when inserting or editing a stand-alone I/O point symbol. Specify the insertion point on the drawing. Transfers all information from the parent component to the child component being inserted or edited. click Parent/Sibling. or to increment for this new component. click Used: Drawing or Used: Project to select an I/O address that was used already on a module. Lists any I/O addresses already assigned.4 (Optional) To assign the I/O address. click External File to select the description from a comma-delimited ASCII text file of available I/O point descriptions. Specify the values you need and press OK. 6 Click OK and the values are annotated onto the I/O point. and select the parent (or another related contact). if found. If the parent is visible on the screen. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert
Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. The values are then annotated onto the selected I/O point.
Used: Drawing or Project
Parent/Sibling
670 | Chapter 8 PLC
.

Opens the catalog database of the I/O point from which you can manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values. To achieve this tag override. assigns IO-100 instead of PLC100. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup.Module Tag/Description
Tag Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each I/O point. May be used to identify the PLC type (for example. Lists the assembly code for the I/O point. Rack # and Slot #). Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. The tag value can be manually typed in the edit box. stand-alone PLC layout symbols | 671
. Lists the manufacturer number for the I/O point. Lists the catalog number for the I/O point. Optional description text for the I/O point.24VDC")
Line1/ Line2
Manufacturer
Catalog
Assembly
Catalog Lookup
Options
Description
I/O Point Description
Description 1-5 Specifies optional description text. Substitutes a fixed text string for the %F part of the tag format. for example. For example. "16 Discrete Inputs . Optional line of description text. a certain PLC module must always have an "IO" family tag value instead of "PLC" so that retag. enter "IO-%N" for the tag override format. Database queries are set up in the 3 lists across the top of the dialog box with the database hits listed in the main window of the dialog box. Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected cable. May be used to identify the relative location of the point in the I/O assembly (for example. The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together.
Modify single. Enter up to five lines of description attribute text. Retag Component can then use this override format value to calculate a new tag for the PLC module.

Displays contents of an external comma-delimited ASCII text file of I/O point descriptions. the module you are editing does not carry rating attributes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of codes used so far is returned. and then copy the values to edit boxes in the Edit dialog box.
Pins
Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the module.
Ratings
Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a module.
Work with PLC styles
Modify a PLC appearance style
There are 5 predefined PLC styles provided with AutoCAD Electrical. If one or more of these do not appeal to you or if you have a
672 | Chapter 8 PLC
.
List descriptions: External file
Installation/Location codes
Changes the installation or location codes. numbered 1 through 5. Select Defaults to display a list of default values. Pick an entry in the file. NOTE If Ratings is unavailable.Pick
Selects a description from a module on the current drawing. Select from the list to update the module automatically with the installation or location code. You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation and location codes.
Show/Edit Miscellaneous
View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes.

dwg" where "?" is the style number.
Create a PLC style
An easy way to create a PLC style is to copy the library symbols of an existing PLC style to one of the unused style numbers (6.bmp where 'x' is the PLC style number (1-9) and H or V indicate the module orientation (horizontal or vertical)
■
Work with PLC styles | 673
.dwg"). copy style 1 to style 6 by copying "\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\hp1*. 3 Save the file as a bitmap using the following name definition:
■
For the Drawing Properties dialog box: the graphic must have the name P_STYLExH. select "6" in the style sub dialog box when you prepare to select and insert a new PLC module. They carry the file name "HP?*.
Add a new PLC style
The icon menu graphics that display for the various PLC styles are bitmap files saved to your \Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Acade\ folder where AutoCAD Electrical's Insert PLC and Drawing Properties tools can access them. or 9) and then edit each one to suit your needs.125 text height version). To access your new style. 1 Create the style in AutoCAD.dwg" to "\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\hp6*.bmp where 'x' is the PLC style number (1-9) and H or V indicate the module orientation (horizontal or vertical) For the Insert PLC dialog box: the file name must be STYLExH. There are about 3 dozen symbols associated with each style. For example. 8. They are located in the jic1 subdirectory (or jic125 for the uniform 0. you can pick one of the existing styles and modify it.dwg" to "\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\hp6*.bmp or P_STYLExV.dwg drawing files in AutoCAD and modify as required. 7.bmp or STYLExV. 2 Zoom in to the new PLC style. Open the hp6*.dwg" (or. copy "\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\{library}\hp1*.client with specific requirements not met by any of the 5 styles. if you are using Windows Vista.

XLS.
Address (ADDR)
Rack numbers (R)
Group numbers (G)
674 | Chapter 8 PLC
.
Module data
Module part numbers (Code) This can be the code for a parametrically generated module. It can even be a nonPLC symbol such as a variable speed drive. The columns can be in any order defined by your settings. This value gets annotated to the "TAGA_" attribute. used for the attribute assigned to the %%1 Prompt from the parametric data file.CSV. or a comma-delimited file. Three example PLC data files are found in the User folder: DEMOPLC. Use the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool to assign spreadsheet or table column numbers to the following data categories. The group number of the module. AutoCAD Electrical expects to find certain columns containing the information needed to generate the drawings. Access database table. open the source drawing in AutoCAD again.XLS.NOTE If the resulting bitmap is too small or off-center. used for the attribute assigned to the %%2 Prompt from the parametric data file.
Create PLC I/O Drawings from Spreadsheets
Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format
The PLC information can be read from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Resize your AutoCAD graphics window so that it is more square. The I/O address for each I/O point. Repeat until you are satisfied with the result. The rack number of the module. and DEMOPLC_IEC. All columns are optional except the Module part number (Code) column. A settings file is also provided to run the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility: DEMOPLC_IEC. Center the image and resave. or for a full module's library symbol. DEMOPLC.WDI.

There should not be any other data in the spreadsheet row. The remote terminal panel ID number of the module. For output modules. Other. Insert this keyword in the ADDRESS column of the spreadsheet where you want to add extra space between adjacent I/O points. AO. only the word “BREAK” in the address column.
Remote terminal panel (RTP)
Wire numbers Module's tag Module's Installation
Module's Location Description 1-5 (DESC1-DESC5) Voltage/Input/Output (VOLTAGE)
Special PLC values
There are some special values that can be placed in a row to direct special PLC module features:
BREAK Insert this keyword in the ADDRESS column of the spreadsheet where you want the PLC module to break and continue on the next ladder column. The value assigned to the TAG attribute of the module. For input modules. The values assigned to the module's 5 description attributes. or both IN and OUT in the text string. The wire number used for each I/O point. used for the attribute assigned to the %%4 Prompt from the parametric data file. AutoCAD Electrical looks for DO. For combination modules. or OUT as part of the text string. used for the attribute assigned to the %%3 Prompt from the parametric data file. or IN as part of the text string. The value assigned to the installation attribute of the module. AI.Slot numbers s
The slot number of the module. it looks for IO. There
SPACER
Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format | 675
. The value assigned to the location attribute of the module. The value used to determine if a module is an input or output module if it cannot be determined from the parametric data file. AutoCAD Electrical looks for DI.

Insert this keyword into the CODE module part number column right after the end of the data on the spreadsheet of the previous module. Use this format TAGSTRIP:TERM where the colon character separates the terminal's TAG-ID value from the terminal number to apply to
676 | Chapter 8 PLC
. When the module is generated these extra attribute values are assigned. For terminals. the first component would have a tag of D1TAG while the second component would have the tag of D2TAG. DESC. For example. There should not be any other data in the spreadsheet row. MFG.should not be any other data in the spreadsheet row.
NEW_DWG
*
You can predefine other attributes on the module.RATING2=HAZARDOUS DUTY”. an Installation value of “MACH1”. There should not be any other data in the spreadsheet row. Location. This keyword triggers the utility to skip to the next sheet before it begins the next module in the spreadsheet. Replace the numeric value “n” with the next incrementing number. and CAT column values for this entry are annotated onto the first AutoCAD Electrical symbol found on the inserted circuit. enter “2. in the RACK column. only the word “SKIP” in the part number code column. and a Rating2 value of “Hazardous Duty”. only the word “NEW_DWG” in the part number code column.
Inline component data
The PLC Generator supports up to 9 inline components. and Ratings.attributename2=attributevalue2.INST=MACH1. use this column to encode both the TAG and Terminal Number. In the spreadsheet. Place an asterisk (*) in front of a device block name to trigger an Insert Circuit instead of an Insert Component. SKIP Insert this keyword into the CODE module part number column right after the end of the data on the spreadsheet of the previous module. The columns of data are as follows:
Tag (DnTAG) The value to use for the TAG attribute of the component. Any associated TAG.” and so on. only the word “SPACER” in the address column. you want the module to have a Rack value of “2”. This keyword triggers the utility to skip a ladder before it begins the next module in the spreadsheet. such as Installation. using the format "mainval.

The value assigned to the assembly code (ASSYCODE) attribute of the component. or DESC3. The value assigned to the manufacturer (MFG) attribute of the component. Description (DnDESC) The values assigned to the DESC attributes of the component. you can modify the DnLOC field by entering “Field. For example. in this case.the TERM attribute.
Block (DnBLK) Location (DnLOC) Installation
Manufacturer
Catalog Assembly
You can predefine other attribute values (such as pin number assignments) using the format "mainval.attributename2=attributevalue2.TERM02=22”. the pin number in your drawing. The value assigned to the catalog (CAT) attribute of the component. DESC2. where “Field” is the main attribute value and “TERM01=21” assigns a value of 21 to the component’s TERM01 attribute and “TERM02=22” assigns a value of 22 to the component’s TERM02 attribute. Use the | symbol to separate text and assign it to DESC1. to annotate pins as “21” and “22”. Whatever follows the colon is inserted into the terminal’s TERM01 attribute. TERM01=21. For example. if you use "CYCLE|START" in the description field.dwg file name for the component you want to use. "CYCLE" is assigned to DESC1 and "START" to DESC2. Enter it in any inline component column except the Block column defining the block name of the component.
Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format | 677
. The . "TB1:25" in the component tag column puts "TB1" on the TAGSTRIP attribute and "25" on the TERM attribute. The value assigned to the location (LOC) attribute of the component. For example. You can also use the colon delimiter to add pin number assignments to terminal symbols.” and so on. For example. The value assigned to the installation (INST) attribute of the component. if the terminal’s tag name is “TB1” and the pin number assignment is “1A” you would enter “TB1:1A” into the DnTAG field.attributename3=attributevalue3.

Automatically generate I/O schematic drawings
The PLC I/O requirements of a project. 1 Click Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ PLC I/O Utility. Just a "|" for the block name is the same as "|WWWW". "|XWXW" trims away the left-hand wire connections of both top and bottom.
2 Select the spreadsheet and click Open. AutoCAD Electrical also supports jumpers between adjacent rungs. while components for output modules are inserted right-to-left. follow the "|" character with four characters to cover upper left. Wiring to analog input or output modules might need to loop back to a return terminal instead of going all the way across to a power bus. For looping back to the right. lower left. To direct AutoCAD Electrical to use a jumper. in spreadsheet or database format. enter a value for the beginning line reference number for the first ladder of the drawing. a block name of "|WWXW" inserts a jumper and trims the lower left wire connection. 5 Click Start. Use the "|" character as the symbol block name for the jumper. To control removal of wire connections. 3 In the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box. you encode the jumper as one of the available inline devices.
678 | Chapter 8 PLC
. all wire connection retained. upper right. 4 Specify how you want the module to be placed in the drawing. To loop back to the left use "|WXWX". For example. Specify any other options to use for the ladder reference numbers. The spacing between devices (as defined in your settings) is maintained even if no component is defined for a particular column. insert "|XWXW" as the first inline device. You can direct the generator to pop in a vertical short wire to loop back around.
Special wiring for inline components
Normally each inline component is wired in series connected from the bus to the I/O point. and lower right connections. can drive automatic generation of the I/O schematic drawings. Use "W" to keep the wire connection and "X" to remove.Components for input modules are inserted left-to-right.

The sub-dialog box (accessed from clicking the More button) identifies the column data for up to nine in-line connected devices for each I/O point. 3 In the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box. You also can adapt this tool to an existing spreadsheet or database format that is different from the example demoplc. scale. 5 Enter a file name for the settings (the file extension is ". and number of rungs. Click Browse to select an existing setting file that you can then edit and save. It includes how many ladders you want inserted.
Change and save the settings
1 Click Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ PLC I/O Utility. and in-line device placement and spacing.AutoCAD Electrical constructs a set of PLC I/O drawings based on the information carried in the PLC spreadsheet. Click Setup then click Spreadsheet/Table Columns to define what column in your spreadsheet or database table goes with what data value in the utility. The first page of this dialog box deals with the overall module information. the type and orientation of the ladders.
Change and use PLC I/O settings
You have control over many aspects of how these drawings auto-generate.
2 Select the spreadsheet and click Open. style. You can change these settings each time you run the program or change them once and save your settings for future use.WDI") and click Save. do one of the following:
■
Click Setup to define how the drawings should be set up (based on the default settings). spacing. Ladders and modules insert automatically. You can also define the module placement.
Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format | 679
. breaking at the bottom of one ladder and continuing on the next.xls file format.
■
■
4 Click Save to save the settings to a file for future use.

or .AutoCAD Electrical reads in your information (.wdi) to use. If you enter the name of the .wdi file. breaking at the bottom of one ladder and continuing on the next (or on to the next drawing).LSP file. The default is to use the settings in the WDIO.csv format) and then constructs a set of PLC I/O wiring diagrams directly from your data. Ladders and modules insert automatically.
Settings
Select a PLC settings file (.wdp file subdirectory 3 Symbol library paths defined for the active project 4 AutoCAD Electrical lookup subdirectory Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\ Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\
Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format | 681
. Specify the settings to use by entering a file name in the box or clicking Browse to select a file.xls. AutoCAD Electrical searches for the file in the standard search locations in the following order: 1 User subdirectory Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\User\ Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\User\ 2 Active project's .mdb. . The path to the selected WDI file displays underneath the edit box.

Indicates whether to use the next sequential number for the first ladder on each successive column or to use the specified value to skip for the first ladder reference of the next column. Use it to modify and save new setting configurations. if you want the module built in a ladder with the previous module only if it fits completely.wdi file are used and the setup changes are not applied.
Ladder Reference Numbering
Start Specifies the value for the beginning line reference number for the first ladder of the first drawing.) 6 Current Directory 7 All paths defined under AutoCAD Options ➤ Files ➤ Support Files Search Path Click Setup to display the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Setup dialog box. or if you want the
682 | Chapter 8 PLC
. Define if you want each I/O module to start at the top of a ladder. Defines if you want your line reference numbers to sequence by 1 (default) or by some other amount.5 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Support\.wdi file to use after you make changes in the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Setup dialog box.
Index
Column to column
Drawing to drawing
Module Placement
There are three options related to module placement. Leading zeros and embedded alpha characters are supported for line reference numbering. Indicates whether to use the next sequential number for the first ladder on each successive drawing or to use the specified value to skip for the first ladder reference of the next drawing. NOTE If you select the . the settings in the .

mdb file with ".
Include unused/extra connections You may have PLC modules with terminal connections that are unused. The . include them in the Attributes column of the Module Terminal Information table of the ace_plc.wdp file.
Starting file name
Specifies the drawing file to begin with for your PLC drawings. Allow pre-defined breaks Your PLC modules automatically break at a given point when a "\\SPECIAL=BREAK" code is encountered in the block of parametric data of the module. they are included if you select this option. enter the number of rungs to skip between modules.
Drawing File Creation
Use active drawing Indicates to use the open and active drawing file to begin the PLC placement process.
Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format | 683
.\\SPECIAL=INCLUDE" following the block information or by selecting "When Including Unused" or "When Excluding Unused" in the Show column of the PLC Database File Editor dialog box. Usually AutoCAD Electrical leaves them out and the module is built without showing these terminal connections. NOTE It is unavailable if a Starting file name is specified.dwg extension is not required and the file is saved in the same folder as the active . NOTE When a module is selected that contains some of these terminals. Enter a name or click Browse to select a file. Select it to include the connections in the PLC module. If you select to place modules within the same ladder. If you want to show these connections.module to be built in the same ladder with the previous module and split if necessary to fill the ladder.

Pause between drawings/Free run
Your spreadsheet may contain enough information to generate multiple drawings.wdi file to reuse. select to do a free run. or continue with a pause between drawings.
Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Command entry: AESS2PLC
684 | Chapter 8 PLC
. The Use active drawing option is disabled. and number of rungs.
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O utility setup
Defines how to set up the drawings. the type and orientation of the ladders. NOTE When you select Pause Between Drawings. Includes how many ladders you want inserted.
Sheet
If your ladders use the AutoCAD Electrical Sheet parameter you can enter a value for the optional sheet number. style. spacing. a single drawing is generated and then a dialog box opens allowing you to adjust settings. and inline device placement and spacing. scale. Select Pause between drawings to stop between each drawing or select Free run if you want the program to run completely to the end without stopping. You can also define the module placement. Adds newly created drawings to the active project. Ribbon: Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ PLC I/O Utility.
Add new drawing to active project
Save
Saves the setup information and settings in a . The new drawings are added to the end of the project’s drawing list.

Set the vertical and horizontal index numbers and letters. but there is not a Y-axis. Set your horizontal labels. spacing.
TIP Use a negative zone spacing value if you want the zone reference origin to be at the right side of the drawing." Open the file with any ASCII text editor and carefully edit the values near the top of the file.
■ X Zones: Like X-Y Grid.lsp. and origin in the X-Y grid setup dialog box. Corresponds to the upper left-hand corner of the ladder.
Ladder
Origin Specifies the insertion point for first (or only) ladder on the drawing. click Setup. In the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box. NOTE New default values can be programmed into the source file.Select the spreadsheet output file and click Open. Specifies to create a vertical bus ladder (with horizontal wires) or horizontal bus ladder (with vertical wires). spacing. Specifies the default referencing system: ■ ■ ■ ■ Numbers Only Numbers Ruling User Blocks X-Y Grid: All referencing is tied to an X-Y grid system of numbers and letters along the left-hand side and top of the drawing. The program source file name is "wdio. and origin of the drawing on the X Zones setup dialog box.
Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format | 685
.
Orientation
Reference numbers
TIP Use negative spacing values for horizontal or vertical to change the origin of the XY grid system to be other than the upper left-hand corner of the drawing.

Width
Specifies the width of each ladder (offset distance between the ladder's two bus wires) from left to right rail. Specifies the Input module insertion offset distance (vertical ladder orientation . Specifies the default wire signal arrow style. You can override the default style setting at insertion time. Horizontal ladders insert top to bottom. This value multiplied by the "Spacing . horizontal ladder orientation . Specifies the offset distance from the insertion point of one ladder to the insertion point of the next ladder. Specifies the quantity of line reference / wire rungs per ladder. Select from the four predefined styles or a user-defined style. Specifies the quantity of rungs to skip before inserting a PLC module (0=no skip) Indicates whether to include/exclude bus rails and rungs.
Distance between
Ladders per drawing
Rungs per ladder
Rung spacing
Rung count skip for I/O start
Suppression Signal arrow style
Module
PLC graphical style Specifies the default PLC module style. Vertical ladders insert left to right. Select from the five predefined styles or a user-defined style.measured in +Y direction from lower horizontal bus). Specifies the number of ladders to insert.ladder rung to rung" value determines the length of the inserted ladders.measured in +X direction from right-hand vertical bus. Specifies the distance from one rung to the next rung on a ladder.
Input offset from neutral
686 | Chapter 8 PLC
.

measured in the -Y direction from the upper horizontal bus).0).
Maximum I/O per ladder
Specifies the maximum number of module I/O points to insert into each ladder without breaking the module and continuing it in the next ladder. Specifies the starting offset distance from the right-hand or lower bus for the first (or only) inline device defined for each Output module I/O point.I/O point to I/O point" value defined previously.
First output device from neutral bus
Spacing between multiple devices
Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format | 687
. Applies a scale factor to the PLC module insertion except for the "Spacing . then this scaling factor is applied only to the outline of the module. Specifies the insertion point offset distance between one in-line device and the next. then the module is inserted down the middle of the ladder. Specifies the PLC module scale override value (default = 1. If Apply this scale to module outline only is selected.measured in -X direction from the left-hand vertical bus. horizontal ladder orientation . Specifies the insertion point offset distance between one in-line device and the next. NOTE If module type cannot be determined or if it is combination Input and Output.
I/O point spacing
Scale
In Line Devices
First input device from hot bus Specifies the starting offset distance from the left-hand or upper bus for the first (or only) inline device defined for each Input module I/O point.Output offset from hot bus
Specifies the Output module insertion offset distance (vertical ladder orientation .

Create PLC spreadsheets using RSLogix
RSLogix is a PLC programming software package for programming various Allen-Bradley PLCs.eas file and apply the PLC data to categories you can save the data into a PLC import spreadsheet that is used to create the PLC drawing files. the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box redisplays and the new . and browse to select a PLC code from the PLC database. For the current default template.
Export I/O information using RSLogix
Creates a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file from a RSLogix file to import into AutoCAD Electrical using the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool. leave the value blank. you can omit PLC cards. Once you modify the . Enter the template drawing file name with the full path or click Browse to search for an existing template (it looks in the AutoCAD template folder where all of the user drawing templates are saved). NOTE Make sure that your template does not have any existing ladders.wdi file to reuse. Once you save the new . Using the RSLogix 500 Import dialog box. export your RSLogix 500 file into . This program has an output function that can write the I/O information out to an ASCII file. If you do not want to use a template drawing.
Save
Saves the spreadsheet information in a . AutoCAD Electrical imports this information and creates a regular spreadsheet from the data that can then be used to create PLC drawing files.Spreadsheet/Table Columns
Displays the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Drawing Generator dialog box for reviewing and mapping spreadsheet columns to attributes on the PLC module symbol. reserve future locations for PLC cards in drawings. enter a single dot in the edit box.EAS format.
688 | Chapter 8 PLC
.
Drawing Template
You can force the tool to use a specific template for new drawings. 1 In RSLogix.wdi file.wdi file name displays in the Settings edit box.

9 Enter a name for the spreadsheet once a module was assigned for each set of points. Click Save. In the RSLogix 500 Import Change Module dialog box. selecting it from the PLC dialog box using Browse. 8 (Optional) Click Omit to skip a set of points. 6 Click OK to assign the module and move on to the next set of points.2 Click Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ RSLogix 500. or 32-point groupings. Use Microsoft Excel to modify your spreadsheet as needed.
RSLogix 500 import
Imports I/O information from RSLogix and create a regular spreadsheet from the data to use for the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O generator. or select from the already used list once you have some modules selected. 16. change the selected module part number by entering the new module name in the edit box. select the module assignment and click Change. 7 (Optional) To change a module assignment.
Ribbon: Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ RSLogix 500. select from the PLC dialog box using Browse. Enter it in the edit box. 10 To create the PLC drawing on page 678 click Import/Export Data tab ➤
Import panel ➤ PLC I/O Utility. or click Future to skip the points and add information so AutoCAD Electrical adds a blank column when generating the drawing from the spreadsheet.CSV file and click Open. 3 Select an . select whether the I/O points should be displayed in 8. Click OK to assign the module and return to the Input Module dialog box. 5 Pick an I/O module for each set of I/O points. or selecting it from the already used list once you have some modules selected. 4 In the RSLogix 500 Import dialog box.
Create PLC spreadsheets using RSLogix | 689
.EAS or .

Skips the points and adds information so AutoCAD Electrical adds a blank column when generating the drawing from the spreadsheet.EAS or .
8pt. Skips a set of points. or select it from the already used list once you have some modules selected.Toolbar: Insert PLC Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ RSLogix 500 Export To Spreadsheet Command entry: AERSLOGIX Select an . select it from the PLC dialog box using Browse.
Toolbar: Insert PLC
690 | Chapter 8 PLC
. The text “Input Module x of x” displays underneath the dialog box title bar to keep track of which module you are editing out of the total number of modules found in the RSLogix import file. or 32 pt slot addressing Specifies whether the I/O points displayed should be in 8-pt. Specifies to display the module in octal or decimal format.CSV file and click Open. or 32-pt groupings.
Default to
Module assignment so far
Omit Future
RSLogix 500 import change module
Ribbon: Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ RSLogix 500. Displays the I/O modules already picked for each set of I/O points. Click OK to assign the module and move on to the next set of points. Enter the module name in the edit box. 16-pt. 16pt.

xsy) to use in the automatic creation of AutoCAD Electrical PLC ladder-style drawings. Unity Pro exports two XML files (.xhw and . Skips the points and adds information so AutoCAD Electrical adds a blank column when generating the drawing from the spreadsheet. The .
Select below for module part number assignment Displays the I/O modules already picked for each set of I/O points. The text “Change Module x” displays underneath the dialog box title bar to keep track of which module you are changing.EAS or .xhw file contains the PLC hardware information such as catalog numbers and starting addressing information.xsy file contains the information about the software such as variable types (input/output) and i/o addressing information.CSV file and click Open. The .
Omit Future
Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro
AutoCAD Electrical imports Unity Pro XML files to aid in the creation of various types of PLC and Panel Layout drawings in the active project. PLC racks.
Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro | 691
. These files also contain catalog information that can be reformatted to generate an equipment list to help in the creation of a rack layout drawing used in Panel Layouts or separate Rack Layout drawings using the Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet tool. Select one of the module assignments and click Change. Skips a set of points. Change the selected module part number by entering the new module name in the edit box. Unity Pro supports numerous Schneider Electrical PLC cards. power supplies. or selecting it from the already used list once you have some modules selected.Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ RSLogix 500 Export To Spreadsheet Command entry: AERSLOGIX Select an . Select OK to assign the module and return to the RSLogix 500 Import dialog box. and various accessories. selecting it from the PLC dialog box using Browse.

and a catalog number. Example: Bus 1 Local Quantum Bus ■ Bus Name Description: displays the name of the bus and is specified in the busType element in the .1\1) Rack Catalog Number: displays the catalog number of the rack and is specified in the partNumber element of the .xhw) file that was defined during the export from Unity Pro. \1.Data structure from the Unity Pro Hardware Configuration File
The tree structure data that displays in the Hardware File section of the Unity Pro Import dialog box is as follows:
Project node The Project node is the topmost node defined in the tree structure. location information. The label given to the node is the file name of the hardware configuration (. Bus 1)
Bus Name node
■
Rack Location and Catalog Number node
The Rack Location node consists of descriptions. (that is. Example: Rack \1. (that is. (i. Supply) Module Location: displays the location of the module in the rack and is specified in the topoAddress of the .xhw file. (i.xhw file. The name of the hardware configuration file can be different from that of the I/O configuration file. Example: Supply \1. (that is.xhw file.1\1 140XBP0600 ■ ■ ■ Rack Description: displays the description of the rack and is specified in the family element of the .e.xhw file.e.1\1. 1.xhw file.xhw file.1 140CPS21400 ■ ■ Module Description: displays the description of the module and is specified in the family element of the . (that is. The Bus Name node consists of the Bus Name Description and the Bus Number ID. Local Quantum Bus) Bus Number ID: displays the number of the bus and is specified in the position element of the . and a catalog number. location information. 140XBP0600)
Module Location and Catalog Number node
The Module Location node consists of descriptions.1)
692 | Chapter 8 PLC
. Rack) Rack Location: displays the location of the rack and is specified in the topoAddress element of the .xhw file.1\1. (that is.

Syntax: Value in Custom Field. The Equipment List file includes all of the catalog information in the .xhw file.HSS112 *3POS*. a PLC Spreadsheet file is created along with an Equipment List spreadsheet file. The custom field supports spaces in the string and wild cards.This file is to be used for mapping of Unity Pro custom strings .mdb (PLCIO table) Column 3 = ASSYCODE. The structure of the Equipment List is:
■ ■ ■
Column 1 = CATALOG. DEFAULT_UNITY.HPB11 .■
Module Catalog Number: displays the catalog number of the module and is specified in the partNumber element of the .HSS113 The comment fields (marked with . PBNC.) at the top of the file are used for information.
Equipment List Structure and Data
When you click OK on the Unity Pro Import dialog box.xhw file. (that is. AutoCAD Electrical Symbol Mapping File Example: .MAP. found in Default_cat.HPB12 PB NC.xhw file Column 2 = MANUFACTURER.Symbol Block File Name .HPB12 *2POS*.for PLC I/O devices to AutoCAD Electrical schematic symbol names . NOTE The distance the remote component is located from the PLC and hot bus rail is determined by the PLC settings file. partNumber variable from the . allows you to define the text strings to be placed in the custom field of the Unity Pro Data Editor to map directly to an AutoCAD Electrical schematic symbol name. 140CPS21400)
Unity Pro to AutoCAD Electrical Mapping File
The Unity Pro to AutoCAD Electrical mapping file.Example: PBNO. column defined (left blank)
Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro | 693
.

PLCIO
Import Unity Pro files to a spreadsheet
1 In Unity Pro.■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Column 4 = TAG. the Unity Pro command window states that the file was exported with 0 errors or warnings.xhw file and click Export. If the export was successful. column defined (left blank) Column 7 = DESC1. Upon successful validation of the files selected for import. right-click the configuration file in the project browser and select Export. 3 Right-click the Variables & FB Instances file in the project browser and select Export. the Unity Pro Import dialog box displays. 2 Enter a file name for the . partFamily variable from the .xhw file that contains I/O addressing (PLCs).xsy file and click Export. 6 Select the Unity Pro hardware configuration file (. column defined (left blank) Column 5 = LOC. You can right-click on a module or rack in the tree structure and select to include or exclude it from being saved into the spreadsheet file. Do any of the following optional steps:
■
Indicate whether to display only modules in the . 4 Enter a file name for the . 8 In the Unity Pro Import dialog box.
694 | Chapter 8 PLC
. column defined (left blank) Column 6 = INST. modify the selected files to create a spreadsheet for PLC import.xhw) and click Open.
5 Click Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Unity Pro.xsy) and click Open. NOTE We recommend that you export the files into the same location as the AutoCAD project (. 7 Select the Unity Pro I/O configuration file (.wdp) file.xhw file Column 8 = WDBLKNAM.

11 Specify a file name and location for the Equipment List file and click Save. 12 To create the PLC drawing on page 678 click Import/Export Data tab ➤
Import panel ➤ PLC I/O Utility.
Toolbar: Insert PLC
Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro | 695
.■
Indicate whether to include inner or outer terminals. and is square). If you select a module that does not have addresses (such as power supplies or CPUs) the grid remains empty. Select whether to place the terminal symbol names in every row or only the names that have a defined I/O point. The default symbol name is HT0001 (a terminal that maintains the wire number potential. Specify the symbol name to insert for inner and outer terminals in the spreadsheet.
Ribbon: Import/Export Data tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Unity Pro. The data relative to the I/O variable file for the selected module displays in the I/O Variable File section of the dialog box.
Unity Pro import
Prepares Unity Pro exported data for the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O utility. has a tag strip ID and terminal number. Change the symbol name or device tag for any of the I/O points using the right-click menu options. select the module to modify. Click the Select from Icon Menu button to select a terminal to use from the icon menu
■
■
■
9 Click OK. The Select Symbol option displays the icon menu from which you can select the symbol name. 10 Specify a file name and location for the PLC spreadsheet file and click Save. In the Hardware File section.

mdb or . The suggested file name is the name of the hardware import file with the suffix ‘(Equipment). You can save this file in .csv format.’
Hardware File
The path and file name of the hardware file created from Unity Pro (. Multiple node selection is allowed. When you click OK. You can exclude or include an entire rack node.Menu: Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet Command entry: AEUNITYPROSS Imports Unity Pro hardware (. Once you enter a name (or accept the default) and click Save. Changed icons:
696 | Chapter 8 PLC
. create PLC style drawing files automatically with the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O utility. . You can save this file in .xsy) files and formats the data into a PLC import spreadsheet in preparation for the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O utility.mdb (preferred) or . The tree structure has four nodes: ■ ■ ■ ■ Unity Project (export file name) Bus name Rack location and catalog number Module location and catalog number
Right-click on a node to include or exclude modules from being saved into the spreadsheet file.xhw) and I/O variable (.csv format.xhw) displays at the top of this section of the dialog box.
Hardware file information Allows you to view and select the hardware configuration from the Unity Pro export files. Upon exclusion the module icon changes to indicate that it was excluded. you are prompted to enter a name for the PLC spreadsheet file. After you create the spreadsheet file. .xls (preferred). you are then prompted to create an equipment list spreadsheet file.xls.

the entire rack is removed from the tree structure. ■ All I/O addresses: Places the terminal symbol name into the row of every I/O address listed in the import spreadsheet.
Show only I/O modules
Indicates to display only modules in the . If a rack node contains modules with and without I/O addressing. The defined address from Unity Pro is the topographical address coming from the I/O variable file that contains a value for the address string.xhw file that contains I/O addressing (PLCs). I/O addresses defined: Places the terminal symbol name into every row where an I/O point is defined from Unity Pro. The defined address from Unity Pro is the topographical address coming from the I/O variable file that contains a value for the address string.
Include inner terminals
■
Include outer terminals
Defines a terminal symbol to place into the spreadsheet on the outer side of the in-line component (between the I/O component and the wire connected to the ladder rail).
■
Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro | 697
. the module catalog number appears in the Code column of the spreadsheet. If a rack node only includes modules that are not PLC I/O modules. I/O addresses defined: Places the terminal symbol name into every row where an I/O point is defined from Unity Pro. ■ All I/O addresses: Places the terminal symbol name into the row of every I/O address listed in the import spreadsheet. the modules that do not have I/O addresses are removed.NOTE If you choose to include modules that do not contain any I/O addressing. Defines a terminal symbol to place into the spreadsheet on the inner side of the in-line component (between the I/O point and the in-line component).

Remains empty if the selected module does not have addresses (such as power supplies and CPUs). Description: Displays the comment field string associated to the address from the Unity Pro I/O Variable export file. Symbol Name: Displays the AutoCAD Electrical schematic symbol file name to place in line with the PLC I/O points. Select the check box to place a terminal symbol in the spreadsheet and drawing file. ■ Address: Displays the address string from the Unity Pro I/O Variable export file.xsy file in combination with the PLC definition inside of the AutoCAD Electrical PLC database file (ACE_PLC.MDB). Right-click in this column to select a file name from the icon menu or to clear the symbol name. If the symbol is not found in the schematic symbol library or the custom string is not mapped to a symbol name in the mapping file.
■
■
■
698 | Chapter 8 PLC
.I/O Variable File
Once you select a module node from the tree selection the data relative to the I/O variable file displays for viewing and editing. Terminal: Defines the placement of a terminal symbol in line with the PLC I/O point. Since it is not defined in the Unity Pro export files.
I/O variable file grid Displays a list of the I/O variables found inside of the Unity Pro I/O Variable export file (. All I/O points for the respective PLC card display in the grid (including the points that are undefined). This field is not editable in the dialog box.xsy) displays at the top of this section of the dialog box.xsy). The total number of I/O points and the order of the data is determined from the topological address in the . the name displays in red. The path and file name of the I/O variable file created from Unity Pro (. NOTE Single and multiple row selection is allowed. it must be defined before creating the AutoCAD Electrical import spreadsheet. This field is not editable in the dialog box.

Click the Select from Icon Menu button to select a terminal to use from the icon menu. Selects every row in the grid control Removes every row from selection. The default symbol name is HT0001.
Outer terminal symbol
I/O variable grid right-click options Right-clicking in the I/O variable grid control allows you to edit the file before creating the PLC I/O spreadsheet.
Select Symbol Displays the icon menu for selection of symbol file names. Specifies the symbol name to insert for outer terminals in the spreadsheet. Selecting a symbol file name fills in an empty grid cell or overwrites the existing text in a cell.
Inner terminal symbol
Specifies the symbol name to insert for inner terminals in the spreadsheet. and is square). Makes a selection in the grid for the rows that are defined with I/O addresses.The symbol name is derived from the value in the Custom field of the Unity Pro data and the symbol file name that it is mapped to in the mapping file. the normal tagging method for parent components is followed while children components remain untagged. Click in the column to enter a value or right-click to copy. The default symbol name is HT0001 (a terminal that maintains the wire number potential. or paste a value into the cell. cut.
Select All Clear All Select All Defined I/O
Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro | 699
. has a tag strip ID and terminal number. If left blank. Multiple selection is allowed.
■ Device Tag: Displays the tag value. Click the Select from Icon Menu button to select a terminal to use from the icon menu.

The default file name is either “Projectname. Variable names and types are created for new I/O addresses for import back into Unity Pro. If you delete the module from the drawing. Variable names and types are defined inside of Unity Pro and are the required for bidirectional updates. the variable name and type are also removed. During the AutoCAD Electrical import process.
Create XML files for export to Unity Pro
The Unity Pro Export command creates the Unity Pro I/O variable file (. symbol name.
Copy
Paste
Apply Terminal Inner Apply Terminal Outer
OK + Run
Displays the Save As dialog box where you can quickly save the data to a spreadsheet and start the PLC drawing creation automatically. NOTE These values are maintained on the PLC module. or device tag). Copies the selected value from one or more grid cells. You can create the file for the active project or active drawing.” The Unity Pro export file is generated from the PLC drawings and their respective PLC symbols. the variable name and variable type are maintained inside of the PLC drawings. Selects all outer terminals in the grid. AutoCAD Electrical suggests naming the XML data file based on whether you select to export for the project or a drawing.xml.xml” or “Drawing filename. The Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box then opens with the saved spreadsheet already selected. These
700 | Chapter 8 PLC
.xsy) in the Unity Pro XML format. Pastes in the selected value from one or more grids into the selected grids.Cut
(single selection only) Cuts the selected value (description. the rest of the addressing is filled in based on the available I/O points on the module. Selects all inner terminals in the grid. To ensure the proper importing and editing of the I/O variable file in Unity Pro.

Toolbar: Schematic Reports
Create XML files for export to Unity Pro | 701
.
Unity Pro export
This tool creates the Unity Pro I/O variable file (.additional I/O points receive a variable name and type upon import into AutoCAD Electrical. select to create an export file (.
Ribbon: Import/Export Data tab ➤ Export panel ➤ Unity Pro. select the drawings to process and click OK.
1 Click Import/Export Data tab ➤ Export panel ➤ Unity Pro. 2 In the Unity Pro Export dialog box. The XML file contains the PLC I/O addresses and descriptions for import into the Unity Pro software. Takes on the same type as the other defined I/O addresses on the module. The variable names and types are maintained on the PLC module so that the file can be imported back into Unity Pro. 3 If you selected Project.xsy) for the project or the active drawing and click OK. specify the file name and click Save.
Export a file in the Unity Pro XML format
The AutoCAD Electrical Unity Pro export file is generated from the PLC drawings and their respective PLC symbols. By default the file is saved in the My Documents folder. If I/O points are not defined on the module then Boolean characters are used. 4 In the Save As dialog box.
Variable Name Variable Type Takes on the address string as the value. AutoCAD Electrical suggests a file name for the XML export file depending on whether you are creating the file for the project or the active drawing.xsy) in the Unity Pro XML format.

and one-line circuit representations. Each time a circuit is configured. The feature is controlled by three things:
■
The spreadsheet on page 705 defines the available circuits.Circuits
9
Circuit Builder
Circuit Builder overview
The Circuit Builder tool comes prepopulated with data to build and annotate a sampling of motor control circuits and power feed circuits. You can add new circuit definitions and edit existing ones. it is added to a history list of circuits.dwg file) for a selected circuit defines the wiring and the placement position for the individual components on that wiring. adjusting the power bus to match the wire bus for the drawing.
■
■
Circuit Builder is customizable. The electrical standards database provides suggested values used to annotate components of the circuit and the wire size and type of the power wiring. The template on page 709 (. This provides for quick re-insertion at a later time. adding wiring between components. and defaults for each option within a circuit. This includes 3-phase. single-phase. and annotating the elements with suggested values based upon the selected load.
703
. Each circuit is built dynamically. circuit types.

or adjust rung spacing. When all marker blocks have been processed. 6 Circuit Builder matches each marker block to a specific section in the circuit codes sheet. This section can be a single spreadsheet row or multiple consecutive rows in the circuit codes sheet. This is a separate sheet within the Circuit Builder spreadsheet.
See also:
■
Customize Circuit Builder on page 1939
704 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. presents a selection list containing a fuse. Provides a list of component insertion options that can be inserted at this point in the circuit. and the name of a circuit code sheet. The associated line from the ACE_CIRCS sheet provides the base drawing template name. 3 Select a circuit to insert or configure. or disconnect switch symbol. 5 Circuit Builder finds and reads the attributes on all the special marker blocks on the inserted drawing template. insert a wire number. If the nested template carries its own marker blocks. For example. calculate a wire type. circuit breaker. 4 The base drawing template for the circuit inserts at your selected location. The section identifies one of the following:
■
The action taken at this marker block location in the circuit.Workflow
1 Circuit Builder opens the spreadsheet and reads in the first sheet named “ACE_CIRCS”. the circuit is complete.
■
Each marker block is processed in sequence. 2 Circuit Builder shows the list of defined circuits in the Circuit Selection dialog box. these are added to the overall list of marker blocks to process. For example. controlled by an ORDER attribute value carried on each marker block 7 A marker block can trigger a nested template to be inserted into the main circuit template.

These sheets contain the information needed to insert or configure a specific circuit selected from the first sheet. The drawing template that is inserted when this circuit is selected. ace_circuit_builder. contains the main circuit categories. The default location for the spreadsheet is:
■
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Support\ Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Support\
■
The default spreadsheet name.Spreadsheet
The Circuit Builder spreadsheet.env on page 1918 file.
ACE_CIRCS sheet
Circuit Builder reads the list of circuit categories and types from the first sheet in the spreadsheet. The specific type of circuit within a major category.xls circuit builder spreadsheet can be relocated into any of the normal AutoCAD Electrical or AutoCAD support paths. along with the template drawings that it references.xls”.xls. The ACE_CIRCS sheet contains the following columns. and types. The first sheet in the spreadsheet. in the wd. The ace_circuit_builder. “ace_circuit_builder.
TYPE
DWG_TEMPLATE
Spreadsheet | 705
. WD_CIRCBUILDER_FNAM. for example “Horizontal .FVNR .non reversing”. ACE_CIRCS. control what is displayed in the Circuit Selection and Circuit Configuration dialog box options.
CATEGORY A major circuit category displayed at the highest level of the tree structure in the Circuit Selection dialog box. This appears in a tree-structure selection window in the Circuit Selection dialog box.dwg extension is assumed if it is not present. for example “3ph Motor Circuit”. can be overridden by setting the environment variable. Along with this first sheet are one or more circuit code sheets. The circuit types appear at the second level of the tree structure. ACE_CIRCS. A .

the associated drawing template is inserted (the DWG_TEMPLATE field). Each marker block contains a CODE attribute with a value.
ANNO_CODE
Circuit code sheets
Once a circuit is selected from the Circuit Selection dialog box (the CATEGORY and TYPE fields from the ACE_CIRC sheet). the main disconnecting means might have two groups of options. for the motor or load and the individual components that might be inserted into the circuit. Each circuit code sheet contains the following columns. The default option for a circuit element is marked with an “X”. When a circuit is inserted rather than configured. Allows you to predefine the description. Each circuit element may have one or more groups of options. Text displayed in the Circuit Elements list in the Circuit Configuration dialog box. For example. and other key information. The matching section in the circuit code sheet provides the key information on what action is required at this physical location in the circuit. The inserted drawing template on page 1945 contains special marker blocks. Code maps to the ANNO_CODE table in the spreadsheet.
COMMENTS
UI_DEF
UI_TITLE
706 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. installation. Title for the group of options in the middle Select section of the Circuit Configuration dialog box. the disconnecting means itself and an optional auxiliary contact. location. This CODE value is used to match up with a section in the circuit code sheet. This circuit code sheet carries the definitions for all of the marker blocks in the selected drawing template and any nested templates.
CODE Value is matched to the CODE attribute value on the marker block.SHEET_NAME
The circuit code sheet name that is referenced for the selected circuit template. all elements marked with "X" are used to build the selected circuit. and a related circuit code sheet is ready for reference (the SHEET_NAME field). Each code corresponds to one circuit element in the list or an action/decision that takes place at the insertion point of the marker block.

NOTE Include the ace_cb_wire_select API call in the LOOKUP_CMD entry to invoke the Wire Size Lookup on page 764 dialog box when the Browse button in the Wire Setup section of the Circuit Configuration dialog box is selected. These numerical values are added up and matched to the value in the UI_SEL column.
UI_PROMPT_LIST
The text to display in the middle Select section for each option within this group. It must be combined with the ace_cb_motor_select API call in the LOOKUP_CMD entry. An apostrophe character in front of the number forces the spreadsheet software to interpret it as a text value.
UI_VAL
UI_SEL
A numerical value matched to the sum total of the values in the UI_VAL column for each selection made within a group. You can also format the cells specifically as text. The COMMAND_LIST value from this row is used to insert the selected options. The text should appear left justified in the cell. !PF_CTRL .
Spreadsheet | 707
. There are two pre-defined codes: !MCC_CTRL . NOTE This value must be inserted as a text value in the spreadsheet and not as a number. NOTE This value must be inserted as a text value in the spreadsheet and not as a number.invokes the Select Motor on page 761 dialog box when the Browse button on the Motor Setup section of the Circuit Configuration on page 759 dialog box is selected. An apostrophe character in front of the number forces the spreadsheet software to interpret it as a text value. The text should appear left justified in the cell. You can also format the cells specifically as text.invokes the Select Load on page 762 dialog box when the Browse button on the Load Setup section of the Circuit Configuration on page 759 dialog box is selected.
COMMAND_LIST
The command calls to insert the selected options.This field may also contain a predefined code to bring up a separate dialog instead of driving the middle Select section of the main Circuit Configuration dialog box. A numerical value assigned to the selection from each group. It must be combined with the ace_cb_power_feed_select API call in the LOOKUP_CMD entry.

NOTE These calls are generally set up using standard AutoLISP format.
LOOKUP_CMD
TABLEn
TITLEn
ANNO_CODE sheet
Allows you to predefine the description. This controls the righthand side of the Circuit Configuration dialog. such as a disconnect switch and a fuse. and other key information for the motor or load and the individual components inserted into the circuit. the UI_SEL value cell should be repeated. Anything after a semi-colon character is interpreted as a comment
ANNOTATE_LIST
Optional command calls to annotate the circuit element. If the option contains multiple components. Attribute name on the component inserted at the position of the marker block. location. installation. Optional command calls to perform the electrical standards database or catalog lookups for the selected circuit element. Text prompt displayed in the Annotation Presets dialog box. If multiple rows are used. Value is matched to the CODE value of the marker block on the circuit template.
ANNO_CODE CODE Value is matched to the ANNO_CODE value from the ACE_CIRCS sheet. there are multiple columns where “n” increments for each component. there are multiple columns where “n” increments for each component. The ANNOTATE_LIST calls execute after all rows of the COMMAND_LIST calls have executed.
ATTRIBUTE
PROMPT
708 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. The title for the component within the Setup & Annotation section on the Configuration dialog box. such as a disconnect switch and a fuse. If the option contains multiple components. Multiple calls can be concatenated in the same cell or in subsequent rows of the sheet. Optional catalog lookup table name.

dwg”. This selection has a value in the ANNO_CODE cell. Branching or nested circuit drawing templates are named “ace_cb2*. the Special Annotation: Presets section of the Circuit Selection dialog box.dwg .non reversing". the attribute values marked as Selected in the Annotation Presets dialog box are applied to the target attributes of the inserted component. 2 Circuit Builder finds the group of entries that match up with code "ANNO_3M" in the ANNO_CODE sheet of ace_circuit_builder. The circuit drawing templates use the following naming convention.xls. If a target attribute is not found.FVNR . The rows displaying the entries with non-blank DEFAULT values are initially marked as Selected.
■
ace_cb1_*. 5 Edit the attribute values as necessary and click OK. "ANNO_3M".
Drawing templates
Each circuit starts with a main drawing template. 7 Circuit Builder processes each marker block on the circuit template. the Annotation Presets dialog box displays. for example "Horizontal . 3 If any matching entries are found. is enabled. These main circuit template drawings are named “ace_cb1*. A branching circuit is a circuit inserted as an option on to the main circuit.DEFAULT
The default value for the attribute if annotation presets are listed on page 759 or applied on page 757. This value can be a text value or an AutoLISP expression that returns a text value. 4 If you select Presets and click the Presets List button. for example a control transformer circuit or a power factor correction circuit. the value is inserted as an Xdata value. 6 Select to Insert or Configure the circuit.dwg”. Future
OPTIONS
How Annotation Presets work
1 Make a selection from the Circuit Selection dialog box. If the CODE value matches the CODE value from the ANNO_CODE rows.primary circuit drawing templates
Drawing templates | 709
.

The default location is in a “1-” folder under the schematic library folder. The action can be:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Insert a component. ace_cb_marker_block.
■
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\{library}\1Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\{library}\1-
■
NOTE This template drawing naming convention is recommended but is not required for Circuit Builder to function.branching or nested circuit drawing templates
The default location for the circuit drawing templates is the schematic library folder:
■
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\{library}\ Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\{library}\
■
One-line template drawings have a “1-” suffix.■
ace_cb2_*. Insert a multi-pole component. A circuit template contains the wiring framework for the circuit and special marker blocks. Decide if underlying wire bus spacing should be adjusted. carrying three attributes. Insert a wire number on the underlying wire. Make a wire type assignment to the underlying wire. Decide if a branching circuit is needed. These marker blocks tell Circuit Builder that some action or decision is required at the insertion point of the marker block. Decide if an underlying wire should be trimmed. Set up the circuit annotation.
■ ■ ■
710 | Chapter 9 Circuits
.dwg . Decide if an underlying wire should be stretched and connect to a nearby power bus. These marker blocks are nothing more than instances of a standard AutoCAD block.

_WIRENO=<value> . If a required wire type does not exist and this flag is missing or has a value of 1.
ORDER
MISC1
■ ■
■ ■
Drawing templates | 711
. When the parent coil is inserted. This is based upon the matching "MR" alias assigned to each.override the drawing property component tag format or wire number format setting for this one instance. This can be used for situations when the child component is inserted before the parent. As the circuit completes.number of wires to skip over when trying to connect to another wire. Annotation values are in the format <attribute name>=<attribute value>. WIRENUMBERS=0 . for each circuit element are used. This attribute value controls the sequence of circuit element display and insertion within the circuit. _WIRESKIP=<value> . _WIRETYPE=<value> . Actions might include embedded AutoLISP expressions or programs.if a required wire type does not exist. For example. _PRETAG=<value> . as defined in the Spreadsheet on page 705.NOTE If you choose to Insert a circuit. Marker blocks are processed in order. This attribute value contains miscellaneous annotation values. Flag codes include the following ■ ■ _TAGFMT=<value> .predefine a default alias tag for parent child linking.predefine a fixed wire number.
Marker block attributes
CODE This attribute value provides the link between the marker block on the circuit template drawing and a section in the circuit codes sheet. The value on this attribute matches with the CODE column value in the circuit codes sheet for the selected template. create it and mark it as Wire Numbering. from low to high. create it and mark it as No Wire Numbering. Support for decimal number order values makes it easy to add a marker block between two others without having to reorder everything. Flags are key words that include enabling child contacts to link to parents and overriding multi-pole build directions. Assigning the same order value to multiple marker blocks links multiple marker blocks together that should be processed as a group. The ORDER value can be an integer or a decimal number value. its marker block also has "_PRETAG=MR".predefine the wire type layer name. to adjust the spacing between multiple wires of a 3-phase bus there are three marker blocks with a common CODE value and a common ORDER value. The marker block for the child contact might have "_PRETAG=MR". and flags. bypassing the Circuit Configuration dialog box. actions. the actual tag value of the parent annotates on to the child contact. the default options.

indicates a base wire.maximum search distance to look for a wire connection. This example might be used to position a marker block for a single phase motor insertion point.define the build direction override for a multi-pole component. the wire that is co-linear with the insertion point of the template becomes the default base wire. halfway between two power bus wires. The wire connection trap value is fixed and is displayed on the Drawing properties: drawing format tab on page 247 for the active drawing. when setting up to adjust multiple bus wire spacing. The specific function assigned to a marker is based on its CODE attribute value and what this code value maps back to in the circuit code sheet for the circuit template. _D=<value> . 8=build down. _L =<value>. the build direction is down for horizontal inserts. "_X=(* 0. _BASE . can predefine attribute values for individual poles of a multi-pole component. ace_cb_marker_block. Without an override. such as motor selection.reposition the marker block in the "Y" direction.reposition the marker block in the "X" direction.■
_MAXTRAPCOUNT=<value> .5 DIST01)" means adjust the position of this marker block in the X direction by an amount equal to 0.5 times the bus spacing distance defined by marker block with a CODE attribute value of "DIST01". or set of cable markers. Blocks that define the wire type layers layer to assign to the wire network under the block. and from left to right for vertical inserts. Here are the categories of marker block functions:
Setup Wire Type Blocks that define the circuit properties. 2=build up. the one that does not move.
712 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. For example.
Marker block functions
All marker blocks have the same block name. 1=build right.each sublist. but can have a wide variety of functions. set of terminals. 4=build left. delimited by "|" characters. X=<value or AutoLISP expression> . If not defined.
■
■
■
■
■
NOTE The flags defined in the circuit drawing marker blocks override any spreadsheet settings. given in wire connection trap units. _Y=<value or AutoLISP expression> .

Blocks that define the placement of a component.
Component
Bus Spacing
Wire Connections
NOTE The name of the marker block cannot be changed.Wire Number Nested Circuit
Blocks that define a wire number to assign to the wire under the block. However. There is a single line wire that represents a multi-wire bus. there are three of these. Most of the one-line circuit templates contain a special "bus-tap" symbol. The Circuit Builder command only processes marker blocks named "ace_cb_marker_block". One at the normal point where the circuit ties into the bus.
One-line circuit templates
One-line circuit templates use the same marker block concept as three-phase motor and power feed circuit templates. cable marker. whether a single circuit or a dual circuit representation. The bus-tap symbol can have two functions:
■
Provide an anchor point for the one-line circuit representation that begins at this point. terminal. each marking the point where that part of the dual circuit starts. Blocks that control stretching a wire segment to connect to another wire. These bus-tap symbols allow various reports to accurately report on a one-line circuit. or a multi-pole component at the insertion point of the marker block. Blocks that define the placement of a branching or nested circuit such as a control circuit at the insertion point of the marker block.dwg . Blocks that are to be processed as a group must carry common CODE and ORDER attribute values. Blocks that control rung spacing adjustment for the wires under these blocks. Break into the one-line bus where the circuit connects. There is another version of the symbol on each of the two circuit "legs". connector.with “dot” for horizontal one-line circuit
Drawing templates | 713
. The following bus-tap symbols are supplied:
■
HDV1_BT_1-. there are a few differences.
■
On a dual circuit one-line template.

designing to the minimum conductor size for a given load may provide short-term savings on material cost but run up longer-term expense due to higher heating loses in the wiring. and disconnect switches. could be substantial. define engineering calculations. During wiring sizing. Circuit Builder looks for a match on the motor size.“corner” connection for dual horizontal circuit VDV1_BTL_1-. Circuit Builder displays not only a list of the valid wire sizes meeting the ampacity requirements of the load.dwg . Over the life of the installation. The default location is:
■
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Catalogs\ Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Catalogs\
■
Sizing and wire type values are based on information from the electrical standards database. Designing to meet minimum code requirements can conflict with green design. but also a list of the
714 | Chapter 9 Circuits
.mdb. and provide wire size recommendations.dwg .dwg . recommended motor power conductor size. Circuit Builder provides the Full Load Amp value.with “dot” for vertical one-line circuit HDV1_BTT_1-. the energy lost in heating up the minimum-sized wiring. For example. ace_electrical_standards.“corner” connection for dual vertical circuit
NOTE A bus-tap symbol is identified by a WDTYPE attribute with a “1-1” value. supply voltage. instead of reaching the load to do useful work. and suggested rating values for various branch circuit protection elements such as circuit breakers.■ ■ ■ ■ ■
VDV1_BT_1-. The electrical standards database.“tee” connection for dual vertical circuit HDV1_BTL_1-. fuses. The electrical standards database also allows Circuit Builder to provide engineering estimates and “green” calculations in the area of power conductor size versus energy losses.
Electrical standards database file
Circuit Builder uses an electrical standards database to define default values.“tee” connection for dual horizontal circuit VDV1_BTT_1-.dwg . annotate circuits. and phase.dwg . On a match. is located in the catalog folder.

you might want to oversize the conductors for a motor to reduce conductor heating losses. the maximum temperature rating for each.mdb file used in previous versions of Circuit Builder. Options tables contain values defining defaults and options lists specific to an electrical standard.mdb file replaces the mcc. This results in a higher initial cost. Conductor Reactance/AC Resistance tables contain values used to estimate single-phase and three-phase voltage drop values. This information is used to retrieve the minimum grounding conductor size and provide a selection list of larger sizes. Contains the values used to populate the Select Load on page 762 dialog box. The electrical standards database contains multiple tables used by Circuit Builder. and feet for conductor length units. which is recovered many times over in reduced energy losses in the wiring during the life of the installation.
MOTOR Contains the values used to populate the Select Motor on page 761 dialog box. Grounding conductor sizing tables contain the maximum ampacity ratings for different grounding conductor sizes.estimated maximum energy loss cost for each wire size. Wire insulation tables lists the insulation types. AWG size standard. Conduit/raceway descriptions list used in conjunction with the XL&R_{wire type}_{wire size standard} tables. material and installation labor. This table name can have an optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code. For example. This set of calculations allows you to make better green design decisions. Wire ampacity tables contain the ampacity ratings for different conductor sizes and insulation temperature ratings. and de-rating factors for each based on a series of temperatures. NOTE The ace_electrical_standards. For example.
FEED
OPT
AMP_{wire type}_{wire size standard} AMPG_{wire type}_{wire size standard}
INSUL_{wire type}_{wire size standard}
XL&R_{wire type}_{wire size standard} XL&R_DESC
Electrical standards database file | 715
. default to copper wiring.

or raceway.
MOTOR_I_DESC
MOTOR_I_CALC
MOTOR_I_MAP
NOTE Each table name can have an optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code. _{standard} . and frequency. neutral. Maps the calculated FLA for a component to a specific rating value and an optional catalog assignment. fuse size. The MOTOR table follows this table naming convention:
■
MOTOR . and disconnect switch rating.FILL
Fill tables contain the ampacity de-rating factors used when there is more than one current carrying conductor (power wiring. A suffixed MOTOR table name is not necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database to support multiple standards. The CODE value maps to the MOTOR_I_CALC and MOTOR_I_MAP tables. The selection list can be filtered by type. not ground. duct.
Motor table
The data in the Motor table is used to populate the Select Motor on page 761 dialog box. The load and FLA values for the selected motor are passed back to the Circuit Configuration dialog box and are used in wire size calculations. Lists the formula to calculate the maximum amp value for various types of components on a per motor type basis. an “_NEC” suffix might mean that the data for the table parallels the National Electrical Code.the default table name to use if no specific electrical standards table is found. Lists the component type descriptions whose sizing ties directly into the full load amps value (FLA) of the motor or load. The values are also used to calculate breaker size. voltage.
■
716 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. for the selected motor. For example.optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code. or control wires) in the same conduit.

for the selected load. A suffixed OPT table name is not necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database to support multiple standards. For example. and feet for conductor length units.the default table name to use if no specific electrical standards table is found _{standard} . an “_NEC” suffix might mean that the data for the table parallels the National Electrical Code. For example. The values are also used to calculate breaker size. The minimum wire size calculation for the wiring for the motor is based upon an ampacity rating of not 10 amps but 12. The FEED table follows this table naming convention:
■
FEED . AWG size standard. and frequency.
■
Name
FLA_MULT
Electrical standards database file | 717
. A suffixed FEED table name is not necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database to support multiple standards. _{standard} . Description
Default full load amps multiplier value used to determine a maximum load. The selection list can be filtered by type.optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code. For example.Feed table
The data in the Feed table is used to populate the Select Load on page 762 dialog box. fuse size. The load and FLA values for the selected feed are passed back to the Circuit Configuration dialog box and are used in wire size calculations. default to copper wiring.25. and disconnect switch rating.25). For example. The OPT table follows this table naming convention:
■
OPT .optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code. voltage. the full load amps for a motor is rated at 10 amps and the FLA_MULT default is set to 1. an “_NEC” suffix might mean that the data for the table parallels the National Electrical Code.
■
Options tables
Options tables contain values defining defaults and options lists specific to an electrical standard.5 amps (10 amps x 1.default table name to use if no specific electrical standards table is found.

W_METAL
W_STD
V_DROP
W_INSUL
LEN_LIST
LEN_UNITS
KWH_COST
718 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. Default wire type standard used to determine appropriate wire ampacity and wire insulation table names. a default de-rating factor can be automatically applied to the wire size ampacity calculation. Run distance is used in the estimated voltage drop calculation.8. Maximum allowable % voltage drop in power wiring. The run distance is used for estimated voltage drop calculations in the motor or load power wiring.
C_LOAD
Continuous load correction factor for wire size ampacity de-rating. Default wire metal value used to determine appropriate wire ampacity and wire insulation table names. “AL” to define aluminum wiring as the default. This means that a given wire size that normally has a maximum rated ampacity value of 20 amps should be de-rated to a maximum ampacity of 16 amps when the wiring is to power a motor that is expected to be a continuous load. Unit cost per kWh. For example. The wire size calculation may need to select the next larger wire size. For example.Name
Description
The FLA_MULT factor displays in the Select Motor on page 761 and Wire Size Lookup on page 764 dialog boxes. For example. This can be used to help calculate an appropriate wire size when the wire run distance is also defined. assuming a continuous full load. “AWG” or “MM2”. Default insulation type used to determine the ambient temperature correction factor. Run distance units for power conductors and values for units pick list in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. a given electrical code defines the Continuous load correction factor at a value of 0. “CU” to define copper wiring as the default. If the electrical load is anticipated to be classified as a continuous load. This value is used for estimating a maximum annual cost of energy loss in the power wiring for a motor or load. Wire run distance values for pick list in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. Units are either "FT" for feet or "M" for meters.

Default value for the minimum wire size when displaying paralleled wire option in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box.
SHORTNAME
FULLNAME
LEN_UNITS
VOLTS
PHASE
PARALLEL_MIN_SIZE
PARALLEL_MAX_CNT
T_AMBIENT
M_POWERFACTOR
F_POWERFACTOR
Electrical standards database file | 719
. “$” for dollar. The code for the electrical standards name for this table. “4” for up to four paralleled wires per phase. “30C”. Default power factor for a motor. This value extracted from all the OPT tables provide the values for the pick list when setting an Electrical Code Standard for a project from the Project properties: project settings tab on page 218. For example. For example. For example.85”. The full name of the electrical standards name for this table. Default value for the maximum number of wire conductors when displaying paralleled wire option in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. For example. “ ” for euro. This value is used in estimated voltage drop calculations. “1-0 AWG”. It must match up with one of the temperature de-rating column labels found in the INSUL_* tables. For example. Default supply voltage value and values for voltage pick list in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. This value is used in wire type sizing.Name
KWH_COST_UNITS
Description
KWh cost units character used in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box showing the wire loss estimates. Default ambient temperature correction factor.85”. This code on page 197 is saved in the project .wdp file when the standard is applied to a project. Default supply phase value and values for phase pick list in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. “1” for single-phase. Default power factor for a power feed. This value is used in estimated voltage drop calculations. For example. “0. “3” for three-phase. Run distance is used in the voltage drop calculation. Run distance units for power conductors and values for units pick list in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. “0. For example.

The “I” in the expression represents the motor or load full load amps (FLA).Name
AMPG_MAX
Description
Defines the expression to calculate the minimum grounding conductor ampacity size. The result of the expression is then applied to the appropriate AMPG table to determine the minimum grounding conductor size.
720 | Chapter 9 Circuits
.

a table named AMP_CU_AWG_NEC contains the wire ampacity information for copper. and parallels what is found in the National Electrical Code. and maximum FLA ampacity values based on wire size and standard insulation temperature ratings. _{type} . _{standard} . This information is used in the following ways:
■
Automatically select a default wire size based upon the maximum load amp value displayed in the Select Motor on page 761 or Select Load on page 762 dialog boxes. an “_NEC” suffix might mean that the data for the table parallels the National Electrical Code. descriptions.the wire metal type such as CU for copper. “250KCMIL”. Automatically calculate or recalculate suggested wire sizes in the Wire Size Lookup on page 764 dialog box as various parameters and de-rating factors are applied. Maximum ampacity rating values for the wire conductor size for each of these standard ambient temperature ratings. Imperial cross-section value for the wire conductor size. Name
SIZE
Description
Wire size code.
For example. Wire size description shown on the Wire Size Lookup dialog box.the table name prefix.optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code. For example.wire size standard such as AWG. For example.Wire ampacity tables
The wire ampacity tables provide the wire conductor sizes. This value can be automatically pushed into a wire type layer name. or AL for aluminum. 75C. or MM2 for metric. _{size} . Additional columns can be added or an
SIZE_DESC
CIRC_MIL 60C. 90C
Electrical standards database file | 721
. “250 KCMIL”. “12 AWG”.
■
The wire ampacity tables use the following naming convention:
■ ■ ■ ■
AMP . “12”. For example. A suffixed table name is not necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database to support multiple standards. AWG sizes.

722 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. if 90C is not supported by local electrical codes. this field can be removed from the table and will not show up as an option in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box.Name
Description
existing column can be deleted. For example.

Provide a selection list on the Wire Size Lookup on page 764 dialog box giving this minimum suggested size plus all larger grounding conductor sizes. a table named AMPG_CU_AWG_NEC contains the grounding conductor sizing information for copper. and parallels values found in the National Electrical Code. _{standard} . “12”. This value can be automatically pushed into a wire type layer name for the ground wire.Grounding conductor sizing tables
The grounding conductor sizing tables provide the grounding wire conductor sizes and maximum FLA ampacity values. For example. “250 KCMIL”. Wire size description shown on the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. A suffixed table name is not necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database to support multiple standards. The value comes from the result of the expression held in the AMPG_MAX entry of the OPT table.
SIZE_DESC
MAX
Electrical standards database file | 723
. For example.
■
The grounding conductor sizing tables use the following naming convention:
■ ■ ■ ■
AMPG .the table name prefix _{type} . Name
SIZE
Description
Wire size code. Maximum amp value associated to this grounding wire size. AWG sizes. or MM2 for metric. or AL for aluminum. _{size} . an “_NEC” suffix might mean that the data for the table parallels the National Electrical Code.
For example.optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code. For example.the wire metal type such as CU for copper.wire size standard such as AWG. “250KCMIL”. This information is used in the following ways:
■
Provide a suggested minimum grounding conductor size based on the amp value returned by the expression defined in the AMPG_MAX entry in the OPT table. “12 AWG”.

Wire insulation tables
The wire insulation tables provide the option to de-rate wire conductor ampacity based upon expected maximum ambient temperature. a table named INSUL_CU_AWG_NEC contains the wire insulation information for copper. For example. _{type} . Insulation type description shown on the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. Standard. or MM2 for metric. the 25C column can be removed. an “_NEC” suffix might mean that the data for the table parallels the National Electrical Code.optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code. Automatically calculate or recalculate suggested wire sizes in the Wire Size Lookup on page 764 dialog box as various insulation and temperature de-rating factors are applied.
■
The wire insulation tables use the following naming convention:
■ ■ ■ ■
INSUL . displayed in the Select Motor on page 761 or Select Load on page 762 dialog boxes. and parallels values found in the National Electrical Code. Columns may be added or deleted.wire size standard such as AWG. For example.the wire metal type such as CU for copper. maximum temperature rating for the insulation type.the table name prefix. AWG sizes. if 30C is the minimum ambient temperature rating. A series of wire conductor ampacity de-rating factor values for maximum ambient temperature. A suffixed table name is not necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database to support multiple standards.
■
Automatically select a default wire size based upon the maximum load amp value.
For example. and the default insulation type and ambient temperature rating defined in the W_INSUL and T_AMBIENT entries of the OPT table. _{size} . _{standard} .
724 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. or AL for aluminum. Name
INSUL INSUL_DESC TEMP 25C-80C
Description
Insulation type code.

A conduit type description table and the reactance/resistance data tables. Conduit type description table
Electrical standards database file | 725
.Conductor Reactance / AC Resistance tables
The optional conductor reactance/AC resistance tables provide the reactance and resistance values for wire size based on conduit type. There are two types of tables for this feature. These values are used to calculate the voltage drop percentage in power wiring when a run distance is supplied.

optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code. _{standard} . an “_NEC” suffix might mean that the data for the table parallels the National Electrical Code.the wire metal type such as CU for copper. XL&R_DESC. or MM2 for metric.the table name prefix _{type} .
Data tables The conductor reactance/AC resistance data tables use the following naming convention:
■ ■ ■ ■
XL&R . A suffixed table name is not necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database to support multiple standards. or AL for aluminum. For example. _{size} .The description table.
726 | Chapter 9 Circuits
.wire size standard such as AWG. contains the labels used on the Wire Size Lookup on page 764 dialog box for the conduit or raceway type selection list and map to the columns in the data tables.

a table named XL&R_CU_AWG_NEC contains the conductor reactance/AC resistance information for copper. Data for additional conduit/raceway types can be added to this table with a corresponding entry added to the XL&R_DESC table. The first element is the estimated reactance and the second element is the AC resistance.
NOTE See Wire Size Lookup on page 764 for the voltage drop calculation. semi-colon delimited for the conduit type.For example.
Electrical standards database file | 727
. A set of reactance and resistance values. NOTE see the XL&R_DESC table for the corresponding label for each. Name
SIZE C1-C3
Description
Wire size code. and parallels values found in the National Electrical Code. AWG sizes.

not ground. or control wires. The FILL table follows this naming convention:
■ ■
FILL . The Fill table provides the de-rating factor based on the maximum number of power wire conductors. the wire ampacity may need to be de-rated.optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code. Current carrying wire conductors are defined as power wiring. duct. an “_NEC” suffix might mean that the data for the table parallels the National Electrical Code. _{standard} . For example.the table name prefix.Fill tables
When multiple current carrying wire conductors are in the same conduit. A suffixed FILL table name is not necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database to support multiple standards.
728 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. neutral. or raceway.

Electrical standards database file | 729
. Each table name can have an optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards code such as “_NEC” for National Electrical Code. fuse size. The CODE value maps to the MOTOR_I_CALC and MOTOR_I_MAP tables. and disconnect switch ratings for a given motor or load amp value.MOTOR_I* tables
A set of three tables that contain values used for calculating suggested breaker size.
MOTOR_I_DESC
Lists the component type descriptions whose sizing ties directly into the full load amps value (FLA) of the motor or load.

The FLA value for the selected motor corresponds to the symbol "I" in the expression. One level of nesting is supported.67) . <.67) if I is less than 9 but greater or equal to 2. If this same motor size is used later on another circuit.25) else if (I < 2. The optional catalog assignment is defined in the Default field. For example.0) else (I * 1.
MOTOR_I_MAP
Maps the calculated FLA for a component to a specific rating value and an optional catalog assignment.MOTOR_I_CALC
Lists the formula to calculate the maximum amp value for various types of components on a per motor type basis. and if greater than or equal to 9.0 amps. The catalog information is saved based on the motor size.CAT={catalog}. >=. these previous catalog selections become the default values when they match up with the configured selections. Each row gives a motor type followed by columns marked with the codes given in the MOTOR_I_DESC table. If I is less than 2.
■
Valid Boolean operations are >. If-then-else statements are supported including one level of nested statements. (if (I >= 9. use the format: MFG={manufacturer}. Use the following format: MFG={manufacturer}.0 amps the calculated value is (I * 3.5 is the square root of I.CAT={catalog}
CATALOGSEL table
Circuit Builder uses the CATALOGSEL table to save the catalog selections made for the motor and other components.0 amps. I^2 is I squared. The “^” character is the exponential function. For example. For example.the calculated amp value is eight times FLA current for 0-400 amps and 11 times for greater than FLA of 400 amps.the calculated value is set to (I * 1. Each cell contains an expression to calculate a FLA value. <=.ASSYCODE={assembly code} If the ASSYCODE value is not needed. =.
■
(if (I > 400) then (I * 8) else (I * 11)) . The rating value is annotated to the symbol using the API call c:ace_cb_anno2 in the circuit builder spreadsheet. if the previous circuit was
730 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. while I^0. Valid operations are +-*/^. it is (I * 1.0) then (I * 1.25).0).0) then (I * 3.

and a 10HP motor with time-delay fuses is selected for the new circuit. the values are not used from the CATALOGSEL table but from the referenced circuit.configured with a 10HP motor with time-delay fuses. use Microsoft Access. the CATALOGSEL tables values are checked for a match. if a new motor is then selected from the Select Motor on page 761 dialog box.
Electrical standards database editor | 731
. 2 Expand the tree list on the left-hand side of the dialog box. 4 Right-click and select Open on the context menu. However.
See also:
■
Electrical standards database file on page 714
Open and close a table
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database Editors
drop-down ➤ Electrical Standards Database Editor.
■ ■ ■ ■
Open a table Copy and paste a table Delete a table Edit the contents of a table
For additional capabilities. If the circuit is configured using the Reference an existing circuit on page 773 feature. the previously used catalog selection appears as the default.
Electrical standards database editor
The electrical standards database editor provides these basic functions to modify the electrical standards database file. 3 Select the table you want to open.

3 Select the table you want to copy and paste. To paste a table into a different electrical standard. 6 Select Yes to save the changes if prompted. enter the name OPT_NEC. NOTE See Electrical standards database file on page 714 for table naming rules. 4 Right click and select Copy on the context menu. Click the X. If the NEC standard does not exist in the database file. it is created. NOTE Use the shift or ctrl keys to select multiple tables. 6 Enter the name for the new table. move the mouse over the tab for the table.
Copy and paste a table
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database Editors
drop-down ➤ Electrical Standards Database Editor. An X is displayed.
732 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. add the appropriate suffix to the table name. The Copying Table dialog box displays.NOTE You can also double-click a table name to open it. enter a name for each table as prompted. 5 To close a table. If multiple tables were selected to copy. if you want to paste the default OPT table to the NEC standard. 5 Right click again and select Paste. For example. 2 Expand the tree list on the left-hand side of the dialog box.

Delete a table
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database Editors
drop-down ➤ Electrical Standards Database Editor. 2 Expand the tree list on the left-hand side of the dialog box. NOTE This change is written to the database file immediately and cannot be canceled or undone.
Edit a table
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database Editors
drop-down ➤ Electrical Standards Database Editor.
Edit contents
1 Click the cell to edit and type to overwrite the contents. 5 Click Yes. NOTE You can also double-click a table name to open it. 2 Expand the tree list on the left-hand side of the dialog box. 3 Select the table you want to delete.
Electrical standards database editor | 733
. The Delete Tables task dialog displays. 4 Right click and select Delete on the context menu. NOTE Use the shift or ctrl keys to select multiple tables. 3 Select the table you want to open. 4 Right-click and select Open on the context menu.

2 Right-click to display the context menu. 3 Click Add New Record. 2 Click Save. 4 Enter values in each cell of the new row.
734 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. 6 Edit the contents of the cells. 7 Click Save. 5 Click Save. 3 Click Delete Record. 5 Click Paste. The copied record is added at the end of the table.
Copy and paste
1 Click to the left of a row to highlight a row. 4 Right-click to display the context menu.Double-click the cell to edit the contents. The contents of the row are placed in memory. 4 Click Save. 2 Right-click to display the context menu.
Delete a record
1 Click to the left of a row to highlight a row.
Add a record
1 Click to the left of a row to highlight a row. 3 Click Copy. 2 Right-click to display the context menu. The new record is added at the end of the table.

2 Right-click to display the context menu. or Number. 2 Right-click to display the context menu. Text. 6 Click OK. NOTE This change is written to the database file immediately and cannot be canceled or undone. The column is added at the end. NOTE Columns can only be added to the AMP.
NOTE Columns can only be deleted from the AMP.
Electrical standards database editor | 735
. and XL&R tables. MOTOR_I_CALC.Add a column
1 Click a column label. The Delete Column task dialog displays. 7 Enter the cell values. INSUL. and XL&R tables.
Sorting
➤ Double-click a column to sort by the contents of that column.
Delete a column
1 Click a column label. 3 Click Insert Column. 5 Select the column type. The Insert Column dialog box displays. 4 Click Yes. 4 Enter a name for the column. 8 Click Save. 3 Click Delete Column. INSUL. MOTOR_I_CALC.

Double-click the table name to open.
Open Select a table. and select Delete. and select Copy.
Toolbar: Project Menu: Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Electrical Standards Database Editor Command entry: AEDBEDITOR
Tree structure
The left-hand side lists the existing tables in a tree structure.
Electrical standards database editor
Edits the electrical standards database file. Select a table. Any tables without a suffix are listed under Default. right-click. you are prompted for each table name. Use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select multiple tables to delete. Enter the new table name. If multiple tables were copied. Use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select multiple tables to delete. right-click.
Delete
Copy
Paste
736 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. and select Open. The highest level is separated by electrical standard as defined by the table suffix. Right-click and select Paste. Enter a new suffix to create a new electrical standard level. Select a table.NOTE Sorting is temporary and is not saved to the file. right-click.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database Editors
drop-down ➤ Electrical Standards Database Editor. A right-click context menu is available for the following functions.

NOTE Columns can only be deleted from the AMP. Click to the left of a row to highlight a row. NOTE Columns can only be added to the AMP. Right-click and select Delete Column.Table
The right-hand side displays the content of a table for modifying. Click the cell to edit. Right-click and select Insert Column. INSUL. to select multiple records to copy. The records are appended to the end of the table. Right-click and select Copy. Click to the left of a row to highlight a row.
Copy
Paste
Add New Record
Delete Record
Edit contents
Insert Column
Delete Column
Click the column label. Click the X. MOTOR_I_CALC. right-click and select Paste. Right-click and select Delete Record. After cutting or copying. Right-click to the left of a row and select Add New Record.
Electrical standards database editor | 737
. or drag the mouse. Use the Shift and Ctrl keys. to select multiple records to cut. INSUL. Use the Shift and Ctrl keys. and XL&R tables.
Close the table Cut Move the mouse to the tab for the table. MOTOR_I_CALC. A blank record is appended to the end of the table. Right-click and select Cut. Double-click the cell to edit the contents. A blank column is appended to the table.
Sort
Double-click a column label to sort the table by the values in that column. Place the mouse over a column label. Click to the left of a row to highlight a row. and XL&R tables. or drag the mouse. Type to overwrite the contents.

Close
Use Circuit Builder
The Circuit Builder tool comes prepopulated with data to build and annotate a sampling of motor control circuits and power feed circuits. It includes three-phase. Adds wiring between components. The Close dialog displays for each open and modified table prompting you to save the changes for that table. One-line symbols
738 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. single-phase.
Each time a circuit is configured. it is added to a history list of circuits.
Save
Select the Save button to save all open and modified tables. Annotates selected components with suggested values based upon the selected load. Select Save Current to save the current or only open table. You can customize on page 1939 Circuit Builder to insert other circuit types. Each one-line symbol has a WDTYPE attribute on page 335 with a value of “1-” or “1-1”. and one-line circuit representations. Select the Close button to exit the editor. This list provides for quick re-insertion at a later time. Select Save All to save changes on all open tables.
One-line motor control
Circuit Build supplies and uses a one-line symbol library when building a one-line circuit. The WDTYPE attribute value distinguishes the one-line symbol from a schematic symbol.NOTE The sorted order is not saved to the database file. Each circuit is built dynamically with the following features:
■ ■ ■
Connects to an adjacent power bus. A schematic symbol either has no WDTYPE attribute or a blank WDTYPE attribute value.

adds wiring between components. If a TERM01 attribute is added to a one-line symbol and carries a nonblank value. or core color assignments. it can be edited in the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box. Schematic symbols do not carry this attribute or have the attribute but with a blank value. and supply voltage. or “1-1” for the one-line bus-tap symbols. motor horsepower.
RATING1
TERM01
Insert a 3-phase circuit
Builds a circuit based on your selection from a list of available circuits and circuit elements. Attribute
WDTYPE
Description
The attribute must be present and carry a value of “1-” to indicate it is a one-line symbol. However.follow the same symbol naming on page 299 conventions and have the same attribute requirements as schematic symbols with a few attribute exceptions. The circuit builds dynamically and matches the rung spacing. NOTE One-line terminals are not processed by Terminal Strip Editor. and can annotate the circuit with calculated values based upon the assigned load amperage of the circuit. multiple wires. A bus-tap symbol is used to mark the beginning of a one-line circuit. Circuit Builder extracts these annotation values from a database based on engineering standards.
Use Circuit Builder | 739
. Omitted from one-line terminal symbols since a one-line terminal can represent multiple independent terminals. Omitted from one-line cable markers symbols since a one-line cable marker can represent multiple conductors. terminal number text on one-line terminal symbols are not linked back to terminal number assignments on schematic or panel terminal representations.

See Set circuit element defaults on page 2010 to change the default circuit setup.non reversing NOTE You can also select History to display the list of previously configured circuits.1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. 4 (Optional) Enter a Component Scale. 5 (Optional) Enter a Horizontal Rung Spacing. A circuit inserted from the Circuits list contains all default circuit elements as defined in the circuit template and circuit builder spreadsheet.defined in the ANNO_CODE sheet of the Circuit Builder spreadsheet file that map to the selected circuit. Reference an existing circuit on page 776 . 2 Select the circuit from the Circuits list. This value sets an insertion scale value for the individual components inserted while building the circuit. Horizontal .reference values from an existing circuit selected from a list of circuits extracted from the active
■
740 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. 6 (Optional) Enter a Vertical Rung Spacing. 7 (Optional) Select to apply some specific annotation:
■
Presets on page 2007 . 3 (Optional) Enter a Circuit Scale. A circuit inserted from the History list contains all circuit elements and values of the previously configured on page 741 circuit. For example: Circuits: 3ph Motor Circuit.FVNR . This value sets an insertion scale value for the circuit template drawing.

This value sets an insertion scale value for the individual components inserted while building the circuit.defined in the ANNO_CODE sheet of the Circuit Builder spreadsheet file that map to the selected circuit. 3 (Optional) Enter a Circuit Scale. This value sets an insertion scale value for the circuit template. and more. Values can
■
Use Circuit Builder | 741
. 4 (Optional) Enter a Component Scale. 2 Select the circuit from the Circuits list. Reference an existing circuit on page 776 . For example: Circuits: 3ph Motor Circuit. Values can include catalog assignment. 8 Select Insert. The state of the Retag new components check box controls the retagging of the components within the new circuit.FVNR .
Configure a 3-phase circuit
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. Horizontal . 5 (Optional) Enter a Horizontal Rung Spacing.project. component descriptions. 6 (Optional) Enter a Vertical Rung Spacing. 9 Select an insertion point location on the drawing. annotation values. The state of the Retag new components check box controls the retagging of the components within the new circuit. 7 (Optional) Select to apply some specific annotation:
■
Presets on page 2007 .non reversing NOTE You can also select History to display the list of previously inserted circuits. NOTE This option is not available if the circuit is selected from the History list.reference values from an existing circuit selected from a list of circuits extracted from the active project.

Each block is marked with a code value that links to instructions for either inserting a component. This dialog box is where you select the motor and horsepower or KW size from the electrical standards database. are displayed in the Select section. 9 Select an insertion point location on the drawing. for example: Circuit Elements: Disconnecting means The options for this circuit element. Select. This dialog box is where you select or adjust the wire size based on an analysis of the load and various installation parameters. or adjusting the wiring of the circuit.
12
Click the Wire Setup Browse button to display the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. You can also type in values for each entry. 10 Select a circuit element. Circuit Elements. For other components.O. The dialog box has three sections. and Setup & Annotations. component descriptions.include catalog assignment. auxiliary contact: Yes
742 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. and more. for example: Main Disconnect: Circuit breaker Include N. the Catalog lookup dialog box displays. defined in the circuit builder spreadsheet. annotation values. 8 Select Configure. The template drawing contains marker blocks.
13 Select a circuit element. for example: Circuit Elements: Motor Setup
11
Click the Motor Setup Browse button to display the Select Motor dialog box. The template drawing for the selected circuit is inserted at the specified location. You can also type in values for each entry. The options differ depending on the circuit and circuit element selected. NOTE This option is not available if the circuit is selected from the History list. wire number. 14 Select the options for this circuit element.

19 Select Done.15 (Optional) Modify values in the Setup & Annotations section for the selected circuit element. the circuit elements tree structure may expand when the nested circuit is inserted into the overall circuit.
Use Circuit Builder | 743
. The circuit is finalized by:
■
Remaining untagged child components are matched up with parent components and tags are assigned. NOTE Depending upon how this circuit element is set up in the circuit builder spreadsheet. You can also type in values for each entry.
Select the Browse button to make a part number assignment from the Catalog lookup dialog box. This name is added to the History list on the Circuit Selection dialog box and makes it easier to find this same circuit for future re-insertion. 16 Repeat to configure each circuit element. this section may not be available for circuit element modification.
Click to insert just the highlighted circuit element. The “TABLE” entry defines the catalog lookup table for the component in the circuit builder spreadsheet.
Click to insert all the circuit elements up to and including the highlighted circuit element.
Click to insert all the circuit elements. You may need to go back and configure the circuit elements that are part of the nested template. NOTE If the circuit contains a nested template. 18 Select from one of three ways to insert the circuit elements. 17 (Optional) Enter a name for the circuit.

2 Select the power feed circuit. A circuit inserted from the History list contains all circuit elements and values of the previously inserted circuit. for example the motor or load symbol. 7 (Optional) Select to apply some specific annotation:
■
Presets on page 2007 . This value sets an insertion scale value for the circuit template. A circuit inserted from the Circuits list contains all default circuit elements as defined in the circuit template and circuit builder spreadsheet.defined in the ANNO_CODE sheet of the Circuit Builder spreadsheet file that map to the selected circuit.
744 | Chapter 9 Circuits
.■
The selection information for the circuit is applied to the main component of the circuit.Single feed NOTE You can also select History to display the list of previously inserted circuits. This value sets an insertion scale value for the individual components inserted while building the circuit.
Insert a power feed circuit
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. 3 (Optional) Enter a Circuit Scale. 4 (Optional) Enter a Component Scale. For example: Circuits: 3ph Power Feed.
■
NOTE The Circuit Elements list is built dynamically based on the template for the selected circuit. if the element contains a nested circuit. As the circuit elements are inserted. The remaining marker blocks are removed from the circuit template for any circuit elements not inserted. 6 (Optional) Enter a Vertical Rung Spacing. the circuit element becomes expandable so you can configure the nested circuit elements. Horizontal . See Customize Circuit Builder on page 1939 to change the default circuit setup. 5 (Optional) Enter a Horizontal Rung Spacing.

The state of the Retag new components check box controls
■
Use Circuit Builder | 745
. 4 (Optional) Enter a Component Scale.reference values from an existing circuit selected from a list of circuits extracted from the active project. 9 Select an insertion point location on the drawing. The state of the Retag new components check box controls the retagging of the components within the new circuit.
8 Select Insert. and more.reference values from an existing circuit selected from a list of circuits extracted from the active project.
Configure a power feed circuit
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. For example: Circuits: 3ph Power Feed. NOTE You can also select History to display the list of previously inserted circuits. 3 (Optional) Enter a Circuit Scale. Horizontal . 7 (Optional) Select to apply some specific annotation:
■
Presets on page 2007 . 2 Select the circuit from the Circuits list. 6 (Optional) Enter a Vertical Rung Spacing. Reference an existing circuit on page 776 . NOTE This option is not available if the circuit is selected from the History list. component descriptions. 5 (Optional) Enter a Horizontal Rung Spacing.defined in the ANNO_CODE sheet of the Circuit Builder spreadsheet file that map to the selected circuit.Single feed. This value sets an insertion scale value for the circuit template.■
Reference an existing circuit on page 776 . This value sets an insertion scale value for the individual components inserted while building the circuit. Values can include catalog assignment. annotation values.

8 Select Configure. component descriptions. Values can include catalog assignment. and the circuit wiring. Circuit Elements. driven from the circuit builder spreadsheet.
14
Click the Wire Setup Browse button to display the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. The template drawing for the power feed is inserted at the specified location. are displayed in the Select section. annotation values. with instructions for building the circuit. The dialog box has three sections.
15 Repeat to configure each circuit element. You can also type in values for each entry. for example: Circuit Elements: Load The options for this circuit element. for example: Load: Generic box 12 Select another circuit element. 11 Select the option for this circuit element. the Catalog lookup dialog box displays. NOTE This option is not available if the circuit is selected from the History list. This dialog box is where you select or adjust the wire size based on an analysis of the load and various installation parameters. 10 Select a circuit element.the retagging of the components within the new circuit. 9 Select an insertion point location on the drawing. and more. The options differ depending on the circuit selected. Select. For other components. You can also type in values for each entry. The template drawing contains marker blocks. This dialog box is where you select the load from the electrical standards database. for example: Circuit Elements: Load Setup
13
Click the Load Setup Browse button to display the Select Load dialog box.
746 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. and Setup & Annotations.

Click to insert all the circuit elements up to and including the highlighted circuit element. 18 Select Done. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. This name is added to the History list on the Circuit Selection dialog box and makes it easier to find for future re-insertion.16 (Optional) Enter a name for the circuit.
Click to insert just the highlighted circuit element.
Use Circuit Builder | 747
. Each circuit can be independently configured.
■
■
Configure a dual power feed circuit
A dual power feed circuit has two distinct circuits running off the same bus-tap. The selection information for the circuit is applied to the main component of the circuit. The circuit is finalized by:
■
Remaining untagged child components are matched up with parent components and tags are assigned. 17 Select from one of three ways to insert the circuit elements.
Click to insert all the circuit elements. NOTE If the circuit contains a nested template. The remaining marker blocks are removed from the circuit template for any circuit elements not inserted. go back and configure the circuit elements in the nested template.

4 (Optional) Enter a Component Scale. Values can include catalog assignment. 9 Select an insertion point location on the drawing. 5 (Optional) Enter a Horizontal Rung Spacing. NOTE You can also select History to display the list of previously inserted circuits. Horizontal . with instructions for building the circuit. and the circuit wiring. The Retag new components check box controls the retagging of the components. 3 (Optional) Enter a Circuit Scale. component descriptions.defined in the ANNO_CODE sheet of the Circuit Builder spreadsheet file that map to the selected circuit.Dual feed. and more. 7 (Optional) Select to apply some specific annotation:
■
Presets on page 2007 . NOTE This option is not available if the circuit is selected from the History list. Select. The template drawing contains marker blocks. This value sets an insertion scale value for the circuit template. 6 (Optional) Enter a Vertical Rung Spacing. The options differ depending on the circuit selected. For example: Circuits: 3ph Power Feed. The template drawing for the dual power feed is inserted at the specified location. Reference an existing circuit on page 776 . 10 Select a circuit element.reference values from an existing circuit selected from a list of circuits extracted from the active project.2 Select the circuit from the Circuits list. annotation values. and Setup & Annotations. for example: Circuit Elements: Load
748 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. NOTE The circuit elements with a “(2)” prefix make up the second circuit. Circuit Elements. This value sets an insertion scale value for the individual components inserted while building the circuit. The dialog box has three sections.
■
8 Select Configure.

15 Repeat to configure each circuit element including the ones with the “(2)” prefix indicating they are part of the second circuit. 17 Select from one of three ways to insert the circuit elements. This name is added to the History list on the Circuit Selection dialog box and makes it easier to find for future re-insertion. For other components. You can also type in values for each entry.
Click to insert just the highlighted circuit element. You can also type in values for each entry. the Catalog lookup dialog box displays. for example: Load: Generic box 12 Select another circuit element. 11 Select the option for this circuit element.
Click to insert all the circuit elements up to and including the highlighted circuit element. for example: Circuit Elements: Load Setup
13
Click the Load Setup Browse button to display the Select Load dialog box. This dialog box is where you select or adjust the wire size based on an analysis of the load and various installation parameters. This dialog box is where you select the load from the electrical standards database.
Click to insert all the circuit elements.The options for this circuit element. driven from the circuit builder spreadsheet. 16 (Optional) Enter a name for the circuit. are displayed in the Select section.
Use Circuit Builder | 749
.
14
Click the Wire Setup Browse button to display the Wire Size Lookup dialog box.

NOTE You can also select History to display the list of previously inserted circuits. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. Annotation values are extracted from a database based on engineering standards. 3 (Optional) Enter a Circuit Scale. For example: Circuits: One-line Motor Circuit.folder under the schematic library folder. This value sets an insertion scale value for the individual components inserted while building the circuit.FVNR . Vertical . motor horsepower. The remaining marker blocks are removed from the circuit template for any circuit elements not inserted.
■
■
Insert a one-line circuit
Builds a one-line circuit based on your selection from a list of available circuits and circuit elements. go back and configure the circuit elements in the nested template. The selection information for the circuit is applied to the main component of the circuit. 18 Select Done. the one-line library is installed in a 1. Circuit Builder builds the circuit dynamically and annotates the circuit. 2 Select a one-line circuit from the Circuits list. By default. NOTE Add the one-line library search path on page 218 to the project so Circuit Builder can find the one-line circuit templates. 4 (Optional) Enter a Component Scale. and supply voltage.non reversing.
750 | Chapter 9 Circuits
.NOTE If the circuit contains a nested template you. This value sets an insertion scale value for the circuit template. The circuit is finalized by:
■
Remaining untagged child components are matched up with parent components and tags are assigned.

By default.
■
6 Select Insert.FVNR . 2 Select the circuit from the Circuits list. NOTE This option is not available if the circuit is selected from the History list.
Use Circuit Builder | 751
. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. Vertical . annotation values.reference values from an existing circuit selected from a list of circuits extracted from the active project. 7 Select an insertion point location on the drawing. and more. For example: Circuits: One-line Motor Circuit. Reference an existing circuit on page 776 . A circuit inserted from the Circuits list contains all default circuit elements as defined in the circuit template and circuit builder spreadsheet.non reversing NOTE You can also select History to display the list of previously inserted circuits. Values can include catalog assignment. See Set circuit element defaults on page 2010 to change default circuit setup.
Configure a one-line circuit
Configures and builds a one-line circuit based on your selection from a list of available circuits and circuit elements. the one-line library is installed in a 1.folder under the schematic library folder. NOTE Add the one-line library search path on page 218 to the project so Circuit Builder can find the one-line circuit templates. The state of the Retag new components check box controls the retagging of the components within the new circuit.defined in the ANNO_CODE sheet of the Circuit Builder spreadsheet file that map to the selected circuit.5 (Optional) Select to apply some specific annotation:
■
Presets on page 2007 . component descriptions.

for example: Circuit Elements: Motor Setup
9
Click the Motor Setup Browse button to display the Select Motor dialog box. 5 (Optional) Select to apply some specific annotation:
■
Presets on page 2007 . Select. The template drawing contains marker blocks. Circuit Elements. The options differ depending on the circuit and circuit element selected. with instructions for building the circuit. Reference an existing circuit on page 776 . and the circuit wiring. NOTE This option is not available if the circuit is selected from the History list. For other components. annotation values. This dialog box is where you select or adjust the wire size
752 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. The dialog box has three sections. This value sets an insertion scale value for the circuit template.reference values from an existing circuit selected from a list of circuits extracted from the active project. This value sets an insertion scale value for the individual components inserted while building the circuit. This dialog box is where you select the motor and horsepower or KW size from the electrical standards database. the Catalog lookup dialog box displays.
10
Click the Wire Setup Browse button to display the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. and Setup & Annotations. 7 Select an insertion point location on the drawing.3 (Optional) Enter a Circuit Scale. You can also type in values for each entry. 8 Select a circuit element.
■
6 Select Configure. 4 (Optional) Enter a Component Scale. and more.defined in the ANNO_CODE sheet of the Circuit Builder spreadsheet file that map to the selected circuit. The template drawing for the selected circuit is inserted at the specified location. Values can include catalog assignment. component descriptions. The state of the Retag new components controls the retagging of the components within the new circuit.

This name is added to the History list on the Circuit Selection dialog box and makes it easier to find for future re-insertion.
Click to insert all the circuit elements up to and including the highlighted circuit element. NOTE Depending upon how this circuit element is set up in the circuit builder spreadsheet. 15 (Optional) Enter a name for the circuit. are displayed in the Select section.
Select the Browse button to make a part number assignment from the Catalog lookup dialog box. 12 Select the options for this circuit element. this section may not be available for circuit element modification. The “TABLE” entry for the component in the circuit builder spreadsheet defines the catalog lookup table. You can also type in values for each entry.
Use Circuit Builder | 753
. You can also type in values for each entry. for example: Main Disconnect: Disconnect switch and fuses 13 (Optional) Modify values in the Setup & Annotations section for the selected circuit element. 16 Select from one of three ways to insert the circuit elements.based on an analysis of the load and various installation parameters. defined in the circuit builder spreadsheet. for example: Circuit Elements: Disconnecting means The options for this circuit element. 11 Select a circuit element. 14 Repeat to configure each circuit element.
Click to insert just the highlighted circuit element.

4 (Optional) Enter a Component Scale.non reversing NOTE You can also select History to display the list of previously inserted circuits. 17 Select Done. 2 Select the circuit from the Circuits list.Click to insert all the circuit elements.
754 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. By default.
■
■
Configure a dual one-line circuit
NOTE Add the one-line library search path on page 218 to the project so Circuit Builder can find the one-line circuit templates. go back and configure the circuit elements in the nested template. Vertical . 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. The remaining marker blocks are removed from the circuit template for any circuit elements not inserted. NOTE If the circuit contains a nested template. The circuit is finalized by:
■
Remaining untagged child components are matched up with parent components and tags are assigned. This value sets an insertion scale value for the individual components inserted while building the circuit. For example: Circuits: One-line Motor Circuit. The selection information for the circuit is applied to the main component of the circuit. the one-line library is installed in a 1. 3 (Optional) Enter a Circuit Scale.Dual FVNR . This value sets an insertion scale value for the circuit template.folder under the schematic library folder.

This dialog box is where you select or adjust the wire size based on an analysis of the load and various installation parameters.
■
6 Select Configure. This dialog box is where you select the motor and horsepower or KW size from the electrical standards database. You can also type in values for each entry. 7 Select an insertion point location on the drawing. the Catalog lookup dialog box displays. Values can include catalog assignment.reference values from an existing circuit selected from a list of circuits extracted from the active project. and the circuit wiring.The state of the Retag new components controls the retagging of the components within the new circuit. NOTE This option is not available if the circuit is selected from the History list. The template drawing contains marker blocks. 8 Select a circuit element.
10
Select the Wire Setup Browse button to display the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. The template drawing for the selected circuit is inserted at the specified location. Reference an existing circuit on page 776 . annotation values. Circuit Elements. You can also type in values for each entry. and Setup & Annotations. with instructions for building the circuit. The dialog box has three sections. component descriptions.defined in the ANNO_CODE sheet of the Circuit Builder spreadsheet file that map to the selected circuit. For other components. Select. The options differ depending on the circuit and circuit element selected. for example: Circuit Elements: Motor Setup
9
Click the Motor Setup Browse button to display the Select Motor dialog box. NOTE The circuit elements with a “(2)” prefix make up the second circuit. and more.
11 Select a circuit element. for example:
Use Circuit Builder | 755
.5 (Optional) Select to apply some specific annotation:
■
Presets on page 2007 .

NOTE Depending upon how this circuit element is set up in the circuit builder spreadsheet.
Click to insert all the circuit elements up to and including the highlighted circuit element. 14 Repeat to configure each circuit element including the ones with the “(2)” prefix indicating they are part of the second circuit. 16 Select from one of three ways to insert the circuit elements.
Select the Browse button to make a part number assignment from the Catalog lookup dialog box. 12 Select the options for this circuit element. NOTE If the circuit contains a nested template.
Click to insert all the circuit elements. are displayed in the Select section. go back and configure the circuit elements in the nested template.
Click to insert just the highlighted circuit element. You can also type in values for each entry. for example: Main Disconnect: Disconnect switch and fuses 13 (Optional) Modify values in the Setup & Annotations section for the selected circuit element.Circuit Elements: Disconnecting means The options for this circuit element. defined in the circuit builder spreadsheet. 15 (Optional) Enter a name for the circuit.
756 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. The “TABLE” entry for the component in the circuit builder spreadsheet defines the catalog lookup table. this section may not be available for circuit element modification. This name is added to the History list on the Circuit Selection dialog box for future insertion.

The tree has two levels. The rung spacing of the circuit adjusts to match the rung spacing setting for the drawing (Drawing properties: drawing format tab on page 247). Each individual device is inserted at a location predefined on the circuit template. The spreadsheet file name is displayed near the top of the Circuit Selection dialog box. Devices are annotated based on values in the Circuit Builder spreadsheet. The second level is the circuit type.17 Select Done. The first level is the circuit category.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Circuit Builder Command entry: AECIRCBUILDER
Circuits The tree structure is created by reading the ACE_CIRCS sheet of the circuit builder spreadsheet and constructing the tree from the data found in columns CATEGORY and TYPE. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. Collapses the dialog box to hide the history of configured and inserted circuits. The marker blocks are removed from the circuit template for any circuit elements not inserted. for example Horizontal . A circuit is built based on a circuit template assigned to the selected circuit type. for example 3-phase Motor Circuit. Select Delete to remove the displayed circuit from the history listing.Full Voltage Non-reversing.
History<<
History
Use Circuit Builder | 757
.xls. to insert or configure. Select a previously inserted circuit.
Circuit Selection
Select to insert a circuit. History>> Expands the dialog box to show the history of configured and inserted circuits. The default spreadsheet file is ace_circuit_builder. Select a circuit from this history list and then select Insert or Configure. including all annotation values.

The ladder rung spacing for the drawing is the default value.List
Displays the Existing Circuits dialog box showing the existing circuits found in the active project. Sets the 3-phase horizontal rung spacing for the circuit. Specifies whether to use annotation values from an existing circuit.
758 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. Sets the 3-phase vertical rung spacing for the circuit. Specifies whether to use the preset annotation values from the circuit builder spreadsheet. The multi-wire spacing for the drawing is the default value.List
Reference existing circuit
Reference existing circuit . The values from the selected circuit are applied to the new circuit. Sets an insertion scale value for the individual components inserted while building the circuit.NOTE This option is not available if Reference existing circuit is selected. Specifies to ignore special annotation options.
Circuit Scale Component Scale
Sets an insertion scale value for the entire template. Select <Default> from the History list to re-enable the Reference existing circuit option. Displays the Annotation dialog box. Select a circuit from the list.
NOTE This option is not available if the circuit is selected from the history list. Use this dialog box to specify which annotation values from the spreadsheet ANNO_CODE sheet to apply.
Horizontal Rung Spacing
Vertical Rung Spacing
None Presets
Presets .

Project
Circuit Configuration
This dialog box provides options to configure a circuit before inserting it. Modify the options for the circuit and insert it.Retag new components
When Reference existing circuit is selected. Displays a dialog box with a list of values used on the active drawing for the highlighted attribute. Displays a dialog box with a list of values used within the project for the highlighted attribute.
Inserts the circuit with all default circuit elements and settings.
Insert Configure
Annotation Presets
Predefine component attribute values in the ANNO_CODE on page 2007 sheet of the Circuit Builder spreadsheet file.
Selection grid Specifies which preset annotation values to apply. Double click to edit a value. Opens the Circuit Configuration dialog box. specifies whether to retag the components inserted as part of the new circuit. Highlight a row before selecting Drawing or Project to display a dialog with a list of used values for the attribute.
Clear all Drawing
Clears all selections. The values are applied to the components when the circuit is inserted.
Toolbar: Main Electrical
Use Circuit Builder | 759
. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. You can configure the circuit both in terms of the physical devices and the device annotation values.

Select a circuit element to configure it.
Inserts all the circuit elements up to and including the highlighted circuit element.Menu: Components ➤ Circuit Builder Command entry: AECIRCBUILDER On the Select Circuit dialog box.
Name Enter a name for the circuit.
Inserts only the highlighted circuit element. The tree structure is created dynamically based on the circuit template.
760 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. Select the options for the highlighted circuit element. and wire type for the circuit. Displays the circuit elements for the selected circuit for configuring. This name is added to the History list on the Circuit Selection dialog box for future insertion. along with default values. are defined in the circuit builder spreadsheet. NOTE The displayed options.
Inserts all the circuit elements. select a circuit and click Configure. rung spacing. NOTE The displayed values for the circuit are based on a motor or load lookup in the electrical standards database.
Circuit Elements
Select
Setup & Annotation
Enter device annotation values.

Motor or Load Setup
Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can select an existing motor or power feed and reuse the existing values. click Configure.
Use Circuit Builder | 761
.mdb.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Circuit Builder Command entry: AECIRCBUILDER On the Select Circuit dialog box. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder.Reverses the most recently inserted circuit element. You can also modify the motor lookup table from this dialog box. ace_electrical_standards. select a circuit. Use this dialog box to specify settings by selecting from a list of predefined parameters. and then select the Motor Setup Browse button.
Motor or Load Setup
Displays the Select Motor or Select Load dialog box.
Wire Setup
Displays the Wire Size Lookup dialog box.
Type Filter the listing based on motor type. Use this dialog to select a wire size based on load and various other parameters. Select <All> from the list to turn off filtering for this field. and select the appropriate motor and annotation values.
Select Motor
Browse the motor lookup table in the electrical standards database.

and select the appropriate load and annotation values. NOTE The initial default values used for Voltage and the FLA multiplier are controlled from the active OPT table in the electrical standards database file.
Frequency (HZ)
Selection grid
Edit or add records
Specifies whether you can edit or select the values.Voltage (V)
Filter the listing based on motor voltage.
762 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can select an existing motor symbol and reuse the values from the motor.
FLA
Displays or sets the full load amps (FLA) value. Displays the calculated maximum load based on the product of FLA and FLA multiplier. Values you edit are written back to the electrical standards database file. The FLA value is multiplied by this value to calculate the Maximum load value. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. Filter the listing based on motor frequency. Select a motor to pass the values back to the Circuit Configuration dialog box. Select <All> from the list to turn off filtering for this field. Sets the multiplier factor.
FLA multiplier
Maximum load
Select Load
Browse the load table. named FEED in the electrical standards database file. The FLA value is multiplied by the FLA Multiplier value to calculate the Maximum load value.mdb. Select <All> from the list to turn off filtering for this field. You can also modify the lookup table from this dialog box. ace_electrical_standards.

Sets the multiplier factor. Displays the calculated maximum load based on the product of FLA and FLA multiplier. Values you edit are written back to the electrical standards database file.
Use Circuit Builder | 763
. The FLA value is multiplied by the FLA Multiplier value to calculate the Maximum load value. select a power feed circuit. Filter the listing based on voltage.Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Circuit Builder Command entry: AECIRCBUILDER On the Select Circuit dialog box.
FLA multiplier
Maximum load
NOTE The initial default values used for Voltage and the FLA multiplier are controlled from the active OPT table in the electrical standards database file. Select a load to pass the values back to the Circuit Configuration dialog box. Select <All> from the list to turn off filtering for this field. and then select the Load Setup Browse button.
Type Filter the listing based on load type. The FLA value is multiplied by this value to calculate the Maximum load value.
Voltage (V)
Phase
Selection grid
Edit or add records
Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can select an existing power feed load symbol and reuse its values. Select <All> from the list to turn off filtering for this field. click Configure.
FLA
Displays or sets the full load amps (FLA) value. Select <All> from the list to turn off filtering for this field. Filter the listing based on phase. Specifies whether you can edit or select the values.

Sets the value that is multiplied by the FLA value to calculate the maximum load for the wire conductors. select a circuit. Sets the phase of the electrical power. Displays the calculated maximum load for the conductors. This value is added to the product of the FLA times FLA multiplier. click Configure. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder.
Other
Maximum load
764 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. Sets the full load amps carried by the wire conductors.
Load
Voltage Phase FLA FLA multiplier
Sets the voltage for the wire conductor. and then select the Wire Setup Browse button. enter the Motor Setup parameters. It is based on the FLA (Other) value added to the product of the FLA times the FLA multiplier value. Sets the amp value of any additional loads to be combined with the main motor or load and fed from this common branch circuit set of conductors.Wire Size Lookup
Specify the wire parameters and select a wire size from a list of wire sizes that meet or exceed the parameters. Estimated energy losses per wire size can provide valuable information in this selection.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Circuit Builder Command entry: AECIRCBUILDER On the Select Circuit dialog box.

This value is used in the total de-rating factor used to calculate wire ampacity. The available values are extracted from the electrical standards database table names.
Type/method
Insulation
De-rating factors
Continuous load correction
Specifies whether to include a continuous load de-rating factor in the calculation of the wire ampacity.
Wire
Size standard
Sets the wire standard.
Fill correction
Use Circuit Builder | 765
. The available values are extracted from the electrical standards database file. For example. When Continuous load correction is on. The available values are extracted from the electrical standards database table names. Sets the wire metal type.NOTE Controls are disabled if the values are predefined on the Circuit Configuration dialog. Directs Circuit Builder to use specific tables from the electrical standards database for that wire metal type. sets the derating factor. continuous equals three hours or longer. Sets the wire insulation and temperature rating type. Specifies whether to include a fill correction de-rating factor in the calculation of the wire ampacity. Directs Circuit Builder to use specific tables from the electrical standards database for that wire size standard.

sets the range of current carrying conductors that are grouped in a common conduit. You can manually set the total de-rating value. When Run distance is on. sets the de-rating factor for the selected fill range. When Run distance is on. Specifies whether to apply a maximum percent voltage drop limit on what size wires are appropriate. sets the correction factor value.
Units Via
Power factor
Maximum % voltage drop
766 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. The value is multiplied with the defined ampacity to calculate the actual de-rated ampacity of the wire. This value is used in the total de-rating factor used to calculate wire ampacity.When Fill correction is on. The available types are extracted from the electrical standards database file. When Ambient temperature correction is on. sets the type of conduit or raceway which affects the voltage drop calculation.
Total correction
Parameters
Run distance
Specifies whether to consider the length of the wire run in calculation of the voltage drop. sets the distance. raceway. When Run distance is on. When Ambient temperature correction is on.
Ambient temperature correction
Specifies whether to use a de-rating factor for an elevated ambient temperature. sets the power factor value used to calculate the voltage drop. When Fill correction is on. When Run distance is on. This value is used in the total de-rating factor used to calculate wire ampacity. or cable. sets the range of maximum ambient temperature. Displays the calculated total correction factor based on the individual de-rating settings. sets the distance units.

Maximum paralleled wire count
Minimum paralleled wire size
Cost per kwh
Sets the cost per kilowatt hour used in the wire loss calculations. sets the maximum conductors per phase to use in the calculation and display. for selection. When Include Paralleled Wire options is on. When on. sets the acceptable maximum percentage of voltage drop along the wire length.
Count
Fill
Use Circuit Builder | 767
.
Size Wire sizes extracted from the wire ampacity table in the electrical standards database. When Include paralleled wire options is on. sets the minimum wire size to use for paralleled conductor calculations.When Maximum voltage drop is on.
Paralleled wires
Include paralleled wire options
Specifies whether to include paralleled wire options in the display.
Wire grid
Displays the available wire conductors. When Include paralleled wire options is on. indicates the fill calculation which takes into account the fill correction. the display includes entries consisting of two or more smaller size conductors per phase to meet the ampacity requirement of the load. Wires that do not meet the ampacity requirements are shown in red. extracted from the electrical standards database. indicates the number of conductors per phase. When Include Paralleled Wire options is on.

It is the ampacity. multiplied by the total correction de-rating factor.
%Ampacity
Voltage Drop
768 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. The Maximum load value divided by the Ampacity. It can only be calculated if the conductor length is defined. The calculated voltage drop from one end of the power run to the other.
Ampacity
Calculated ampacity for the conductor. extracted from the wire ampacity table.NOTE This value is displayed regardless of the state of the Fill correction check box when the Include Paralleled Wire options is on. It indicates if the wire is close to being fully loaded.

Wire KW Loss
Use Circuit Builder | 769
.%Voltage Drop
The Voltage Drop value divided by the applied voltage and multiplied by 100. Calculated from the Voltage Drop and FLA.

Entries >= 300% ampacity are never shown in the list.Show all
Specifies whether to display entries where the %Ampacity value is greater than 100%. values that are greater than 100% are shown in red. When Show all is on.
Use Circuit Builder | 771
. The suggested wire conductor size is determined from the appropriate AMPG* table in the electrical standards database file.
Grounding conductor size
Displays the minimum size grounding conductor based on the FLA of the motor or power feed. Select a larger conductor size from the list.

and enter a name for the output file
772 | Chapter 9 Circuits
.
Description
Recalculate wire size
Recalculating wire size
Displays Wire Size Lookup dialog box with previous calculated data for selected motor or power feed load representation. 2 Select the motor or power feed load symbol. This is controlled by the appropriate AMPG* table in the electrical standards database file. The Wire Size Lookup dialog box displays. Uses this description when you select Save as to save the current settings and wire options as an external file. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Recalculate Wire Size.Save as
Save as
Saves the current settings. and identifying values from the Select Motor dialog box as an external file. Assigns a description for the parameters and wire options. 5 Select a grounding conductor size. A suggested minimum size is preselected. wire options. 4 Select a wire conductor size from the list. 6 (Optional) Enter a description for the parameters. the Select Motor or Select Load dialog box displays first. click Save As. NOTE If the necessary load xdata does not exist on the selected motor or load symbol. 3 Adjust the parameters as necessary.

NOTE If the xdata does not exist on the selected motor or load symbol. Make design decisions. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Recalculate Wire Size. you can reference an existing circuit picked from a list of circuits pulled from the active project. adjusting parameters as needed. The new wire layer name is determined. csv. or text format.
Recalculate wire size
Displays Wire Size Lookup dialog box with previous calculated data for selected motor or power feed load representation.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Wires ➤ Recalculate Wire Size Command entry: AEEDITWS When Circuit Builder inserts a circuit. and the connected wires are updated. To recalculate the wire size. wire sizes. The wire layer name is updated to reflect the selected size. and select an appropriate wire size.
Reference an existing circuit
When a new circuit is inserted. descriptions. and selected wire size are saved to an external file. preserving any color substring in the existing layer name. 7 Click OK. This feature can be especially useful when inserting 3-phase circuits based on existing one-line circuits. The components for each circuit element for the
Reference an existing circuit | 773
. and tag assignments from the selected circuit. values. become defaults for the new circuit. This can be either a new file or appended to an existing file in xls. the Select Motor or Select Load dialog box displays first. the parameters used to size the wires are saved on the motor or load symbol as xdata. The Wire Size Lookup on page 764 dialog box displays the existing values as defaults. The components. select the motor or load symbol when prompted.The input parameters.

semi-colon delimited list of template marker codes. The new three-line schematic circuit being inserted needs to have a marker block code Q001 marking where the three-pole disconnecting means is to be inserted.comma-delimited list that includes the template name. VIA_WD_CB_CIRCCODES . a referenced one-line circuit used marker block code Q001 to trigger insertion of the main disconnecting means. The result is that component values from the referenced circuit are applied to components in the new circuit when the marker block on page 709 codes match. inserted component handles. the “Reference Existing Circuit” option is disabled.comma-delimited list that includes data returned from any Select Motor or Select Load dialog box. Referencing an existing circuit depends on:
■ ■
Marker block CODE values UI_VAL values from the circuit builder spreadsheet
Marker Block CODE values
Referencing an existing circuit depends on finding matching marker block CODE values used in both the referenced circuit and the circuit being inserted or configured. For example. Referencing an existing circuit uses xdata (AutoCAD Extended Entity Data) added on the motor or load symbol by Circuit Builder when the circuit is inserted. The template marker code maps the values from the components in the existing circuit to the components in the new circuit. VIA_WD_CB_CIRCPARAMS . spreadsheet file name. and spreadsheet UI_VAL selection values. VIA_WD_CB_CIRCPARAMS2 .list of motor or load wire size assignments. Alternately. NOTE If there are no existing circuits in the active project that carry the VIA_WD_CB_CIRCCODE xdata. and sheet name. new component tags are generated if the option “Retag new component” is selected. The tag assignments and values are pulled across from the referenced one-line circuit.
774 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. VIA_WD_CB_CIRCSELECT .one-line circuit become the default for the new 3-phase circuit.

Main Disconnecting Means Option
Disconnect switch . the main disconnecting means may have the following options.non-fused Disconnect switch and fuses Disconnect switch and fuses (time-delay) Fuses Fuses (time-delay) Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker-thermal/inverse-time Circuit Breaker-magnetic/instantaneous None
UI_VAL
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 0
For example.
Reference an existing circuit | 775
. When the 3-phase circuit references this one-line circuit. each with a UI_VAL assigned.Spreadsheet UI_VAL values
The default circuit element options are controlled by both the CODE value and the UI_VAL from the circuit codes sheet on page 705 of the circuit builder spreadsheet. If a matching UI_VAL is not found for a particular marker block CODE value. the default as defined by the “X” in the UI_DEF column is used. For example. the one-line circuit used the Disconnect switch and fuses (time-delay) option with a UI_VAL of “6”. There may be multiple options for a particular CODE value. the disconnecting means option with a UI_VAL of “6” becomes the default.

6 (Optional) Enter a Vertical Rung Spacing. This value sets an insertion scale value for the circuit template. ladders. such as motor starters or control circuits. 14 Select Done. 11 Select to Retag new components or use the same tags as the referenced circuit. Default circuit elements and values for the circuit are based on the referenced circuit.Reference an existing circuit
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit Builder
drop-down ➤ Circuit Builder. Saved circuits save time when your projects require common arrangements of components. This value sets an insertion scale value for the individual components inserted while building the circuit. and other entities as circuits. 5 (Optional) Enter a Horizontal Rung Spacing. 13 Continue as described in Insert a 3-phase circuit on page 739 or Configure a 3-phase circuit on page 741. wires. The Existing Circuits dialog box displays with a row for each circuit carrying the necessary xdata. 3 (Optional) Enter a Circuit Scale. 4 (Optional) Enter a Component Scale.
776 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. 10 Select OK.
Use circuitry
You can save groupings of components. 7 Select Reference Existing Circuit. 9 Select a circuit row. saved circuits are inserted as a single object. 8 Select the List button. 2 Select the circuit from the Circuits list or select History to display the list of previously configured circuits. Like blocks. 12 Select Insert or Configure.

1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Circuit
drop-down ➤ Copy Circuit.
Copy circuitry
Copies windowed circuitry in the active drawing. Wire numbers and component tags are updated according to the tag settings of the current drawing. However.
Use circuitry | 777
. The components are retagged automatically based on their new line reference locations. you have the options to keep them or update them based on the new line reference locations. and includes automatic update of the component tag. the circuit explodes. If the circuit you copied contains fixed wire numbers or component tags.When you use any of the AutoCAD Electrical Insert Circuit commands to insert a circuit. fixed tags are not updated.

The components are automatically retagged based on their new line reference locations and cross-references are updated. making sure to capture the connection wires and dots that tie in to the vertical bus.2 Select the components and wires to copy. 3 Press Enter.
778 | Chapter 9 Circuits
.
Save circuit portions for later use
Use this tool to save circuit portions for later use. making sure to capture the connection wires and dots that tie in to the vertical bus. and then the second point for the move. blank them out. NOTE If the circuit you copied contains any fixed wire numbers or component tags. 2 Select the circuit to move. 1 Zoom around the circuit to save so that it fills your screen. 4 Select the base point. NOTE You can also use the AutoCAD WBLOCK command to save circuits to disk and then use the Insert Wblocked Circuit tool to insert the circuit.
Move circuitry
This tool moves the selected circuit to a specified location. Carefully window (from left to right) around the circuit. 3 Press Enter. or keep all orphan contacts. specify to keep them. 4 (Optional) Press M to make multiple copies of the selected circuit. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Circuit
drop-down ➤ Move Circuit. Carefully window (from left to right) around the circuit. retag all the found tags. 5 Select the base point and then the second point for the copy.

NOTE If you did not zoom in on the circuit in the previous step 1.2 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Circuit
drop-down ➤ Save Circuit To Icon Menu. 6 Select the insertion base point of the circuit.
■
5 Click OK. Image file to use. you can click Zoom on the Create New Circuit dialog box to zoom around the circuit to save. Make sure to select Create PNG from current screen image. 7 Window around the circuit (from left to right).
Use circuitry | 779
. AutoCAD Electrical processes the circuit and saves it to your AutoCAD Electrical user subdirectory. right-click in the Symbol Preview window and select Add icon ➤ New circuit. AutoCAD Electrical creates and adds a new circuit icon (.png) of your circuit to the bottom of the symbol preview window. Circuit drawing file name. capturing all the appropriate components and wiring and press Enter.env) file. the new circuit and image file are saved to N:\Electrical\Circuits. 3 On the Save Circuit to Icon Menu dialog box. 4 On the Create New Circuit dialog box. For example. NOTE You can also click the arrow on the Add tab and select New circuit. NOTE You can overwrite the user subdirectory using the wd_usercktdir setting in the environment (. if wd_usercktdir is enabled and set to “N:\Electrical\Circuits”. specify:
■ ■
Name of the icon.

or add or delete components and wiring.
Insert a saved circuit
You can insert circuits you saved using the Save Circuit to Icon Menu tool or circuits that you saved using WBLOCK command in AutoCAD.Add existing circuits to the icon menu
Use the Save Circuit to Icon Menu tool to add existing circuits to the icon menu. 2 On the Save Circuit to Icon Menu dialog box. right-click in the Symbol Preview window and select Add icon ➤ Add circuit.
780 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. the circuit inserts and the component tags update. 3 On the Add Existing Circuit dialog box.
■
4 Click OK. select the circuit you want to insert into the drawing from the Symbol Preview window. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Circuit
drop-down ➤ Save Circuit To Icon Menu. Existing circuit name. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit
drop-down ➤ Insert Saved Circuit. and one wire at a time. Image file to use. one component. After you specify an insertion point. The existing circuit is added to the bottom of the symbol preview window. specify:
■ ■
Name of the icon. 2 On the Insert Component dialog box. Make sure to select Create PNG from current screen image. You can then edit the component tags. You can then select the circuit from the Insert Component dialog box for insertion into a drawing. run the wire numbering tool. This circuit behaves as if you had drawn it by hand. NOTE You can also click the arrow on the Add tab and select Add circuit.

and other entities as circuits.
Insert component
This icon menu can be modified. 4 On the Circuit Scale dialog box. such as motor starters or control circuits in projects. ladders. expanded. 5 Specify the insertion point on the drawing. 4 Specify the insertion point on the drawing. select the circuit you want to insert into the drawing and click Open. or replaced with your own custom menu. Component tags update according to the tag settings in the drawing. Saved circuits provide common arrangements of components. wires. Saved circuits insert as a single object and are then exploded. click OK to use the defaults or specify a scale and then click OK. 3 On the Circuit Scale dialog box.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit
drop-down ➤ Insert WBlocked Circuit. Inserts a previously saved group of components.
Insert a WBlocked circuit
Inserts WBlocked circuitry (external drawing file) with automatic update of the component tag. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon
Use circuitry | 781
. click OK to use the defaults or specify a scale and then click OK.3 Click OK. Fixed tags do not update. 2 On the Insert WBlocked Circuit dialog box.

Display
Vertical/Horizontal
Use circuitry | 783
. the icon name and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information.
Recently Used
Displays the last components inserted during the current editing session.■
Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the current menu in the Menu tree view. Enter integer numbers only. Displays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure.dat). icon with text or list view) and the total number of icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit box.dat file. Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions based on the icon properties as defined by the . the default value is 10. Options include: Icon with text. Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation.
■
Menu
The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (. This list follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window (icon only. Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list box. The tree structure is based on the arrangement order of submenus defined in the . Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window.dat file: ■ ■ ■ Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing Executes a command Displays a submenu
Symbol Preview window
NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon. the most recently used icon displays in the top. This is unavailable if the main menu is selected in the Menu tree view. This is opposite the drawing's default ladder rung orientation. Icon only or List view. The current view option is indicated with a check mark.

this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing editing session ends. Specifies the component block insertion scale. Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open the Insert Component dialog box. without assigning a unique Component Tag). the next time you open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu displays by default. this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing editing session ends.
Type it Browse
Manually type in the component block to insert. click the Edit Component tool. if you insert a push button from the Push Buttons menu. This defaults to the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box. Once set. This defaults to the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box. Once set. untagged (i. Inserts the component.
Right-click menus
Options for the Menu tree structure view Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the following options:
■
Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus. click the Edit Component tool. For example. Browses to and selects the component to insert. To add component detail later.No edit dialog
Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing.
784 | Chapter 9 Circuits
. and select the component to edit.
No tag
Always display previously used menu
Scale schematic
Scale panel
Specifies the footprint insertion scale. and select the component to edit. The untagged value that displays is the component's TAG1/TAG2 default value. To add component detail later.e.

hydraulic. Up to 24 circuits can be saved at any one time in this scratch menu. The Insert Pneumatic Component. Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name. Insert Hydraulic Component and Insert P&ID Component tools are accessed from the Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel on the ribbon or the Extra Library toolbar.■
Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name.
■
Pneumatic. The current view option is indicated with a check mark. or P&ID). Icon only or List view. Options include: Icon with text. and P&ID icon menus
The Menu tree structure displays the symbols for the selected component type (pneumatic.
Options for the Symbol Preview window Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display the following options:
■
View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window. Hydraulic. You can change the user
Use circuitry | 785
. or submenu title. block names and so on. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties.
Insert Pneumatic Component
Insert Hydraulic Component
Insert P&ID Component
Save circuit to icon menu
You can save windowed portions of circuitry for later reuse. image. image. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.

dat).
786 | Chapter 9 Circuits
.dat file. Add: Modifies the icon menu by adding icons for circuits or a new submenu. The current view option is indicated with a check mark. Icon only.
Tabs
■
Symbol Preview window
Displays the symbol images corresponding to the menu or the submenu selected in the Menu section. The tree structure is based on the arrangement order of submenus defined in the . Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the current menu in the Menu tree view. or List view. place commonly used icons at the top and rarely used icons at the bottom of the window.
Toolbar: Circuits Menu: Components ➤ Save Circuit To Icon Menu Command entry: AESAVECIRCUIT
Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (*. Options include: Icon with text. TIP To get a good icon picture for the circuit button. ■ ■ ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.circuit menu number (default is 19) by editing this command in the CUI editor. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Circuit
drop-down ➤ Save Circuit To Icon Menu. For example. You can drag icons within the Symbol Preview window for rearrangement (multiple selection is allowed). zoom in close to the circuit you plan to save so that it fills the screen. Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window.

New Submenu: Creates a submenu in the Symbol Preview window and the tree structure. You can then paste the icon into the desired submenu.Symbol Preview right-click menu
Right-click in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display the following options:
■
View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window.dat file is overwritten with your changes. Icon only. Delete: Deletes the icon. Options include: Icon with text. You can then paste the icon into the desired submenu. Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to modify the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name. Add Icon: Adds new circuit icons or an existing circuit into the Symbol Preview window.
Toolbar: Circuits Menu: Components ➤ Insert Saved Circuit Command entry: AESAVEDCIRCUIT
Use circuitry | 787
. The current view option is marked with a check mark. or List view.
Insert Saved Circuit
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Circuit
drop-down ➤ Insert Saved Circuit. image. Copy: Makes a copy of the highlighted icon and stores it in the Paste clipboard. or block names. Paste: Adds the copied or cut icon to the highlighted submenu. Cut: Removes the selected icon from the Symbol Preview window. The existing data in the *.
■
■
■
■
■ ■ ■
Circuit scale
Use this tool to specify the scale and options for circuit insertion.

2 In the Insert Component dialog box. The wire breaks automatically if the symbol lands on it or very near it. select the starting orientation for the component: horizontal or vertical.Component Tools
10
Insert schematic components
Insert schematic components
Inserts a component you select from the icon menu. Pick an insertion point on the drawing.
789
. The orientation of the symbol tries to match the underlying wire.
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components
drop-down ➤ Icon Menu.

The right-hand column of the menu displays the last ten components inserted during the current editing session. The untagged value that displays is the TAG1/TAG2 default value of the component. 4 (Optional) If you want to insert the component. The default icon menu can also be redefined in "wd.3 (Optional) If you want to turn off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing select No Edit dialog box. annotate the component. untagged (for example." Add entry "WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout icon menu.
Insert component
This icon menu can be modified. expanded. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu.
Insert Component
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components
drop-down ➤ Icon Menu.env. or replaced with your own custom menu.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT
790 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. 8 Click OK.) Select an icon picture or the component type from the left-hand list. without assigning a unique Component Tag) select No Tag. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon Menu Paths section of the Project properties: project settings tab on page 218. The orientation of the symbol tries to match the underlying wire. The wire breaks automatically if the symbol lands on it.O. 7 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. 6 Specify the insertion point in the drawing. 5 Select the component to insert (such as Push Buttons ➤ Push Button N.

in-line wire labels. Displays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure. The current view option is indicated with a check mark.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Multiple Insert ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu) Command entry: AEMULTI NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic.dat file. Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window. The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just above the menu tree structure. This is unavailable if the main menu is selected in the Menu tree view. The tree structure is based on the arrangement order of submenus defined in the . Options include: Icon with text. cable markers. Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions based on the icon properties as defined by the .
■
Menu
The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (. or P&ID components.
Tabs ■ ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view. Hydraulic. Icon only or List view. Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure. and saved circuits. stand-alone cross-reference symbols.Multiple Insert (Icon Menu)
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Multiple Insert
drop-down ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).dat).dat file: ■ ■ Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing Executes a command
Symbol Preview window
Insert schematic components | 791
. Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the current menu in the Menu tree view.

This defaults to the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box. This list follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window (icon only. To add component detail later. Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open the Insert Component dialog box. Specifies the component block insertion scale. if you insert a push button from the Push Buttons menu. Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later. Enter integer numbers only. and select the component to edit. The untagged value that displays is the component's TAG1/TAG2 default value. and select the component to edit.e. the icon name and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information. the default value is 10. Inserts the component. Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list box. click the Edit Component tool. For example. click the Edit Component tool.
Recently Used
Displays the last components inserted during the current editing session. Once set. icon with text or list view) and the total number of icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit box.■
Displays a submenu
NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon. the most recently used icon displays in the top. untagged (i. without assigning a unique Component Tag).
Display
Vertical/Horizontal
No edit dialog
No tag
Always display previously used menu
Scale schematic
792 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. the next time you open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu displays by default. this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing editing session ends. This is opposite the drawing's default ladder rung orientation.

image. Options include: Icon with text.
Right-click menus
Options for the Menu tree structure view Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the following options:
■ ■
Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus. Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name. image.
Type it Browse
Manually type in the component block to insert. The current view option is indicated with a check mark. and P&ID icon menus
The Menu tree structure displays the symbols for the selected component type (pneumatic.
■
Pneumatic. hydraulic. or P&ID). block names and so on. this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing editing session ends. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties. This defaults to the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box. Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name. The Insert Pneumatic Component. Browses to and selects the component to insert. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties. Hydraulic. Once set. or submenu title. Insert Hydraulic Component and Insert P&ID Component tools are accessed from
Insert schematic components | 793
.
Options for the Symbol Preview window Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display the following options:
■
View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window.Scale panel
Specifies the footprint insertion scale. Icon only or List view.

While inserting a component for the first time you establish its tag definition inside of the project. location. and so on. 5 Click OK. 2 Click OK and insert the component on the drawing. click Yes-Update to update the related components with your changes. as needed. the relationship must be established before editing. 6 In the Update Related Components dialog box. You can go back to a component at any time and edit values such as tag.Edit Component
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components
drop-down ➤ Edit. ratings. The steps to link the new component with related components are: 1 Insert a new component and change the component tag as needed. and miscellaneous values. catalog data. catalog assignment.
Insert schematic components | 795
. installation.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit. Related components update to match the new values. 4 Change the description. NOTE Some options are not available depending on whether you are inserting a single component or multiple components. If the component could potentially reference other components found on different drawing files in the project. Click Skip to update only the component you edited. 3 Right-click the component and select Edit Component. descriptions.

Lists used component tag names. Lists used panel component tag names.
Use PLC Address Searches for a wire connection to a nearby PLC I/O address and. and one-line components in the list. To define the component tag. panel.log" and is saved in the User subdirectory. You can select whether to use the duplicated tag or use a new tag that is suggested (or you can type in a new tag). a warning dialog box displays. to this new component. Select a tag from the list to copy. uses the PLC address number in the tag name of the component. catalog. if found. Select to include children. all families. If you enter an existing component tag during the insert/edit process.
Tags Used: Schematic
Tags Used: Panel
External List
796 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
.Component Tag
Any existing tags appear in the edit box. the list includes schematic parent components in the same family as the current component. An “o” in front of the tag indicates a schematic component exists but there is mismatch on Catalog and Manufacturer values between the two. tag. NOTE An error log file is created for every project regardless of whether you chose to display the real-time warning dialog box or not. edit the existing tag or type a specific tag in the edit box. You can reference an ASCII text file in comma or space delimited format to help annotate the component's description. Select a tag from the list to copy. An “x” in front of the tag indicates there is a schematic component already inserted. Initially. The real-time warning is saved in the log file named "<project_name>_error. or to increment for this new component. It temporarily disables the warning dialog box for the current session of AutoCAD Electrical). Assigns a tag from an external list file. (Turn off the warning in the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box. It alerts you of the duplication and suggests alternative tag names based on the user-defined format. Select Fixed if you do not want this tag to update on a retag. and other information of the component.

Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selected component and returns the component values. You can then
Catalog
Assembly
Item
Count
Lookup
Previous
Insert schematic components | 797
.
Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the component. This value gets inserted into the "SUBQTY" column of the BOM report. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Lists the assembly code for the component.
Catalog Data
You can do a drawing-wide or project-wide listing of similar components with their catalog assignments. Database queries are set up in the three lists across the top of the dialog box with the database hits listed in the main window of the dialog box. Retag Component uses this override format value to calculate a new tag for the selected component.Options
Substitutes a fixed text string for the %F part of the tag format. When you insert another component of that type. Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each component. The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together. the last MFG / CAT / ASSYCODE assignment for each component type you insert into your wiring diagram is remembered. Enter a tag format override in the edit box. Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected component. Lists the catalog number for the component. Opens the catalog database of the component from which you can manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Specifies the quantity number for the part number (blank=1). The tag value can be manually typed in the edit box. During your editing session. the previous catalog assignment of the component is set as the default (assuming a previous one was made during the current editing session).

Displays what the selected item looks like in a Bill of Material template. These multiple BOM part numbers appear as sub-assembly part numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM and component reports. another project. They are displayed in the left-hand dialog box list. highlight it. External file: You can pull catalog assignments from a generic ASCII file created by a word processor or output from a spreadsheet or database program.
Project
■
■
Multiple Catalog
Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selected component. A dialog box displays the contents of the selected text file. and then pick the appropriate category button in the center column. Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the project.make your catalog assignment by picking from the dialog box list. You can search in the active project. Other project: Scans each listed drawing in a previous project for the target component type and returns the catalog information in a subdialog box. AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the file and breaks it into its component parts. Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the current drawing. Make your catalog assignment by picking from the dialog box list. ■ Active project: All the drawings in the current project are scanned and the results are listed in a dialog box. For each relevant item.
Catalog Check
798 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. You can add up to 99 part numbers to any component. The highlighted item is transferred to the corresponding category (and then to the Insert/Edit dialog box once OK is clicked). Find and highlight the appropriate entry. or an external file. Select from the list to assign your new component with a catalog number that is consistent with other similar components in the project.

Cross-Reference
Component override Overrides the WD_M block settings of the drawing with component-specific cross-reference settings.dwg. Select Defaults to display a list of default values. DESC2. Fuse symbol file names are HFU*. Picks a description from a component on the current drawing. A pin list database table is consulted when a part number is added or an existing part number is changed on a parent symbol.Ratings
Specifies values for each ratings attribute. the component you are editing does not carry rating attributes. Click Setup to edit the component cross-reference settings manually.dwg and VFU*.
Drawing Displays a list of descriptions found in the current drawing so you can pick similar descriptions to edit. Displays a list of descriptions found in the project so you can pick similar descriptions to edit.
Project
Defaults
Pick
If a symbol does not have the DESC1-3 attributes. To put descriptions on fuse symbols (or other symbols without these attributes). Opens an ASCII text file from which you can select standard descriptions. the description edit boxes are unavailable. open the fuse library symbols in AutoCAD Electrical and add the DESC1. Catalog. You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a component. and DESC3 attribute definitions.
Description
Up to three lines of description attribute text can be entered. and Assembly values of the part number in the database table is found. If a match on the Manufacturer. the associated contact count and pin number in-
Reference NO/ Reference NC
Insert schematic components | 799
. NOTE If Ratings is unavailable.

Pins
Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the component. Click NO/NC Setup to view or manually edit pin list data values.)
Show/Edit Miscellaneous
View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of installation codes used so far is returned.
800 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation codes. Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can create installation-specific BOM and component lists later.
Location Code
Changes the location codes. BOM for all field cables. Click List to display the Connector Pin Numbers in Use dialog box where you can edit the pin numbers and descriptions.formation is retrieved and placed on the parent component. For Connectors: Once a connector is inserted onto the block definition of the drawing file. BOM for all PNL cables. Select from the list to update the component with the location code automatically.
Installation Code
Changes the installation codes. (For example. You can search the current drawing or entire project for location codes. you can edit the connector pins found inside of the connector. Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can extract cable from/to reports and location-specific BOM reports later.
Switch Positions
Labels the positions of a selector switch. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing file is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned. Select from the list to update the component with the installation code automatically.

Insert Component
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert
Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. Related components update to match the new values. 5 Click OK. 3 Right-click the component and select Edit Component. Click Skip to update only the component you edited. click Yes-Update to update the related components with your changes. and miscellaneous values. The Insert/Edit Component dialog box is for working in IEC mode.OK-Repeat
(not available when editing components) Inserts the new component onto the drawing and then inserts another 'just like' component.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT
Insert schematic components | 801
. ratings. catalog. the dialog box displays differently. the relationship must be established before editing. and so on. as needed. location. If you are working in JIC mode.
Insert/edit component: IEC
Assign values on the component such as tag. The steps to link the new component with related components are: 1 Insert a new component and change the component tag as needed. descriptions. catalog data. 2 Click OK and insert the component on the drawing. While inserting a component for the first time you establish its tag definition inside of the project. 6 In the Update Related Components dialog box. If the component could potentially reference other components found on different drawing files in the project. 4 Change the description. installation.

BOM for all field cables. (For example. Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can extract cable from/to reports and location-specific BOM reports later. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing file is done and a list of installation codes used so far is returned. To insert multiple components. Select from the list to update the component automatically with the installation code. You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation codes. select Components ➤ Multiple Insert ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).
Installation
Changes the installation codes. You can search the current drawing or entire project for location codes.Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing.)
802 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
.
Location
Changes the location codes. BOM for all PNL cables. Select from the list to update the component automatically with the location code. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit.
Edit Component
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components
drop-down ➤ Edit. You can go back to any component at any time and make changes. NOTE Some options are not available depending on whether you are inserting a single component or multiple components. Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can create installation-specific BOM and component lists later.

and location code is used for error checking in IEC mode. installation code. An “o” in front of the tag indicates a schematic component exists but there is mismatch on Catalog and Manufacturer values between the two. Select Fixed if you do not want this tag to update on a retag. panel. or to increment for this new component.
Tags Used: Schematic
Tags Used: Panel
External List Options
Insert schematic components | 803
. This alerts you of the duplication and suggests alternative tag names based on the user-defined format.
Use PLC Address Searches for a wire connection to a nearby PLC I/O address and. Select a tag from the list to copy. if found. Lists used panel component tag names. Retag Component uses this override format value to calculate a new tag for the selected component. to this new component. a warning dialog box displays. Select a tag from the list to copy. and one-line components in the list.Component Tag
Any existing tags appear in the edit box. If you enter an existing component tag during the insert/edit process. Enter a tag format override in the edit box. uses the PLC address number in the tag name of the component. Substitutes a fixed text string for the %F part of the tag format. An “x” in front of the tag indicates there is a schematic component already inserted. the list includes schematic parent components in the same family as the current component. edit the tag or type a specific tag in the edit box. You can select whether to use the duplicated tag or use a new tag that is suggested (or you can type in a new tag). Assigns a tag from an external list file. To define the component tag. Initially. all families. Select to include children. Lists used component tag names. NOTE The combined value of the component tag.

The tag value can be manually typed in the edit box. Displays a list of descriptions found in the project so you can pick similar descriptions to edit.
Project
Defaults
Pick
Catalog Data
You can do a drawing-wide or project-wide listing of similar components with their catalog assignments.
Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the component. Specifies the quantity number for the part number (blank=1). Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each component. the last MFG / CAT / ASSYCODE assignment for each component type you insert into your wiring diagram is remembered. When you insert another component of that type. Picks a description from a component on the current drawing. Lists the assembly code for the component. the previous catalog assignment of the component is set as the default (assuming a previous one was made during the current editing session). During your editing session. Opens an ASCII text file from which you can quickly pick standard descriptions. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup.
Catalog
Assembly
Item
Count
804 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup.
Drawing Displays a list of descriptions found in the current drawing so you can pick similar descriptions to edit. Lists the catalog number for the component.Description
Up to three lines of description attribute text can be entered. This value gets inserted into the "SUBQTY" column of the BOM report. The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together.

Catalog. Click Setup to edit the component cross-reference settings manually. Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selected component. Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the project. These multiple BOM part numbers appear as subassembly part numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM and component reports. and Assembly values in the database table of the part number is found. Database queries are set up in the three lists across the top of the dialog box with the database hits listed in the main window of the dialog box.Lookup
Opens the catalog database of the component from which you can manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values. the associated contact count and pin number information is retrieved and placed on the parent component.
Reference NO/ Reference NC
Insert schematic components | 805
. Displays what the selected item looks like in a Bill of Material template. Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the current drawing. You can add up to ten part numbers to any component.
Previous
Drawing
Project
Multiple Catalog
Catalog Check
Cross-Reference
Component override Overrides the WD_M block settings of the drawing with component-specific cross-reference settings. Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected component. If a match on Manufacturer. Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selected component and returns the component values. A pin list database table is consulted when a part number is added or an existing part number is changed on a parent symbol.

Click NO/NC Setup to view or manually edit pin list data values. Select Defaults to display a list of default values. You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a component.
806 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. These multiple BOM part numbers appear as subassembly part numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM and component reports.
Ratings
Specifies values for each ratings attribute. click Multiple Catalog. You can add up to 99 additional part numbers to any schematic or panel component on-the-fly. the component you are editing does not carry rating attributes. the plug pin values in the second column. On the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout . Catalog Data section. Lists all the pins previously used in the project and the next available pin assignment that can be used. Enter a new pin number value in the edit boxes or click the arrows to either increase or decrease both plug and receptacle values by one.
Pins
Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the component.
Show/Edit Miscellaneous
View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes.
Edit
List
Multiple bill of material information
This tool allows you to insert or edit extra catalog part numbers on to the currently selected component or footprint. and the receptacle pin values in the last column.Component Insert/Edit dialog box.
Pins Displays pairs of pins in the first column. NOTE If Ratings is unavailable. you can edit the connector pins found inside of the connector. For Connectors: Once a connector is inserted onto the block definition of the drawing file.

Catalog Data
Specifies the catalog part number information such as the manufacturer and catalog number.
Sequential code
Adds up to 99 extra part numbers (in addition to the main catalog part number). you must provide a name for the catalog look-up table. If these attributes are not present on the symbols. The additional catalog part numbers are saved on the symbol as MFGn/CATn/ASSYCODEn attribute values where "n" is the sequential code value "01" through "99" selected in the top list box.NOTE You can also access this dialog box by clicking Multiple Catalog on the Copy Catalog Assignment on page 1330 dialog box. Pick which one you want to add or inspect/edit. this information is provided on the symbol itself but may not be there for these catalog entries. AutoCAD Electrical saves the information as Extended Entity Data (Xdata) on the symbol's block insert. Select List to pick from a list of tables that are contained in your catalog database file or Misc to use the MISC_CAT table. For the main catalog entry.
Insert schematic components | 807
.
Unit
Specifies the unit of measure. Click the list button to show all extra part numbers carried on the component.
Parts Catalog Lookup
Lists the catalog database table that is to be referenced for the description information for the given Manufacturer/Catalog/Assembly combination. For each catalog entry.
Count
Specifies the quantity number for the extra part number (blank=1). This value gets inserted into a BOM report's "SUBQTY" column. which can be displayed in the component list report.

Click Sequential Code: List on the Multiple Bill of Material Information dialog box.
Catalog Check
Quickly performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result.
Multiple catalog part number assignments
This displays the order in which the extra part numbers will appear in the various AutoCAD Electrical reports. click Multiple Catalog.
Tags in use
Displays a listing of all component tags found on the schematic for the project. NOTE You can also access this dialog box by clicking Multiple Catalog on the Copy Catalog Assignment on page 1330dialog box and then clicking Sequential Code: List. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box.Catalog Lookup
Checks for and displays catalog table information in the Parts Catalog dialog box for the selected component type. You can add up to 99 additional part number assignments to a component.
808 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. Catalog Data section. To change the order. highlight the part number and click Move Up or Move Down to move it in the list. click Tags Used: Schematic.
Insert Component
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert
Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu.Component Insert/Edit dialog box.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. On the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout .

Displays all panel components.Edit Component
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components
drop-down ➤ Edit. (Default) Shows the children along with the parent for related family codes in the project. click Tags Used:Schematic. drawing sequence.
Show parent/stand-alone references
Show child references
Show all components for all families Show all panel components Show one-line components
Freshen
Copy Tag Calculate Next
Insert schematic components | 809
. Shows all parent components for related family codes in the project. Provides the next available tag (sequence or line reference number) for the device type selected in the dialog box. Changes the current drawing visible in the tag list and updates the data in the project database.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit. Shows all one-line components for related family codes in the project.
Sort Sorts the list by component tag. Shows all devices from all families in the project. Applies the selected line to the edited component. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. or description.

In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box.
Edit Component
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components
drop-down ➤ Edit. To achieve this tag override.Option: tag format "family" override
AutoCAD Electrical provides a way to override a component tag but still update the reference number portion on a retag. enter "MC-R%N" for the tag format.
Insert schematic components | 811
. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. a certain relay component must always have an "MC-R" family tag value instead of "CR" so that retag assigns MC-R100 instead of CR100. For example. You can substitute a fixed text string for the %F part of the tag format for a component. Retag can then use the override format value to calculate a new tag for the component.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit. click the Options button in the Component Tag area.
Insert Component
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert
Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. click the Options button in the Component Tag area.

or ." The file format is free-form.Component annotation from external file
This tool pulls information from a selected line in an external space or comma-delimited text file and assigns its text to a specific attribute/xdata on the component. click External List.txt file to reference and click Open. .txt.csv" or ".wdx. Select the . . In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box.csv.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit.
Edit Component
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components
drop-down ➤ Edit.csv.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component Command entry: AECOMPONENT Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. Select the .txt file to reference and click Open. Select a line of data from the list and click OK.
Insert Component
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert
Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. Select a line of data from the list and click OK.wdx. click External List. or .wdx" but can also be ". The default extension for this file is ".
812 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box.

Project
Insert schematic components | 813
.
Overwrite Add Overwrites the existing value in the edit box with the selected value. or any type of description list.
Descriptions
Standard Description lists can be created in ASCII text files with a . or click Pick File to select a different file and description list. You may create project-related list. component family lists. then click one of the buttons next to the attribute name to assign the value to.
Descriptions panel Pick File Language Displays the values for the description file. Adds the selected value to the edit box. Click Defaults in the Description section of the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. Displays the Language Database file (WD_LANG1. a generic list. Displays a project .wdd file (if not already displayed). Selects a different file and description list. Highlight an entry from the list and click OK. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components
drop-down ➤ Edit.Select a value from the list of data elements on the left. The value is appended to any existing value.MDB) for the AutoCAD Electrical Language Conversion tool.WDD file extension.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit.

WDD) if not already displayed. The default table is wd_lang1. Enter a value or click Edit File to edit the file using WordPad.
General Add/Edit
OK-Description 1
OK-Description 2
OK-Description 3
Select description from AutoCAD Electrical language table
Opens the current language table for review. Inserts the selected text into line Description 2. Displays a generic file (WD_DESC. Any existing text in description lines 1 and 2 is left untouched. if the component has the family code “PB” for push buttons and a file called PB. DESC2.mdb Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components
drop-down ➤ Edit. it displays when you click Family. and DESC3) for the file. Inserts the selected text into line Description 3. Inserts the selected text into line Description 1. Any existing text in description lines 1 and 3 is left untouched. inserting dual language descriptions).wdd file (if not already displayed). Any existing text in description lines 2 and 3 is left untouched (for example.Family
Displays a family . For example.
814 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. Opens a dialog box for adding or editing description text (DESC1. and click Language.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit.WDD exists. Click the Defaults button in the Description section of the Insert/Edit Component dialog box.

Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components
drop-down ➤ Edit. Specifies which language to use for the selected phrase.WDD) if not already displayed. Displays a family . it displays when you click Family.
Select language Selects a predefined language.
Phrase list in selected language Pick language/Phrase to use Pick File Project Family
Displays a phrase list for the selected language.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT
Insert schematic components | 815
.WDD exists. Displays a project . if the component has the family code “PB” for push buttons and a file called PB. NOTE Language matches are not case sensitive.
Generic
Select description text format
Specifies how to handle description text in the selected language.NOTE Use the Edit Language Database File on page 1244 tool to modify the language table. Displays a generic file (WD_DESC.wdd file (if not already displayed). For example. Selects a different file and description list. but phrase substitutions are made exactly as entered in the language table.wdd file (if not already displayed).

The "|" character forces a line break. leaving any existing text in lines 2 and 3 as is. the description text displays in description lines 1 and 2 in the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. Examples of what the description looks like appear next to the options. Inserts selected description text into the first description text line of the component. In the Descriptions dialog box.3
NOTE These components are useful for inserting description text in dual languages. OK ➤ Description 2 Inserts selected description text into the second description text line of the component. You can use the default text or type modifications in the edit box.
1 Line. leaving any existing text in lines 1 and 3 as is. leaving any existing text in the first line as is.Select the component to edit. Inserts text starting at the second description text line of the component. 3 Lines Specifies whether to display the selected description text in one line or across multiple lines.
Pin numbers in use
Lists all the pins previously used in the project and the available pins that can be assigned to a component. However. click Language. The component tag displays below the title bar in the dialog box.
816 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. click Defaults. Select the phrase and language to edit and click OK. Overrides the selected description text. if you selected two Lines above and click OK ➤ Description 1. 2 Lines. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components
drop-down ➤ Edit. Description section.
Manual edit/override
OK ➤ Description 1
OK ➤ Description 2.

If no wire connection to the pin. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. The number in parenthesis () indicates the single or pair of pins for the component. Displays the sheet number and potential reference line number where the connector definition is located in the project. Displays the pin numbers already in use in the project. Pins section. Displays the wire numbers carried on wires attached to each of the pins above.
Insert or edit child components | 817
. or if the wire does not carry a wire number assignment. Reference
Type
Pins Wire Numbers
Insert or edit child components
Insert or edit child component
Insert Component
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert
Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. click List.
Pin List The three lists display all available pins to assign to the component. Pins can be Unused NO Pairs.Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT Select the component to edit. "NO" or "NC"). Unused Form-C contacts. It is the value carried by the CONTACT attribute of the component.
Sheet. and undefined. Displays the contact type (for example. then this field is blank. then this field is blank. If no attribute is present or this attribute is blank.

AutoCAD Electrical does a quick read of all the current or selected drawing files and returns a list of all installation codes used
Insert or edit child components | 819
. click Parent/Sibling and select the parent (or another related contact). If the parent is visible on the screen. category "schematic" is assumed. NOTE If the Cross-reference edit box is grayed out. only one-line components are listed. the component you are editing does not carry rating attributes.
Installation Code
Changes the installation code(s). NOTE Only components of the same category are displayed in the Drawing or Project lists. The category for a component is defined by the WDTYPE attribute on page 335 value.Component Tag
The parent tag value can be manually typed into the edit box or selected from a drawing-wide or project-wide list of similar components.
Description
Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered. NOTE If Ratings is grayed out. You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation codes. These lines are automatically filled with a copy of the parent's description text if the parent Tag name is picked using one of the methods above. You can enter descriptions or select a description from a component on the current drawing.
Ratings
Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a component. If this attribute is missing or blank. if the child is a one-line component. the component you are editing does not carry an XREF attribute. Select Defaults to display a list of default values.
Cross-reference
AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross-reference text when the cross-reference command is run. This transfers all information automatically to the child contact being inserted or edited. For example.

Insert Component
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert
Components drop-down ➤ Icon Menu. Assigning short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" allow you to later create installation-specific BOM and component lists. Pick from the list to automatically update the component with the location code. If you are working in JIC mode.
Location Code
Changes the location code(s). A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned.
820 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
.
Pins
Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the component.so far.
Insert or edit child component: IEC
This is Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box for working in IEC mode. the dialog box will display differently. You can search the current drawing or entire project for location codes. Assigning short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" allow you to later extract cable from/to reports and location-specific BOM reports (ex: BOM for all field cables.
OK-Repeat
(not available when editing components) Inserts the new component onto the drawing and then inserts another 'just like' component.
Show/Edit Miscellaneous
View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes. Pick from the list to automatically update the component with the installation code. BOM for all PNL cables).

NOTE Only components of the same category are displayed in the Drawing or Project lists. You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation codes. only one-line components are listed. Select from the list to automatically update the component with the installation code.
Description
Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered. The category for a component is defined by the WDTYPE attribute on page 335 value. Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can extract cable from/to reports and location-specific BOM reports later. These lines are automatically filled with a copy of the parent's description text if the parent Tag name is picked using one of the methods described previously. (For example. For example. You can enter descriptions or select a description from a component on the current drawing. Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can create installation-specific BOM and component lists later. Click Parent/Sibling and select the parent (or another related contact).
Location
Changes the location codes. BOM for all PNL cables.
822 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. Select from the list to automatically update the component with the location code. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of installation codes used so far is returned.)
Component Tag
The parent tag value can be manually typed into the edit box or selected from a drawing-wide or project-wide list of similar components. if the child is a one-line component. This transfers all information automatically to the child contact being inserted or edited. If the parent is visible on the screen.Installation
Changes the installation codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned. BOM for all field cables. You can search the current drawing or entire project for location codes.

Show/Edit Miscellaneous
View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes.
Insert a copy of a component | 823
. the component you are editing does not carry any rating attributes. the component you are editing does not carry an XREF attribute.
Insert a copy of a component
Insert a copy of an existing component
Copies a component you select in a drawing to a point you specify. You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a component. You can edit the component values brought over from the original component. Select Defaults to display a list of default values. and includes automatic update of the component tag. NOTE If the Cross-reference edit box is grayed out. A copied component automatically breaks any underlying wires. NOTE If Ratings is grayed out.
Cross-reference
AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross-reference text when the cross-reference command is run.
Pins
Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the component.Ratings
Specifies values for each ratings attribute.

You can edit the component values. so you can finish annotating the component. The operation inserts each component and breaks any underlying wires.
2 Select a component from the drawing just like the new one you want to insert.
824 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. This inserts a copy of the symbol you selected and then displays the Insert/Edit Component dialog box.1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Copy Component.
Insert similar components at fence crossing points
Inserts a component selected from the icon menu at points where the fence you define crosses a wire. Each point where the fence crosses a wire is an optional insertion point. 4 Click OK. 3 Select the insertion point.

5 Select a point below the final wire for processing. 4 Select a point above the first wire that you want to process. where you finish annotating the component. and then right-click to end the command. 2 Select the component type from the Insert Component: Schematic Symbols dialog box. If you keep the insertion point.
Insert a copy of a component | 825
. 7 Click OK to complete the operation. 2 Select the component to copy. 3 Select the component from the selection dialog box.1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Multiple Insert
drop-down ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu). prompting you to decide whether to keep the insertion. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Multiple Insert
drop-down ➤ Multiple Insert (Pick Master). or skip to the next one. keep all of the insertions. 6 With each possible insertion point (that is. the regular Insert/Edit dialog box is displayed.
Copy a component to fence crossing points
Inserts copies of a selected component at each point a defined fence crosses a wire. fence crossing point with a wire) a dialog box displays.

prompting you to decide whether to keep the insertion. the regular Insert/Edit dialog box is displayed. 3 Select the component to insert. NOTE This procedure uses schematic tools. fence crossing point with a wire) a dialog box displays. keep all of the insertions. but the same procedure can be done using panel tools. 4 (Optional) Click Edit to make any changes to the catalog record. 6 Click OK. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components
drop-down ➤ Catalog List. 6 Click OK to complete the operation. 7 Specify an insertion point in the active drawing.
Insert from catalog lists
Insert components from catalog lists
Use this to annotate the selected schematic (or panel) component with the catalog number or a component description selected from a user-defined pick list and insert it into the drawing. highlight the existing record before you click Add. Modify the record in the Edit Record dialog box and click OK. or skip to the next one. 5 With each possible insertion point (that is. Modify the record in the Add Record dialog box and click OK. 4 Select a point below the final wire for processing. If you keep the insertion point. where you finish annotating the component. 5 (Optional) Click Add to create a new record. description. or manufacturer. and then right-click to end the command. 2 Sort the component list by catalog. If the new record is similar to an existing record.3 Select a point above the first wire that you want to process.
826 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
.

You can sort by description. Opens a dialog box for editing a record. Modify the record in the displayed dialog box. catalog number. Removes an existing record. Highlight the record and click Edit.
Toolbar: Insert Component Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component (Lists) ➤ Insert Component (Catalog List) Command entry: AECOMPONENTCAT Click Add or Edit. If the new record is similar to an existing record.
828 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. or manufacturer code. include the part of the path that needs to be appended to one of these search paths (or you can enter the full path). If the footprint block is not in an AutoCAD or an AutoCAD Electrical search path.
Insert Footprint (Catalog List)
Ribbon: Panel tab ➤ Insert Component Footprints panel ➤ Insert
Components drop-down ➤ Catalog List.on whether the routine is called from the AutoCAD Electrical or Panel Layout toolbar. Opens a dialog box for creating a record.
Add
Edit
Delete
Add or edit record
Insert Component (Catalog List)
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components
drop-down ➤ Catalog List. highlight the existing record before you click Add.
Sort by Specifies how to sort the record list.

If the footprint block is not in an AutoCAD search path or an AutoCAD Electrical search path. Description: Specifies the optional comment for the footprint record. Use Browse to locate the block name.
Single block or explode on insert
Specifies if it should be inserted as a block or exploded upon insert (as you would for a circuit). This is for reference in this file only.
Minimum of Block Name and either Description or Catalog
■
Block/Assembly/Circuit: The Block value can be a symbol name or AutoLISP expression. Then. include the part of the path that needs to be appended to one of these search paths (or enter the full path to the footprint block). Wild card characters include: * = match any characters ? = match any single character # = match any single numeric digit @ = match any single alphabetic character
■
■
Insert from catalog lists | 829
. you need to define the block name and either the catalog number or description. at a minimum. It does not get extracted into any AutoCAD Electrical report Catalog: (not used for exploded inserts) The Catalog value may contain wildcards. NOTE When you add a record you must indicate if the component or circuit is Schematic or Panel and you need to indicate if it should be inserted as a block or exploded upon insert (as you would for a circuit).
Select Schematic or Panel Device
Specifies if the component (or circuit) is Schematic or Panel.Toolbar: Insert Footprint (Lists) Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Lists) ➤ Insert Footprint (Catalog List) Command entry: AEFOOTPRINTCAT Click Add or Edit.

The TEXTVALS value can be used to filter your pick list based on the component's FAMILY code value. the text substring "FAMILY=<family code>" needs to be somewhere in each line of text to be displayed. it carries a manufacturer code. You may use the MDB file (schematic_lookup. If the
830 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
.mdb) or a project-specific schematic lookup file. called <project>_schematic_lookup. assembly code. "1492". AutoCAD Electrical takes this MFG code. then precede it with the ` char. CAT. If the same footprint is used no matter what the ASSYCODE value is (ex: different combinations of contact blocks on a base relay) then use " * " wildcard character for the ASSYCODE value in the record. The TEXTVALS field can also be used to auto-fill attribute values on insertion. You must expand and modify these tables to meet your specific schematic needs.mdb.LOC=PNL1" then the MFG. goes to the matching table name in the schematic lookup database and tries to find a match on the manufacturer. If the catalog information includes an ASSYCODE value. and "PNL1" respectively. You can do this using tools provided with AutoCAD Electrical or through the use of a database program that can read/write the Access file format. example "F120#10" would be "F120`#10"
Optional Values
(These options are not available for exploded inserts) Options for specifying the manufacturer code. catalog number and assembly code (if non-blank).
The schematic lookup file
The schematic lookup file maps catalog information from a panel component or equipment list to a specific schematic component library symbol. on the MFG attribute. For example.NOTE If the catalog number actually has a character in it like #. Within the database file are tables based on Manufacturer codes.mdb in Access ". if the line includes the substring "MFG=AB. and LOC edit boxes will auto-fill with the values "AB". For this to work. and text values.mdb" file format. If a match is found. When you select a panel footprint from an AutoCAD Electrical extract file or select a panel footprint from a catalog lookup file. AutoCAD Electrical supplies a starter lookup file called schematic_lookup. include it in the record to ensure a complete match.CAT=1492. AutoCAD Electrical retrieves the component block path/name (or AutoCAD Electrical command list) from the matching record and inserts the schematic component representation into the drawing.

Each record consists of these fields (in this order):
MANUFACTURER CATALOG ASSEMBLYCODE FUNCTION_DESCRIPTION PANEL_BLKNAM CATEGORY Manufacturer name (same as attribute value) Catalog part number Assembly code part number link Assigned description text (DESC1-DESC3) Block name of the panel footprint insert Blank for component queries.project-specific .wdp file. Fields may be blank and may use wildcards. in your Access schematic_lookup. which is automatically numbered in the list for you. with the exception of SCHEMATIC_BLKNAM. CR) Schematic symbol block name or special insert command flag Description of the schematic block name Record number (automatically numbered in the list)
WDBLKNAM
SCHEMATIC_BLKNAM
COMMENTS RECNUM
The schematic lookup file | 831
. PB11. 'T' or 'W' for terminal queries Name used to tie into catalog lookup table (ex.
Lookup file format
All fields contain characters except for RECNUM. then AutoCAD Electrical searches for a schematic lookup table called SQD.mdb file with that name. if the footprint's MFG value is SQD. manufacturer code of AB yields the table name AB. Lookup file naming convention: AutoCAD Electrical takes the target footprint's MFG code and looks for a table. For example. it needs to be in the same subdirectory as the <project>.mdb file is used.

4 (Optional) Click Filter to filter the listing based on certain values in the table. a third query is done on the WDBLKNAM field. If this fails to return any records. After you define the values to filter. 3 (Optional) Click Find or Replace to jump to the next occurrence of the specified text or to replace the existing text. If 0 records are returned. You can:
■ ■ ■ ■
Pick from AutoCAD Electrical's icon menu Browse to the symbol file (available from the icon menu) Enter a symbol name into the edit box (available from the icon menu) Pick a 'just like schematic component to get the schematic block name
Edit schematic lookup files
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ ➤ Database Editors
drop-down ➤ Schematic Database File Editor. The first level is a query on the MFG/CAT/ASSYCODE fields. the displayed Insert dialog box offers several other options. If 0 records are returned. If a match is not found or if matches are found and you choose not to use any of them. 2 (Optional) Click Sort to sort the database fields so that you can quickly find the record you are looking for.Table query sequence
Queries on this database can be multi-level until a hit is returned. a final query is made on keywords in the FUNCTION_DESCRIPTION field. NOTE When querying panel terminals. a second query is done on just the CATALOG field (or the CATEGORY field if working with terminals). The 'T' displays a list of terminal symbols for terminal numbers. while the 'W' displays a list of terminal symbols for wire number terminals. the second query is on the CATEGORY field.
832 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. apply the filter in the database editing window. they are displayed in a pick list along with any comments from each matching record. When multiple block name choices are returned. which contains a 'T' or 'W'. This query determines which symbols to display in the Insert dialog box.

5 Decide if you want to edit an existing record or add a new one. click Add New or Add Copy on the Edit dialog box. You can also immediately see any changes you made to an existing record. If you decide to add a new record. This searches in a specific column or in the entire table.mdb file that can be expanded as needed.
Toolbar: Panel Miscellaneous Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Database File Editor ➤ Schematic Database File Editor Command entry: AESCHEMATICDB This lookup database table is a catalog lookup Access .mdb file to use for mapping panel footprints and terminal representations to the equivalent schematic component block names.
Edit
Use this tool to add or modify records in the schematic_lookup. edit or delete entries from the table. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list. select the record to edit and click Edit on the Edit dialog box or double-click the record in the list.
■
If you decide to edit an existing record.
■
6 Add or edit the record values and click OK.
Sort Sorts the list of database records using either an alphanumeric sort or number values.
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database
Editors drop-down ➤ Schematic Database File Editor. 7 Click Save/Exit. Use either Microsoft Access or this dialog box to add new entries. Specifies the value to find and then jumps to the next occurrence of the specified text. Your new record is added to the list.
Find
The schematic lookup file | 833
.

Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤
➤ Database
Editors drop-down ➤ Schematic Database File Editor. You cannot have two duplicate copies in the database.Replace
Indicates to replace the find value with the new text string that you specify. Displays the Edit Record dialog box for modifying the existing record in the database. or copied records in the schematic_lookup. After you define the values to filter.
Toolbar: Panel Miscellaneous Menu: Panel Layout ➤ Database File Editor ➤ Schematic Database File Editor Command entry: AESCHEMATICDB Click Add New. Filters the listing based on certain values in the table. Displays the Edit Copied Record dialog box for modifying and copying the record to make a new record.
Filter
Edit
Add New
Add Copy
Delete
Edit record
Edit new. apply the filter in the database editing window. existing.mdb database. Add Copy. or Edit or double-click on a record in the Edit dialog box. Picking the blank entry in the list removes the filter for that field. Displays the Edit New Record dialog box for entering a new record into the database. Removes the selected record from the database.
MANUFACTURER Manufacturer name (same as attribute value)
834 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
.

Click Command List to add a command rather than a single block name. but the same procedure can be done using panel tools. 'T' or 'W' for terminal queries Name used to tie into catalog lookup table (ex. The quantity for a selected catalog number is not considered when inserting schematic components.
Insert from equipment lists | 835
. NOTE This procedure uses schematic tools. PB11.mdb on page 830.CATALOG ASSEMBLYCODE FUNCTION_DESCRIPTION PANEL_BLKNAM CATEGORY WDBLKNAM SCHEMATIC_BLKNAM
Catalog part number Assembly code part number link (Optional) Assigned description text (DESC1-DESC3) Block name of the panel footprint insert Blank for component queries. CR) Schematic symbol block name or special insert command flag.
Insert components from equipment lists
Use this to annotate the selected schematic (or panel) component with the panel footprint or equipment list data and insert it into the drawing. Description of the schematic block name
COMMENTS
Insert from equipment lists
This tool lists BOM data extracted from your equipment list and finds the appropriate schematic symbol by querying the schematic_lookup. It inserts the schematic components at your pick point. Each line or record in the equipment list represents a single entry into the Equipment in dialog box for schematic component selection.

Pick File: Picks a file for the insert. 11 Make any changes to the scale. 10 Select the component to insert on the drawing. Catalog. Select an existing AutoCAD Electrical extracted equipment list component list file or extract a
■
836 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
.wde) to read the settings from and click Open. 2 Select the spreadsheet file to use and click Open. 4 Click OK. assign column numbers to the data categories (such as Manufacturer. 8 On the Settings dialog box. determine whether to use the default settings or select a file of previously saved settings.
■
6 (Optional) Click Spreadsheet/Table columns to define the order of the data in the selected equipment list file. 3 If multiple sheets/tables were found in the data file. On the Equipment List Spreadsheet Settings dialog box. Modify the settings or click OK to continue with the insert using the default settings. 9 In the Schematic equipment in (or the Panel equipment in) dialog box. review the components by sorting or performing a catalog check.1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components
drop-down ➤ Equipment List. click OK. 5 On the Settings dialog box. 7 (Optional) Click Save Settings to save the settings to a file for later recall.
■
Default Settings: The View/Edit Settings options become available to modify the default settings. 12 Select the method for inserting the component into the drawing:
■
Insert: Finds and inserts a schematic (or panel) component for the highlighted equipment list component. orientation. Read Settings: Select the file (*. or rotation angle for the component. and Installation). select the table to edit.

Toolbar: Insert Component (Lists) Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component (Lists) ➤ Insert Component (Equipment List) Command entry: AECOMPONENTEQ Select the spreadsheet file to use and click Open. NOTE You can open a comma-delimited file. Your equipment list can be an AutoCAD Electrical-generated Component report. the appropriate schematic symbol is found and inserted in the drawing at your pick point.
Insert from equipment lists | 837
. or Access database file for input. Click the table to edit and click OK. Excel spreadsheet.fresh copy of panel component data from the database for the current project. or it can be a list of motors giving horsepower and starter type along with motor ID and descriptions. select the block name to insert from the list.
■
Convert Existing: (for Panel components only) Inserts the data for the selected entry on an existing non-AutoCAD Electrical block insert. This instantly converts the block to a smart AutoCAD Electrical footprint. 14 Click OK.
Insert Component (Equipment List)
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components
drop-down ➤ Equipment List.
Settings
This spreadsheet organizes the selected user-created equipment list and presents the list in a pick list. As you pick an item from the pick list.
13 In the Insert dialog box.

Catalog Check
Performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result. (1. Maintains the tag as defined in the component listing and sets the tag to fixed in the schematic.
Use auto-generated schematic TAG Modifies the schematic component tag based upon the drawing settings. When a component that doesn't have a tag is selected from the list. The results are displayed in the Insert dialog box along with a short description of each choice.
TAG Options
Specifies whether to use the component tag as listed in the equipment list or recalculate the schematic tag based on the tagging settings of the drawing.
Sort List
Sorts the list of components.
Insert
Finds and inserts a schematic component for the highlighted equipment list component. This is enabled if the selected equipment list item contains catalog data. this switch is automatically set to Use auto-generated schematic TAG.
Insert from equipment lists | 839
.0 = full)
Vertical/Horizontal
Changes the default drawing orientation. Specify to use default or previously saved settings and click OK. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list.
Use Equipment List TAG
Scale
Specifies the block insert scale. The query of the schematic_lookup.Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component (Lists) ➤ Insert Component (Equipment List) Command entry: AECOMPONENTEQ Select the spreadsheet file to use and click Open.mdb file returns one or more block names based on data that appears in the pick list.

Select the appropriate block to insert from the list and click OK. Make your selection in the dialog box and click OK.
Icon Menu Displays the icon menu from which you can select the schematic component to insert. Select an existing AutoCAD Electrical extracted equipment list component list file or extract a fresh copy of panel component data from the current project's database.
840 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. If a copy of the panel data is not in memory. then AutoCAD Electrical prompts you to select which panel data you want to extract. or Schematic equipment list in dialog boxes. Click Insert on the Panel terminals. Panel components. Copies a "just like" component and annotates it with the panel data. Select from the panel list and place the schematic symbol on the wiring diagram.
Insert components or terminals from panel lists
After the schematic component is selected and inserted in the drawing. all panel-related information is copied to the schematic. The selected schematic component is then annotated with the panel footprint or equipment list data and inserted into the drawing. A list of all panel footprints is extracted. You can also select one of the methods below to insert an alternative symbol. Use the Insert/Edit Component dialog box to make any additional changes to the new schematic component.
Insert
This dialog box displays the result of a query on the schematic_lookup.mdb file. AutoCAD Electrical finds a match for the panel footprint in the schematic lookup database on page 830 to determine the correct schematic symbol to insert.
Copy Component
Insert from panel lists
Let your project set of panel layout drawings help drive the schematic wiring diagrams.Pick File
Picks a file for the insert. This is different than the schematic symbols in the list and should not be considered another way to select the same components.

and click OK. 4 Click OK.
Panel layout list -> schematic components insert
This tool lists panel components extracted from your panel drawing. To modify the pick list so you can easily find the component or terminal to select. 5 If you are extracting for the entire project. finds the appropriate schematic symbol. 9 Click OK.1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components
drop-down ➤ Panel List. select which drawing files to process. 7 Click Insert.
Insert from panel lists | 841
. select from the list of panel components/terminals to insert the schematic symbol on the schematic drawing. click Sort List. and inserts the schematic components at your pick point. select which block name to insert from the list. Display. 6 On the Panel Components (or Panel Terminals) dialog box. 8 On the Insert dialog box. click Icon Menu to select a component from the icon menu or click Copy Component to insert a component 'just like' another existing component. 2 Specify whether to extract the panel component/terminal list for the active drawing or the active project. If you want to insert an alternative block that is not in the list. 11 Make any changes to the inserted component in the Insert/Edit Component dialog box and click OK. or to insert terminals Click Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components drop-down ➤ Terminal (Panel List). 10 Select the insertion point on the drawing. or Mark Existing. 3 Specify any installation or location codes to extract.

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Save list to external file
Browse
Installation Codes to extract
Location Codes to extract
Panel components
This presents a list of all panel components extracted from the project's panel layout drawings. a list of panel components displays for selection. the appropriate schematic symbol is found and inserted in the drawing at your pick point. Uses a previous project's panel component list to create a spreadsheet listing. you can type the location code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You can display this data in spreadsheet format (open it in comma-delimited "CSV" format). Creates a comma-delimited file of the panel component data. Once you pick Named Installations. and then save. you can type the installation code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes. As you pick an item from the pick list.WD4).
Toolbar: Insert Component Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component (Panel List) Command entry: AECOMPONENTPNL
Extract component list for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire active project.Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components
drop-down ➤ Panel List. Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. edit. The extracted file name is the same as the project by default (project_name. After the selection of the schematic component and the annotation of the
842 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. After the initial extraction. Once you pick Named Location.

Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components
drop-down ➤ Panel List. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list. You can select to insert a single schematic component or multiple components from the panel list.
Toolbar: Insert Component Menu: Components ➤ Insert Component (Panel List) Command entry: AECOMPONENTPNL Select Project and click OK.
Mark Existing
Matches panel components extracted from the project database with schematic components previously placed into the drawing and marks any existing components. and location codes are copied to the schematic. An "o" displays if the tags match but there is mismatch on catalog and manufacturer values between the two.device tag. Select the files to process and click OK. installation. all panel-related information such as descriptions. An "x" displays in left-hand column for any listed panel component tag that already has its schematic component inserted on the drawing and there is an exact match on catalog and manufacturer values between the two.
Sort List
Sorts the list of panel components.
Insert from panel lists | 843
.
Reload
Reopens the Panel Layout List ➤ Schematic Components Insert dialog box so you can re-extract data or select a saved external file to use.
Display
Specifies to show all extracted panel data or hide the panel data that has a matching schematic component.

upd) for later modification of the panel drawings to match the new schematic component tag. while updates on other drawings are maintained inside of the update task file (project_name. or recalculate the schematic tag based on the tagging settings of the drawing.
Insert
Finds and inserts a schematic component for the highlighted panel component.
TAG Options
Specifies whether to use the panel tag as is.
844 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
.
Use panel footprint TAG
Scale
Specifies the block insert scale. If a new tag is generated when inserting the schematic component. Maintains the tag as defined in the panel component listing and sets the tag to fixed in the schematic. (1.
Use auto-generated schematic TAG Modifies the schematic component tag based on the drawing settings. When a component that doesn't have a tag is selected from the list. The active drawing is automatically updated.0 = full) The drawing scale is used as the default. The results are displayed in the Insert dialog box along with a short description of each choice.
Vertical
Changes the default drawing orientation.mdb file returns one or more block names based on data that appears in the pick list.Catalog Check
Performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result. The query of the schematic_lookup. the source panel footprint is updated with the generated tag. This is enabled if the selected panel item contains catalog data. this switch is automatically set to Use auto-generated schematic TAG.

If a match is found. edit. looking for a match. and installation information.
Toolbar: Insert Component Menu: Components ➤ Insert Terminal (Panel List) Command entry: AETERMINALPNL
Extract terminal list for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or multiple drawings in the active project. You can display this data in spreadsheet format (open it in comma-delimited "CSV" format). Uses a previous project's terminal list to create a spreadsheet listing. Creates a comma-delimited file of the panel component data.Pick File
Picks a file for the insert. then it compares catalog information looking for any discrepancies. a list of terminals displays for selection. Once you pick Named Installation. both schematic and panel. you can type the installation code in the
Save list to external file
Browse
Installation Codes to extract
Insert from panel lists | 845
. After the initial extraction. Extracts only the information for panel terminals with specific installation values. location. Select an existing AutoCAD Electrical extracted panel component list file or extract a fresh copy of panel component data from the current project's database.
Panel terminal list -> schematic terminals insert
This report provides error checking between the schematics and the panel layout drawings.WD4). The program looks at the selected drawings. the routine tries to find a matching schematic component based on tag. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components
drop-down ➤ Terminal (Panel List). The extracted file name is the same as the project by default (project_name. and then save. For each panel component.

Select the files to process and click OK. You can select to insert a single terminal block or multiple terminal blocks from the panel list. installation.
Sort List Sorts the list of panel terminals. Matches schematic components extracted from the project database with panel terminal components and marks any existing components.box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes. the appropriate schematic terminal is found and inserted in the drawing at your pick point. all panel-related information such as descriptions. Once you pick Named Location. Reopens the Panel Terminal List ➤ Schematic Terminals Insert dialog box so you can re-extract data or select a saved external file to use. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list.
Toolbar: Insert Component Menu: Components ➤ Insert Terminal (Panel List) Command entry: AETERMINALPNL Select Project and click OK. and location codes are copied to the schematic. As you pick an item from the pick list. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Insert Components
drop-down ➤ Terminal (Panel List). After the selection of the schematic terminal and the annotation of the device tag. you can type the location code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes.
Panel terminals
This presents a list of all panel terminals extracted from the project's panel layout drawings. An "x" displays in left-hand column for any listed panel component
Reload
Mark Existing
846 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. Location Codes to extract Extracts only the information for panel terminals with specific location values.

aligning. A query of the schematic_lookup. The results are displayed in the Insert dialog box along with a short description of each choice. Performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result. splitting.
Manipulate Components | 847
.
Catalog Check
Last symbol used
Scale Rotate Insert
Pick File
Manipulate Components
Manipulate components
You can manipulate components by moving. This is enabled if the selected panel terminal contains catalog data. stretching. Specifies to pick a file for the insert. An "o" displays if the tags match but there is mismatch on catalog and manufacturer values between the two.mdb file returns one or more block names based on data that appears in the pick list. (1. Displays the last symbol selected through the insert process. Select an existing AutoCAD Electrical extracted panel terminal list file or extract a fresh copy of panel component data from the current project's database. Display Specifies to show all extracted panel data or hide the panel data that has a matching schematic component. or deleting them. Finds and inserts a schematic terminal for the highlighted panel terminal. You can clear the selection and go back through the insert process to select the schematic terminal symbol or you can automatically insert the last symbol used by not making any changes.tag that already has its schematic inserted on the drawing and there is an exact match on catalog and manufacturer values between the two.0 = full) Changes the default drawing orientation. Specifies the block insert scale.

PLC I\O modules. The broken wires are repaired and any resulting instances of multiple wire numbers now assigned to a single wire network are reconciled. and wire numbers re-centered if necessary. Select directly on a component to slide just that component along its connected wire(s). including all its components and wire numbers. signal arrows. AutoCAD Electrical looks for its parent on the current drawing and removes the deleted contact from the parent's cross-reference annotation (if the parent is on some other drawing then a separate run of the Cross-reference command may be required on the drawing set). and wires with wire-crossing loops.
848 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. Wires remain connected to components and existing wire numbers re-center. components. All connected wires will be adjusted. The component’s movement will be constrained along the wire segment. jogs in dashed link lines. In the case of a child contact. You can align vertically or horizontally by flipping the command with a V or H character and a [space] entered on the command line. and optionally delete them. surf to them. If you erase a parent schematic component you will have the option to search for related child components. wires.Delete components
The Delete Component command lets you remove the selected component. select directly on any wire segment that makes up the rung. terminals.
Scoot components/wire segments
The Scoot command lets you quickly reposition components and wire segments. Scoot works on wire numbers.
Align components/wire numbers
The Align Components command aligns the selected component with a master component that you select.
NOTE Components constrained by connected wiring at right angles will not scoot. To scoot a ladder rung.

you have the option to search for related components and delete them.
Move component attributes
The Move/Show Attributes command removes the selected attribute from its current location and inserts it into the new position you pick. if necessary.
Split PLC modules
The Split PLC Module command is especially handy for splitting PLC modules once they have been built or inserted. AutoCAD Electrical attempts to repair the broken wires and reconcile multiple wire numbers left over in the component's vacated position. If you erase a parent schematic component. If you use this command and select on a panel footprint. AutoCAD Electrical issues the normal AutoCAD Move command. For a child contact.
Stretch PLC modules
The Stretch PLC Module command is a very handy feature.
Move components
The Move Component command removes the selected component from its current location/wire connection and inserts it into the new position you pick. especially for PLC modules. Let's say you have a PLC module and you need to add a couple components in parallel on a particular rung and you did not leave enough room between the I/O points. What do you do? You could erase everything and rebuild the module and then reinsert the components.
Manipulate components | 849
. AutoCAD Electrical uses a rotated version of the symbol. and corrects resulting wire gaps. If you accidentally pick on the block's graphics instead of an attribute. Maybe you need to move the last few I/O terminal points to another ladder to make room for some other devices. redo the wiring.
Delete components
Deletes the components you select. as it breaks and reconnects any underlying wires. or you could use the Stretch PLC Module command. this move command will kick into the attribute Display/Edit mode instead.NOTE The Align Component command can be used on panel layout symbols. etc. NOTE The block name itself is changed to make it unique. Delete Component updates the cross-reference on the parent.

A rectangle indicates the selected items. You can align vertically or horizontally by flipping the command with a V or H character and a [space] entered on the command line. A Move Component operation breaks and reconnects any underlying wires. You can select the components individually or by windowing. 3 Move your cursor to the appropriate position and click. and includes automatic update of the component tag. if necessary.
Manipulate components | 851
. along the bus. or update the child cross-references only. It repairs broken wires and removes unnecessary wire numbers left in the position the component vacated. including components.
Align components/wire numbers
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components
drop-down ➤ Align. and inserts a rotated version of the symbol. The items scoot and reconnect. All connected wires are adjusted. and wire numbers recentered if necessary. 2 Select the master component to align with.
Move components
Moves a component you select in a drawing to a point you specify. A temporary line appears showing the alignment position. 2 Select the component to scoot along its connected wires or select the wire segment to scoot the entire wire. NOTE You can run the Auto-Retag operation on the components if they move to a new line reference.1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components
drop-down ➤ Scoot . 3 Select the components to move into alignment with the selected master component.

Split PLC modules
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components
drop-down ➤ Split PLC Module. Keep windowing until all objects are selected. 2 Select the block to split. 3 Press Enter. You can enter the coordinates or click Pick Point and select the origin point on the drawing. To cancel the selection of any object. 3 Select the split point or enter “M” to select the objects for the new child component using a crossing window or crossing polygon. The exploded blocks stretch and are then rebuilt (maintaining all the original block information.1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components
drop-down ➤ Move Component. 2 Select the blocks to stretch using a crossing window or crossing polygon window. jagged lines. 4 Select your base and second point of displacement. including attributes). 5 Set the break type: no lines. The component automatically moves to the selected position. 4 Define the origin point for the new block. 2 Select the component to move. straight lines. 3 Select the insertion point for the move. or draw it.
852 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
.
Stretch PLC modules
1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components
drop-down ➤ Stretch PLC Module. press U and select as usual.

Child Base Point Specifies the origin point for the new block. Specifies the layer for the child block. Specifies the break type: no lines. 3 (Optional) Select to reverse or flip the graphics only. NOTE This tool only operates on a component with 2-wire connections (for example. Specifies to reposition the child block to move it as part of this command. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Components
drop-down ➤ Reverse/Flip Component. jagged lines. or draw it.
Reverse/flip component
854 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. straight lines. You can accept the default or click List to select the layer from a list of existing layers. limit switch contact symbol). enter the coordinates or click Pick Point and select the origin point on the drawing.Select the connector to split and specify the split point. 2 Select whether to reverse or flip the component. NOTE Components are reversed perpendicular to the axis formed by the two wire connections or flipped along the axis of the wire connection. The default is set to jagged lines. If you do not want to accept the default. Click Draw to manually draw the break type on the drawing.
Break Type
Layer
Reposition Child Block
Reverse/flip components
Use this tool to reverse or flip selected component graphics and its associated attributes. The default is in-line with the first set of pins on the split-off piece.

Ratings defaults
AutoCAD Electrical allows up to 12 Ratings attributes on a component.WDR extension. 4 Select a line from the file to map its values to the available rating attributes. You may also create a project specific file with the same name and path as the project with the . Any text that follows a semi-colon is considered a comment and will be ignored. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Edit Components
drop-down ➤ Edit.
Toolbar: Main Electrical Menu: Components ➤ Edit Component Command entry: AEEDITCOMPONENT
856 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. 6 Click OK to finish the operation. if the component has the family code "PB" for push buttons and a file called PB.WDR stored in the AutoCAD Electrical support directory. AutoCAD Electrical will look for a generic defaults file called WD_RATINGS. To help you annotate these attributes AutoCAD Electrical lets you pick from a list of defaults. it will display when you select the "Family" button.WDR extension. This file is a simple text file and can be edited with any editor such as WordPad. the component you are editing does not have a rating attribute. You may create multiple .WDR files. Notice that a single line may carry multiple values with each value separated by a "|" character. NOTE If the Show All Ratings button is disabled. For example. You may also have Family specific files named for the Family code of the component with the .WDR extension.WDR exists.3 Click the Defaults button next to the edit box to display the list of default values. To take advantage of this feature you need to create/modify a text file with a . 5 Choose whether to select a different file or add a new entry to the ratings defaults file.

WDD) if it is not already displayed. if the component has the family code "PB" for push buttons and a file called PB. it will display when you select the Family button. It looks for a matching block name with the opposite 1 or 2. For example. Enter a value in the dialog box or click Edit File to edit the file using WordPad. Displays a project . and then click Defaults. Displays family-specific files named for the Family code of the component.WDD file (if it is not already displayed).
Ratings panel Pick File Project Family Displays the values for the rating attribute.WDD exists.
Generic
Add/Edit
Swap contact states
Swap contact states
Switches a selected component between the Normally Open and Normally Closed contact states. Selects a different file and description list. and swaps this block for the existing block. Adds a new entry to the rating defaults file. The program looks at the selected contact. reads its block name. and checks the fifth character for either 1 or 2.
Swap contact states | 857
. Displays a generic file (WD_DESC.Click the Show All Ratings button.

if attribute XREF is present. references are combined into a single cross-reference text string. and N. Alternately.
Component Cross-References
Cross-Referencing
Cross-referencing is based on collecting and annotating groups of components that carry the same TAG text string value (for example. 101CR). Exceptions include child contact with no parent and parent relay coil with no child contacts found.C.O. The Exception/Error report lists the exceptions AutoCAD Electrical found as it processed the drawing or drawing set. references respectively.O and N.C. but they must have the same TAG1/TAG2/TAG_*/TAG attribute values. Existing attribute text is preserved on the flipped contact. Components do not have to be of the same family to be cross-referenced. The AutoCAD Electrical Component Cross-reference tool creates two text reports in the process of annotating components with cross-reference information. 3 (Optional) Type Ctrl + Z to undo the contact swap if you selected the wrong component. both N. Cross-reference data is annotated on to attributes XREFNO and XREFNC for N.
858 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
.1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Toggle NO/NC. The Cross-reference report gives a listing of each component and quantity and locations of child contacts.
2 Select the component to toggle. If the maximum contact counts are carried by the parent symbol. the maximum counts are checked so that they are not exceeded by the flip.

The components are cross-referenced and the Cross-Reference Report or Error/Exception Report dialog box displays. 4 If the Active drawing (all) option is not selected. 2 Select the contact that you want to exclude from cross-referencing.select components to process. select the components or drawings to process. window selection.process all components on the active drawing. 8 Click Edit to correct the error.
3 Click OK. the cross-referencing should be visible but there are times when you may not want the cross-referencing displayed on parent symbols. and then surf to the next one.
860 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. In most cases. or multiple selection is allowed.■ ■
Active drawing (all) . 3 Right-click to end the selection and apply the command. Active drawing (pick) . AutoCAD Electrical changes to surfer mode. Single selection. 1 Enter ATTEDIT at the command line. AutoCAD Electrical surfs to the appropriate drawing and zooms up on the offending contact. 7 Double-click any listed error/exception entry in the Surf dialog box. 6 Select Surf. 5 Select Exception to display the Error/Exception Report. 2 Select the objects whose cross-referencing you want to hide or display.
Change cross-reference visibility
This tool changes the visibility of the cross-reference XREF attribute. 1 Click Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component
Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Hide/Unhide Cross-Referencing.
Exclude contacts when cross-referencing
You can exclude the contact from being included in any AutoCAD Electrical cross-reference text annotation.

Component cross-reference
Adds or updates cross-reference text on related parent and child components. 4 Click OK. Component Cross-reference creates both a listing of each component with the quantity and locations of child contacts. if attribute XREF is
Cross-Referencing | 861
. and an exception report. Alternately. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component
Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Component Cross-Reference. Cross-reference data is annotated on to attributes "XREFNO" and "XREFNC" for N. Components do not have to be of the same family to be cross-referenced. NOTE Run the Cross-reference command to update the cross-referencing on the parent symbol.C. references respectively. they must have the same TAG1/TAG2/TAG_*/TAG attribute values.
Cross-referencing is based upon collecting and annotating groups of components that carry the same TAG text string value (such as "101CR").3 Change the CONTACT attribute value to “NULL”.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Components ➤ Cross-Reference ➤ Component Cross-Reference Command entry: AEXREF The drawing properties define the cross-referencing format.O and N.

Cross-reference Exception
Using other dialog boxes to set cross-reference options
■
The cross-reference format is set up on the Drawing Properties ➤ Cross-Reference dialog box. You can do a catalog check to see if the description of the item indicates that the quantity of contacts can be accommodated. the current drawing.
Component reference listing
The Cross-Reference Check tool displays all associated and parent components to the selected component. Displays the last Exception/Error report. Displays the last Cross-Reference report. Component Cross-Reference Display section. line or grid-reference location. AutoCAD Electrical reads the tag of the component.present. and N. Real-time cross-reference update can be turned on or off on the Project Properties ➤ Cross-References dialog box. both N.C. or the entire project. It also displays the assigned catalog number of the parent (if one exists).
Run Cross-Reference on Specifies to run the report on selected components. and fixed punctuation. It is on a per-drawing basis and can include sheet and drawing ID. select Text Format and click Setup. AutoCAD Electrical first extracts a complete list of components from the project drawing set. Then it prompts you to select a component to check. and lists them in a dialog box. Right-click the project name and select Properties. references are combined into a single cross-reference text string.O. In the Project Properties ➤ Cross-References dialog box.
■
■
Check coil/contact count
Using the Cross-Reference Check on page 862 tool.
862 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. finds all associated child components. A project-wide option to fill unused contact references with a user-defined text string is available using the Project Manager on page 230 tool.

Toolbar: Cross-Reference Menu: Components ➤ Cross-Reference ➤ Cross-Reference Check Command entry: AEXREFCHECK A complete list of components is extracted from the project drawing set. installation. references: Lists the number of normally closed contacts assigned to the selected component.
References
■
N.O.
■
■
■
Parent Information
■
Manufacturer code: Lists the associated manufacturing code of the parent (if one exists). Reference listing: Lists the type. form C contacts. Catalog number: Lists the associated catalog number of the parent (if one exists).Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component
Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Cross-Reference Check. number.C. references: Lists the number of normally open contacts assigned to the selected component. A bill of material check can be performed to see if the description of the item indicates that the quantity of contacts can be accommodated. and description text for the reference. or general devices that are being referenced. Catalog Check: Creates a BOM description for the selected component using the catalog number of the parent component. Assembly code: Lists the associated assembly code of the parent (if one exists). They can include pins of a connector. N. location. Other references: Lists the number of child devices that are neither NO or NC contacts.
■
■
■
Check coil/contact count | 863
. then all associated components are found and listed in the dialog box. The tag of the component is read.

AutoCAD Electrical looks to the component for its settings information before using the drawing settings.wdp). Once settings are created for the project. When the cross-reference command is run. Settings are maintained at the component to override the drawing's WD_M block settings of the drawing. and component level.
Project Cross-Reference Settings Settings are maintained inside of the project definition file (. and copied drawings inside of the project. During program runtime. Settings are maintained on the WD_M block of the drawing.Comparing the description (2 available) with the contact count (3 required) reveals a needed adjustment. cross-reference settings are written to the WD_M block of the drawing file to use during normal operations. they are used. the cross-reference command looks at the WD_M block as the definition for all referencing on the drawing. AutoCAD Electrical applies those settings to new.
■
Catalog lookup: Opens the parts catalog to look up component-specific catalog information.
864 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. During program runtime. the component settings are used where applied and the drawing settings are used for the rest of the components. If the component has settings defined. If there are both component and drawing cross-reference settings on the same drawing. AutoCAD Electrical uses the drawing settings to determine the cross-reference types.
Overview of cross-reference settings
Cross-reference settings are supported at the project. the cross-reference command first looks to the component definition before the WD_M block as the definition for referencing the component on the drawing. drawing.
Drawing Cross-Reference Settings
Component Cross-Reference Settings
During normal operation of cross-referencing commands. Ultimately. existing.

Click
Overview of cross-reference settings | 865
.
■
■
4 Specify the format for the cross-reference display. or Table Format and click Setup.
■
Text Format: Displays cross-referencing as text with any user-defined string as a separator between references on the same attribute. In the Component Cross-reference Display section. and component level. drawing. Graphical Format: Displays cross-referencing using the AutoCAD Electrical graphical font or using contact mapping edit boxes while displaying each reference on a new line. 3 Click the Cross-references tab. specify the table style and table title. 6 If you selected to use the Table Format style. right-click the project or drawing name. Select a table style from the list.
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. You must later apply the settings to drawings to see display changes. Table Format: Displays cross-referencing in a table object so you can define the columns to display. and select Properties. 2 In the Project Manager. use the Copy/Add Component Override tool. TIP To set display settings for a specific component that are different from the drawing. The Preview box shows an image that shows an example of the cross-referencing format being defined. TIP See the Reference topics for each cross-reference display format to learn about the various display options. 5 Select the display options. Graphical. select Text. Changes you make to the settings are automatically updated in real time. The list initially displays table styles from the active drawing and from the table styles drawing.Set cross-referencing display
Cross-reference settings are supported at the project. NOTE Selecting the project applies changes to the project definition file and not the drawing.

Cross-Reference Format Defines the cross-reference annotation format. must always be part of the cross-reference format string. the table location is based on the cross reference attribute position. enter the replaceable parameter to use. One replaceable parameter. %N. To set the table title.
Toolbar: Cross-Reference Menu: Components ➤ Cross-Reference ➤ Copy/Add Component Override Command entry: AECOPYOVERRIDE NOTE You can also access this when you use Insert Component on page 794. but you can move the table to any location on the drawing and the table will remain in the new position for that symbol. Component overrides are copied when the component is copied. Cross-Reference section. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component
Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Copy/Add Component Override.Browse to select a drawing with the desired table style. the table style is applied to the Table Styles drawing. select the allowable replaceable parameter entry from the selection list. If you selected to use the Table Format style. similarly they are applied to multiple inserts of the same component. Use the upper section for on-drawing references and the bottom
866 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
.
Cross-reference component override
You can define components to have different cross-referencing styles. or enter text for the table title. Select the component with settings to copy or override. 7 Click OK. select Component override and click Setup. The settings specified using this tool override the drawing properties. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. A typical format string might be just the %N parameter. Once selected.

enter the values in the edit boxes in Sheet Values section of the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box.
Toolbar: Cross-Reference Menu: Components ➤ Cross-Reference ➤ Remove Component Override
Overview of cross-reference settings | 867
. Table Format: Displays cross-referencing in a table object.section for off-drawing references.
■
■
Click Setup to display a dialog box for setting the display defaults for each component cross-reference display format. NOTE If your format includes the sheet number %S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter. You can use the same format for both. Graphical Format: Displays cross-referencing using the AutoCAD Electrical graphical font or contact mapping edit boxes while displaying each reference on a new line.
Component Cross-Reference Display
There are different styles of cross referencing AutoCAD Electrical supports: ■ Text Format: Displays cross-referencing as text with any user-defined string as a separator between references on the same attribute.
Remove component overrides
You can apply overrides to a component so its settings override those of the drawing or project. while allowing you to define the columns to display. that automatically gets updated in real time. Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Edit Components panel ➤ Modify Component
Cross-Reference drop-down ➤ Remove Component Override. Use this tool to remove the component overrides so the cross-referencing commands use the settings for the drawing or project.

Format
The Reference Separator edit box allows you to define any string as a separator between references on the same attribute. The separator value is applied to the drawing settings in the WD_M block definition or the component to override the drawing settings. Spaces are allowed. The default separator is a comma. and click Setup.
Text cross-reference format setup
This format displays cross-referencing as text with any user-defined string as a separator between references on the same cross-reference attribute. In the component Cross-Reference Display section. right-click the project or drawing name and select Properties.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager.Command entry: AERMOVERRIDE Select to remove the component overrides on the project.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager.
868 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. Project and Active drawing (all) remove overrides on all components on the drawings while Active drawing (pick) removes overrides for selected components only. Cross-Reference section. NOTE You can also access this when you use Insert Component on page 794. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. Click the Cross-References tab. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. and click Setup. Use "|" anywhere in the edit box to change the XREF attribute to multi-line text and add a carriage return after each reference. In the Cross-reference component override dialog box. NOTE Mtext cross-referencing can still be used on selected components that use text cross-referencing. select Text Format. select Component override and click Setup. or selected components on the drawing. active drawing. select Text Format.

Options
Display Unused Children (Contacts) Displays the child symbols that are not referenced or being used in the project pin list. If left empty. Displays each unused child symbol in its own reference. If you use a comma as the separator the references would look like the following examples: NO 412. For example if you enter the text "SP" for spares.3
Preview
Displays an image that shows an example of the cross-referencing format being defined.
Separate Reference
Contact Count Totals
Fill Reference With
Cross-Referencing Sorted by Line Reference Cross-Referencing Sorted by Pin List Order
Overview of cross-reference settings | 869
. Displays the total count of all unused child symbols in a single reference. "SP" displays in the referencing. a space appears where the referencing would be displayed. It is sorted regardless if the pins are displayed as part of the referencing.When there are 2 or more references on the same cross-reference attribute each reference is separated by the specified separator. Displays the referencing in the order that the Pin List is defined on the parent component.633 NO 20. Displays the referencing in the order that the contacts are found in the line reference of the project. Specifies what should be displayed in the unused reference position for both Separate and Contact Count options.21.3.

”
JIC
IEC
Contact Mapping Format:
870 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. The setting is applied to the graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties.Overview of graphical cross-reference formats
When you use the graphical cross-reference format style. Graphic Font Format: Displays the cross-reference format using the JIC or IEC/GB/JIS graphical font.
JIC
IEC
The following example displays cross-referencing next to the symbol in the graphic font format while the unused children (contacts) are displayed as separate references. This setting is taken from drawing properties if there are no cross-reference overrides specified on the inserted component. The Fill Reference With value is “SP. the preview image changes to show what the cross-reference looks like in the drawing.

Enter the format into the edit boxes. and Form C contact types. The IEC/GB/JIS image font style displays the cross-referencing using the IEC style normally open.
Options
Display Unused Children (Contacts) Displays the child symbols that are not referenced or being used in the project pin list.
Graphic Font Displays the cross-reference format using a graphical font. NONC). The setting is applied to the graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties. The JIC image font style displays the cross-referencing using the JIC style normally open. normally close. NC. Displays each unused child symbol in its own reference. Select to use the JIC font or the IEC font.
Preview
Displays an image that shows an example of the cross-referencing format being defined. Displays the total count of all unused child symbols in a single reference.Format
In the event where there are 2 or more references for the same component. each reference is entered into a new line. Contact Mapping Displays the cross-reference format using cross-referencing type values (NO. Specifies what to display in the unused reference position for both Separate and Contact Count op-
Separate Reference
Contact Count Totals
Fill Reference With
872 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. and Form C contact types. normally close. It is dependent on pin list count.

Graphic Font Format: Displays the cross-reference format using the JIC or IEC graphical font. a space appears where the referencing would be displayed. For example if you enter the text "SP" for spares.
Overview of table cross-reference formats
When you use the table cross-reference format style. the preview image changes to show what the cross-reference looks like in the drawing. If left empty.tions. The setting is applied to the graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties.
JIC
IEC
Contact Mapping Format:
Overview of table cross-reference formats | 873
. The following examples display the table cross-referencing using the graphic font format inside the table style. The Fill Reference With value is "SP" for unused children (contacts). "SP" displays in the referencing.

JIC
IEC
NOTE If using the symbol mapping method. It is comprised of 2 contacts. or together as one symbol. 1 open and 1 closed where they share a common terminal pin number. Example: Two symbols make up the Form C contact The common pin is on the right-hand side next to the referencing column and displays in the P2 column of the table.Form C contacts and tables
A typical type of contact is a Form C contact type. a single symbol represents the form-c contact even if two separate contacts are inserted. Example: Single symbol makes up the Form C contact
Overview of table cross-reference formats | 875
. You can choose to insert both of the Form C contacts as two individual symbols.

and click Setup. In the component Cross-reference Display section. select Table Format. To display component cross-referencing in a table.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager. The table location is based on cross-reference attributes. you must select a predefined table style and define the column labels to display. so you can define the columns to display. the cross-referencing table automatically updates. and select Properties. but you can move the table to any location on the drawing and the table remains in the new position.
876 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. Click the Cross-references tab.
JIC
IEC
Table cross-reference format setup
This format displays cross-referencing in a table object that automatically gets updated in real time.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. If new contacts are added to the component. right-click the project or drawing name.The common pin is on the right-hand side next to the referencing column and displays in the P2 column of the table.

The JIC image font style displays the cross-referencing using the JIC style normally open. and click Setup. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. select Table Format. Displays the cross-reference format using mapped graphic block drawings. The setting is applied to the graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties. and Form C contact types.
Preview
Displays an image that shows an example of the cross-referencing format being defined. Cross-reference section.
The IEC/GB/JIS image font style displays the cross-referencing using the IEC style normally open. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing.
Symbol Mapping
See Learn about table cross-reference formats on page 870 for examples of the format styles. select Component override. Enter the format into the edit boxes.
Format
Graphic Font Displays the cross-reference format using a graphical font.If you change the table setup once a table has been inserted onto the drawing. and Form C contact types. NONC). NC. NOTE You can also access this by selecting Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Icon Menu. Click Edit on page 879 to modify the mapping settings.
Contact Mapping
Displays the cross-reference format using cross-referencing type values (NO. In the Cross-reference component override dialog box. Select to use the JIC font or the IEC/GB/JIS font. normally close. you must run the Component Cross-reference tool to update the table. normally close.
Overview of table cross-reference formats | 877
. and click Setup.

Options
Display Parent (Coil) Displays the parent component's reference information inside the cross-reference format. Specifies what should be displayed in the unused reference position for both Separate and Contact Count options. shape. Click Define Columns to open the Cross-reference Table Data Fields to Display dialog box to define the columns to be used in the table cross-referencing. If left empty. Click Browse to select a drawing with the desired table style.dwg it will be copied to it. "SP" displays in the referencing.
878 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. Select a table style from the list. a space appears where the referencing would be displayed.dwg. There is always a table style on a drawing. When a drawing is referenced the style is then copied from the TableStyle. and font of a table object. Various style drawing files that determine the drawing-related settings are provided with AutoCAD Electrical. the table style can be applied to the Table Styles drawing. Once selected.dwg) defines a series of table objects that are used in the selection process and then copied to the drawing files. If the selected style does not exist on the TableStyle. Displays the child symbols that are not referenced or being used in the project pin list. The list initially displays table styles from the active drawing and the TableStyle. Displays the total count of all unused child symbols in a single reference. style. The standard table style cannot be deleted. For example if you enter the text "SP" for spares.
Display Unused Children (Contacts)
Separate Reference
Contact Count Totals
Fill Reference With
Table Style
Table styles are defined within a drawing file to determine the size. The Table Styles drawing (TableStyle.dwg. Displays each unused child symbol in its own reference.

NOTE If the replaceable parameter does not include a value from the drawing. or enter text for the table title. and select Properties. select Table Format and click Setup.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT Right-click the project or drawing name. and click Edit. Click the Cross-References tab.Table Title
Controls the replaceable parameters and carriage returns.
Edit cross-reference symbol mapping table
AutoCAD Electrical checks a cross-reference symbol mapping table when the cross-reference table uses the symbol mapping format. On the Cross-Reference Format Setup dialog box select Symbol Mapping. the table will not show the title row. This graphic drawing is inserted as a block in the TYPE column of the cross-reference table for the contact.
Drawing Properties
Ribbon: Schematic tab ➤ Other Tools panel ➤ Drawing Properties
drop-down ➤ Drawing Properties. a blank space is displayed in the table title. Select the allowable replaceable parameter entry from the selection list. Add a carriage return inside of the string by using "|" anywhere in the Table Title edit box.
Project Manager
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. In the component Cross-Reference Display section. enter the replaceable parameter to use. If the title line is left blank. This table maps a contact block name to a graphic drawing name.
Overview of table cross-reference formats | 879
.

In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. Filters the listing based on certain values in the table. Cross-Reference section. Displays the Edit Record dialog box for modifying the existing record in the database. Select to match the entire field. Find the next instance of the text you enter.
Find
Replace
Filter
Edit
880 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. In the component Cross-Reference Display section. and is populated with a sample of symbol mapping data. The default file name is default_cat. and click Setup. part of the field. NOTE You can also access this when you use Insert Component on page 794. Make it case sensitive by clicking Match case. and click Setup. table _XREF_GRAPHICS. Select to look in the entire table or a specific field. In the Cross-reference component override dialog box. select Table Format. Expand this table as needed. On the Cross-Reference Format Setup dialog box select Symbol Mapping. After you define the values to filter. This database table is a table within the catalog lookup Access . Use your copy of Microsoft Access or use this dialog box to add new entries. Indicates to replace the find value with the new text string that you specify.mdb. and click Edit. or the beginning of the field with the entered text.Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: AEPROPERTIES Click the Cross-References tab. On the Cross-Reference Format Setup dialog box select Symbol Mapping. edit. select Component override.mdb file.
Sort Sorts the list of database records using either an alphanumeric sort or number values. Picking the blank entry in the list removes the filter for that field. add entries based on existing entries. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list. select Table Format and click Setup. apply the filter in the database editing window. and delete entries from the table. and click Edit.

Displays the Edit Copied Record dialog box for modifying and copying the record to make a new record. GRAPHIC The name of the block (.Add New
Displays the Edit New Record dialog box for entering a new record into the database.
Add Copy
Delete
Table Format
SEARCHORDER Arranges the order of the records so that certain wildcard patterns are used before others. the contact symbol HCR217F. Removes the selected record from the database. The contact symbol block name or wild card to map to a graphic block name. “*217F*” and “*21*”. SP=NO map a spare normally open contact SP=NC map a spare normally closed contact SP=<> map a spare convertible contact SP=NONC map a spare form-c contact SP=NO2 map a spare normally open contact that is part of a form-c definition SP=NC2 map a spare normally closed contact that is part of a form-c definition
SYMBOL
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
NOTE The spare contacts are shown only if the cross-reference option to display the unused child contacts is selected. The following codes are supported to handle special cases. For example.dwg matches two different SYMBOL values. its GRAPHIC symbol is used in the cross-reference table.
Overview of table cross-reference formats | 881
.dwg) file that is inserted into the table cell when the block name of the contact matches the SYMBOL value. Since “*217F*” has a lower SEARCHORDER value. ■ A+B map one graphic block where two separate NO/NC contacts exist for a given coil and the pins match up with a Form-C in the PINLIST for that coil. You cannot have two duplicate copies in the database.

COMMENTS
Explains the purpose of the wild-card pattern and graphic. If inserting a parent component with a cross-reference table.
Component Retag
Edit Component
Copy Catalog Assignment
IEC Tagging Mode
Copy Circuit
Insert Component
Scoot
882 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. the table is also deleted from the drawing. the cross-reference table updates for the parent component. When copying a different catalog number to a parent symbol. the table title updates with the new tag values. If a circuit with a cross-reference table is copied. If a replaceable parameter is modified for a component that has a crossreference table. If scooting a parent component with a cross-reference table. the table title updates to reflect the changes. Some AutoCAD Electrical commands take it into account when modifications are made to the drawing and the cross-reference table is later updated.
Update cross-reference tables
The table style cross-referencing provides support for replaceable parameters to define and display in the table title. the table also scoots along the wire. edit component) the cross-reference table updates if the tag is part of the title. If inserting a child component. move component. the cross-reference table title updates to reflect the changes. the PINLIST and contact count may update and the cross-reference table updates in real time.
Delete Component If a component with a cross-reference table is deleted. If a component is retagged (retag. the table inserts at the cross-reference attribute locations (XREF and XREFNO). If IEC drawing-wide Location or Installation values change. move circuit.

right-click the project or drawing name. if you modify the Pin List manually on the parent component. drawing. select Text. TIP To set display settings for a specific component that are different from the drawing.
■
■
Update cross-reference tables | 883
. NOTE Selecting the project applies changes to the project definition file and not the drawing. Commands that do not support real-time cross-reference updates include:
■ ■
Component Find and Replace Spreadsheet Export and Import
Set cross-referencing display
Cross-reference settings are supported at the project. and select Properties. Additionally. 2 In the Project Manager.
1 Click Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. the cross-reference table updates with the new pin numbers and the modified contact count once the Insert/Edit Component dialog box is exited. In the Component Cross-reference Display section. Table Format: Displays cross-referencing in a table object so you can define the columns to display.NOTE If you change the component catalog number or add a multiple BOM catalog number to the component (both change the Pin List data) the cross-reference table updates as soon as you exit out of the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. Graphical Format: Displays cross-referencing using the AutoCAD Electrical graphical font or using contact mapping edit boxes while displaying each reference on a new line. 3 Click the Cross-references tab. use the Copy/Add Component Override tool. and component level. You must later apply the settings to drawings to see display changes. or Table Format and click Setup.
■
Text Format: Displays cross-referencing as text with any user-defined string as a separator between references on the same attribute. Graphical. Changes you make to the settings are automatically updated in real time.

and select Properties.
Table cross-reference format setup
This format displays cross-referencing in a table object that automatically gets updated in real time. and click Setup. you must select a predefined table style and define the column labels to display. TIP See the Reference topics for each cross-reference display format to learn about the various display options. Once selected. Click the Cross-references tab. 6 If you selected to use the Table Format style.4 Specify the format for the cross-reference display. To display component cross-referencing in a table. 5 Select the display options. enter the replaceable parameter to use. In the component Cross-reference Display section. the table style is applied to the Table Styles drawing.
Ribbon: Project tab ➤ Project Tools panel ➤ Manager. The Preview box shows an image that shows an example of the cross-referencing format being defined. but you can move the table to any location on the drawing and the table will remain in the new position for that symbol. select the allowable replaceable parameter entry from the selection list. If you selected to use the Table Format style. so you can define the columns to display. specify the table style and table title.
884 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
.
Toolbar: Main Electrical 2 Menu: Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager Command entry: AEPROJECT In the Project Manager. select Table Format. Click Browse to select a drawing with the desired table style. Select a table style from the list. right-click the project or drawing name. The list initially displays table styles from the active drawing and from the table styles drawing. 7 Click OK. the table location is based on the cross reference attribute position. or enter text for the table title. To set the table title.

NOTE You can also access this by selecting Schematic tab ➤ Insert Components panel ➤ Icon Menu. but you can move the table to any location on the drawing and the table remains in the new position. Click Edit on page 879 to modify the mapping settings.
The IEC/GB/JIS image font style displays the cross-referencing using the IEC style normally open.
Symbol Mapping
See Learn about table cross-reference formats on page 870 for examples of the format styles. In the Cross-reference component override dialog box. Displays the cross-reference format using mapped graphic block drawings. you must run the Component Cross-reference tool to update the table. Enter the format into the edit boxes. NONC). NC. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. and click Setup.
Contact Mapping
Displays the cross-reference format using cross-referencing type values (NO. normally close.If new contacts are added to the component. and Form C contact types. If you change the table setup once a table has been inserted onto the drawing. The JIC image font style displays the cross-referencing using the JIC style normally open. select Table Format. Select to use the JIC font or the IEC/GB/JIS font. The setting is applied to the graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties. normally close. and Form C contact types. and click Setup. Cross-reference section. The table location is based on cross-reference attributes.
Format
Graphic Font Displays the cross-reference format using a graphical font. the cross-referencing table automatically updates. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing.
Update cross-reference tables | 885
. select Component override.

For example if you enter the text "SP" for spares. Displays the total count of all unused child symbols in a single reference. Various style drawing files that determine the drawing-related settings are provided with AutoCAD Electrical.dwg) defines a series of table objects that are used in the selection process and then copied to the drawing files. Displays each unused child symbol in its own reference.
Display Unused Children (Contacts)
Separate Reference
Contact Count Totals
Fill Reference With
Table Style
Table styles are defined within a drawing file to determine the size.dwg. and font of a table object. If left empty. Specifies what should be displayed in the unused reference position for both Separate and Contact Count options. Once selected.dwg. Displays the child symbols that are not referenced or being used in the project pin list. The standard table style cannot be deleted. When a drawing is referenced the style is then copied from the TableStyle. If the selected style does not exist on the TableStyle. style.Preview
Displays an image that shows an example of the cross-referencing format being defined. There is always a table style on a drawing. Select a table style from the list.
Options
Display Parent (Coil) Displays the parent component's reference information inside the cross-reference format. a space appears where the referencing would be displayed. the table style can be applied to the Table Styles drawing. The Table Styles drawing (TableStyle.
886 | Chapter 10 Component Tools
. shape.dwg it will be copied to it. The list initially displays table styles from the active drawing and the TableStyle. Click Browse to select a drawing with the desired table style. "SP" displays in the referencing.

Use stand-alone cross-reference symbols
You use stand-alone cross-reference symbols just as you would wire source/destination arrow symbols but without the wires. and then tie one or more destination reference symbols to it. Select the allowable replaceable parameter entry from the selection list. 2 On the Insert Component dialog box.
Table Title
Controls the replaceable parameters and carriage returns. a blank space is displayed in the table title.Click Define Columns to open the Cross-reference Table Data Fields to Display dialog box to define the columns to be used in the table cross-referencing. 3 Specify the insertion point on the drawing. select the cross-reference symbol to insert from the Symbol Preview window.
Use stand-alone cross-reference symbols | 887
. You can also enter the symbol to insert in the Type it edit box or click Browse to select a symbol to insert. Insert a source reference symbol. Insert a source reference symbol. NOTE If the replaceable parameter does not include a value from the drawing. They can be on the same drawing or scattered across the project drawing set. If the title line is left blank. and then tie one or more destination reference symbols to it.
Insert stand-alone cross-reference